Tektronix cts710 User manual

User Manual
User Manual
CTS 710
SONET Test Set
CTS 710
SONET Test Set
070-8852-03
070-8852-03
This document applies to firmware version 1.3
and above.
This document applies to firmware version 1.3
and above.
Copyright E Tektronix, Inc. 1994. All rights reserved.
Copyright E Tektronix, Inc. 1994. All rights reserved.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and
pending. Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously
published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and
pending. Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously
published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR, 97077
Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 1000, Wilsonville, OR 97070–1000
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
WARRANTY
WARRANTY
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment. If any such product
proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the
defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in
exchange for the defective product.
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment. If any such product
proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the
defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in
exchange for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the
defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the
performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the
defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges
prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to
a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer
shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for
products returned to any other locations.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the
defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the
performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the
defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges
prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to
a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer
shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for
products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or
improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish
service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other
than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage
resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a
product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such
modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or
improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish
service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other
than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage
resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a
product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such
modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS
PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE
DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY.
TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS
PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE
DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY.
TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How This Manual is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the CTS 710 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi
xxi
xxi
xxii
xxiii
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How This Manual is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the CTS 710 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi
xxi
xxi
xxii
xxiii
Getting Started
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Time Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Accessory Pouch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning On the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Off the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Started
1–1
1–1
1–2
1–2
1–2
1–3
1–3
1–7
1–9
1–10
Operating Basics
Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-Panel Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Basic Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What is a Menu? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting SONET Electrical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DS1/DS3 Electrical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initiating Autoscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Time Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Accessory Pouch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning On the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Off the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–1
1–1
1–2
1–2
1–2
1–3
1–3
1–7
1–9
1–10
Operating Basics
2–1
2–2
2–4
2–4
2–6
2–9
2–9
2–11
2–11
2–12
2–13
2–14
2–15
2–15
2–15
i
Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-Panel Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Basic Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What is a Menu? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting SONET Electrical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DS1/DS3 Electrical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initiating Autoscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–1
2–2
2–4
2–4
2–6
2–9
2–9
2–11
2–11
2–12
2–13
2–14
2–15
2–15
2–15
i
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Changing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting from Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Decimal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Binary Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with the Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Files on Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–15
2–16
2–16
2–17
2–20
2–21
2–23
2–24
Changing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting from Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Decimal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Binary Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with the Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Files on Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–15
2–16
2–16
2–17
2–20
2–21
2–23
2–24
Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Turning On the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Transmit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Receive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Test Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where Test Results Are Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Begin the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Transport Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the Transport Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–27
2–27
2–28
2–30
2–31
2–32
2–33
2–34
2–36
2–40
2–41
2–43
Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Turning On the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Transmit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Receive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Test Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where Test Results Are Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Begin the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Transport Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the Transport Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–27
2–27
2–28
2–30
2–31
2–32
2–33
2–34
2–36
2–40
2–41
2–43
Reference
ii
Reference
Basic Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Continuity Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Signal Quality Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Bit Error Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing Mapping and Demapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Tolerance Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response to Errors and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response to Pointer Movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response to Line Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–1
3–1
3–2
3–4
3–4
3–6
3–8
3–8
3–13
3–16
3–18
Basic Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Continuity Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Signal Quality Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Bit Error Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing Mapping and Demapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Tolerance Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response to Errors and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response to Pointer Movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response to Line Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–1
3–1
3–2
3–4
3–4
3–6
3–8
3–8
3–13
3–16
3–18
Setting Test Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Test Time Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a Unique Test Time Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the History Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–23
3–23
3–24
3–26
Setting Test Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Test Time Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a Unique Test Time Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the History Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–23
3–23
3–24
3–26
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
ii
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Starting and Stopping a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Changes While Running a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actions You Cannot Perform While Running a Test . . . . . .
3–27
3–28
3–28
Starting and Stopping a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Changes While Running a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actions You Cannot Perform While Running a Test . . . . . .
3–27
3–28
3–28
Working with Test Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling the Default Factory Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Instrument Setups from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pass/Fail Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters of a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fail If Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing an Existing Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Pass/Fail Test from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–31
3–31
3–32
3–34
3–35
3–36
3–37
3–37
3–38
3–44
3–49
3–51
3–53
Working with Test Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling the Default Factory Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Instrument Setups from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pass/Fail Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters of a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fail If Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing an Existing Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Pass/Fail Test from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–31
3–31
3–32
3–34
3–35
3–36
3–37
3–37
3–38
3–44
3–49
3–51
3–53
Checking Signal Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Payload (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . .
Determining the Payload Pattern and Framing
(Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing the AutoScan Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Signal State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–55
3–55
3–56
3–55
3–55
3–56
3–57
3–58
3–58
3–61
3–61
Checking Signal Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Payload (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . .
Determining the Payload Pattern and Framing
(Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing the AutoScan Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Signal State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–57
3–58
3–58
3–61
3–61
Setting SONET Transmit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Through Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the STS to Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Payload Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unequipped Payload Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–63
3–63
3–64
3–64
3–65
3–67
3–68
3–69
3–69
3–70
3–71
3–72
Setting SONET Transmit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Through Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the STS to Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Payload Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unequipped Payload Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–63
3–63
3–64
3–64
3–65
3–67
3–68
3–69
3–69
3–70
3–71
3–72
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
iii
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
iii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
iv
Mapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . .
Mapping a Tributary with VT1.5 Floating Async Payload
Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Edit an Overhead Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the V5 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bytes You Cannot Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . .
3–72
3–72
3–75
3–77
3–77
3–80
3–81
3–82
3–84
Mapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . .
Mapping a Tributary with VT1.5 Floating Async Payload
Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Edit an Overhead Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the V5 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bytes You Cannot Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . .
3–72
3–75
3–77
3–77
3–80
3–81
3–82
3–84
Setting Tributary Signal Transmit Parameters . . . . . . . . . .
Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Line Clock Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Line Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–89
3–89
3–90
3–90
3–90
3–92
3–93
3–93
3–94
3–96
Setting Tributary Signal Transmit Parameters . . . . . . . . . .
Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Line Clock Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transmit Line Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–89
3–89
3–90
3–90
3–90
3–92
3–93
3–93
3–94
3–96
Setting SONET Receive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Receive Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Receive Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Which STS to Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Mapped in a SONET Signal
(Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) .
Dropping a Tributary Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unequipped Payload Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Received Optical Power or Received Peak Voltage .
3–99
3–99
3–100
3–101
3–101
3–103
3–103
3–104
3–104
Setting SONET Receive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Receive Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Receive Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Signal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Which STS to Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Mapped in a SONET Signal
(Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) .
Dropping a Tributary Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unequipped Payload Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Received Optical Power or Received Peak Voltage .
3–99
3–99
3–100
3–101
3–101
3–103
3–103
3–104
3–104
3–107
3–110
3–111
3–113
3–114
3–114
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
iv
3–72
3–107
3–110
3–111
3–113
3–114
3–114
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Viewing Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Transport Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Path Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the J1 Path Trace Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the V5 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dropping DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes . . . . . . .
Controlling the Display Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–115
3–115
3–116
3–116
3–117
3–117
3–120
Viewing Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Transport Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Path Overhead Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the J1 Path Trace Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the V5 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dropping DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes . . . . . . .
Controlling the Display Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–115
3–115
3–116
3–116
3–117
3–117
3–120
Setting Tributary Receive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Receive Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Receive Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–121
3–121
3–122
3–123
3–123
3–124
3–124
3–125
3–127
Setting Tributary Receive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps for Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Receive Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Receive Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–121
3–121
3–122
3–123
3–123
3–124
3–124
3–125
3–127
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulating Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Error to Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulating Transmit Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–131
3–131
3–132
3–133
3–135
3–138
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulating Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Error to Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulating Transmit Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–131
3–131
3–132
3–133
3–135
3–138
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Pointer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous Pointer Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–141
3–141
3–142
3–147
3–149
3–151
3–156
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Pointer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous Pointer Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–141
3–141
3–142
3–147
3–149
3–151
3–156
Testing Automatic Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the APS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the K1 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the K2 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitting the K1 and K2 Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Network Response to APS Commands . . . . . . . . .
3–161
3–161
3–162
3–166
3–170
3–172
Testing Automatic Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the APS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the K1 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the K2 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitting the K1 and K2 Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Network Response to APS Commands . . . . . . . . .
3–161
3–161
3–162
3–166
3–170
3–172
Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–173
Viewing a Summary of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–173
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
v
Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–173
Viewing a Summary of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–173
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
v
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
vi
Viewing Detailed Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying an Overview of Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying an Analysis of Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Measurement Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elements of the History Graph Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graph Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
History Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Out Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Results at Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zooming History Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panning History Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Displayed History Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Mini-Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Recalling Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Test Results to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Test Results from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Test Results from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Test Results from Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Main Results or Error Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing History Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–174
3–175
3–177
3–181
3–182
3–186
3–186
3–186
3–187
3–187
3–187
3–187
3–188
3–190
3–190
3–191
3–192
3–192
3–194
3–195
3–196
3–196
3–196
3–198
Viewing Detailed Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying an Overview of Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying an Analysis of Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Measurement Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elements of the History Graph Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graph Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
History Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Out Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Results at Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zooming History Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panning History Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Displayed History Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Mini-Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Recalling Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Test Results to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Test Results from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Test Results from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Test Results from Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Main Results or Error Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing History Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–174
3–175
3–177
3–181
3–182
3–186
3–186
3–186
3–187
3–187
3–187
3–187
3–188
3–190
3–190
3–191
3–192
3–192
3–194
3–195
3–196
3–196
3–196
3–198
Changing Instrument Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Instrument Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the Beeper On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Printer or File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting RS-232 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Print User & Company Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Remote Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting RS-232 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–199
3–199
3–200
3–201
3–202
3–202
3–203
3–204
3–204
3–206
3–206
3–207
3–208
Changing Instrument Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Instrument Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the Beeper On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Printer or File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting RS-232 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Print User & Company Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Remote Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting RS-232 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–199
3–199
3–200
3–201
3–202
3–202
3–203
3–204
3–204
3–206
3–206
3–207
3–208
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
vi
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Running Instrument Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–210
Running the Power Up Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–211
Running Instrument Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–210
Running the Power Up Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–211
Appendices
Appendix A: Menu Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINTERS & TIMING Page (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINTERS & TIMING Page (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINTERS & TIMING Page (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APS COMMANDS Page (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APS COMMANDS Page (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APS COMMANDS Page (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATH OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIGNAL STATUS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATH OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST SUMMARY Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIN RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HISTORY GRAPHS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECALL RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MISC SETTINGS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINTER SETUP Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOTE CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTR CONFIG Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELF TEST Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendices
A–1
A–1
A–1
A–2
A–2
A–3
A–4
A–5
A–6
A–7
A–8
A–9
A–10
A–11
A–12
A–13
A–14
A–15
A–16
A–17
A–18
A–19
A–20
A–20
A–21
A–21
A–22
A–22
A–23
A–24
A–24
A–24
A–25
A–26
A–27
A–27
vii
Appendix A: Menu Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINTERS & TIMING Page (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINTERS & TIMING Page (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINTERS & TIMING Page (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APS COMMANDS Page (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APS COMMANDS Page (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APS COMMANDS Page (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATH OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIGNAL STATUS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATH OVERHEAD Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST SUMMARY Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIN RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HISTORY GRAPHS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECALL RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MISC SETTINGS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINTER SETUP Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOTE CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTR CONFIG Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELF TEST Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–1
A–1
A–1
A–2
A–2
A–3
A–4
A–5
A–6
A–7
A–8
A–9
A–10
A–11
A–12
A–13
A–14
A–15
A–16
A–17
A–18
A–19
A–20
A–20
A–21
A–21
A–22
A–22
A–23
A–24
A–24
A–24
A–25
A–26
A–27
A–27
vii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–1
B–1
B–3
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–1
B–1
B–3
Appendix C: Default Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–1
Appendix C: Default Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–1
Appendix D: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D–1
Appendix D: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D–1
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop-Back Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Proceed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Self Test with External Loop-Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SONET Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tributary Signals (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . .
E–1
E–2
E–3
E–3
E–4
E–6
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop-Back Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Proceed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Self Test with External Loop-Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SONET Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tributary Signals (Add/Drop/Test Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . .
E–1
E–2
E–3
E–3
E–4
E–6
Appendix F: Example Disk Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pass/Fail Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F–1
F–1
F–1
F–1
Appendix F: Example Disk Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pass/Fail Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F–1
F–1
F–1
F–1
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VGA Video Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Clock Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Signal Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead Add/Drop Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BITS Timing Reference Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–1
G–1
G–3
G–3
G–4
G–4
G–5
G–7
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VGA Video Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Clock Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Signal Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead Add/Drop Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BITS Timing Reference Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–1
G–1
G–3
G–3
G–4
G–4
G–5
G–7
Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the Optical Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Optical Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H–1
H–1
H–2
Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the Optical Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Optical Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H–1
H–1
H–2
Appendix I: Packing for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I–1
Appendix I: Packing for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I–1
Glossary and Index
viii
Glossary and Index
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
viii
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure i: Placing the Reference for Easy Viewing . . . . . . . .
xxiii
Figure i: Placing the Reference for Easy Viewing . . . . . . . .
xxiii
Figure 1–1: Installing the Accessory Pouch . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–4
Figure 1–1: Installing the Accessory Pouch . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–4
Figure 1–2: Inserting the Pouch Under the Front Panel
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–5
Figure 1–2: Inserting the Pouch Under the Front Panel
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–5
Figure 1–3: Location of the D-Ring on the Accessory Pouch
1–6
Figure 1–3: Location of the D-Ring on the Accessory Pouch
1–6
Figure 1–4: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors Used
in Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–8
Figure 1–4: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors Used
in Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–8
Figure 1–5: ON/STBY Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
Figure 1–5: ON/STBY Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
Figure 2–1: Controls Located Around the Display . . . . . . . .
2–2
Figure 2–1: Controls Located Around the Display . . . . . . . .
2–2
Figure 2–2: Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–3
Figure 2–2: Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–3
Figure 2–3: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . .
2–4
Figure 2–3: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . .
2–4
Figure 2–4: Status Lights (With Option 22 Installed) . . . . .
2–5
Figure 2–4: Status Lights (With Option 22 Installed) . . . . .
2–5
Figure 2–5: Major Areas of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–6
Figure 2–5: Major Areas of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–6
Figure 2–6: Specific Elements of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–7
Figure 2–6: Specific Elements of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–7
Figure 2–7: The Five Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–9
Figure 2–7: The Five Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–9
Figure 2–8: Menus and Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–10
Figure 2–8: Menus and Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–10
Figure 2–9: Menu Select Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–11
Figure 2–9: Menu Select Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–11
Figure 2–10: How to Display a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–12
Figure 2–10: How to Display a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–12
Figure 2–11: Help Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–13
Figure 2–11: Help Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–13
Figure 2–12: Selecting a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–16
Figure 2–12: Selecting a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–16
Figure 2–13: Selecting Choices From a List . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–17
Figure 2–13: Selecting Choices From a List . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–17
Figure 2–14: Selecting USER DEFINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–18
Figure 2–14: Selecting USER DEFINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–18
Figure 2–15: Entering a Numeric Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–19
Figure 2–15: Entering a Numeric Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–19
Figure 2–16: Selecting a Byte for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–20
Figure 2–16: Selecting a Byte for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–20
Figure 2–17: Editing a Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–21
Figure 2–17: Editing a Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–21
Figure 2–18: Selecting a Text String for Editing . . . . . . . . .
2–22
Figure 2–18: Selecting a Text String for Editing . . . . . . . . .
2–22
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
ix
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
ix
Table of Contents
x
Table of Contents
Figure 2–19: Editing a Text String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–23
Figure 2–19: Editing a Text String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–23
Figure 2–20: Setup for the Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–28
Figure 2–20: Setup for the Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–28
Figure 2–21: The TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page of the
TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–29
Figure 2–21: The TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page of the
TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–29
Figure 2–22: The TEST TIME Page of the UTILITY Menu
2–31
Figure 2–22: The TEST TIME Page of the UTILITY Menu
2–31
Figure 2–23: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–32
Figure 2–23: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–32
Figure 2–24: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–33
Figure 2–24: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–33
Figure 2–25: The Message Line and Test Status Indicator .
2–34
Figure 2–25: The Message Line and Test Status Indicator .
2–34
Figure 2–26: The ERRORS & ALARMS Page of the
TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–35
Figure 2–26: The ERRORS & ALARMS Page of the
TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–35
Figure 2–27: The POINTERS & TIMING Page of the
TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–37
Figure 2–27: The POINTERS & TIMING Page of the
TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–37
Figure 2–28: Adjusting Frequency Offset Using the Knob .
2–39
Figure 2–28: Adjusting Frequency Offset Using the Knob .
2–39
Figure 2–29: The TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page of
the TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–41
Figure 2–29: The TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page of
the TRANSMIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–41
Figure 2–30: The Display in Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–42
Figure 2–30: The Display in Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–42
Figure 2–31: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–44
Figure 2–31: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–44
Figure 2–32: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–45
Figure 2–32: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–45
Figure 3–1: Setup to Check Network Continuity . . . . . . . . .
3–2
Figure 3–1: Setup to Check Network Continuity . . . . . . . . .
3–2
Figure 3–2: Setup to Check a Transmission Link . . . . . . . . .
3–4
Figure 3–2: Setup to Check a Transmission Link . . . . . . . . .
3–4
Figure 3–3: Setup to Test Mapping and Demapping . . . . . .
3–6
Figure 3–3: Setup to Test Mapping and Demapping . . . . . .
3–6
Figure 3–4: Setup to Check Error and Alarm Response . . .
3–9
Figure 3–4: Setup to Check Error and Alarm Response . . .
3–9
Figure 3–5: Setup to Check Pointer Movements . . . . . . . . .
3–14
Figure 3–5: Setup to Check Pointer Movements . . . . . . . . .
3–14
Figure 3–6: Setup to Check Line Frequency Offset
Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–16
Figure 3–6: Setup to Check Line Frequency Offset
Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–16
Figure 3–7: Setup to Monitor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–19
Figure 3–7: Setup to Monitor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–19
Figure 3–8: The Test Control Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–24
Figure 3–8: The Test Control Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–24
Figure 3–9: Setting a USER DEFINED Test Duration . . . .
3–25
Figure 3–9: Setting a USER DEFINED Test Duration . . . .
3–25
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
x
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Figure 3–10: Elapsed Time and Bar Graph Indicators . . . .
3–28
Figure 3–10: Elapsed Time and Bar Graph Indicators . . . .
3–28
Figure 3–11: The SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page . . .
3–33
Figure 3–11: The SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page . . .
3–33
Figure 3–12: The RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page
3–35
Figure 3–12: The RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page
3–35
Figure 3–13: Selecting a Disk File for Deleting . . . . . . . . . . .
3–36
Figure 3–13: Selecting a Disk File for Deleting . . . . . . . . . . .
3–36
Figure 3–14: The SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page . . . . . . . .
3–37
Figure 3–14: The SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page . . . . . . . .
3–37
Figure 3–15: Entering Fail If Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–47
Figure 3–15: Entering Fail If Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–47
Figure 3–16: The TEST BEGIN Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–51
Figure 3–16: The TEST BEGIN Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–51
Figure 3–17: Selecting a Pass/Fail Test for Deleting . . . . . . .
3–53
Figure 3–17: Selecting a Pass/Fail Test for Deleting . . . . . . .
3–53
Figure 3–18: The AUTOSCAN Dialog Box Showing Signal
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–56
Figure 3–18: The AUTOSCAN Dialog Box Showing Signal
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–56
Figure 3–19: Viewing Tributary Signal Structure . . . . . . . .
3–57
Figure 3–19: Viewing Tributary Signal Structure . . . . . . . .
3–57
Figure 3–20: The Meaning of the Icons in the Autoscan
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–58
Figure 3–20: The Meaning of the Icons in the Autoscan
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–58
Figure 3–21: Front-Panel Status Lights (with Add/Drop/Test
Option Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–59
Figure 3–21: Front-Panel Status Lights (with Add/Drop/Test
Option Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–59
Figure 3–22: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–63
Figure 3–22: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–63
Figure 3–23: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal
Parameters When Mapping a Tributary Signal . . . . . . .
3–64
Figure 3–23: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal
Parameters When Mapping a Tributary Signal . . . . . . .
3–64
Figure 3–24: SONET Transmit Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–65
Figure 3–24: SONET Transmit Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–65
Figure 3–25: CTS 710 in Through Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–68
Figure 3–25: CTS 710 in Through Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–68
Figure 3–26: Mapping a Tributary Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–73
Figure 3–26: Mapping a Tributary Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–73
Figure 3–27: Editing the User Word Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–77
Figure 3–27: Editing the User Word Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–77
Figure 3–28: Editing the Z2 Transmit Overhead Byte . . . . .
3–79
Figure 3–28: Editing the Z2 Transmit Overhead Byte . . . . .
3–79
Figure 3–29: Editing an Overhead Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–80
Figure 3–29: Editing an Overhead Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–80
Figure 3–30: Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–84
Figure 3–30: Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–84
Figure 3–31: Adding Data into the DCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–86
Figure 3–31: Adding Data into the DCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–86
Figure 3–32: Adding Data into the User Channel . . . . . . . . .
3–87
Figure 3–32: Adding Data into the User Channel . . . . . . . . .
3–87
Figure 3–33: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–89
Figure 3–33: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–89
Figure 3–34: Tributary Transmit Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–91
Figure 3–34: Tributary Transmit Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–91
Figure 3–35: Editing the User Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–97
Figure 3–35: Editing the User Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–97
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xi
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xi
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Figure 3–36: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
Figure 3–36: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–99
3–99
Figure 3–37: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal
Parameters When Demapping a Tributary Signal . . . . . 3–100
Figure 3–37: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal
Parameters When Demapping a Tributary Signal . . . . . 3–100
Figure 3–38: SONET Receive Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101
Figure 3–38: SONET Receive Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101
Figure 3–39: Setting Tributary Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110
Figure 3–39: Setting Tributary Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110
Figure 3–40: Displaying Received Optical Power . . . . . . . . . 3–115
Figure 3–40: Displaying Received Optical Power . . . . . . . . . 3–115
Figure 3–41: J1 Path Trace Message Received by the
CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–117
Figure 3–41: J1 Path Trace Message Received by the
CTS 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–117
Figure 3–42: Dropping Data from the DCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–118
Figure 3–42: Dropping Data from the DCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–118
Figure 3–43: Dropping the User Channel Data Byte . . . . . . 3–119
Figure 3–43: Dropping the User Channel Data Byte . . . . . . 3–119
Figure 3–44: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–121
Figure 3–44: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–121
Figure 3–45: Sequence for Setting Signal Parameters to
Demultiplex a DS1 from a DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–121
Figure 3–45: Sequence for Setting Signal Parameters to
Demultiplex a DS1 from a DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–121
Figure 3–46: Tributary Signal Receive Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–122
Figure 3–46: Tributary Signal Receive Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–122
Figure 3–47: Setting An Error Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–135
Figure 3–47: Setting An Error Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–135
Figure 3–48: Manual Pointer Control Choices . . . . . . . . . . . 3–142
Figure 3–48: Manual Pointer Control Choices . . . . . . . . . . . 3–142
Figure 3–49: Alternating Burst Pointer Movement . . . . . . . 3–144
Figure 3–49: Alternating Burst Pointer Movement . . . . . . . 3–144
Figure 3–50: Incrementing Pointer Location Once Every
Two Milliseconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–149
Figure 3–50: Incrementing Pointer Location Once Every
Two Milliseconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–149
Figure 3–51: Offsetting the Transmit Rate by +4.6 ppm . . . 3–151
Figure 3–51: Offsetting the Transmit Rate by +4.6 ppm . . . 3–151
Figure 3–52: The Three Periods of a Pointer Sequence . . . . 3–152
Figure 3–52: The Three Periods of a Pointer Sequence . . . . 3–152
Figure 3–53: An Example of a Pointer Sequence . . . . . . . . . 3–153
Figure 3–53: An Example of a Pointer Sequence . . . . . . . . . 3–153
Figure 3–54: Status Display While Pointer Sequences are
Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–160
Figure 3–54: Status Display While Pointer Sequences are
Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–160
Figure 3–55: The APS COMMANDS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–162
Figure 3–55: The APS COMMANDS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–162
Figure 3–56: The RECEIVE Column on the
APS COMMANDS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–172
Figure 3–56: The RECEIVE Column on the
APS COMMANDS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–172
Figure 3–57: The Test Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–174
Figure 3–57: The Test Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–174
Figure 3–58: Bar Graphs Showing Code Violations and
Errored Seconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–182
Figure 3–58: Bar Graphs Showing Code Violations and
Errored Seconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–182
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xii
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Figure 3–59: Line Graph Showing Pointer Value . . . . . . . . . 3–184
Figure 3–59: Line Graph Showing Pointer Value . . . . . . . . . 3–184
Figure 3–60: On/Off Graphs Showing Failures and Alarms 3–185
Figure 3–60: On/Off Graphs Showing Failures and Alarms 3–185
Figure 3–61: Elements of a History Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–188
Figure 3–61: Elements of a History Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–188
Figure 3–62: Changing the Displayed History Graph . . . . . 3–191
Figure 3–62: Changing the Displayed History Graph . . . . . 3–191
Figure 3–63: The SAVE RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–193
Figure 3–63: The SAVE RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–193
Figure 3–64: The RECALL RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–195
Figure 3–64: The RECALL RESULTS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–195
Figure 3–65: The PRINT CONTROL Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 3–197
Figure 3–65: The PRINT CONTROL Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 3–197
Figure 3–66: The MISC SETTINGS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–201
Figure 3–66: The MISC SETTINGS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–201
Figure 3–67: The PRINTER SETUP Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–203
Figure 3–67: The PRINTER SETUP Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–203
Figure 3–68: The REMOTE CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . 3–208
Figure 3–68: The REMOTE CONTROL Page . . . . . . . . . . . 3–208
Figure E–1: Front-Panel Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E–1
Figure E–1: Front-Panel Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E–1
Figure G–1: CTS 710 Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . .
G–1
Figure G–1: CTS 710 Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . .
G–1
Figure G–2: The VGA Video Output Connector . . . . . . . . .
G–2
Figure G–2: The VGA Video Output Connector . . . . . . . . .
G–2
Figure G–3: The RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–3
Figure G–3: The RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–3
Figure G–4: The Overhead Add/Drop Port . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–5
Figure G–4: The Overhead Add/Drop Port . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–5
Figure H–1: Removing the Optical Bulkhead Connector . .
H–2
Figure H–1: Removing the Optical Bulkhead Connector . .
H–2
Figure H–2: FC Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
H–3
Figure H–2: FC Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
H–3
Figure H–3: ST Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
H–3
Figure H–3: ST Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
H–3
Figure H–4: DIN 47256 Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . .
H–4
Figure H–4: DIN 47256 Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . .
H–4
Figure H–5: SC Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
H–4
Figure H–5: SC Optical Bulkhead Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
H–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xiii
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xiii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
List of Tables
List of Tables
xiv
Table 1–1: Fuse and Fuse Cap Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . .
1–8
Table 1–1: Fuse and Fuse Cap Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . .
1–8
Table 1–2: Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–9
Table 1–2: Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–9
Table 2–1: Icons that Appear in the Display . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–8
Table 2–1: Icons that Appear in the Display . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–8
Table 2–2: CTS 710 Disk File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–24
Table 2–2: CTS 710 Disk File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–24
Table 3–1: LTE Responses to Errors and Alarms . . . . . . . .
3–9
Table 3–1: LTE Responses to Errors and Alarms . . . . . . . .
3–9
Table 3–2: Test Duration Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–26
Table 3–2: Test Duration Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–26
Table 3–3: Actions You Cannot Perform While a Test
is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–29
Table 3–3: Actions You Cannot Perform While a Test
is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–29
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . .
3–39
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test . . . . . . . . .
3–39
Table 3–5: Green Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–59
Table 3–5: Green Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–59
Table 3–6: Red and Yellow Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–60
Table 3–6: Red and Yellow Status Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–60
Table 3–7: Choices for Bits 5, 6, and 7 of the V5 Byte . . . . .
3–81
Table 3–7: Choices for Bits 5, 6, and 7 of the V5 Byte . . . . .
3–81
Table 3–8: Overhead Bytes That Cannot Be Edited . . . . . .
3–81
Table 3–8: Overhead Bytes That Cannot Be Edited . . . . . .
3–81
Table 3–9: Bytes You Cannot Edit Due to Parameter
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–82
Table 3–9: Bytes You Cannot Edit Due to Parameter
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–82
Table 3–10: Tributary Rate Line Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–94
Table 3–10: Tributary Rate Line Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–94
Table 3–11: Maximum Error Rates for SONET Signals . . . 3–134
Table 3–11: Maximum Error Rates for SONET Signals . . . 3–134
Table 3–12: Maximum Error Rates for Tributary Signals . 3–134
Table 3–12: Maximum Error Rates for Tributary Signals . 3–134
Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–153
Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–153
Table 3–14: Availability of Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . 3–155
Table 3–14: Availability of Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . 3–155
Table 3–15: Status Lines for Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . 3–160
Table 3–15: Status Lines for Pointer Sequences . . . . . . . . . 3–160
Table 3–16: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When
Mode is Set to Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–163
Table 3–16: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When
Mode is Set to Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–163
Table 3–17: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When
Mode is Set to Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–164
Table 3–17: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When
Mode is Set to Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–164
Table 3–18: Choices for Bits 5–8 of the K1 Byte . . . . . . . . . 3–166
Table 3–18: Choices for Bits 5–8 of the K1 Byte . . . . . . . . . 3–166
Table 3–19: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K2 Byte . . . . . . . . . 3–168
Table 3–19: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K2 Byte . . . . . . . . . 3–168
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xiv
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table 3–20: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode
is Set to Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169
Table 3–20: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode
is Set to Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169
Table 3–21: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode
is Set to Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169
Table 3–21: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode
is Set to Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169
Table 3–22: Choices for Bits 6–8 of the K2 Byte . . . . . . . . . 3–170
Table 3–22: Choices for Bits 6–8 of the K2 Byte . . . . . . . . . 3–170
Table 3–23: Results Displayed on MAIN RESULTS Page . 3–175
Table 3–23: Results Displayed on MAIN RESULTS Page . 3–175
Table 3–24: T1M1 Section Analysis Results Displayed on
the ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–178
Table 3–24: T1M1 Section Analysis Results Displayed on
the ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–178
Table 3–25: T1M1 Line Analysis Results Displayed on the
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–178
Table 3–25: T1M1 Line Analysis Results Displayed on the
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–178
Table 3–26: T1M1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on the
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–179
Table 3–26: T1M1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on the
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–179
Table 3–27: T1M1 VT1.5 Analysis Results Displayed on the
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–179
Table 3–27: T1M1 VT1.5 Analysis Results Displayed on the
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–179
Table 3–28: T1M1 Payload Analysis Results Displayed on
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–180
Table 3–28: T1M1 Payload Analysis Results Displayed on
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–180
Table 3–29: DS1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181
Table 3–29: DS1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181
Table 3–30: DS3 Path Analysis Results Displayed on
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181
Table 3–30: DS3 Path Analysis Results Displayed on
ERROR ANALYSIS Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181
Table 3–31: Measurements Displayed as Bar Graphs . . . . . 3–183
Table 3–31: Measurements Displayed as Bar Graphs . . . . . 3–183
Table 3–32: Measurements Displayed as a Line Graph . . . 3–184
Table 3–32: Measurements Displayed as a Line Graph . . . 3–184
Table 3–33: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs
for SONET Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–185
Table 3–33: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs
for SONET Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–185
Table 3–34: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs
for Tributary Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–186
Table 3–34: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs
for Tributary Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–186
Table 3–35: Time Represented by Bars on History Graph . 3–188
Table 3–35: Time Represented by Bars on History Graph . 3–188
Table 3–36: Lines of the Instrument Configuration Page . . 3–199
Table 3–36: Lines of the Instrument Configuration Page . . 3–199
Table C–1: Default Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–1
Table C–1: Default Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–1
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
D–1
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
D–1
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities . . . . . .
D–10
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities . . . . . .
D–10
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xv
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xv
Table of Contents
xvi
Table of Contents
Table D–3: Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D–17
Table D–3: Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D–17
Table D–4: Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D–18
Table D–4: Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D–18
Table D–5: Certifications and Compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D–18
Table D–5: Certifications and Compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D–18
Table E–1: Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E–2
Table E–1: Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E–2
Table G–1: VGA Video Output Connector Pin Assignment
G–2
Table G–1: VGA Video Output Connector Pin Assignment
G–2
Table G–2: RS-232 Rear Panel Connector Pin Assignment
G–3
Table G–2: RS-232 Rear Panel Connector Pin Assignment
G–3
Table G–3: Overhead Channels Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–5
Table G–3: Overhead Channels Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–5
Table G–4: Overhead Channels Dropped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–6
Table G–4: Overhead Channels Dropped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–6
Table G–5: Overhead Add/Drop Port Data Signal Pin
Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–6
Table G–5: Overhead Add/Drop Port Data Signal Pin
Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–6
Table G–6: Overhead Add/Drop Port Additional Pin
Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–7
Table G–6: Overhead Add/Drop Port Additional Pin
Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G–7
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xvi
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
General Safety Summary
General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent
damage to this product or any products connected to it.
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent
damage to this product or any products connected to it.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified.
To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified.
Injury Precautions
Injury Precautions
Use Proper Power Cord
Use Proper Power Cord
To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this
product.
To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this
product.
Avoid Electric Overload
Avoid Electric Overload
To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not apply a voltage to a
terminal that is outside the range specified for that terminal.
To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not apply a voltage to a
terminal that is outside the range specified for that terminal.
Ground the Product
Ground the Product
This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the
power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must
be connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the
input or output terminals of the product, ensure that the product is
properly grounded.
This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the
power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must
be connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the
input or output terminals of the product, ensure that the product is
properly grounded.
Do Not Operate Without Covers
Do Not Operate Without Covers
To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product
with covers or panels removed.
To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product
with covers or panels removed.
Use Proper Fuse
Use Proper Fuse
To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse type and rating specified for
this product.
To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse type and rating specified for
this product.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xvii
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xvii
General Safety Summary
General Safety Summary
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions
To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product in wet or damp
conditions.
To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product in wet or damp
conditions.
Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere
Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an
explosive atmosphere.
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an
explosive atmosphere.
Wear Eye Protection
Wear Eye Protection
To avoid eye injury, wear eye protection if there is a possibility of
exposure to high-intensity rays.
To avoid eye injury, wear eye protection if there is a possibility of
exposure to high-intensity rays.
Product Damage Precautions
xviii
Product Damage Precautions
Use Proper Power Source
Use Proper Power Source
Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more
than the voltage specified.
Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more
than the voltage specified.
Provide Proper Ventilation
Provide Proper Ventilation
To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation.
To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures
If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by
qualified service personnel.
If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by
qualified service personnel.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xviii
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
General Safety Summary
Safety Terms and Symbols
General Safety Summary
Safety Terms and Symbols
Terms in This Manual
Terms in This Manual
These terms may appear in this manual:
These terms may appear in this manual:
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that
could result in injury or loss of life.
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that
could result in injury or loss of life.
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that
could result in damage to this product or other property.
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that
could result in damage to this product or other property.
Terms on the Product
Terms on the Product
These terms may appear on the product:
These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you
read the marking.
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you
read the marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as
you read the marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as
you read the marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the Product
Symbols on the Product
The following symbols may appear on the product:
The following symbols may appear on the product:
DANGER
High Voltage
Protective Ground
(Earth) Terminal
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
ATTENTION
Refer to
Manual
Double
Insulated
DANGER
High Voltage
xix
Protective Ground
(Earth) Terminal
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
ATTENTION
Refer to
Manual
Double
Insulated
xix
General Safety Summary
General Safety Summary
Certifications and Compliances
Certifications and Compliances
xx
CSA Certified Power Cords
CSA Certified Power Cords
CSA Certification includes the products and power cords appropriate
for use in the North America power network. All other power cords
supplied are approved for the country of use.
CSA Certification includes the products and power cords appropriate
for use in the North America power network. All other power cords
supplied are approved for the country of use.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xx
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Preface
Preface
This manual describes how to use the Tektronix CTS 710 SONET
Test Set. This manual is your primary source of information about
how the CTS 710 functions.
This manual describes how to use the Tektronix CTS 710 SONET
Test Set. This manual is your primary source of information about
how the CTS 710 functions.
How This Manual is Organized
How This Manual is Organized
This manual is divided into four sections: Getting Started, Operating
Basics, Reference, and Appendices.
This manual is divided into four sections: Getting Started, Operating
Basics, Reference, and Appendices.
H Getting Started provides an overview of the CTS 710 and
describes first time operation.
H Getting Started provides an overview of the CTS 710 and
describes first time operation.
H Operating Basics explains the basic principles of operating the
CTS 710. The Operating Basics section also includes a tutorial
which introduces you to most of the capabilities of the CTS 710
by having you run a BER test.
H Operating Basics explains the basic principles of operating the
CTS 710. The Operating Basics section also includes a tutorial
which introduces you to most of the capabilities of the CTS 710
by having you run a BER test.
H Reference provides explanations of how to perform detailed tasks.
H Reference provides explanations of how to perform detailed tasks.
H The Appendices provide a listing of specifications, default factory
settings, an incoming inspection test, and other useful information.
H The Appendices provide a listing of specifications, default factory
settings, an incoming inspection test, and other useful information.
Conventions
Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:
This manual uses the following conventions:
H The names of front-panel controls and menus appear in all upper
case letters, for example, TRANSMIT and HELP.
H The names of front-panel controls and menus appear in all upper
case letters, for example, TRANSMIT and HELP.
H Names appear in the same case in this manual as they appear on
the display of the CTS 710, for example, Test Duration and
USER DEFINED.
H Names appear in the same case in this manual as they appear on
the display of the CTS 710, for example, Test Duration and
USER DEFINED.
H Within a procedure, a specific button to be pressed or a parameter
to be selected appears in boldface print. For example, press the
AUTOSCAN button or select Continuous.
H Within a procedure, a specific button to be pressed or a parameter
to be selected appears in boldface print. For example, press the
AUTOSCAN button or select Continuous.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xxi
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xxi
Preface
Preface
The Tutorial and the Reference sections frequently present
procedures in tables. Perform the procedure by reading from left to
right in the table (see example below). The word none in a cell
indicates that no action is required.
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Begin here with
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 7
The Tutorial and the Reference sections frequently present
procedures in tables. Perform the procedure by reading from left to
right in the table (see example below). The word none in a cell
indicates that no action is required.
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Begin here with
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 6
Step 5
Step 6
Step 8, CTS 710
instruction is
complete
Step 7
Step 8, CTS 710
instruction is
complete
Some procedures require several iterations of highlighting parameters and selecting choices. Some procedures may require more than
one menu button or menu page selection as well.
Related Manuals
xxii
Some procedures require several iterations of highlighting parameters and selecting choices. Some procedures may require more than
one menu button or menu page selection as well.
Related Manuals
The following documents are also available for the CTS 710 SONET
Test Set:
The following documents are also available for the CTS 710 SONET
Test Set:
H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set Reference (Tektronix part number
070-9336-XX) provides a quick overview of the menu structure,
front-panel buttons, example alarm responses, and a glossary.
H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set Reference (Tektronix part number
070-9336-XX) provides a quick overview of the menu structure,
front-panel buttons, example alarm responses, and a glossary.
H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set Programmer Manual (Tektronix
part number 070-8924-XX) describes how to control the CTS 710
using an instrument controller.
H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set Programmer Manual (Tektronix
part number 070-8924-XX) describes how to control the CTS 710
using an instrument controller.
H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Reference
(Tektronix part number 070-8854-XX) provides a quick overview
of the instrument programming commands.
H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Reference
(Tektronix part number 070-8854-XX) provides a quick overview
of the instrument programming commands.
H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service
Manual (Tektronix part number 070-8853-XX) provides
information on maintaining and servicing your instrument to the
module level.
H The CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service
Manual (Tektronix part number 070-8853-XX) provides
information on maintaining and servicing your instrument to the
module level.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xxii
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Preface
Preface
Using the CTS 710 Reference
Using the CTS 710 Reference
The Reference presents an overview of the CTS 710 menu structure,
front-panel buttons, examples of alarm responses, and a glossary. To
store the Reference for easy viewing, fold the card to display the
desired page and slide the card behind the window located on the
inside of the top flap of the pouch (see Figure i).
The Reference presents an overview of the CTS 710 menu structure,
front-panel buttons, examples of alarm responses, and a glossary. To
store the Reference for easy viewing, fold the card to display the
desired page and slide the card behind the window located on the
inside of the top flap of the pouch (see Figure i).
Figure i: Placing the Reference for Easy Viewing
Figure i: Placing the Reference for Easy Viewing
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xxiii
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xxiii
Preface
Preface
Contacting Tektronix
Contacting Tektronix
Product
Support
Service
Support
For application-oriented questions about a Tektronix
measurement product, call toll free in North
America:
1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433 ext. 2400)
6:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. Pacific time
Product
Support
Or contact us by e-mail:
[email protected]
Or contact us by e-mail:
[email protected]
For product support outside of North America,
contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales
office.
For product support outside of North America,
contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales
office.
Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales
office. Or visit our web site for a listing of
worldwide service locations.
Service
Support
http://www.tek.com
xxiv
For application-oriented questions about a Tektronix
measurement product, call toll free in North
America:
1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433 ext. 2400)
6:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. Pacific time
Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales
office. Or visit our web site for a listing of
worldwide service locations.
http://www.tek.com
For other
information
In North America:
1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433)
An operator will direct your call.
For other
information
In North America:
1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433)
An operator will direct your call.
To write us
Tektronix, Inc.
P.O. Box 1000
Wilsonville, OR 97070-1000
To write us
Tektronix, Inc.
P.O. Box 1000
Wilsonville, OR 97070-1000
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
xxiv
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Getting Started
Getting Started
Getting Started
Getting Started
This section provides a description of the CTS 710, a list of standard
and optional accessories, and explains how to operate the CTS 710
for the first time.
Product Description
This section provides a description of the CTS 710, a list of standard
and optional accessories, and explains how to operate the CTS 710
for the first time.
Product Description
The Tektronix CTS 710 SONET Test Set is a rugged, portable test set
designed for installing and maintaining telecommunications
networks. The CTS 710 is a SONET analyzer that combines bit error
rate test capabilities with overhead testing, payload mapping, and
demapping in one unit. The CTS 710 features the following
capabilities:
The Tektronix CTS 710 SONET Test Set is a rugged, portable test set
designed for installing and maintaining telecommunications
networks. The CTS 710 is a SONET analyzer that combines bit error
rate test capabilities with overhead testing, payload mapping, and
demapping in one unit. The CTS 710 features the following
capabilities:
H STS-1, STS-3, OC-1, OC-3, OC-12, DS1, and DS3 transmit and
receive
H STS-1, STS-3, OC-1, OC-3, OC-12, DS1, and DS3 transmit and
receive
H Optical interface available at 1310 nm and 1550 nm
H Optical interface available at 1310 nm and 1550 nm
H Bit Error Rate testing
H Bit Error Rate testing
H BIP error monitoring and analysis
H BIP error monitoring and analysis
H Payload mapping and demapping
H Payload mapping and demapping
H Tributary Add/Drop/Test
H Tributary Add/Drop/Test
H Pointer generation, including sequences, and analysis
H Pointer generation, including sequences, and analysis
H Alarm generation and analysis
H Alarm generation and analysis
H DS1/DS3 error monitoring and analysis
H DS1/DS3 error monitoring and analysis
H DS1 Demultiplex from direct-input DS3 or a DS3 embedded in a
SONET rate signal
H DS1 Demultiplex from direct-input DS3 or a DS3 embedded in a
SONET rate signal
H Performance monitoring
H Performance monitoring
H APS testing
H APS testing
H DCC and user channel access
H DCC and user channel access
H Programmable via IEEE 488.2 and RS-232
H Programmable via IEEE 488.2 and RS-232
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–1
Getting Started
Getting Started
The CTS 710 meets the needs of the craftsperson and the network
engineer. The CTS 710 meets the requirements of those working in
network installation and maintenance by providing the capability to
perform:
The CTS 710 meets the needs of the craftsperson and the network
engineer. The CTS 710 meets the requirements of those working in
network installation and maintenance by providing the capability to
perform:
H Network integrity testing
H Network integrity testing
H In-service performance monitoring
H In-service performance monitoring
H Stimulus and response testing
H Stimulus and response testing
H Stress testing
H Stress testing
H Overhead testing
H Overhead testing
Accessories
1–2
Accessories
Some accessories are included with the CTS 710 SONET Test Set. If
you wish to purchase optional accessories or additional standard
accessories, see a Tektronix products catalog or contact your local
Tektronix field representative.
Some accessories are included with the CTS 710 SONET Test Set. If
you wish to purchase optional accessories or additional standard
accessories, see a Tektronix products catalog or contact your local
Tektronix field representative.
Standard Accessories
Standard Accessories
H CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual, Tektronix part number
070-8852-XX
H CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual, Tektronix part number
070-8852-XX
H CTS 710 SONET Test Set Reference, Tektronix part number
070-9336-XX
H CTS 710 SONET Test Set Reference, Tektronix part number
070-9336-XX
H Instrument Front Cover, Tektronix part number 200-3232-XX
H Instrument Front Cover, Tektronix part number 200-3232-XX
H 75 W loopback cable, Tektronix part number 012-1338-XX
H 75 W loopback cable, Tektronix part number 012-1338-XX
H Pouch, Tektronix part number 016-1266-XX
H Pouch, Tektronix part number 016-1266-XX
Optional Accessories
Optional Accessories
H CTS 710 SONET Test Set Programmer Manual (Tektronix part
number 070-8924-XX)
H CTS 710 SONET Test Set Programmer Manual (Tektronix part
number 070-8924-XX)
H CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Reference,
Programming commands (Tektronix part number 070-8854-XX)
H CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Reference,
Programming commands (Tektronix part number 070-8854-XX)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Getting Started
Getting Started
H CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service
Manual (Tektronix part number 070-8853-XX)
H CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service
Manual (Tektronix part number 070-8853-XX)
H Hard Transit Case, Tektronix part number 016-1157-XX
H Hard Transit Case, Tektronix part number 016-1157-XX
H Soft Carrying Bag, Tektronix part number 016-1158-XX
H Soft Carrying Bag, Tektronix part number 016-1158-XX
H K212 Portable Instrument Cart
H K212 Portable Instrument Cart
H Optical Connector Kit, Tektronix part number 020-1885-XX
H Optical Connector Kit, Tektronix part number 020-1885-XX
First Time Operation
First Time Operation
This section describes how to set up the CTS 710 for the first time.
This section describes how to set up the CTS 710 for the first time.
Installing the Accessory Pouch
Installing the Accessory Pouch
The CTS 710 ships with an accessory pouch that mounts on top of
the instrument. The pouch is not installed at the factory. To install
the accessory pouch:
The CTS 710 ships with an accessory pouch that mounts on top of
the instrument. The pouch is not installed at the factory. To install
the accessory pouch:
1. Place the CTS 710 on a table or work bench with the front facing
toward you.
1. Place the CTS 710 on a table or work bench with the front facing
toward you.
2. Center the pouch plate and insert the rear edge of the plate in the
space between the cabinet top and the rear panel trim (see part A
of Figure 1–1).
2. Center the pouch plate and insert the rear edge of the plate in the
space between the cabinet top and the rear panel trim (see part A
of Figure 1–1).
3. Move the pouch sideways as necessary to line up the key slots in
the pouch plate with the keys on the rear panel (the plate is
centered when it is aligned) and push the plate all the way in (see
part B of Figure 1–1).
3. Move the pouch sideways as necessary to line up the key slots in
the pouch plate with the keys on the rear panel (the plate is
centered when it is aligned) and push the plate all the way in (see
part B of Figure 1–1).
4. While keeping the pouch plate pushed under the rear panel trim,
reach under the pouch plate and carefully remove the backing
from the Velcro strip to expose the adhesive on the Velcro strip.
The Velcro should remain attached to the pouch plate.
4. While keeping the pouch plate pushed under the rear panel trim,
reach under the pouch plate and carefully remove the backing
from the Velcro strip to expose the adhesive on the Velcro strip.
The Velcro should remain attached to the pouch plate.
5. Grasp the pouch plate assembly with both hands near the front of
the assembly.
5. Grasp the pouch plate assembly with both hands near the front of
the assembly.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–3
Getting Started
Getting Started
Rear Panel Trim Gap
Rear Panel Trim Gap
Pouch
Plate
Pouch
Plate
Pouch Plate
Velcro Strip
Pouch Plate
Rear
Panel
Trim
Velcro Strip
Rear
Panel
Trim
(Top View)
(Top View)
A. Push the pouch plate into the rear panel trim gap.
A. Push the pouch plate into the rear panel trim gap.
Key Slots Under
Rear Panel Trim
Key Slots Under
Rear Panel Trim
B. Center the pouch plate to align with key slot under the rear panel trim.
B. Center the pouch plate to align with key slot under the rear panel trim.
Figure 1–1: Installing the Accessory Pouch
1–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Figure 1–1: Installing the Accessory Pouch
1–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Getting Started
Getting Started
CAUTION. In the next step, use only enough force to clear the front
panel trim with the plate front edge. Excessive force will cause a
permanent bow in the plate.
CAUTION. In the next step, use only enough force to clear the front
panel trim with the plate front edge. Excessive force will cause a
permanent bow in the plate.
6. Push back on the pouch plate and press down with the heels of
your hands to bow the plate enough to slide the front of the plate
into the space between the cabinet top and the front panel trim
(see Figure 1–2).
6. Push back on the pouch plate and press down with the heels of
your hands to bow the plate enough to slide the front of the plate
into the space between the cabinet top and the front panel trim
(see Figure 1–2).
7. Move the front of the pouch as needed to line up the slots in the
plate with the keys on the front panel.
7. Move the front of the pouch as needed to line up the slots in the
plate with the keys on the front panel.
8. Release the pressure on the plate to allow it to return to its normal
flat shape.
8. Release the pressure on the plate to allow it to return to its normal
flat shape.
9. Press down firmly to secure the Velcro strip to the top of the
cabinet top.
9. Press down firmly to secure the Velcro strip to the top of the
cabinet top.
Velcro Strip
Velcro Strip
Figure 1–2: Inserting the Pouch Under the Front Panel Trim
Figure 1–2: Inserting the Pouch Under the Front Panel Trim
CAUTION. Do not use the D-ring (see Figure 1–3) on the pouch plate
to lift the CTS 710. Using the D-ring to lift the CTS 710 can pull the
accessory pouch off the CTS 710, resulting in damage to the
CTS 710.
CAUTION. Do not use the D-ring (see Figure 1–3) on the pouch plate
to lift the CTS 710. Using the D-ring to lift the CTS 710 can pull the
accessory pouch off the CTS 710, resulting in damage to the
CTS 710.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–5
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–5
Getting Started
Getting Started
1–6
DO NOT LIFT
Instrument
With D-Ring
DO NOT LIFT
Instrument
With D-Ring
Figure 1–3: Location of the D-Ring on the Accessory Pouch
Figure 1–3: Location of the D-Ring on the Accessory Pouch
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–6
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Getting Started
Getting Started
Setting Up the CTS 710
Setting Up the CTS 710
Before you use the CTS 710, ensure that it is properly set up and
powered on.
Before you use the CTS 710, ensure that it is properly set up and
powered on.
To properly set up the CTS 710, do the following:
To properly set up the CTS 710, do the following:
1. Be sure that the environment in which you will operate the
CTS 710 is within instrument specifications. Specifications for
temperature, relative humidity, altitude, vibrations, and emissions
are included in Appendix D.
1. Be sure that the environment in which you will operate the
CTS 710 is within instrument specifications. Specifications for
temperature, relative humidity, altitude, vibrations, and emissions
are included in Appendix D.
2. Leave space around the CTS 710 for cooling. Verify that the air
intake and exhaust holes on the sides of the cabinet (where the
fan operates) are free of any airflow obstructions. Leave at least
5 cm (2 in) free on each side.
2. Leave space around the CTS 710 for cooling. Verify that the air
intake and exhaust holes on the sides of the cabinet (where the
fan operates) are free of any airflow obstructions. Leave at least
5 cm (2 in) free on each side.
WARNING. To avoid electrical shock, be sure that the power cord is
disconnected before checking the fuse.
WARNING. To avoid electrical shock, be sure that the power cord is
disconnected before checking the fuse.
3. Check the fuse to be sure it is the proper type and rating (see
Figure 1–4). The CTS 710 works with one of two fuses,
depending on the AC supply. Each fuse requires its own cap (see
Table 1–1). The CTS 710 is shipped with the UL-approved fuse
installed.
3. Check the fuse to be sure it is the proper type and rating (see
Figure 1–4). The CTS 710 works with one of two fuses,
depending on the AC supply. Each fuse requires its own cap (see
Table 1–1). The CTS 710 is shipped with the UL-approved fuse
installed.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–7
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–7
Getting Started
Getting Started
Power
Connector
Ground
Fuse
Power
Connector
Ground
Principal
Power Switch
Figure 1–4: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors Used in Setup
1–8
Principal
Power Switch
Figure 1–4: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors Used in Setup
Table 1–1: Fuse and Fuse Cap Part Numbers
Table 1–1: Fuse and Fuse Cap Part Numbers
Fuse Tektronix
Part Number
Fuse Cap Tektronix
Part Number
0.25 in 1.25 in
(UL 198.6, 3AG): 5 A
FAST, 250 V
159-0014-XX
200-2264-XX
5 mm 20 mm
(IEC 127): 4 A, 250 V
159-0255-XX
200-2265-XX
Fuse
Fuse
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Fuse Tektronix
Part Number
Fuse Cap Tektronix
Part Number
0.25 in 1.25 in
(UL 198.6, 3AG): 5 A
FAST, 250 V
159-0014-XX
200-2264-XX
5 mm 20 mm
(IEC 127): 4 A, 250 V
159-0255-XX
200-2265-XX
Fuse
1–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Getting Started
Getting Started
4. Check that you have the proper electrical connections. The
CTS 710 power requirements are listed in Table 1–2.
4. Check that you have the proper electrical connections. The
CTS 710 power requirements are listed in Table 1–2.
Table 1–2: Power Requirements
Table 1–2: Power Requirements
Voltage Range
Frequency Range
Maximum Power
Voltage Range
Frequency Range
Maximum Power
90–132 V
48–62 Hz
250 W
90–132 V
48–62 Hz
250 W
180–250 V
48–62 Hz
250 W
180–250 V
48–62 Hz
250 W
5. Connect the proper power cord from the rear-panel power
connector (see Figure 1–4) to the power system.
5. Connect the proper power cord from the rear-panel power
connector (see Figure 1–4) to the power system.
Turning On the CTS 710
Turning On the CTS 710
To properly turn on the CTS 710:
To properly turn on the CTS 710:
1. Check that the rear-panel principal power switch is on. The
principal power switch controls all AC power to the instrument.
1. Check that the rear-panel principal power switch is on. The
principal power switch controls all AC power to the instrument.
2. If the CTS 710 is not turned on (the screen is blank), press the
front-panel ON/STBY (On/Standby) button to turn it on (see
Figure 1–5).
2. If the CTS 710 is not turned on (the screen is blank), press the
front-panel ON/STBY (On/Standby) button to turn it on (see
Figure 1–5).
The ON/STBY button controls power to most instrument circuits.
Power continues to go to certain parts even when this switch is
set to STBY.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–9
The ON/STBY button controls power to most instrument circuits.
Power continues to go to certain parts even when this switch is
set to STBY.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–9
Getting Started
Getting Started
ON/STBY
Button
1–10
ON/STBY
Button
Figure 1–5: ON/STBY Button
Figure 1–5: ON/STBY Button
The CTS 710 performs an internal self test each time it is turned on.
When turned on, it displays a screen that states whether or not it
passed the self test. (If the self test passes, the status display screen is
removed after a few seconds.)
The CTS 710 performs an internal self test each time it is turned on.
When turned on, it displays a screen that states whether or not it
passed the self test. (If the self test passes, the status display screen is
removed after a few seconds.)
3. Check the self-test results.
3. Check the self-test results.
If the self test fails, contact your local Tektronix Service Center for
assistance.
If the self test fails, contact your local Tektronix Service Center for
assistance.
Turning Off the CTS 710
Turning Off the CTS 710
Press the ON/STBY button to turn off the CTS 710.
Press the ON/STBY button to turn off the CTS 710.
Once the CTS 710 is in use, it is typical to leave the principal power
switch on and use the ON/STBY button as the power switch. If the
CTS 710 is frequently moved, use the principal power switch to turn
the CTS 710 on and off.
Once the CTS 710 is in use, it is typical to leave the principal power
switch on and use the ON/STBY button as the power switch. If the
CTS 710 is frequently moved, use the principal power switch to turn
the CTS 710 on and off.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1–10
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Operating Basics
Operating Basics
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
This section describes how to use and navigate through the basic
functions of the CTS 710, including:
This section describes how to use and navigate through the basic
functions of the CTS 710, including:
H Controls, indicators, and connectors
H Controls, indicators, and connectors
H Elements of the display
H Elements of the display
H Menu structure
H Menu structure
H On-line help
H On-line help
H Connecting signals
H Connecting signals
H Parameter selection and editing
H Parameter selection and editing
H Disk drive operation
H Disk drive operation
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–1
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Figures 2–1 and 2–2 identify the controls, indicators, and connectors
located on the front panel of the CTS 710 SONET Test Set.
Figures 2–1 and 2–2 identify the controls, indicators, and connectors
located on the front panel of the CTS 710 SONET Test Set.
These buttons assign the displayed choice to the
selected parameter or execute the selected action.
ON/STBY Switch
(the principal
power switch is on
the rear panel)
These buttons assign the displayed choice to the
selected parameter or execute the selected action.
ON/STBY Switch
(the principal
power switch is on
the rear panel)
These buttons select the
pages of the current menu.
Figure 2–1: Controls Located Around the Display
2–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
These buttons select the
pages of the current menu.
Figure 2–1: Controls Located Around the Display
2–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
Disk Drive
Functional Overview
Each of these buttons
perform a specific function.
The knob is
primarily used
to highlight
parameters
within pages.
Disk Drive
Each of these buttons
perform a specific function.
The knob is
primarily used
to highlight
parameters
within pages.
DS1
Connectors
(optional)
DS1
Connectors
(optional)
Status Lights
These buttons
select one of
the five
menus.
Status Lights
These buttons
select one of
the five
menus.
DS3
Connectors
(optional)
LASER IN
USE Indicator
DS3
Connectors
(optional)
LASER IN
USE Indicator
Clear History
Button
Optical
Connector
Electrical
Connectors
Clear History
Button
Optical
Connector
Optical
Connector
Figure 2–2: Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Electrical
Connectors
Optical
Connector
Figure 2–2: Front-Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
2–3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–3
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors
Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors
VGA
Video
Output
GPIB
Port
RS-232
Port
External Clock
Input (Optional)
Calibration Overhead 1.544 Mb/s (Connector
BITS
Not Used)
Add/Drop
Signal
Timing
Port
Output
Reference
Input
Ground
Fuse
VGA
Video
Output
Power
Connector
Principal
Power
Switch
GPIB
Port
RS-232
Port
External Clock
Input (Optional)
Calibration Overhead 1.544 Mb/s (Connector
BITS
Not Used)
Add/Drop
Signal
Timing
Port
Output
Reference
Input
Fuse
Figure 2–3: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors
Figure 2–3: Rear-Panel Controls and Connectors
Front-Panel Status Lights
Front-Panel Status Lights
2–4
Ground
Power
Connector
Principal
Power
Switch
The status lights make it easy to quickly determine the condition of
the received signal. There are three types of front-panel status lights.
The status lights make it easy to quickly determine the condition of
the received signal. There are three types of front-panel status lights.
H Green status lights. Green lights indicate whether a signal is
present and whether the CTS 710 has locked onto the signal.
H Green status lights. Green lights indicate whether a signal is
present and whether the CTS 710 has locked onto the signal.
H Red status lights. When a red status light is on, it means that the
indicated event is occurring. When the red light is off, no event is
occurring.
H Red status lights. When a red status light is on, it means that the
indicated event is occurring. When the red light is off, no event is
occurring.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
H Yellow history lights. Once an event has been detected, a yellow
history light is turned on. The yellow history light shows that the
associated event occurred at some time in the past. Yellow history
lights remain on until you reset the event history by pressing the
CLEAR HISTORY button, starting a new test, or changing the
Receive Rate.
Yellow history lights
indicate an event has
occurred.
Red lights indicate an
event is occurring
now.
Green lights
indicate the
condition is true.
H Yellow history lights. Once an event has been detected, a yellow
history light is turned on. The yellow history light shows that the
associated event occurred at some time in the past. Yellow history
lights remain on until you reset the event history by pressing the
CLEAR HISTORY button, starting a new test, or changing the
Receive Rate.
Yellow history lights
indicate an event has
occurred.
CLEAR HISTORY
button clears
history of events.
Red lights indicate an
event is occurring
now.
Figure 2–4: Status Lights (With Option 22 Installed)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
Green lights
indicate the
condition is true.
CLEAR HISTORY
button clears
history of events.
Figure 2–4: Status Lights (With Option 22 Installed)
2–5
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–5
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Reading the Display
Reading the Display
There are several major areas that make up the CTS 710 display (see
Figure 2–5).
There are several major areas that make up the CTS 710 display (see
Figure 2–5).
This area displays the contents of the different
pages of each menu. Some pages display control
parameters; some pages display test results.
The menu name appears
here; the menu name is
always visible.
Pages of
the Menu
Status message
area. This area
is always visible.
This area displays the contents of the different
pages of each menu. Some pages display control
parameters; some pages display test results.
Icons
Pressing one of these buttons selects the
page identified above the button.
Signal
Status
Indicators
Usually these
items are the
values that can
be assigned to
the selected
parameter.
Figure 2–5: Major Areas of the Display
2–6
The menu name appears
here; the menu name is
always visible.
Pages of
the Menu
Status message
area. This area
is always visible.
Icons
Pressing one of these buttons selects the
page identified above the button.
Signal
Status
Indicators
Usually these
items are the
values that can
be assigned to
the selected
parameter.
Figure 2–5: Major Areas of the Display
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–6
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Figure 2–6 provides a guide to specific areas of the display.
Figure 2–6 provides a guide to specific areas of the display.
Highlighted parameters can be
Choices or actions
changed; dimmed parameters
available for the
cannot be changed under the
selected parameter
current setup.
Received
Signal
Test
Transmitted
Menu Test State Progress
Highlighted Status
Signal Status
Name Indicator
Parameter Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Highlighted parameters can be
Choices or actions
changed; dimmed parameters
available for the
cannot be changed under the
selected parameter
current setup.
Received
Signal
Test
Transmitted
Menu Test State Progress
Highlighted Status
Signal Status
Name Indicator
Parameter Indicator
Indicator
Indicator
Parameters
or options
controlled
from this
page
Parameters
or options
controlled
from this
page
Selected
page is
highlighted
Selected
page is
highlighted
Pages are
identified by
page tabs.
Pages of the
Menu
Pages are
identified by
page tabs.
“–more–” means
additional
choices are
available.
Figure 2–6: Specific Elements of the Display
“–more–” means
additional
choices are
available.
Figure 2–6: Specific Elements of the Display
Table 2–1 provides a list of icons that appear on the display. Icons
are used to identify information, indicate instrument status, and
clarify available actions.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Pages of the
Menu
Table 2–1 provides a list of icons that appear on the display. Icons
are used to identify information, indicate instrument status, and
clarify available actions.
2–7
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–7
Functional Overview
2–8
Functional Overview
Table 2–1: Icons that Appear in the Display
Table 2–1: Icons that Appear in the Display
Icon
Icon
Meaning
Meaning
Transmitted signal
Transmitted signal
Received signal
Received signal
CTS 710 is in through mode
CTS 710 is in through mode
CTS 710 is in coupled mode
CTS 710 is in coupled mode
Use the knob
Use the knob
Not allowed
Not allowed
File stored on disk
File stored on disk
File stored in memory
File stored in memory
Message or warning identifier
Message or warning identifier
Press the button to perform the indicated action
Press the button to perform the indicated action
The CTS 710 is busy
The CTS 710 is busy
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
The Basic Menu Structure
The Basic Menu Structure
The CTS 710 is controlled primarily through its menu system.
Though several controls are located on the front panel, such as
INSERT ERROR, most functions are controlled from one of the five
menus. Figure 2–7 shows the five menus.
The CTS 710 is controlled primarily through its menu system.
Though several controls are located on the front panel, such as
INSERT ERROR, most functions are controlled from one of the five
menus. Figure 2–7 shows the five menus.
Figure 2–7: The Five Menus
Figure 2–7: The Five Menus
What is a Menu?
What is a Menu?
A menu groups related functions together. For example, all settings
that affect the signal transmitted by the CTS 710 are located in the
TRANSMIT menu. Each menu is made up of pages. A page is
A menu groups related functions together. For example, all settings
that affect the signal transmitted by the CTS 710 are located in the
TRANSMIT menu. Each menu is made up of pages. A page is
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–9
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–9
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
identified by a page tab located at the bottom of the display (see
Figure 2–8).
TEST
CONTROL
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
RECALL
PASS/FAIL
TESTS
SAVE
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
SAVE
PASS/FAIL
TESTS
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
ERRORS
& ALARMS
POINTERS
& TIMING
APS
TRANSPORT
COMMANDS OVERHEAD
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
SIGNAL
STATUS
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
PATH
OVERHEAD
TEST
SUMMARY
MAIN
RESULTS
ERROR
ANALYSIS
HISTORY
GRAPHS
SAVE
RESULTS
MISC
SETTINGS
PRINTER
SETUP
REMOTE
CONTROL
INSTR
CONFIG
SELF
TEST
PATH
OVERHEAD
RECALL
RESULTS
Figure 2–8: Menus and Pages
identified by a page tab located at the bottom of the display (see
Figure 2–8).
TEST
CONTROL
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
RECALL
PASS/FAIL
TESTS
SAVE
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
ERRORS
& ALARMS
POINTERS
& TIMING
APS
TRANSPORT
COMMANDS OVERHEAD
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
SIGNAL
STATUS
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
PATH
OVERHEAD
TEST
SUMMARY
MAIN
RESULTS
ERROR
ANALYSIS
HISTORY
GRAPHS
SAVE
RESULTS
MISC
SETTINGS
PRINTER
SETUP
REMOTE
CONTROL
INSTR
CONFIG
SELF
TEST
PATH
OVERHEAD
RECALL
RESULTS
Figure 2–8: Menus and Pages
The CTS 710 always displays a menu. The name of the current menu
is shown near the top of the display. To change to another menu,
press a menu button on the front panel.
2–10
SAVE
PASS/FAIL
TESTS
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
The CTS 710 always displays a menu. The name of the current menu
is shown near the top of the display. To change to another menu,
press a menu button on the front panel.
2–10
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
NOTE. The only times pressing a menu button does not change menus
are when a dialog box is displayed or when you are entering a value
for a parameter. You must first exit the dialog box or finish entering
the value before you can change menus.
NOTE. The only times pressing a menu button does not change menus
are when a dialog box is displayed or when you are entering a value
for a parameter. You must first exit the dialog box or finish entering
the value before you can change menus.
A page usually provides control over a related group of instrument
functions or parameters. For example, the TRANSMIT SETTINGS
page in the TRANSMIT menu controls the rate, format, and active
channels of the signal transmitted by the CTS 710. However, some
pages display information rather than provide control over settings;
for example, the pages of the RESULTS menu display various test
results.
A page usually provides control over a related group of instrument
functions or parameters. For example, the TRANSMIT SETTINGS
page in the TRANSMIT menu controls the rate, format, and active
channels of the signal transmitted by the CTS 710. However, some
pages display information rather than provide control over settings;
for example, the pages of the RESULTS menu display various test
results.
Selecting Menus
Selecting Menus
To display a menu, press the button on the front panel with the same
name (see Figure 2–9).
To display a menu, press the button on the front panel with the same
name (see Figure 2–9).
Figure 2–9: Menu Select Buttons
Figure 2–9: Menu Select Buttons
Selecting Pages
Selecting Pages
To select a page within a menu, press the button beneath the page tab
located at the bottom of the display (see Figure 2–10).
To select a page within a menu, press the button beneath the page tab
located at the bottom of the display (see Figure 2–10).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–11
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–11
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Page Tab
Page Tab
Display the page by
pressing the button
below the page tab.
Display the page by
pressing the button
below the page tab.
Figure 2–10: How to Display a Page
Displaying Help
2–12
Figure 2–10: How to Display a Page
Displaying Help
To display help, press the HELP front-panel button.
To display help, press the HELP front-panel button.
When the HELP dialog box appears, use the knob to select the topic
you wish to view (see Figure 2–11). After you select the topic to
view, select View Help to see the help screen.
When the HELP dialog box appears, use the knob to select the topic
you wish to view (see Figure 2–11). After you select the topic to
view, select View Help to see the help screen.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–12
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Figure 2–11: Help Dialog Box
Figure 2–11: Help Dialog Box
Once you press View Help, the help screen for that topic is
displayed. If a help topic covers more than one page, you can display
the next page by selecting Page Down. To display the previous page,
select Page Up.
Once you press View Help, the help screen for that topic is
displayed. If a help topic covers more than one page, you can display
the next page by selecting Page Down. To display the previous page,
select Page Up.
To display help in a different language, select Change Language.
Then, to display help in French, select Francais. To display help in
German, select Deutsch.
To display help in a different language, select Change Language.
Then, to display help in French, select Francais. To display help in
German, select Deutsch.
When you finish reading the help text, you can exit the help dialog
box by selecting EXIT. If you wish to read additional help topics,
select Help Menu to return to the main help screen.
When you finish reading the help text, you can exit the help dialog
box by selecting EXIT. If you wish to read additional help topics,
select Help Menu to return to the main help screen.
Connecting Signals
Connecting Signals
To connect signals to the CTS 710, use the electrical and optical
connectors located at the bottom and right side of the front panel.
To connect signals to the CTS 710, use the electrical and optical
connectors located at the bottom and right side of the front panel.
For optical connections, the CTS 710 accepts both single mode and
multimode fiber. For electrical connections, the CTS 710 accepts
75 W coaxial cable with BNC connectors for SONET rates and DS3
signals. The CTS 710 accepts bantam connectors for DS1 signals.
For optical connections, the CTS 710 accepts both single mode and
multimode fiber. For electrical connections, the CTS 710 accepts
75 W coaxial cable with BNC connectors for SONET rates and DS3
signals. The CTS 710 accepts bantam connectors for DS1 signals.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–13
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–13
Functional Overview
2–14
Functional Overview
Connecting Optical Signals
Connecting Optical Signals
NOTE. The optical TRANSMIT output is produced by a Class 1 laser
device. The output from a Class 1 laser is safe to view without
special eye protection. However, because other optical signals in
your environment may exceed the Class 1 limits, we recommend eye
protection as a precaution.
NOTE. The optical TRANSMIT output is produced by a Class 1 laser
device. The output from a Class 1 laser is safe to view without
special eye protection. However, because other optical signals in
your environment may exceed the Class 1 limits, we recommend eye
protection as a precaution.
To connect optical signals to the CTS 710:
To connect optical signals to the CTS 710:
1. Unscrew the dustcap that covers the optical port on the CTS 710.
1. Unscrew the dustcap that covers the optical port on the CTS 710.
2. Remove the dustcap (if present) covering the connector on the
optical fiber.
2. Remove the dustcap (if present) covering the connector on the
optical fiber.
3. Carefully insert the transmit end of the optical fiber into the
RECEIVE port on the CTS 710. Line up the key on the optical
fiber connector with the cutout on the optical port connector.
Make sure that the optical fiber connector is fully inserted into
the optical port.
3. Carefully insert the transmit end of the optical fiber into the
RECEIVE port on the CTS 710. Line up the key on the optical
fiber connector with the cutout on the optical port connector.
Make sure that the optical fiber connector is fully inserted into
the optical port.
4. Tighten the optical fiber connector so it does not accidentally
come loose during use.
4. Tighten the optical fiber connector so it does not accidentally
come loose during use.
5. Carefully insert the receive end of the optical fiber into the
TRANSMIT port on the CTS 710. Make sure that the optical
fiber connector is fully inserted into the optical port.
5. Carefully insert the receive end of the optical fiber into the
TRANSMIT port on the CTS 710. Make sure that the optical
fiber connector is fully inserted into the optical port.
6. Tighten the optical fiber connector so it does not accidentally
come loose during use. Tighten the connectors only finger tight;
do not use a tool to tighten the connectors.
6. Tighten the optical fiber connector so it does not accidentally
come loose during use. Tighten the connectors only finger tight;
do not use a tool to tighten the connectors.
CAUTION. To prevent damage to the optical port connectors and to
keep them clean, always replace the dustcaps on the optical port
connectors when not using the optical ports.
CAUTION. To prevent damage to the optical port connectors and to
keep them clean, always replace the dustcaps on the optical port
connectors when not using the optical ports.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–14
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Connecting SONET Electrical Signals
Connecting SONET Electrical Signals
To connect SONET electrical signals to the CTS 710:
To connect SONET electrical signals to the CTS 710:
1. Connect the transmit end of the signal cable to the RECEIVE
connector on the CTS 710.
1. Connect the transmit end of the signal cable to the RECEIVE
connector on the CTS 710.
2. Connect the receive end of the signal cable to the TRANSMIT
connector on the CTS 710.
2. Connect the receive end of the signal cable to the TRANSMIT
connector on the CTS 710.
Connecting DS1/DS3 Electrical Signals
Connecting DS1/DS3 Electrical Signals
To connect DS1/DS3 electrical signals to the CTS 710:
To connect DS1/DS3 electrical signals to the CTS 710:
1. Connect the transmit end of the signal cable to the IN connector
for the appropriate rate on the CTS 710.
1. Connect the transmit end of the signal cable to the IN connector
for the appropriate rate on the CTS 710.
2. Connect the receive end of the signal cable to the OUT connector
for the appropriate rate on the CTS 710.
2. Connect the receive end of the signal cable to the OUT connector
for the appropriate rate on the CTS 710.
Initiating Autoscan
Initiating Autoscan
Autoscan is a feature that automatically scans the received signal and
changes the CTS 710 receive settings to match the received signal.
Autoscan is the quickest way to set up the CTS 710 to view a signal.
Autoscan is a feature that automatically scans the received signal and
changes the CTS 710 receive settings to match the received signal.
Autoscan is the quickest way to set up the CTS 710 to view a signal.
To initiate autoscan, press the AUTOSCAN front-panel button. For
detailed information on the AUTOSCAN function, see Checking
Signal Status on page 3–55.
To initiate autoscan, press the AUTOSCAN front-panel button. For
detailed information on the AUTOSCAN function, see Checking
Signal Status on page 3–55.
Changing Parameters
Changing Parameters
Most of the menu pages in the CTS 710 contain parameters (or
settings) that you can change. The choices available for a parameter
appear in four ways (examples in parentheses):
Most of the menu pages in the CTS 710 contain parameters (or
settings) that you can change. The choices available for a parameter
appear in four ways (examples in parentheses):
H As a list (Test Pattern: PRBS 2^23–1, PRBS 2^20–1, ...)
H As a list (Test Pattern: PRBS 2^23–1, PRBS 2^20–1, ...)
H As a decimal number (Frequency Offset: 74.3 ppm)
H As a decimal number (Frequency Offset: 74.3 ppm)
H As a binary number (Z1 Byte: 10101111)
H As a binary number (Z1 Byte: 10101111)
H As a text string (File Name: TEST_34)
H As a text string (File Name: TEST_34)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–15
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–15
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Selecting Parameters
Selecting Parameters
To change a parameter, use the knob to highlight it. As you turn the
knob, the display highlight moves from parameter to parameter (see
Figure 2–12).
To change a parameter, use the knob to highlight it. As you turn the
knob, the display highlight moves from parameter to parameter (see
Figure 2–12).
This is the selected parameter. It is
identified by the location of the highlight.
This is the selected parameter. It is
identified by the location of the highlight.
Turning the
knob moves
the highlight
to another
parameter.
2–16
Turning the
knob moves
the highlight
to another
parameter.
Figure 2–12: Selecting a Parameter
Figure 2–12: Selecting a Parameter
The parameter values displayed in high-intensity text indicate
parameters that you can change. If a parameter is displayed in
dimmed text, it cannot be selected under the current setup.
The parameter values displayed in high-intensity text indicate
parameters that you can change. If a parameter is displayed in
dimmed text, it cannot be selected under the current setup.
Selecting from Lists
Selecting from Lists
Most parameters have a set group of choices available. The choices
are presented as a list, located along the right side of the display.
Press the button next to the choice to assign that choice to the
highlighted parameter.
Most parameters have a set group of choices available. The choices
are presented as a list, located along the right side of the display.
Press the button next to the choice to assign that choice to the
highlighted parameter.
Sometimes parameters have more than five choices available. When
more than five choices are available, the bottom choice changes to
–more–. Selecting –more– displays additional choices. Each time
Sometimes parameters have more than five choices available. When
more than five choices are available, the bottom choice changes to
–more–. Selecting –more– displays additional choices. Each time
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–16
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
you press –more– the next list of choices is displayed. Below –more–
is a line that shows which list of choices is displayed. When the last
list of choices is displayed, pressing –more– displays the first list of
choices again (see Figure 2–13).
List of
Choices
Functional Overview
you press –more– the next list of choices is displayed. Below –more–
is a line that shows which list of choices is displayed. When the last
list of choices is displayed, pressing –more– displays the first list of
choices again (see Figure 2–13).
Pressing a button assigns
the choice next to the button
to the highlighted parameter.
List of
Choices
Selecting –more–
displays additional
choices.
Figure 2–13: Selecting Choices From a List
Pressing a button assigns
the choice next to the button
to the highlighted parameter.
Selecting –more–
displays additional
choices.
Figure 2–13: Selecting Choices From a List
Changing Decimal Numbers
Changing Decimal Numbers
Some parameters allow you to set a numeric value for them. For
these parameters, preset choices are always provided to save you
time. However, if the preset choices are not appropriate for your
needs, you can set specific values by selecting the USER DEFINED
choice (see Figure 2–14).
Some parameters allow you to set a numeric value for them. For
these parameters, preset choices are always provided to save you
time. However, if the preset choices are not appropriate for your
needs, you can set specific values by selecting the USER DEFINED
choice (see Figure 2–14).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–17
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–17
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Selecting USER
DEFINED allows you to
enter a numeric value.
Figure 2–14: Selecting USER DEFINED
Selecting USER
DEFINED allows you to
enter a numeric value.
Figure 2–14: Selecting USER DEFINED
After you select USER DEFINED, the buttons at the right side of the
display are reassigned, as shown in Figure 2–15.
2–18
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
After you select USER DEFINED, the buttons at the right side of the
display are reassigned, as shown in Figure 2–15.
2–18
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
Turning the knob
changes this value.
Selecting this choice allows the knob
to make large changes quickly.
Functional Overview
Turning the knob
changes this value.
Selecting this choice allows the knob
to make large changes quickly.
Selecting this
choice allows the
knob to make
small changes.
Selecting this
choice allows the
knob to make
small changes.
You must select
DONE to exit
the edit mode.
You must select
DONE to exit
the edit mode.
Figure 2–15: Entering a Numeric Value
Figure 2–15: Entering a Numeric Value
After you press USER DEFINED, the CTS 710 enters edit mode. In
edit mode, you change the value of the highlighted parameter by
turning the knob. When you have set the parameter to the desired
value, select DONE to enter the value and exit edit mode.
After you press USER DEFINED, the CTS 710 enters edit mode. In
edit mode, you change the value of the highlighted parameter by
turning the knob. When you have set the parameter to the desired
value, select DONE to enter the value and exit edit mode.
NOTE. The new value does not take effect until DONE is selected.
NOTE. The new value does not take effect until DONE is selected.
When in edit mode, the knob can work in several ways. As shown in
Figure 2–15, the knob can be assigned to make either coarse or fine
adjustments to the highlighted parameter. For other parameters, the
knob is assigned to change different elements of the selected
parameter. For example, when setting a test time, rather than making
coarse or fine adjustments, the knob is assigned to change days,
hours, minutes, or seconds.
When in edit mode, the knob can work in several ways. As shown in
Figure 2–15, the knob can be assigned to make either coarse or fine
adjustments to the highlighted parameter. For other parameters, the
knob is assigned to change different elements of the selected
parameter. For example, when setting a test time, rather than making
coarse or fine adjustments, the knob is assigned to change days,
hours, minutes, or seconds.
The knob icon is displayed in solid form to indicate which function it
is currently assigned to. The knob icon is displayed in outline form
next to other possible choices.
The knob icon is displayed in solid form to indicate which function it
is currently assigned to. The knob icon is displayed in outline form
next to other possible choices.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–19
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–19
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Changing Binary Numbers
Changing Binary Numbers
There are two kinds of binary numbers that can be changed in the
CTS 710: payload patterns and overhead bytes. As with other
numerical values, you can select preset values or enter specific
values by selecting Edit Byte.
There are two kinds of binary numbers that can be changed in the
CTS 710: payload patterns and overhead bytes. As with other
numerical values, you can select preset values or enter specific
values by selecting Edit Byte.
To change a byte:
To change a byte:
1. Select the byte with the knob (see Figure 2–16).
1. Select the byte with the knob (see Figure 2–16).
2. Change the byte by selecting one of the preset choices at the right
side of the display or to enter a different bit pattern, select EDIT
BYTE. This places the CTS 710 into edit mode.
2. Change the byte by selecting one of the preset choices at the right
side of the display or to enter a different bit pattern, select EDIT
BYTE. This places the CTS 710 into edit mode.
The highlighted
byte can be
quickly set to
these choices by
pressing the
button next to the
desired choice.
Select the byte to edit
by using the knob.
Select EDIT BYTE to change
the bits within the byte.
Figure 2–16: Selecting a Byte for Editing
The highlighted
byte can be
quickly set to
these choices by
pressing the
button next to the
desired choice.
Select the byte to edit
by using the knob.
Figure 2–16: Selecting a Byte for Editing
When in edit mode, the choices along the right side of the display
change (see Figure 2–17). The highlight now applies to a single
bit.
2–20
Select EDIT BYTE to change
the bits within the byte.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
When in edit mode, the choices along the right side of the display
change (see Figure 2–17). The highlight now applies to a single
bit.
2–20
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
3. To change the value of the highlighted bit, select either 1 or 0.
Each time you select 1 or 0, the highlighted bit is changed and
the highlight moves to the next bit.
3. To change the value of the highlighted bit, select either 1 or 0.
Each time you select 1 or 0, the highlighted bit is changed and
the highlight moves to the next bit.
4. To select a different bit for editing, select either the right or left
arrow to move the highlight. When the desired bit is highlighted,
select either 1 or 0.
4. To select a different bit for editing, select either the right or left
arrow to move the highlight. When the desired bit is highlighted,
select either 1 or 0.
5. When you are finished editing the byte, select DONE. This enters
the changes to the byte and exits edit mode.
5. When you are finished editing the byte, select DONE. This enters
the changes to the byte and exits edit mode.
Select the bit to edit by
using the knob.
Change the value
of the bit by
selecting one of
these choices.
Change the value
of the bit by
selecting one of
these choices.
Change the
highlighted bit by
selecting one of
these choices.
Change the
highlighted bit by
selecting one of
these choices.
Select DONE when you are
finished editing.
Select the bit to edit by
using the knob.
Figure 2–17: Editing a Byte
Select DONE when you are
finished editing.
Figure 2–17: Editing a Byte
Entering Text
Entering Text
Several parameters, such as file names, operator prompts, and path
trace messages, consist of text strings. You can set text strings to
preset choices or enter your own text string. When you highlight a
text parameter using the knob, the choices at the right side of the
display change to present predefined text strings (if appropriate) and
the option to edit the text string (see Figure 2–18).
Several parameters, such as file names, operator prompts, and path
trace messages, consist of text strings. You can set text strings to
preset choices or enter your own text string. When you highlight a
text parameter using the knob, the choices at the right side of the
display change to present predefined text strings (if appropriate) and
the option to edit the text string (see Figure 2–18).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–21
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–21
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Select the text string to edit by
using the knob.
Select the text string to edit by
using the knob.
Select EDIT TEXT to
edit the specified
text string.
Figure 2–18: Selecting a Text String for Editing
Select EDIT TEXT to
edit the specified
text string.
Figure 2–18: Selecting a Text String for Editing
To edit a text string:
To edit a text string:
1. Select the text string by turning the knob until the desired text
string is highlighted (see Figure 2–18).
1. Select the text string by turning the knob until the desired text
string is highlighted (see Figure 2–18).
2. Select EDIT TEXT. This places the CTS 710 into edit mode.
2. Select EDIT TEXT. This places the CTS 710 into edit mode.
When in edit mode, the choices along the right side of the display
change (see Figure 2–19). In edit mode, the status line at the top
of the display is replaced with a line that displays the characters
available for placing into the text string. (Some characters
available for message text are not available for file names.)
When in edit mode, the choices along the right side of the display
change (see Figure 2–19). In edit mode, the status line at the top
of the display is replaced with a line that displays the characters
available for placing into the text string. (Some characters
available for message text are not available for file names.)
3. To change the highlighted character or enter a new one, select the
character to enter by turning the knob.
3. To change the highlighted character or enter a new one, select the
character to enter by turning the knob.
4. To enter the selected character, select Enter <character>.
4. To enter the selected character, select Enter <character>.
To delete a character already entered, use the arrows to highlight
the character. Select Delete to delete the character.
2–22
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
To delete a character already entered, use the arrows to highlight
the character. Select Delete to delete the character.
2–22
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
5. When you are finished editing the text string, select DONE.
The characters available depend on
the text string being edited. The
characters used for file names are a
subset of the characters available for
message text.
Functional Overview
5. When you are finished editing the text string, select DONE.
The characters available depend on
the text string being edited. The
characters used for file names are a
subset of the characters available for
message text.
Turning the knob selects the
character to be entered.
Select this choice to enter
the selected character.
Turning the knob selects the
character to be entered.
Select this choice
to delete the
selected character.
Select this choice
to delete the
selected character.
Select either of
these choices to
move the
highlight within
the text string.
Select either of
these choices to
move the
highlight within
the text string.
Select DONE when you
are finished editing text.
Select DONE when you
are finished editing text.
The highlighted character is the
character that will be changed
when Enter ! is selected
The highlighted character is the
character that will be changed
when Enter ! is selected
Figure 2–19: Editing a Text String
Figure 2–19: Editing a Text String
Working with the Disk Drive
Working with the Disk Drive
Use the disk drive in the CTS 710 to save instrument setups, pass/fail
tests, measurement results and measurement histories. The CTS 710
reads disks formatted in MS-DOS format. It reads only 1.44 MB
disks. The CTS 710 does not format disks. Files written to disk
consist of four types, as shown in Table 2–2.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select this choice to enter
the selected character.
2–23
Use the disk drive in the CTS 710 to save instrument setups, pass/fail
tests, measurement results and measurement histories. The CTS 710
reads disks formatted in MS-DOS format. It reads only 1.44 MB
disks. The CTS 710 does not format disks. Files written to disk
consist of four types, as shown in Table 2–2.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–23
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
Table 2–2: CTS 710 Disk File Types
File Type
Description
Instrument Setups
File Type
Description
Complete description of instru- .SET
ment settings
Instrument Setups
Complete description of instru- .SET
ment settings
Pass/Fail Tests
Complete description of instru- .TST
ment settings, operator
prompts, and Fail If conditions
Pass/Fail Tests
Complete description of instru- .TST
ment settings, operator
prompts, and Fail If conditions
Measurement Results1
An ASCII file listing the results .RES
of a test
Measurement Results1
An ASCII file listing the results .RES
of a test
Measurement History1
Binary file containing the
history of test results
Measurement History1
Binary file containing the
history of test results
1
2–24
Table 2–2: CTS 710 Disk File Types
File Extension
.HIS
1
The CTS 710 creates two files (with extensions .RES and .HIS)
when you save test results.
File Extension
.HIS
The CTS 710 creates two files (with extensions .RES and .HIS)
when you save test results.
The CTS 710 displays only file names with the extensions shown in
Table 2–2. Disk files with any other extensions do not appear in file
name displays.
The CTS 710 displays only file names with the extensions shown in
Table 2–2. Disk files with any other extensions do not appear in file
name displays.
Reading Files on Disk
Reading Files on Disk
You can display disk file names in three places: the RECALL
INSTRUMENT SETUPS page and the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS
page of the TEST SETUPS menu, and the RECALL RESULTS page
of the RESULTS menu.
You can display disk file names in three places: the RECALL
INSTRUMENT SETUPS page and the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS
page of the TEST SETUPS menu, and the RECALL RESULTS page
of the RESULTS menu.
To view instrument setups files on a disk:
To view instrument setups files on a disk:
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive.
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive.
2. Press the TEST SETUPS front-panel button to display the TEST
SETUPS menu.
2. Press the TEST SETUPS front-panel button to display the TEST
SETUPS menu.
3. Select the RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS page.
3. Select the RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS page.
4. Select Disk to display the instrument setups on disk.
4. Select Disk to display the instrument setups on disk.
To view pass/fail files on a disk:
To view pass/fail files on a disk:
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive.
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–24
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Functional Overview
Functional Overview
2. Press the TEST SETUPS front-panel button to display the TEST
SETUPS menu.
2. Press the TEST SETUPS front-panel button to display the TEST
SETUPS menu.
3. Select the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS page.
3. Select the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS page.
4. Select Disk to display the pass/fail tests on disk.
4. Select Disk to display the pass/fail tests on disk.
To view test results files on a disk:
To view test results files on a disk:
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive.
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive.
2. Press the RESULTS front-panel button to display the RESULTS
menu.
2. Press the RESULTS front-panel button to display the RESULTS
menu.
3. Select the RECALL RESULTS page.
3. Select the RECALL RESULTS page.
4. Select Disk to display the test results files on disk.
4. Select Disk to display the test results files on disk.
NOTE. Disk operations may take several seconds if there are many
files on the disk. The light on the front of the disk drive turns off
when the disk operation is complete.
NOTE. Disk operations may take several seconds if there are many
files on the disk. The light on the front of the disk drive turns off
when the disk operation is complete.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–25
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–25
Functional Overview
2–26
Functional Overview
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–26
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Tutorial
Tutorial
The tutorial acquaints you with the features of the CTS 710 by
having you run a test while you explore specific features of the
CTS 710. For full details on how to use the CTS 710, refer to
Reference.
The tutorial acquaints you with the features of the CTS 710 by
having you run a test while you explore specific features of the
CTS 710. For full details on how to use the CTS 710, refer to
Reference.
The tutorial presents procedures in tables. Perform the procedure by
reading from left to right in the table (see example below). The word
none in a cell indicates that no action is required.
The tutorial presents procedures in tables. Perform the procedure by
reading from left to right in the table (see example below). The word
none in a cell indicates that no action is required.
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Begin here with
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Begin here with
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8, CTS 710
instruction is
complete
Step 7
Step 8, CTS 710
instruction is
complete
Some procedures require several iterations of highlighting parameters and selecting choices. Some procedures may require more than
one menu button or menu page selection as well.
Before Turning On the CTS 710
Some procedures require several iterations of highlighting parameters and selecting choices. Some procedures may require more than
one menu button or menu page selection as well.
Before Turning On the CTS 710
This tutorial describes how to perform a bit-error rate (BER) test on
an STS-1 signal. To perform the tutorial, you need a 75 W coaxial
cable with BNC connectors on each end. This tutorial assumes you
have set up the CTS 710 as described in First Time Operation, on
page 1–3.
This tutorial describes how to perform a bit-error rate (BER) test on
an STS-1 signal. To perform the tutorial, you need a 75 W coaxial
cable with BNC connectors on each end. This tutorial assumes you
have set up the CTS 710 as described in First Time Operation, on
page 1–3.
To set up your CTS 710 for the tutorial, perform these steps:
To set up your CTS 710 for the tutorial, perform these steps:
H Check that the CTS 710 is turned off. If it is on, you can put it in
standby mode by pressing the ON/STBY button.
H Check that the CTS 710 is turned off. If it is on, you can put it in
standby mode by pressing the ON/STBY button.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–27
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–27
Tutorial
Tutorial
Connect the coaxial cable between the TRANSMIT and RECEIVE
BNC connectors on the front panel (see Figure 2–20).
Connect the coaxial cable between the TRANSMIT and RECEIVE
BNC connectors on the front panel (see Figure 2–20).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
75 W Coaxial Cable
75 W Coaxial Cable
Figure 2–20: Setup for the Tutorial
Figure 2–20: Setup for the Tutorial
Press the ON/STBY button to turn on the CTS 710.
Press the ON/STBY button to turn on the CTS 710.
The CTS 710 performs its power-on self test and then displays the
TRANSMIT menu.
The CTS 710 performs its power-on self test and then displays the
TRANSMIT menu.
Before proceeding with the tutorial, initialize the CTS 710 as
follows:
Before proceeding with the tutorial, initialize the CTS 710 as
follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Setting Transmit Parameters
Recall Setup
Setting Transmit Parameters
Before beginning the BER test, set the transmit and receive
parameters.
2–28
Select Choice
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Before beginning the BER test, set the transmit and receive
parameters.
2–28
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Tutorial
To set the transmit and receive parameters:
Tutorial
To set the transmit and receive parameters:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-3
(see Figure 2–21)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-3
(see Figure 2–21)
Select Choice
Figure 2–21: The TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page of the TRANSMIT Menu
Figure 2–21: The TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page of the TRANSMIT Menu
Note that as soon as you changed the transmit rate that the red
ERROR light on the front panel came on and the red LOS, LOF, and
LOP status lights came on (also, NO SIG appeared next to the
incoming-signal icon at the top of the display). The lights turned on
because you can set the transmit and receive settings independently
and right now the receive section is still set to STS-1. You will
change the receive rate later in this tutorial.
Note that as soon as you changed the transmit rate that the red
ERROR light on the front panel came on and the red LOS, LOF, and
LOP status lights came on (also, NO SIG appeared next to the
incoming-signal icon at the top of the display). The lights turned on
because you can set the transmit and receive settings independently
and right now the receive section is still set to STS-1. You will
change the receive rate later in this tutorial.
An STS-3 signal is made up of three STS-1 signals. The CTS 710
can test only one signal at a time; therefore, you must specify which
of the three signals that make up the STS-3 signal you wish to test.
This tutorial has you test the second signal. The signal to be tested is
identified on the STS Under Test line.
An STS-3 signal is made up of three STS-1 signals. The CTS 710
can test only one signal at a time; therefore, you must specify which
of the three signals that make up the STS-3 signal you wish to test.
This tutorial has you test the second signal. The signal to be tested is
identified on the STS Under Test line.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–29
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–29
Tutorial
Tutorial
To specify which signal, or STS, to test:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
To specify which signal, or STS, to test:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
STS Under Test
2
Press Menu
Button
To set the mapping and the test pattern:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
STS Under Test
2
To set the mapping and the test pattern:
Press Menu
Button
Select Choice
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Mapping
No Mapping
(Equipped)
Mapping
No Mapping
(Equipped)
Test Pattern
PRBS 2^20–1
Test Pattern
PRBS 2^20–1
Setting Receive Parameters
Setting Receive Parameters
You can set receive parameters two ways. The first way is to set the
parameters individually: display the RECEIVE menu and set each
parameter manually on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page. The second
way is to couple the receive settings to the transmit settings. To do
this, use the Tx/Rx Settings line on the TRANSMIT SETTINGS
page. (The Tx/Rx Settings line appears on both the TRANSMIT
SETTINGS page and the RECEIVE SETTINGS page. To couple
transmit settings to the receive settings, you would use the Tx/Rx
Settings line on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page.)
You can set receive parameters two ways. The first way is to set the
parameters individually: display the RECEIVE menu and set each
parameter manually on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page. The second
way is to couple the receive settings to the transmit settings. To do
this, use the Tx/Rx Settings line on the TRANSMIT SETTINGS
page. (The Tx/Rx Settings line appears on both the TRANSMIT
SETTINGS page and the RECEIVE SETTINGS page. To couple
transmit settings to the receive settings, you would use the Tx/Rx
Settings line on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page.)
To couple the receive settings to the transmit settings:
To couple the receive settings to the transmit settings:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
As soon as you select Coupled, the red error light turns off and the
icon in the status area changes to indicate the Tx/Rx Settings are
2–30
Select Menu
Page
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
As soon as you select Coupled, the red error light turns off and the
icon in the status area changes to indicate the Tx/Rx Settings are
2–30
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Tutorial
Tutorial
coupled. However, note that the yellow history light remains on as an
indication that an error has occurred.
coupled. However, note that the yellow history light remains on as an
indication that an error has occurred.
Press CLEAR HISTORY to clear the error history light.
Press CLEAR HISTORY to clear the error history light.
When the Tx/Rx Settings parameter is set to Coupled, all parameter
settings on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page transfer to the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page. Thereafter, any change to either page affects
both pages as long as Tx/Rx Settings is set to Coupled.
When the Tx/Rx Settings parameter is set to Coupled, all parameter
settings on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page transfer to the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page. Thereafter, any change to either page affects
both pages as long as Tx/Rx Settings is set to Coupled.
Setting the Test Time
Setting the Test Time
Before beginning the BER test, you must specify the duration of the
test.
Before beginning the BER test, you must specify the duration of the
test.
To set the duration of the test:
To set the duration of the test:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
(see Figure 2–22)
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Test Duration
15 min
Select Menu
Page
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
(see Figure 2–22)
Figure 2–22: The TEST CONTROL Page of the UTILITY Menu
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Press Menu
Button
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Test Duration
15 min
Figure 2–22: The TEST CONTROL Page of the UTILITY Menu
2–31
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–31
Tutorial
Tutorial
Where Test Results Are Displayed
Where Test Results Are Displayed
2–32
Once you have set the transmit and receive parameters and the test
time, you can begin the test. However, before starting the test, look
at the RESULTS menu where the results of the test appear.
Once you have set the transmit and receive parameters and the test
time, you can begin the test. However, before starting the test, look
at the RESULTS menu where the results of the test appear.
To display the RESULTS menu:
To display the RESULTS menu:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
none
none
none
RESULTS
none
none
none
The TEST SUMMARY page contains a summary of the current or
most recent test (see Figure 2–23). Just below the menu name is
information about the current or most recent test. If the test detected
no alarms or errors, the CTS 710 displays the message No Alarms
No Errors.
The TEST SUMMARY page contains a summary of the current or
most recent test (see Figure 2–23). Just below the menu name is
information about the current or most recent test. If the test detected
no alarms or errors, the CTS 710 displays the message No Alarms
No Errors.
Figure 2–23: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS Menu
Figure 2–23: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS Menu
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–32
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Tutorial
Tutorial
The RESULTS menu contains four pages on which results are
displayed: TEST SUMMARY, MAIN RESULTS, ERROR
ANALYSIS, and HISTORY GRAPHS. Select MAIN RESULTS to
see one way test results are displayed (see Figure 2–24).
The RESULTS menu contains four pages on which results are
displayed: TEST SUMMARY, MAIN RESULTS, ERROR
ANALYSIS, and HISTORY GRAPHS. Select MAIN RESULTS to
see one way test results are displayed (see Figure 2–24).
Figure 2–24: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS Menu
Figure 2–24: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS Menu
The MAIN RESULTS page contains a listing of the different errors
that can occur. Since you have not started your test yet, the values
are those of the last test run. To continue with the test setup, select
TEST SUMMARY.
The MAIN RESULTS page contains a listing of the different errors
that can occur. Since you have not started your test yet, the values
are those of the last test run. To continue with the test setup, select
TEST SUMMARY.
Begin the Test
Begin the Test
Note at the top of the display the message Measurements Stopped.
When you start the test, this message will change. To start the test,
press the front-panel START/STOP button.
Note at the top of the display the message Measurements Stopped.
When you start the test, this message will change. To start the test,
press the front-panel START/STOP button.
Once a test starts, the display changes in two ways. First, the
message Running appears at the top of the display (see Figure 2–25).
This message line is always visible so you know that a test is
running, even if a page is displayed that doesn’t contain any
information about tests. Second, the test status indicator appears.
Once a test starts, the display changes in two ways. First, the
message Running appears at the top of the display (see Figure 2–25).
This message line is always visible so you know that a test is
running, even if a page is displayed that doesn’t contain any
information about tests. Second, the test status indicator appears.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–33
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–33
Tutorial
Tutorial
There are two elements to the test status indicator. The text above the
bar graph indicates how long the test has been running. The text lists
the days, hours, minutes, and seconds the test has been running. The
bar graph indicates what percentage of the test is complete (except
when the test duration is set to continuous).
There are two elements to the test status indicator. The text above the
bar graph indicates how long the test has been running. The text lists
the days, hours, minutes, and seconds the test has been running. The
bar graph indicates what percentage of the test is complete (except
when the test duration is set to continuous).
Figure 2–25: The Message Line and Test Status Indicator
Figure 2–25: The Message Line and Test Status Indicator
Inserting Errors
Inserting Errors
Now that the test is running, you will insert some errors and see how
the CTS 710 responds. To set the error insertion parameters, first
display the ERRORS & ALARMS page as follows:
2–34
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
none
ALARMS
(see Figure 2–26)
Highlight
Parameter
Now that the test is running, you will insert some errors and see how
the CTS 710 responds. To set the error insertion parameters, first
display the ERRORS & ALARMS page as follows:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
none
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
none
ALARMS
(see Figure 2–26)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–34
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
none
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Tutorial
Tutorial
Figure 2–26: The ERRORS & ALARMS Page of the TRANSMIT Menu
Figure 2–26: The ERRORS & ALARMS Page of the TRANSMIT Menu
There are two ways to insert errors into the transmitted signal. You
can insert errors one at a time or you can set a rate at which the
CTS 710 inserts errors automatically. Before inserting errors, you
must specify the type of error to be inserted. You specify the type of
error to be inserted with the Error type set to parameter.
There are two ways to insert errors into the transmitted signal. You
can insert errors one at a time or you can set a rate at which the
CTS 710 inserts errors automatically. Before inserting errors, you
must specify the type of error to be inserted. You specify the type of
error to be inserted with the Error type set to parameter.
To set the type of error to insert:
To set the type of error to insert:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Error type set to
Path B3 BIP
The rate at which errors are inserted is specified on the Error rate set
to line. An error rate of None specifies that no errors are inserted
unless the INSERT ERROR button is pressed. Any error rate other
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–35
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Error type set to
Path B3 BIP
The rate at which errors are inserted is specified on the Error rate set
to line. An error rate of None specifies that no errors are inserted
unless the INSERT ERROR button is pressed. Any error rate other
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–35
Tutorial
Tutorial
than None results in a continuous stream of errors being inserted into
the transmitted signal.
than None results in a continuous stream of errors being inserted into
the transmitted signal.
To insert a single error, press INSERT ERROR.
To insert a single error, press INSERT ERROR.
When you press the INSERT ERROR button the red ERROR light
flashes.
When you press the INSERT ERROR button the red ERROR light
flashes.
To insert a continuous stream of errors:
To insert a continuous stream of errors:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Error rate set to
1.0E-5
Press Menu
Button
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Error rate set to
1.0E-5
Note that the red ERROR light now stays on all the time; errors are
being detected continually.
Note that the red ERROR light now stays on all the time; errors are
being detected continually.
To turn off the automatic error insertion:
To turn off the automatic error insertion:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Error Rate set to
None
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Error Rate set to
None
Now that errors are no longer being transmitted, the red ERROR
light has gone out, although the yellow history light is still on. To
clear the error history, press CLEAR HISTORY.
Adjusting Pointers
Now that errors are no longer being transmitted, the red ERROR
light has gone out, although the yellow history light is still on. To
clear the error history, press CLEAR HISTORY.
Adjusting Pointers
The CTS 710 enables you to adjust or move pointers. Note that
pointer movements are not necessarily errors. Pointer parameters are
set on the POINTERS & TIMING page of the TRANSMIT menu.
2–36
Select Menu
Page
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
The CTS 710 enables you to adjust or move pointers. Note that
pointer movements are not necessarily errors. Pointer parameters are
set on the POINTERS & TIMING page of the TRANSMIT menu.
2–36
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Tutorial
To display the POINTERS & TIMING page:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
none
TIMING
(see Figure 2–27)
Tutorial
To display the POINTERS & TIMING page:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
none
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
none
TIMING
(see Figure 2–27)
Select Choice
none
Figure 2–27: The POINTERS & TIMING Page of the TRANSMIT Menu
Figure 2–27: The POINTERS & TIMING Page of the TRANSMIT Menu
Before adjusting a pointer, you must decide what mode of pointer
movement to use. You can change a pointer by adjusting the pointer
directly or by using frequency offset. The default mode is Pointer
Movements, which allows you to adjust pointers directly.
Before adjusting a pointer, you must decide what mode of pointer
movement to use. You can change a pointer by adjusting the pointer
directly or by using frequency offset. The default mode is Pointer
Movements, which allows you to adjust pointers directly.
To specify how the pointer will be adjusted:
To specify how the pointer will be adjusted:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Control
Single
2–37
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Control
Single
2–37
Tutorial
Tutorial
After selecting Single for pointer control, a message displays that
tells you how to adjust the pointer. Pointer movement alternates
between increment and decrement.
After selecting Single for pointer control, a message displays that
tells you how to adjust the pointer. Pointer movement alternates
between increment and decrement.
To adjust a pointer, press the front-panel POINTER ACTION
button.
To adjust a pointer, press the front-panel POINTER ACTION
button.
Each time you press POINTER ACTION, a pointer adjusts and the
POINTER ACTION light turns on. Also, a message appears at the
top of the display that describes the type of pointer movement that
occurs. On this page you can also adjust frequency offset which may
cause a network element to generate pointer movements.
Each time you press POINTER ACTION, a pointer adjusts and the
POINTER ACTION light turns on. Also, a message appears at the
top of the display that describes the type of pointer movement that
occurs. On this page you can also adjust frequency offset which may
cause a network element to generate pointer movements.
To see the pointer value changing:
To see the pointer value changing:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Pointers
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Pointers
Now press POINTER ACTION again.
Now press POINTER ACTION again.
To adjust a pointer using frequency offset:
To adjust a pointer using frequency offset:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer / Timing
Mode
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Frequency Offset
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer / Timing
Mode
Select Choice
Frequency Offset
After selecting Frequency Offset, note that the available parameters
change. When in Frequency Offset mode, the only parameters that
can be set are Offset Mode and Frequency Offset.
After selecting Frequency Offset, note that the available parameters
change. When in Frequency Offset mode, the only parameters that
can be set are Offset Mode and Frequency Offset.
To change the frequency offset of the signal:
To change the frequency offset of the signal:
Press Menu
Button
2–38
Select Choice
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Frequency Offset
Stress +4.6ppm
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Press Menu
Button
2–38
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Frequency Offset
Stress +4.6ppm
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Tutorial
Tutorial
If the preset choices do not match what you need, use USER
DEFINED to define an alternative.
If the preset choices do not match what you need, use USER
DEFINED to define an alternative.
To define a specific frequency offset:
To define a specific frequency offset:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
When you select USER DEFINED, the knob is assigned to adjust the
frequency offset. Two choices are available in this mode: Coarse and
Fine (see Figure 2–28). Coarse adjusts the frequency offset by
10 ppm. Fine adjusts the frequency offset by 0.1 ppm. The larger the
value for frequency offset, the more often the pointer is adjusted.
When you select USER DEFINED, the knob is assigned to adjust the
frequency offset. Two choices are available in this mode: Coarse and
Fine (see Figure 2–28). Coarse adjusts the frequency offset by
10 ppm. Fine adjusts the frequency offset by 0.1 ppm. The larger the
value for frequency offset, the more often the pointer is adjusted.
Figure 2–28: Adjusting Frequency Offset Using the Knob
Figure 2–28: Adjusting Frequency Offset Using the Knob
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–39
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–39
Tutorial
Tutorial
Use the knob to change the value of Frequency Offset; select any
value you wish. When you are finished selecting a frequency offset:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Use the knob to change the value of Frequency Offset; select any
value you wish. When you are finished selecting a frequency offset:
Press Menu
Button
Select Choice
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
DONE
DONE
To turn off frequency offset:
To turn off frequency offset:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Frequency Offset
Default 0ppm
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Frequency Offset
Default 0ppm
Selecting Default 0ppm sets the Frequency Offset back to 0 ppm.
Viewing Transport Overhead
Selecting Default 0ppm sets the Frequency Offset back to 0 ppm.
Viewing Transport Overhead
The CTS 710 allows you to view the transport overhead for the
transmitted or received signal. To view the transport overhead for the
transmitted signal:
The CTS 710 allows you to view the transport overhead for the
transmitted or received signal. To view the transport overhead for the
transmitted signal:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
none
none
TRANSMIT
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
none
none
The first line of text under the menu name describes the signal being
received and the STS under test (see Figure 2–29).
2–40
Select Choice
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
The first line of text under the menu name describes the signal being
received and the STS under test (see Figure 2–29).
2–40
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Tutorial
Tutorial
Figure 2–29: The TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page of the TRANSMIT
Menu
Figure 2–29: The TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page of the TRANSMIT
Menu
The Showing Overhead for parameter identifies which columns of
the transport overhead are displayed. To display the overhead for
other SPEs within the signal, select the appropriate choice.
The Showing Overhead for parameter identifies which columns of
the transport overhead are displayed. To display the overhead for
other SPEs within the signal, select the appropriate choice.
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Showing
Overhead for
Select Choice
Select Menu
Page
STS–1 #1
Highlight
Parameter
Showing
Overhead for
Editing the Transport Overhead
Select Choice
STS–1 #1
Editing the Transport Overhead
Except for certain reserved bytes, you can edit the bytes of the
transport overhead of the transmitted signal. Reserved bytes are
identified by asterisks (*) in the byte content area of the displayed
column.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Press Menu
Button
Except for certain reserved bytes, you can edit the bytes of the
transport overhead of the transmitted signal. Reserved bytes are
identified by asterisks (*) in the byte content area of the displayed
column.
2–41
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–41
Tutorial
Tutorial
To edit a byte of the transport overhead:
Press Menu
Button
2–42
Select Menu
Page
To edit a byte of the transport overhead:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
S1 byte
EDIT BYTE
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
S1 byte
EDIT BYTE
Once you have selected EDIT BYTE, the CTS 710 enters the edit
mode (see Figure 2–30).
Once you have selected EDIT BYTE, the CTS 710 enters the edit
mode (see Figure 2–30).
Figure 2–30: The Display in Edit Mode
Figure 2–30: The Display in Edit Mode
To change the value of any bit within the byte, highlight the bit you
wish to change. To change the value of the highlighted bit, select
either 1 or 0. After you assign a value to the highlighted bit, the
highlight moves to the next bit to be edited.
To change the value of any bit within the byte, highlight the bit you
wish to change. To change the value of the highlighted bit, select
either 1 or 0. After you assign a value to the highlighted bit, the
highlight moves to the next bit to be edited.
Edit the S1 byte to read 10101010.
Edit the S1 byte to read 10101010.
Select DONE when you have finished editing the byte.
Select DONE when you have finished editing the byte.
You can assign preset values to the highlighted byte. For example,
rather than editing each bit of the byte as you just did, you could also
You can assign preset values to the highlighted byte. For example,
rather than editing each bit of the byte as you just did, you could also
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–42
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Tutorial
have selected Set to 10101010. To see that the CTS 710 is now
receiving the new value of the S1 byte:
Tutorial
have selected Set to 10101010. To see that the CTS 710 is now
receiving the new value of the S1 byte:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
none
none
RECEIVE
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
none
none
Verify that the transport overhead for STS–1 #1 is displayed. If it is
not:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Showing
Overhead for
Select Choice
Verify that the transport overhead for STS–1 #1 is displayed. If it is
not:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
STS–1 #1
Highlight
Parameter
Showing
Overhead for
Look at the value of the S1 byte. You will see that it is 10101010, as
previously set.
Viewing Test Results
Select Choice
STS–1 #1
Look at the value of the S1 byte. You will see that it is 10101010, as
previously set.
Viewing Test Results
The test has been running for several minutes and errors have been
transmitted. To see the test results, you must display the RESULTS
menu. To display the RESULTS menu:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
RESULTS
TEST SUMMARY none
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
none
RESULTS
TEST SUMMARY none
The TEST SUMMARY page identifies the most common errors that
the CTS 710 has detected. You will see a line that identifies the
worst error rate detected and may find listings for other types of
errors (see Figure 2–31).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
The test has been running for several minutes and errors have been
transmitted. To see the test results, you must display the RESULTS
menu. To display the RESULTS menu:
2–43
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
none
The TEST SUMMARY page identifies the most common errors that
the CTS 710 has detected. You will see a line that identifies the
worst error rate detected and may find listings for other types of
errors (see Figure 2–31).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–43
Tutorial
Tutorial
Figure 2–31: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS Menu
Figure 2–31: The TEST SUMMARY Page of the RESULTS Menu
The MAIN RESULTS page displays all the errors that have been
detected. It also displays the error ratio and the number of errored
seconds that have been logged (see Figure 2–32).
The MAIN RESULTS page displays all the errors that have been
detected. It also displays the error ratio and the number of errored
seconds that have been logged (see Figure 2–32).
To display the MAIN RESULTS page:
To display the MAIN RESULTS page:
Press Menu
Button
2–44
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
MAIN RESULTS
none
none
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Press Menu
Button
2–44
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
MAIN RESULTS
none
none
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Tutorial
Tutorial
Figure 2–32: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS Menu
Figure 2–32: The MAIN RESULTS Page of the RESULTS Menu
This completes the tutorial. For detailed information on CTS 710
capabilities, refer to Reference, starting on page 3–1.
This completes the tutorial. For detailed information on CTS 710
capabilities, refer to Reference, starting on page 3–1.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–45
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–45
Tutorial
2–46
Tutorial
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
2–46
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Reference
Reference
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
This section gives examples of how to set up and use the
CTS 710 SONET Test Set for several common telecommunication
network applications:
This section gives examples of how to set up and use the
CTS 710 SONET Test Set for several common telecommunication
network applications:
H Network continuity checking
H Network continuity checking
H Transmission signal quality testing
H Transmission signal quality testing
H Fault tolerance testing
H Fault tolerance testing
H Performance monitoring
H Performance monitoring
Setting Up the CTS 710
Setting Up the CTS 710
This section presents setup instructions for the CTS 710 in tables.
Perform the steps reading from left to right in the table (see example
below). The word none in a cell indicates that no action is required.
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Begin here with
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 7
This section presents setup instructions for the CTS 710 in tables.
Perform the steps reading from left to right in the table (see example
below). The word none in a cell indicates that no action is required.
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Begin here with
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 6
Step 5
Step 6
Step 8, CTS 710
Setup is complete
Step 7
Step 8, CTS 710
Setup is complete
Menu buttons are located on the instrument front panel. Select menu
pages with the buttons below the display. Use the knob to highlight a
parameter; then use the buttons at the right to select a choice. Many
setups require several iterations of highlighting parameters and
selecting choices. Some setups may require more than one menu
button or menu page selection as well.
Menu buttons are located on the instrument front panel. Select menu
pages with the buttons below the display. Use the knob to highlight a
parameter; then use the buttons at the right to select a choice. Many
setups require several iterations of highlighting parameters and
selecting choices. Some setups may require more than one menu
button or menu page selection as well.
The first step in each application setup initializes the CTS 710 to a
known state.
The first step in each application setup initializes the CTS 710 to a
known state.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–1
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
Network Continuity Checking
Network Continuity Checking
With the AUTOSCAN feature of the CTS 710, it is easy to make a
quick continuity check. The continuity check verifies that a SONET
network element (NE), or portion of the network, is correctly set up
and provisioned and that the signal passes through intact. In this
example, the CTS 710 transmits an STS-3 signal into an NE. Then
the CTS 710 receives the output from the NE and verifies that all
three SPEs, including their payload patterns, are intact.
With the AUTOSCAN feature of the CTS 710, it is easy to make a
quick continuity check. The continuity check verifies that a SONET
network element (NE), or portion of the network, is correctly set up
and provisioned and that the signal passes through intact. In this
example, the CTS 710 transmits an STS-3 signal into an NE. Then
the CTS 710 receives the output from the NE and verifies that all
three SPEs, including their payload patterns, are intact.
1. Connect the CTS 710 to the NE as shown in Figure 3–1.
1. Connect the CTS 710 to the NE as shown in Figure 3–1.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
All Signals are
STS-3
All Signals are
STS-3
One or More SONET NEs
One or More SONET NEs
Figure 3–1: Setup to Check Network Continuity
3–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Figure 3–1: Setup to Check Network Continuity
3–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-3
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-3
Select Choice
3. Press the AUTOSCAN button. The receiver locks onto the output
from the NE, displays the signal structure, and shows information
about the content of STS #1.
3. Press the AUTOSCAN button. The receiver locks onto the output
from the NE, displays the signal structure, and shows information
about the content of STS #1.
4. To analyze the payload pattern, select Show Payload. The
CTS 710 detects a PRBS of length 223–1.
4. To analyze the payload pattern, select Show Payload. The
CTS 710 detects a PRBS of length 223–1.
5. Check the J1 Path Trace for any message.
5. Check the J1 Path Trace for any message.
6. Check the front-panel status lights to verify that there are no
errors, alarms, or failures.
6. Check the front-panel status lights to verify that there are no
errors, alarms, or failures.
7. Select EXIT to leave the AUTOSCAN dialog box.
7. Select EXIT to leave the AUTOSCAN dialog box.
8. To check STS #2, change the CTS 710 setup to:
8. To check STS #2, change the CTS 710 setup to:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
STS Under Test
2
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
STS Under Test
2
9. Press the AUTOSCAN button.
9. Press the AUTOSCAN button.
10. Use the knob to select STS #2.
10. Use the knob to select STS #2.
11. Repeat steps 4 through 7 of this procedure to verify the integrity
of STS #2.
11. Repeat steps 4 through 7 of this procedure to verify the integrity
of STS #2.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 11 for the remaining STSs in the SONET
signal.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 11 for the remaining STSs in the SONET
signal.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–3
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
Transmission Signal Quality Testing
Transmission Signal Quality Testing
Measuring Bit Error Rate
Measuring Bit Error Rate
The bit error rate (BER) test is one of the best ways to measure the
quality of a SONET transmission link. You can use the CTS 710 to
make a BER test on a two-way link that is connected in a loop-back
configuration. If this is a test you perform often, save it as a pass/fail
test for easy recall.
The bit error rate (BER) test is one of the best ways to measure the
quality of a SONET transmission link. You can use the CTS 710 to
make a BER test on a two-way link that is connected in a loop-back
configuration. If this is a test you perform often, save it as a pass/fail
test for easy recall.
1. Connect the CTS 710 to a network as shown in Figure 3–2.
1. Connect the CTS 710 to a network as shown in Figure 3–2.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
All Signals are
STS-1
All Signals are
STS-1
One or More SONET NEs
NE
Figure 3–2: Setup to Check a Transmission Link
3–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
One or More SONET NEs
NE
Figure 3–2: Setup to Check a Transmission Link
3–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-1
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-1
Mapping
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Equipped)
Mapping
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Equipped)
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
Test Duration
15 Minutes
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
Test Duration
15 Minutes
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Errors
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Errors
3. Press the START/STOP button.
3. Press the START/STOP button.
4. While the test is running, the CTS 710 counts errors and errored
seconds and then calculates the error ratio for each error type.
4. While the test is running, the CTS 710 counts errors and errored
seconds and then calculates the error ratio for each error type.
5. After 15 minutes have elapsed, the test stops automatically and
the measured results are held on the MAIN RESULTS page until
another test is started.
5. After 15 minutes have elapsed, the test stops automatically and
the measured results are held on the MAIN RESULTS page until
another test is started.
6. When the test is complete, you can store the test results to disk or
print out a hardcopy. To save the test results to disk, you must
enter a name for the disk file as follows:
6. When the test is complete, you can store the test results to disk or
print out a hardcopy. To save the test results to disk, you must
enter a name for the disk file as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
SAVE RESULTS
Name
EDIT NAME
RESULTS
SAVE RESULTS
Name
EDIT NAME
7. Enter an eight-character name for the file.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
7. Enter an eight-character name for the file.
3–5
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–5
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
8. If you wish, you can also enter a description of the test results by
highlighting Description and selecting EDIT TEXT.
8. If you wish, you can also enter a description of the test results by
highlighting Description and selecting EDIT TEXT.
9. Save the test results to disk as follows:
9. Save the test results to disk as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Save to Disk
Save Current
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Save to Disk
Save Current
Testing Mapping and Demapping
Testing Mapping and Demapping
To test that a DS1 signal is correctly mapped into a SONET signal,
you would use a Bit Error Rate test. However, testing mapping/demapping requires a different test setup than that described on
page 3–4.
To test that a DS1 signal is correctly mapped into a SONET signal,
you would use a Bit Error Rate test. However, testing mapping/demapping requires a different test setup than that described on
page 3–4.
1. Connect the CTS 710 to an Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM) as
shown in Figure 3–3.
1. Connect the CTS 710 to an Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM) as
shown in Figure 3–3.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
DS1
DS1
STS–1
STS–1
DS1 Add/Drop
Multiplexer
Figure 3–3: Setup to Test Mapping and Demapping
3–6
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
DS1 Add/Drop
Multiplexer
Figure 3–3: Setup to Test Mapping and Demapping
3–6
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
DS1
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
DS1
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Receive Rate
STS-1
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Receive Rate
STS-1
Mapping
VT1.5 Async
Mapping
VT1.5 Async
VT Under Test
Set to match how
the NE is
provisioned
VT Under Test
Set to match how
the NE is
provisioned
Payload
DS1 Unframed
Payload
DS1 Unframed
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
Test Duration
15 Minutes
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
Test Duration
15 Minutes
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Errors
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Errors
3. Press the START/STOP button.
3. Press the START/STOP button.
While the test is running, the CTS 710 counts errors and errored
seconds and then calculates the error ratio for each error type.
While the test is running, the CTS 710 counts errors and errored
seconds and then calculates the error ratio for each error type.
After 15 minutes have elapsed, the test stops automatically and the
measured results are held on the MAIN RESULTS page until another
test is started.
After 15 minutes have elapsed, the test stops automatically and the
measured results are held on the MAIN RESULTS page until another
test is started.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–7
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–7
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
4. When the test is complete, you can store the test results to disk or
print out a hardcopy. To save the test results to disk, you must
enter a name for the disk file as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
SAVE RESULTS
Name
EDIT NAME
RESULTS
SAVE RESULTS
Name
EDIT NAME
5. Enter an eight-character name for the file.
5. Enter an eight-character name for the file.
6. If you wish, you can also enter a description of the test results by
highlighting Description and selecting EDIT TEXT.
6. If you wish, you can also enter a description of the test results by
highlighting Description and selecting EDIT TEXT.
7. Save the test results to disk as follows:
7. Save the test results to disk as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Save to Disk
Save Current
Fault Tolerance Checking
3–8
4. When the test is complete, you can store the test results to disk or
print out a hardcopy. To save the test results to disk, you must
enter a name for the disk file as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Save to Disk
Save Current
Fault Tolerance Checking
Fault tolerance testing (sometimes called stimulus/response testing or
stress testing) is used to ensure that a network responds correctly to
various fault conditions. Though there are many additional fault
conditions you can test with the CTS 710, this section covers three
common examples:
Fault tolerance testing (sometimes called stimulus/response testing or
stress testing) is used to ensure that a network responds correctly to
various fault conditions. Though there are many additional fault
conditions you can test with the CTS 710, this section covers three
common examples:
H Response to errors and alarms
H Response to errors and alarms
H Response to pointer movements
H Response to pointer movements
H Response to line frequency offset
H Response to line frequency offset
Response to Errors and Alarms
Response to Errors and Alarms
This example uses two CTS 710s to simultaneously check the
upstream and downstream responses to an error or alarm condition.
You can use a single CTS 710 to do the same thing by alternately
This example uses two CTS 710s to simultaneously check the
upstream and downstream responses to an error or alarm condition.
You can use a single CTS 710 to do the same thing by alternately
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
connecting the upstream and downstream signals to the RECEIVE
input.
connecting the upstream and downstream signals to the RECEIVE
input.
Table 3–1 shows the responses expected from Line Terminating
Equipment (LTE), such as an STS-3/STS-1 multiplexer, when
presented with three possible error and alarm conditions.
Table 3–1 shows the responses expected from Line Terminating
Equipment (LTE), such as an STS-3/STS-1 multiplexer, when
presented with three possible error and alarm conditions.
Table 3–1: LTE Responses to Errors and Alarms
Table 3–1: LTE Responses to Errors and Alarms
Transmitted Error or
Alarm
Expected Upstream
Response
Expected Downstream Response
Transmitted Error or
Alarm
Expected Upstream
Response
Expected Downstream Response
Section B1 Error
Line FEBE
none
Section B1 Error
Line FEBE
none
LINE AIS
LINE FERF
PATH AIS
LINE AIS
LINE FERF
PATH AIS
PATH FERF
none
PATH FERF
PATH FERF
none
PATH FERF
1. Connect two CTS 710s to an LTE as shown in Figure 3–4.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
1. Connect two CTS 710s to an LTE as shown in Figure 3–4.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
All Signals are
STS-1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
All Signals are
STS-1
Downstream
Downstream
LTE
LTE
Upstream
Upstream
Figure 3–4: Setup to Check Error and Alarm Response
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Figure 3–4: Setup to Check Error and Alarm Response
3–9
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–9
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
2. To check the LTE response to a Section B1 error, set up the
upstream CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
TRANSMIT
RESULTS
3–10
ERRORS &
ALARMS
MAIN RESULTS
2. To check the LTE response to a Section B1 error, set up the
upstream CTS 710 as follows:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
Transmit Rate
STS-1
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-1
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
Error Type
Section B1 BIP
Error Type
Section B1 BIP
Error Rate set to
1.0E–5
Error Rate set to
1.0E–5
none
Errors
none
Errors
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
TRANSMIT
RESULTS
3–10
ERRORS &
ALARMS
MAIN RESULTS
Select Choice
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Basic Test Procedures
3. Set up the downstream CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
RECEIVE
RESULTS
Basic Test Procedures
3. Set up the downstream CTS 710 as follows:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Receive Rate
STS-1
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Receive Rate
STS-1
MAIN RESULTS
none
Errors
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Errors
Select Choice
4. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and
downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are on.
4. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and
downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are on.
5. Verify that Line FEBE errors are counted in the MAIN RESULTS
display of the upstream CTS 710.
5. Verify that Line FEBE errors are counted in the MAIN RESULTS
display of the upstream CTS 710.
6. Verify there are no errors counted in the MAIN RESULTS display
of the downstream CTS 710.
6. Verify there are no errors counted in the MAIN RESULTS display
of the downstream CTS 710.
7. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and
downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are off.
7. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and
downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are off.
8. To check the LTE response to a LINE AIS alarm, change the
upstream CTS 710 as follows:
8. To check the LTE response to a LINE AIS alarm, change the
upstream CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Error Rate set to
None
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Error Rate set to
None
Transmit Alarm
set to
LINE AIS
Transmit Alarm
set to
LINE AIS
none
Errors
none
Errors
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
RESULTS
3–11
MAIN RESULTS
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–11
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
9. Change the downstream CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
none
none
RECEIVE
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
none
none
10. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and
downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are on.
10. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and
downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are on.
11. Verify that LINE FERF alarm seconds are counted in the MAIN
RESULTS display of the upstream CTS 710.
11. Verify that LINE FERF alarm seconds are counted in the MAIN
RESULTS display of the upstream CTS 710.
12. With the downstream CTS 710, verify that the displayed K1 or
K2 bytes are not all zeros.
12. With the downstream CTS 710, verify that the displayed K1 or
K2 bytes are not all zeros.
13. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and
downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are off.
13. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and
downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are off.
14. To check the LTE response to a PATH FERF alarm, change the
upstream CTS 710 as follows:
14. To check the LTE response to a PATH FERF alarm, change the
upstream CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Error Rate set to
None
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Error Rate set to
None
Transmit Alarm
set to
PATH FERF
Transmit Alarm
set to
PATH FERF
none
Alarms
none
Alarms
RESULTS
3–12
9. Change the downstream CTS 710 as follows:
MAIN RESULTS
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
RESULTS
3–12
MAIN RESULTS
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Basic Test Procedures
15. Change the downstream CTS 710 as follows:
Basic Test Procedures
15. Change the downstream CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Alarms
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Alarms
16. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and
downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are on.
16. Press the START/STOP buttons on both the upstream and
downstream CTS 710s so that the START/STOP lights are on.
17. Verify that the PATH FERF light is on, on the downstream
CTS 710.
17. Verify that the PATH FERF light is on, on the downstream
CTS 710.
Response to Pointer Movements
Response to Pointer Movements
Pointers allow the SONET network to multiplex signals from
independent sources, even if the signal clock rates differ slightly
from each other. Within the allowed range, pointer movements
should have no adverse affect on the performance of the network.
Pointers allow the SONET network to multiplex signals from
independent sources, even if the signal clock rates differ slightly
from each other. Within the allowed range, pointer movements
should have no adverse affect on the performance of the network.
This example transmits a signal with frequent pointer movements to
an NE and checks that the downstream signal is error free.
This example transmits a signal with frequent pointer movements to
an NE and checks that the downstream signal is error free.
1. Connect the CTS 710 to an NE as shown in Figure 3–5.
1. Connect the CTS 710 to an NE as shown in Figure 3–5.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–13
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–13
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
All Signals are
STS-3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
NE
All Signals are
STS-3
Figure 3–5: Setup to Check Pointer Movements
3–14
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
NE
Figure 3–5: Setup to Check Pointer Movements
3–14
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Basic Test Procedures
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
Basic Test Procedures
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-3
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-3
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer Control
Continuous
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer Control
Continuous
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Errors
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Errors
3. Press the START/STOP button on the CTS 710 so that the
START/STOP light is on.
3. Press the START/STOP button on the CTS 710 so that the
START/STOP light is on.
4. Verify that there are no errors in the MAIN RESULTS display.
When the front-panel ERROR light is not on, it also indicates
there are no errors in the received signal.
4. Verify that there are no errors in the MAIN RESULTS display.
When the front-panel ERROR light is not on, it also indicates
there are no errors in the received signal.
5. To check for received pointer movements, change the CTS 710
setup as follows:
5. To check for received pointer movements, change the CTS 710
setup as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Pointers
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Pointers
6. Verify that the CTS 710 is counting positive pointer justifications.
Depending on the clock rate of the NE, some negative pointer
justifications are also possible.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–15
6. Verify that the CTS 710 is counting positive pointer justifications.
Depending on the clock rate of the NE, some negative pointer
justifications are also possible.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–15
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
Response to Line Frequency Offset
Response to Line Frequency Offset
Pointers also accommodate differences in line frequency from one
NE to another. In this example, the CTS 710 transmits a signal at an
offset line frequency to an NE and measures the response.
Pointers also accommodate differences in line frequency from one
NE to another. In this example, the CTS 710 transmits a signal at an
offset line frequency to an NE and measures the response.
1. Connect the CTS 710 to an NE as shown in Figure 3–6.
1. Connect the CTS 710 to an NE as shown in Figure 3–6.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
All Signals are
STS-3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
NE
All Signals are
STS-3
Figure 3–6: Setup to Check Line Frequency Offset Response
3–16
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
NE
Figure 3–6: Setup to Check Line Frequency Offset Response
3–16
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Basic Test Procedures
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
TRANSMIT
RESULTS
POINTERS &
TIMING
MAIN RESULTS
Basic Test Procedures
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
Transmit Rate
STS-3
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-3
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
Pointer/Timing
Mode
Frequency Offset
Pointer/Timing
Mode
Frequency Offset
Offset Mode
Line
Offset Mode
Line
Frequency Offset
Stress +4.6 ppm
Frequency Offset
Stress +4.6 ppm
none
Errors
none
Errors
TRANSMIT
RESULTS
POINTERS &
TIMING
MAIN RESULTS
Select Choice
3. Press the START/STOP button on the CTS 710 so that the
START/STOP light is on.
3. Press the START/STOP button on the CTS 710 so that the
START/STOP light is on.
4. Verify that there are no errors in the MAIN RESULTS display.
When the front-panel ERROR light is not on, it also indicates
there are no errors in the received signal.
4. Verify that there are no errors in the MAIN RESULTS display.
When the front-panel ERROR light is not on, it also indicates
there are no errors in the received signal.
5. To check that the NE is generating pointer movements, change
the CTS 710 setup as follows:
5. To check that the NE is generating pointer movements, change
the CTS 710 setup as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Pointers
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Pointers
6. Verify that negative pointer justifications are being counted.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
6. Verify that negative pointer justifications are being counted.
3–17
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–17
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
Performance Monitoring
Performance Monitoring
3–18
When a new line is installed you may want to monitor performance
for a day or so to be sure it is operating correctly. Or, if problems are
suspected on a line, you may want to run a long test to determine the
cause of the problem. In either case, the CTS 710 makes it easy to
monitor an electrical or optical line without the need for splitters.
When a new line is installed you may want to monitor performance
for a day or so to be sure it is operating correctly. Or, if problems are
suspected on a line, you may want to run a long test to determine the
cause of the problem. In either case, the CTS 710 makes it easy to
monitor an electrical or optical line without the need for splitters.
During a test, the CTS 710 simultaneously takes all performance
measurements, analyzes the results according to the T1M1.3
standard, and displays the measurements and analysis in your choice
of three formats:
During a test, the CTS 710 simultaneously takes all performance
measurements, analyzes the results according to the T1M1.3
standard, and displays the measurements and analysis in your choice
of three formats:
H In a brief summary
H In a brief summary
H In detail by type (error, alarm, failure)
H In detail by type (error, alarm, failure)
H In detail by layer (section, line, path)
H In detail by layer (section, line, path)
In this example, the CTS 710 is placed directly in line with a live
optical signal to monitor performance in an unintrusive mode
(Through Mode).
In this example, the CTS 710 is placed directly in line with a live
optical signal to monitor performance in an unintrusive mode
(Through Mode).
1. Connect the CTS 710 in line with an optical signal as shown in
Figure 3–7.
1. Connect the CTS 710 in line with an optical signal as shown in
Figure 3–7.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–18
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
NE
CTS 710 SONET Test Set
All Signals are OC-3
NE
NE
All Signals are OC-3
Figure 3–7: Setup to Monitor Performance
Figure 3–7: Setup to Monitor Performance
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
2. Set up the CTS 710 as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
RECEIVE
NE
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Receive Rate
OC-3
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Receive Rate
OC-3
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Through Mode
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Through Mode
RESULTS
ERROR
ANALYSIS
none
Section Analysis
RESULTS
ERROR
ANALYSIS
none
Section Analysis
Select Choice
3. Press the START/STOP button on the CTS 710 so that the
START/STOP light is on.
3. Press the START/STOP button on the CTS 710 so that the
START/STOP light is on.
4. As the test is running, the analysis of Section errors continually
updates. You can also look at the analysis of Line, Path, or
4. As the test is running, the analysis of Section errors continually
updates. You can also look at the analysis of Line, Path, or
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–19
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–19
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
Payload errors by pressing the buttons corresponding to those
choices.
Payload errors by pressing the buttons corresponding to those
choices.
5. To see network performance data since the start of the test
presented in graphical form, change the CTS 710 setup as
follows:
5. To see network performance data since the start of the test
presented in graphical form, change the CTS 710 setup as
follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
HISTORY
GRAPHS
none
none
RESULTS
HISTORY
GRAPHS
none
none
6. The CTS 710 history graphs can cover a time span up to
72 hours. You can choose history graphs of the measured
performance indicators in the following categories:
3–20
6. The CTS 710 history graphs can cover a time span up to
72 hours. You can choose history graphs of the measured
performance indicators in the following categories:
H Error count (any error you choose)
H Error count (any error you choose)
H Errored seconds (any error you choose)
H Errored seconds (any error you choose)
H Pointer justifications
H Pointer justifications
H Pointer value
H Pointer value
H All failures
H All failures
H All alarms
H All alarms
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–20
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Basic Test Procedures
Basic Test Procedures
7. For example, to change the bottom graph to display the history of
Path B3 Errored Seconds, change the CTS 710 setup as follows:
7. For example, to change the bottom graph to display the history of
Path B3 Errored Seconds, change the CTS 710 setup as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
HISTORY
GRAPHS
none
Change Bottom
RESULTS
HISTORY
GRAPHS
none
Change Bottom
turn the knob to
select the desired
graph
Path B3 Errored
Secs
turn the knob to
select the desired
graph
Path B3 Errored
Secs
Select Graph
Select Graph
8. Turning the knob moves the cursor from one bar to the next. The
specific measurement values at the cursor location are shown in
the display.
8. Turning the knob moves the cursor from one bar to the next. The
specific measurement values at the cursor location are shown in
the display.
9. Once the graph fills the width of the display, you can pan through
the entire test using the knob.
9. Once the graph fills the width of the display, you can pan through
the entire test using the knob.
10. You can compress or expand the time scale with the Zoom Out or
Zoom In action buttons. Press the button next to Zoom Out to
change the time scale to 5 minutes per bar.
10. You can compress or expand the time scale with the Zoom Out or
Zoom In action buttons. Press the button next to Zoom Out to
change the time scale to 5 minutes per bar.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–21
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–21
Basic Test Procedures
3–22
Basic Test Procedures
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–22
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Test Control Parameters
Setting Test Control Parameters
This section describes how to set the duration for a test, the
resolution of the test history, and how to start and stop a test. It also
lists parameters that cannot be adjusted during a test and other
actions that cannot be performed while a test is running.
Setting the Test Time Duration
This section describes how to set the duration for a test, the
resolution of the test history, and how to start and stop a test. It also
lists parameters that cannot be adjusted during a test and other
actions that cannot be performed while a test is running.
Setting the Test Time Duration
Before running a test, you must specify how long the test will run.
The default test duration is continuous, which means a test runs until
you stop it with the START/STOP button.
Before running a test, you must specify how long the test will run.
The default test duration is continuous, which means a test runs until
you stop it with the START/STOP button.
To set the duration of a test:
To set the duration of a test:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
(see Figure 3–8)
Test Duration
5 min
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
(see Figure 3–8)
Test Duration
5 min
15 min
15 min
1 hour
1 hour
Continuous
Continuous
USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
H Select Continuous to set the test to run until the START/STOP
button is pressed. If you select Continuous, the CTS 710
accumulates measurements from the time you start the test until
the time you stop the test.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–23
H Select Continuous to set the test to run until the START/STOP
button is pressed. If you select Continuous, the CTS 710
accumulates measurements from the time you start the test until
the time you stop the test.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–23
Setting Test Control Parameters
3–24
Setting Test Control Parameters
Once the test duration is set, any time a test is started it will run for
the time specified on the Test Duration line.
Once the test duration is set, any time a test is started it will run for
the time specified on the Test Duration line.
NOTE. If an instrument setup or pass/fail test is recalled from memory
or disk, it overwrites the test duration specified on the TEST TIME
page.
NOTE. If an instrument setup or pass/fail test is recalled from memory
or disk, it overwrites the test duration specified on the TEST TIME
page.
Figure 3–8: The Test Control Page
Figure 3–8: The Test Control Page
Setting a Unique Test Time Duration
Setting a Unique Test Time Duration
To set a test duration time other than the three choices presented, use
the USER DEFINED choice.
To set a test duration time other than the three choices presented, use
the USER DEFINED choice.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–24
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Test Control Parameters
Setting Test Control Parameters
To set a unique test duration:
To set a unique test duration:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
none
Select Choice
USER DEFINED
(see Figure 3–9)
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
none
Select Choice
USER DEFINED
(see Figure 3–9)
Day
Day
Hour
Hour
Minute
Minute
Second
Second
H Select Day, Hour, Minute, or Second as appropriate, then use
the knob to set the duration of the selected period. Set each
choice as necessary.
H Select Day, Hour, Minute, or Second as appropriate, then use
the knob to set the duration of the selected period. Set each
choice as necessary.
H Select DONE when finished setting the duration to enter the
specified test duration.
H Select DONE when finished setting the duration to enter the
specified test duration.
Figure 3–9: Setting a USER DEFINED Test Duration
Figure 3–9: Setting a USER DEFINED Test Duration
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–25
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–25
Setting Test Control Parameters
Setting Test Control Parameters
Table 3–2 lists the range limits for the test duration.
Table 3–2 lists the range limits for the test duration.
Table 3–2: Test Duration Limits
Table 3–2: Test Duration Limits
Choice
Range
Increment
Choice
Range
Increment
Day
0 to 99
1
Day
0 to 99
1
Hour
0 to 23
1
Hour
0 to 23
1
Minute
0 to 59
1
Minute
0 to 59
1
Second
0 to 59
1
Second
0 to 59
1
NOTE. Although a test can be set to run up to 99 days, 23 hours, 59
minutes, and 59 seconds, only results from a limited period are saved
in memory. The period of test results saved is determined by the
History Resolution setting.
Setting the History Resolution
NOTE. Although a test can be set to run up to 99 days, 23 hours, 59
minutes, and 59 seconds, only results from a limited period are saved
in memory. The period of test results saved is determined by the
History Resolution setting.
Setting the History Resolution
The history of test results can be recorded at two resolutions, either
1 minute or 15 minutes. At 1-minute resolution, 3 days worth of test
results can be recorded. At 15-minutes resolution, 45 days worth of
test results can be recorded.
3–26
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
The history of test results can be recorded at two resolutions, either
1 minute or 15 minutes. At 1-minute resolution, 3 days worth of test
results can be recorded. At 15-minutes resolution, 45 days worth of
test results can be recorded.
3–26
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Test Control Parameters
To set the history resolution of a test:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
(see Figure 3–8
on page 3–24)
History
Resolution
Setting Test Control Parameters
To set the history resolution of a test:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Normal (1 min)
TEST SETUPS
TEST CONTROL
(see Figure 3–8
on page 3–24)
History
Resolution
Low (15 min)
Select Choice
Normal (1 min)
Low (15 min)
Starting and Stopping a Test
Starting and Stopping a Test
To start or stop a test:
To start or stop a test:
H Press START/STOP.
H Press START/STOP.
When a test starts, the light next to the START/STOP button turns on
and the status line displays the message, Running.
When a test starts, the light next to the START/STOP button turns on
and the status line displays the message, Running.
NOTE. Pressing START/STOP while a test is running stops the test
immediately, even if the test time has not expired.
NOTE. Pressing START/STOP while a test is running stops the test
immediately, even if the test time has not expired.
While a test is running, the status line shows the elapsed time since
the test began. If a limited test duration has been set (any setting
other than Continuous), a bar graph indicates the current percentage
of test completion. Figure 3–10 shows the locations of the elapsed
time indicator and bar graph.
While a test is running, the status line shows the elapsed time since
the test began. If a limited test duration has been set (any setting
other than Continuous), a bar graph indicates the current percentage
of test completion. Figure 3–10 shows the locations of the elapsed
time indicator and bar graph.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–27
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–27
Setting Test Control Parameters
Setting Test Control Parameters
Bar Graph shows
percent of test complete
3–28
Bar Graph shows
percent of test complete
Elapsed Time
since test started
Elapsed Time
since test started
Figure 3–10: Elapsed Time and Bar Graph Indicators
Figure 3–10: Elapsed Time and Bar Graph Indicators
Making Changes While Running a Test
Making Changes While Running a Test
If you change instrument receive settings while a test is running, the
test is restarted. Error counts are cleared and the test begins again
using the new settings. You can change transmitter settings while a
test is running without restarting the test.
If you change instrument receive settings while a test is running, the
test is restarted. Error counts are cleared and the test begins again
using the new settings. You can change transmitter settings while a
test is running without restarting the test.
Actions You Cannot Perform While Running a Test
Actions You Cannot Perform While Running a Test
There are actions you cannot perform while a test is running (see
Table 3–3). You cannot recall instrument settings, pass/fail tests, or
results and you cannot save results while a test is running. If you try
to perform a recall while a test is running, you are warned that a
recall is not allowed while a test is running.
There are actions you cannot perform while a test is running (see
Table 3–3). You cannot recall instrument settings, pass/fail tests, or
results and you cannot save results while a test is running. If you try
to perform a recall while a test is running, you are warned that a
recall is not allowed while a test is running.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–28
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Test Control Parameters
Table 3–3: Actions You Cannot Perform While a Test is Running
Setting Test Control Parameters
Table 3–3: Actions You Cannot Perform While a Test is Running
Menu
Page
Action
Menu
Page
Action
TEST SETUPS
RECALL INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
Recall an instrument setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
Recall an instrument setup
RECALL PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Recall a pass/fail test
RECALL PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Recall a pass/fail test
RECALL RESULTS
Recall previous results
RECALL RESULTS
Recall previous results
SAVE RESULTS
Save current results to
disk
SAVE RESULTS
Save current results to
disk
SELF TEST
Execute self test or diagnostics
UTILITY
SELF TEST
Execute self test or diagnostics
Autoscan the received
signal
AUTOSCAN
RESULTS
UTILITY
AUTOSCAN
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
RESULTS
3–29
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Autoscan the received
signal
3–29
Setting Test Control Parameters
3–30
Setting Test Control Parameters
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–30
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
This section describes how to save instrument setups to disk, recall
instrument setups, create pass/fail tests, and run a pass/fail test.
This section describes how to save instrument setups to disk, recall
instrument setups, create pass/fail tests, and run a pass/fail test.
Instrument setups are files, stored in memory or on disk, that
completely describe how the CTS 710 is set up. You can use this
feature to ensure that every time a test is run, using an instrument
setup, that the CTS 710 is configured the same way, thus ensuring
consistent results. The disk file is an ASCII format file that consists
of SCPI commands. The disk file can be edited with any ASCII file
editor.
Instrument setups are files, stored in memory or on disk, that
completely describe how the CTS 710 is set up. You can use this
feature to ensure that every time a test is run, using an instrument
setup, that the CTS 710 is configured the same way, thus ensuring
consistent results. The disk file is an ASCII format file that consists
of SCPI commands. The disk file can be edited with any ASCII file
editor.
Pass/fail tests are tests that display a message indicating whether the
completed test encountered any of the specified failure conditions.
Up to four failure conditions can be specified in a pass/fail test.
Pass/fail tests can be configured to save test results to disk or to print
out the test results when the test completes.
Pass/fail tests are tests that display a message indicating whether the
completed test encountered any of the specified failure conditions.
Up to four failure conditions can be specified in a pass/fail test.
Pass/fail tests can be configured to save test results to disk or to print
out the test results when the test completes.
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups
Instrument setups are files stored in memory or on disk that define
how the CTS 710 is configured. If you regularly set up the CTS 710
in the same way, you can save the instrument settings in an
instrument setup. Then you can recall the instrument setup whenever
you want the CTS 710 configured a certain way. This capability
saves you time and minimizes the chances of error when setting up
the CTS 710 for standard tasks.
Instrument setups are files stored in memory or on disk that define
how the CTS 710 is configured. If you regularly set up the CTS 710
in the same way, you can save the instrument settings in an
instrument setup. Then you can recall the instrument setup whenever
you want the CTS 710 configured a certain way. This capability
saves you time and minimizes the chances of error when setting up
the CTS 710 for standard tasks.
NOTE. Instrument setups saved to memory are retained when the
instrument is turned off. Instrument setups are retained in memory
even if power is removed from the CTS 710.
NOTE. Instrument setups saved to memory are retained when the
instrument is turned off. Instrument setups are retained in memory
even if power is removed from the CTS 710.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–31
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–31
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
Saving Instrument Setups
Saving Instrument Setups
To save an instrument setup:
To save an instrument setup:
1. Set up the CTS 710 as desired. Set all instrument parameters as
required.
1. Set up the CTS 710 as desired. Set all instrument parameters as
required.
2. To save an instrument setup to disk, it must have a name. Enter a
file name as follows:
2. To save an instrument setup to disk, it must have a name. Enter a
file name as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
SAVE
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
(see Figure 3–11)
Name
SETUP_XX
TEST SETUPS
SAVE
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
(see Figure 3–11)
Name
SETUP_XX
EDIT NAME
3–32
EDIT NAME
H If you wish to label the setup file as SETUP<Number>, you
can save time by selecting SETUP_XX. Once you select
SETUP_XX, select EDIT NAME and edit XX to the desired
number (or letter). Select DONE when you are finished
editing the setup name. The instrument setup name can be up
to eight characters long.
H If you wish to label the setup file as SETUP<Number>, you
can save time by selecting SETUP_XX. Once you select
SETUP_XX, select EDIT NAME and edit XX to the desired
number (or letter). Select DONE when you are finished
editing the setup name. The instrument setup name can be up
to eight characters long.
H Select EDIT NAME to enter a name other than SETUP_XX.
Select DONE when you are finished editing the setup name.
The instrument setup name can be up to eight characters long.
H Select EDIT NAME to enter a name other than SETUP_XX.
Select DONE when you are finished editing the setup name.
The instrument setup name can be up to eight characters long.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–32
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
Figure 3–11: The SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page
Figure 3–11: The SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page
3. Enter a description of the instrument setup as follows:
3. Enter a description of the instrument setup as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Description
EDIT TEXT
H Select EDIT TEXT to edit the description of the instrument
setup. The description can be up to 24 characters long. To
remove an existing description, select Clear or None.
4. Save the instrument setup to memory as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Description
EDIT TEXT
H Select EDIT TEXT to edit the description of the instrument
setup. The description can be up to 24 characters long. To
remove an existing description, select Clear or None.
4. Save the instrument setup to memory as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Save to Memory
Memory n
3–33
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Save to Memory
Memory n
3–33
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
5. Save the instrument setup to disk as follows:
5. Save the instrument setup to disk as follows:
H Insert a disk to store the file on, if one has not already been
inserted.
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Save to Disk
Save File
H Insert a disk to store the file on, if one has not already been
inserted.
Press Menu
Button
The instrument setup is saved to disk with the name specified on
the Name line. Status messages indicate the progress of the file
save. Once the file is written to disk, the CTS 710 reads the disk
directory and updates the file listing shown on the RECALL
INSTRUMENT SETUPS page.
3–34
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Save to Disk
Save File
The instrument setup is saved to disk with the name specified on
the Name line. Status messages indicate the progress of the file
save. Once the file is written to disk, the CTS 710 reads the disk
directory and updates the file listing shown on the RECALL
INSTRUMENT SETUPS page.
Recalling Instrument Setups
Recalling Instrument Setups
To recall an instrument setup from memory:
To recall an instrument setup from memory:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
none
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
(see Figure 3–12)
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Memory
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
none
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
(see Figure 3–12)
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Memory
none
Disk
none
Disk
select setup
Recall Setup
select setup
Recall Setup
H Use the knob to select the desired instrument setup.
H Use the knob to select the desired instrument setup.
H To recall setups from memory rather than disk, select Memory to
highlight the Memory listing (see Figure 3–12).
H To recall setups from memory rather than disk, select Memory to
highlight the Memory listing (see Figure 3–12).
H To recall setups from disk rather than memory, select Disk to
highlight the Disk listing.
H To recall setups from disk rather than memory, select Disk to
highlight the Disk listing.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–34
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
Figure 3–12: The RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page
Figure 3–12: The RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page
The disk file listing displays up to six file names at a time. If
more than six files are on disk, the file listing automatically
scrolls when you turn the knob.
The disk file listing displays up to six file names at a time. If
more than six files are on disk, the file listing automatically
scrolls when you turn the knob.
Recalling the Default Factory Setup
Recalling the Default Factory Setup
To recall the default factory setup (initialize the CTS 710):
To recall the default factory setup (initialize the CTS 710):
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
none
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
(see Figure 3–12)
Highlight
Parameter
0. Default
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Memory
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
none
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
(see Figure 3–12)
Recall Setup
0. Default
Recall the default settings whenever you want to restore the CTS 710
to a known state. For a listing of the factory default settings, see
page C–1.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Highlight
Parameter
3–35
Select Choice
Memory
Recall Setup
Recall the default settings whenever you want to restore the CTS 710
to a known state. For a listing of the factory default settings, see
page C–1.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–35
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
Deleting Instrument Setups from Disk
Deleting Instrument Setups from Disk
You can delete instrument setups from disk using the Delete File
action.
You can delete instrument setups from disk using the Delete File
action.
To delete an instrument setup from disk:
To delete an instrument setup from disk:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
none
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
(see Figure 3–12)
Highlight
Parameter
select setup
3–36
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Disk
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
none
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
(see Figure 3–12)
Delete File
Highlight
Parameter
select setup
Select Choice
Disk
Delete File
H Use the knob to select the file to delete (see Figure 3–13).
H Use the knob to select the file to delete (see Figure 3–13).
Figure 3–13: Selecting a Disk File for Deleting
Figure 3–13: Selecting a Disk File for Deleting
After you select Delete File, status messages appear indicating the
progress of the file deletion. When the file has been deleted, the file
listing updates.
After you select Delete File, status messages appear indicating the
progress of the file deletion. When the file has been deleted, the file
listing updates.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–36
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
Pass/Fail Tests
Pass/Fail Tests
A pass/fail test is an easy way to run a test and get a simple response
stating whether or not the CTS 710 encountered the specified errors
during the test. When a pass/fail test completes, the CTS 710
displays a message stating that either the test passed or failed.
Pass/fail tests are set up in the TEST SETUPS menu on the SAVE
PASS/FAIL TESTS page (see Figure 3–14). A pass/fail test consists
of instrument setup information and the parameters described in
Parameters of a Pass/Fail Test.
A pass/fail test is an easy way to run a test and get a simple response
stating whether or not the CTS 710 encountered the specified errors
during the test. When a pass/fail test completes, the CTS 710
displays a message stating that either the test passed or failed.
Pass/fail tests are set up in the TEST SETUPS menu on the SAVE
PASS/FAIL TESTS page (see Figure 3–14). A pass/fail test consists
of instrument setup information and the parameters described in
Parameters of a Pass/Fail Test.
Figure 3–14: The SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page
Figure 3–14: The SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page
Parameters of a Pass/Fail Test
Parameters of a Pass/Fail Test
A pass/fail test has the following parameters (some parameters are
optional):
A pass/fail test has the following parameters (some parameters are
optional):
H Name. The name of the test, a mandatory parameter. It can be up
to eight-characters long. The name of the test also serves as the
file name for the test when you save it to disk.
H Name. The name of the test, a mandatory parameter. It can be up
to eight-characters long. The name of the test also serves as the
file name for the test when you save it to disk.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–37
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–37
Working with Test Setups
3–38
Working with Test Setups
NOTE. A pass/fail test can only be saved on disk. It cannot be saved
in memory.
NOTE. A pass/fail test can only be saved on disk. It cannot be saved
in memory.
H Description. An optional, 24-character field that describes the
test.
H Description. An optional, 24-character field that describes the
test.
H Operator Start Prompt. An optional, 72-character field that is
displayed at the beginning of the test. You can use the operator
start prompt to provide instruction to the operator prior to the
beginning of the test.
H Operator Start Prompt. An optional, 72-character field that is
displayed at the beginning of the test. You can use the operator
start prompt to provide instruction to the operator prior to the
beginning of the test.
H Test Duration. A required parameter that sets the length of the
test.
H Test Duration. A required parameter that sets the length of the
test.
H Fail If conditions. The specific conditions that define whether a
test has failed.
H Fail If conditions. The specific conditions that define whether a
test has failed.
H Operator End Prompt. An optional, 72-character field that is
displayed at the end of the test. You can use the operator end
prompt to provide instruction to the operator after the test is
completed.
H Operator End Prompt. An optional, 72-character field that is
displayed at the end of the test. You can use the operator end
prompt to provide instruction to the operator after the test is
completed.
H On Test Completion. A required parameter that defines the action
to be taken when a test completes.
H On Test Completion. A required parameter that defines the action
to be taken when a test completes.
Fail If Conditions
Fail If Conditions
A Fail If condition is what determines if a test passes or fails. There
are three elements to a Fail If condition: condition type, specific
condition, and threshold (see Table 3–4).
A Fail If condition is what determines if a test passes or fails. There
are three elements to a Fail If condition: condition type, specific
condition, and threshold (see Table 3–4).
The condition type describes the general condition that indicates a
test has failed. For each condition type (except None), there is list of
specific conditions and thresholds used to determine when a test
fails. None indicates that no condition type has been assigned.
The condition type describes the general condition that indicates a
test has failed. For each condition type (except None), there is list of
specific conditions and thresholds used to determine when a test
fails. None indicates that no condition type has been assigned.
The specific condition describes the type of failure used to determine
when a test fails. The specific conditions that define a failure depend
on the condition type (see Table 3–4).
The specific condition describes the type of failure used to determine
when a test fails. The specific conditions that define a failure depend
on the condition type (see Table 3–4).
The threshold is the level at which a test fails (see Table 3–4). For
example, for the condition types Alarm and Failure, the threshold for
any specific condition is Detected or Not Detected.
The threshold is the level at which a test fails (see Table 3–4). For
example, for the condition types Alarm and Failure, the threshold for
any specific condition is Detected or Not Detected.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–38
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
H Detected. If the specified condition is detected, the test fails.
H Detected. If the specified condition is detected, the test fails.
H Not Detected. If the specified condition is not detected, the test
fails.
H Not Detected. If the specified condition is not detected, the test
fails.
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test
Condition Type
Specific Condition
Threshold
Condition Type
Specific Condition
Threshold
Alarm
Any
Detected/Not Detected
Alarm
Any
Detected/Not Detected
Line AIS
Detected/Not Detected
Line AIS
Detected/Not Detected
Line FERF
Detected/Not Detected
Line FERF
Detected/Not Detected
Path AIS
Detected/Not Detected
Path AIS
Detected/Not Detected
PATH FERF
Detected/Not Detected
PATH FERF
Detected/Not Detected
VT AIS
Detected/Not Detected
VT AIS
Detected/Not Detected
VT FERF
Detected/Not Detected
VT FERF
Detected/Not Detected
DSn AIS
Detected/Not Detected
DSn AIS
Detected/Not Detected
Yellow
Detected/Not Detected
Yellow
Detected/Not Detected
Any
Detected/Not Detected
Any
Detected/Not Detected
LOS
Detected/Not Detected
LOS
Detected/Not Detected
LOF
Detected/Not Detected
LOF
Detected/Not Detected
STS LOP
Detected/Not Detected
STS LOP
Detected/Not Detected
VT LOP
Detected/Not Detected
VT LOP
Detected/Not Detected
VT LOM
Detected/Not Detected
VT LOM
Detected/Not Detected
Pattern Sync
Detected/Not Detected
Pattern Sync
Detected/Not Detected
Any
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
Any
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
Failure
Error Ratio
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Failure
Error Ratio
3–39
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–39
Working with Test Setups
3–40
Working with Test Setups
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)
Condition Type
Condition Type
Specific Condition
Threshold
Specific Condition
Threshold
Section B1
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
Section B1
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
Line B2
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
Line B2
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
Path B3
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
Path B3
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
VT BIP
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
VT BIP
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
VT FEBE
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
VT FEBE
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
Payload BIT
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
Payload BIT
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
DS3 Parity
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
DS3 Parity
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–40
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)
Condition Type
Condition Type
Error Count
Specific Condition
Threshold
Specific Condition
Threshold
DS1 CRC
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
DS1 CRC
>1.0e–9
>1.0e–8
>1.0e–7
>1.0e–6
USER
Any
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
Any
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
Section B1
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
Section B1
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
Line B2
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
Line B2
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
Path B3
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
Path B3
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
VT BIP
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
VT BIP
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
VT FEBE
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
VT FEBE
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Error Count
3–41
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–41
Working with Test Setups
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)
Condition Type
Condition Type
Errored Seconds
3–42
Working with Test Setups
Specific Condition
Threshold
Specific Condition
Threshold
Payload BIT
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
Payload BIT
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
DS3 Parity
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
DS3 Parity
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
DS1 CRC
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
DS1 CRC
>0
>10
>100
>1000
USER (0 – 10000)
Any
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
Any
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
Section B1
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
Section B1
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
Line B2
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
Line B2
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
Path B3
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
Path B3
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Errored Seconds
3–42
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)
Condition Type
Condition Type
Pointer
Specific Condition
Threshold
Specific Condition
Threshold
VT BIP
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
VT BIP
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
VT FEBE
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
VT FEBE
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
Payload BIT
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
Payload BIT
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
DS3 Parity
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
DS3 Parity
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
DS1 CRC
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
DS1 CRC
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
STS NDFs
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
STS NDFs
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
STS Ptr. Justifys
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
STS Ptr. Justifys
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Pointer
3–43
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–43
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)
Table 3–4: Fail If Conditions of a Pass/Fail Test (Cont.)
Condition Type
Condition Type
Specific Condition
Threshold
Specific Condition
Threshold
VT NDF’s
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
VT NDF’s
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
VT Ptr. Justifys
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
VT Ptr. Justifys
>0
>1
>10
>60
USER (0–10000)
Creating a Pass/Fail Test
Creating a Pass/Fail Test
To create a pass/fail test:
To create a pass/fail test:
1. Set up the CTS 710 as required to perform the desired test.
1. Set up the CTS 710 as required to perform the desired test.
Set all transmit and receive parameters as necessary. When the
pass/fail test is recalled, the CTS 710 is set up exactly as it was
when the pass/fail test was saved.
Set all transmit and receive parameters as necessary. When the
pass/fail test is recalled, the CTS 710 is set up exactly as it was
when the pass/fail test was saved.
2. Set the name of the pass/fail test as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL Name
TESTS
(see Figure 3–14)
2. Set the name of the pass/fail test as follows:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
TEST_XX
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL Name
TESTS
(see Figure 3–14)
Select Choice
TEST_XX
EDIT NAME
EDIT NAME
Clear
Clear
H If you wish to name the test file as TEST<Number>, you can
save time by selecting TEST_XX. Once you select
TEST_XX, select EDIT NAME and edit XX to the desired
3–44
Highlight
Parameter
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H If you wish to name the test file as TEST<Number>, you can
save time by selecting TEST_XX. Once you select
TEST_XX, select EDIT NAME and edit XX to the desired
3–44
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
number (or letter). Select DONE when you are finished
editing the setup name.
number (or letter). Select DONE when you are finished
editing the setup name.
H Select EDIT NAME to enter a name other than TEST_XX
for the pass/fail test. Select DONE when you are finished
editing the test name.
H Select EDIT NAME to enter a name other than TEST_XX
for the pass/fail test. Select DONE when you are finished
editing the test name.
H Select Clear to remove an existing name.
H Select Clear to remove an existing name.
3. Enter a description of the pass/fail test as follows:
3. Enter a description of the pass/fail test as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Description
EDIT TEXT
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Description
EDIT TEXT
None
None
Clear
Clear
H Select EDIT TEXT to enter a description of the test, up to
24 characters long. Select DONE when you are finished
editing the description.
H Select EDIT TEXT to enter a description of the test, up to
24 characters long. Select DONE when you are finished
editing the description.
H Select None if you do not want to use a description.
H Select None if you do not want to use a description.
H Select Clear to remove an existing description.
H Select Clear to remove an existing description.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–45
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–45
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
4. Enter an operator start prompt as follows:
3–46
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Operator Start
Prompt
4. Enter an operator start prompt as follows:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Default
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Operator Start
Prompt
Select Choice
Default
Clear
Clear
Preview
Preview
EDIT TEXT
EDIT TEXT
H Select Default to enter the default prompt TEST IS ABOUT
TO START!.
H Select Default to enter the default prompt TEST IS ABOUT
TO START!.
H Select Clear to remove any previously entered prompt text.
H Select Clear to remove any previously entered prompt text.
H Select Preview to see how the prompt text you have entered
appears in the pass/fail test dialog box. Select EXIT to
remove the preview.
H Select Preview to see how the prompt text you have entered
appears in the pass/fail test dialog box. Select EXIT to
remove the preview.
H Select EDIT TEXT to enter an operator start prompt, up to
72 characters long. The prompt appears on the display as
three lines of 24 characters. Select DONE when you are
finished editing the prompt.
H Select EDIT TEXT to enter an operator start prompt, up to
72 characters long. The prompt appears on the display as
three lines of 24 characters. Select DONE when you are
finished editing the prompt.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–46
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
5. Set the test duration as follows:
Working with Test Setups
5. Set the test duration as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Test Duration
5 min
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Test Duration
5 min
15 min
15 min
1 hour
1 hour
Continuous
Continuous
USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
H Select USER DEFINED to enter a time other than one of the
preset choices. The maximum duration is 99 days, 23 hours,
59 minutes, 59 seconds.
H Select USER DEFINED to enter a time other than one of the
preset choices. The maximum duration is 99 days, 23 hours,
59 minutes, 59 seconds.
6. Highlight the first entry in the first column of the Fail If table
(see Figure 3–15). Select one of the preset choices to specify a
condition type.
6. Highlight the first entry in the first column of the Fail If table
(see Figure 3–15). Select one of the preset choices to specify a
condition type.
Figure 3–15: Entering Fail If Conditions
Figure 3–15: Entering Fail If Conditions
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–47
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–47
Working with Test Setups
3–48
Working with Test Setups
7. Highlight the first entry in the second column (see Figure 3–15).
If you wish to specify a specific condition, select one of the
preset choices.
7. Highlight the first entry in the second column (see Figure 3–15).
If you wish to specify a specific condition, select one of the
preset choices.
8. Highlight the first entry in the third column (see Figure 3–15).
Select one of the preset choices to set the threshold. Select USER
to specify a threshold other than one of the preset choices. (USER
is not available for Alarm or Failure condition types.)
8. Highlight the first entry in the third column (see Figure 3–15).
Select one of the preset choices to set the threshold. Select USER
to specify a threshold other than one of the preset choices. (USER
is not available for Alarm or Failure condition types.)
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 as necessary to specify additional Fail If
conditions. A maximum of four Fail If conditions can be
specified.
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 as necessary to specify additional Fail If
conditions. A maximum of four Fail If conditions can be
specified.
10. Enter an operator end prompt as follows:
10. Enter an operator end prompt as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Operator End
Prompt
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Default
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Operator End
Prompt
Select Choice
Default
Clear
Clear
Preview
Preview
EDIT TEXT
EDIT TEXT
H Select Default to enter the default prompt TEST HAS
ENDED!.
H Select Default to enter the default prompt TEST HAS
ENDED!.
H Select Clear to remove any previously entered prompt text.
H Select Clear to remove any previously entered prompt text.
H Select Preview to see how the prompt text you have entered
appears in the pass/fail test dialog box. Select Exit to remove
the preview.
H Select Preview to see how the prompt text you have entered
appears in the pass/fail test dialog box. Select Exit to remove
the preview.
H Select EDIT TEXT to enter an operator end prompt, up to 72
characters long. The prompt appears on the display as three
lines of 24 characters. Select DONE when you are finished
editing the prompt.
H Select EDIT TEXT to enter an operator end prompt, up to 72
characters long. The prompt appears on the display as three
lines of 24 characters. Select DONE when you are finished
editing the prompt.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–48
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
11. Specify the action to be taken when the test completes as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
On Test
Completion
Working with Test Setups
11. Specify the action to be taken when the test completes as follows:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Do Nothing
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
On Test
Completion
Select Choice
Do Nothing
Print Summary
Print Summary
Save to Disk
Save to Disk
H Select Do Nothing if you do not want any action taken at test
completion.
H Select Do Nothing if you do not want any action taken at test
completion.
H Select Print Summary to print the test results when the test
completes.
H Select Print Summary to print the test results when the test
completes.
H Select Save to Disk to create a disk file of the test results
when the test completes.
H Select Save to Disk to create a disk file of the test results
when the test completes.
12. Save the pass/fail test to disk as follows:
12. Save the pass/fail test to disk as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Save to Disk
Save File
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Save to Disk
Save File
Running a Pass/Fail Test
Running a Pass/Fail Test
To run a pass/fail test:
To run a pass/fail test:
1. Insert the disk containing the pass/fail test into the disk drive.
1. Insert the disk containing the pass/fail test into the disk drive.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–49
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–49
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
2. Select the pass/fail test to run as follows:
2. Select the pass/fail test to run as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
PASS/FAIL
TESTS
none
Disk
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
PASS/FAIL
TESTS
none
Disk
select disk file
name
Recall
select disk file
name
Recall
NOTE. The Disk action displays only files with the extension .TST.
3–50
NOTE. The Disk action displays only files with the extension .TST.
Selecting Recall begins the recall of the pass/fail test.
Selecting Recall begins the recall of the pass/fail test.
As the file recall begins, the TEST BEGIN dialog box appears
(see Figure 3–16). The first line of text in the dialog box is the
file name. The second line of text is the test description. The third
line informs the user that the file was recalled successfully. The
fourth line states how to begin the test. The fifth line is the
operator start prompt.
As the file recall begins, the TEST BEGIN dialog box appears
(see Figure 3–16). The first line of text in the dialog box is the
file name. The second line of text is the test description. The third
line informs the user that the file was recalled successfully. The
fourth line states how to begin the test. The fifth line is the
operator start prompt.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–50
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
Figure 3–16: The TEST BEGIN Dialog Box
Figure 3–16: The TEST BEGIN Dialog Box
3. To run the pass/fail test immediately, press START/STOP.
3. To run the pass/fail test immediately, press START/STOP.
The pass/fail test will begin. When the test is completed, the
CTS 710 displays either TEST PASSED! or TEST FAILED!.
The pass/fail test will begin. When the test is completed, the
CTS 710 displays either TEST PASSED! or TEST FAILED!.
If you decide not to run the test, select EXIT from the dialog
box.
If you decide not to run the test, select EXIT from the dialog
box.
4. Select EXIT to remove the dialog box after the test completes.
4. Select EXIT to remove the dialog box after the test completes.
5. Press RESULTS to see the detailed results of the test.
5. Press RESULTS to see the detailed results of the test.
A test does not have to be run when it is recalled from disk. After the
TEST BEGIN dialog box appears, you can exit the dialog box by
selecting EXIT. You can then select the SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS
page and edit the parameters of the pass/fail test.
A test does not have to be run when it is recalled from disk. After the
TEST BEGIN dialog box appears, you can exit the dialog box by
selecting EXIT. You can then select the SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS
page and edit the parameters of the pass/fail test.
Changing an Existing Pass/Fail Test
Changing an Existing Pass/Fail Test
You do not have to create a pass/fail test from the beginning every
time. You can recall an existing test, edit the parameters of the test,
and then save it under a new name.
You do not have to create a pass/fail test from the beginning every
time. You can recall an existing test, edit the parameters of the test,
and then save it under a new name.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–51
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–51
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
To change an existing pass/fail test:
To change an existing pass/fail test:
1. Insert the disk containing the pass/fail test into the disk drive.
1. Insert the disk containing the pass/fail test into the disk drive.
2. Select the pass/fail test to edit as follows:
2. Select the pass/fail test to edit as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
PASS/FAIL
TESTS
none
Disk
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
PASS/FAIL
TESTS
none
Disk
select disk file
name
Recall
select disk file
name
Recall
NOTE. The Disk action displays only files with the extension .TST.
NOTE. The Disk action displays only files with the extension .TST.
As the file recall begins, the TEST BEGIN dialog box appears
(see Figure 3–16).
As the file recall begins, the TEST BEGIN dialog box appears
(see Figure 3–16).
3. Select EXIT to remove the dialog box.
3. Select EXIT to remove the dialog box.
4. Select SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS.
4. Select SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS.
5. Edit the parameters of the pass/fail test as necessary.
5. Edit the parameters of the pass/fail test as necessary.
6. If you want to save the edited pass/fail test under a different
name, change the Name of the test. You do not have to change
the name of the test file to save it to disk.
6. If you want to save the edited pass/fail test under a different
name, change the Name of the test. You do not have to change
the name of the test file to save it to disk.
7. Save the pass/fail test to disk as follows:
7. Save the pass/fail test to disk as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Save to Disk
Save File
TEST SETUPS
SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS
Save to Disk
Save File
H If you select Save File without changing the name of the file,
a Disk dialog box appears asking if you want to overwrite the
3–52
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H If you select Save File without changing the name of the file,
a Disk dialog box appears asking if you want to overwrite the
3–52
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Working with Test Setups
Working with Test Setups
existing file. To overwrite the file, select Overwrite. If you
do not want to overwrite the file, select Cancel.
existing file. To overwrite the file, select Overwrite. If you
do not want to overwrite the file, select Cancel.
Deleting a Pass/Fail Test from Disk
Deleting a Pass/Fail Test from Disk
Delete a pass/fail test from disk as follows:
Delete a pass/fail test from disk as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
PASS/FAIL
TESTS
select file name
Delete File
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
PASS/FAIL
TESTS
select file name
Delete File
H If necessary, select Disk from the list of actions to display the
names of the files on disk (see Figure 3–17).
H If necessary, select Disk from the list of actions to display the
names of the files on disk (see Figure 3–17).
Figure 3–17: Selecting a Pass/Fail Test for Deleting
Figure 3–17: Selecting a Pass/Fail Test for Deleting
After you select Delete, status messages appear indicating the
progress of the file deletion. The file list updates after the file is
deleted.
After you select Delete, status messages appear indicating the
progress of the file deletion. The file list updates after the file is
deleted.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–53
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–53
Working with Test Setups
3–54
Working with Test Setups
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–54
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Checking Signal Status
Checking Signal Status
This section describes how to use the CTS 710 to check signal status.
The CTS 710 continuously monitors the input signal for alarms,
errors, and failures and provides indicators for the current signal
status as well as indicating the history of the signal status.
Viewing Signal Structure
This section describes how to use the CTS 710 to check signal status.
The CTS 710 continuously monitors the input signal for alarms,
errors, and failures and provides indicators for the current signal
status as well as indicating the history of the signal status.
Viewing Signal Structure
The quickest way to view the structure of a signal is to use
AUTOSCAN. AUTOSCAN analyzes the input signal and once a
signal is found, the CTS 710 synchronizes with the signal and
displays the structure of the signal.
The quickest way to view the structure of a signal is to use
AUTOSCAN. AUTOSCAN analyzes the input signal and once a
signal is found, the CTS 710 synchronizes with the signal and
displays the structure of the signal.
To view signal structure using AUTOSCAN:
To view signal structure using AUTOSCAN:
1. Connect a signal to the receiver input.
1. Connect a signal to the receiver input.
2. If a test is running, stop the test by pressing START/STOP.
2. If a test is running, stop the test by pressing START/STOP.
3. Press the AUTOSCAN front-panel button.
3. Press the AUTOSCAN front-panel button.
While AUTOSCAN is running, several messages appear in the
display. While the CTS 710 searches for a signal it displays the
message: Please wait, autosetting to received signal. The CTS 710
scans all line rates and all receiver input connectors until it finds a
framed signal. When the CTS 710 finds a framed signal, the
instrument displays the message: Autosetting to received signal. If a
signal is not found, a message to that effect is displayed.
While AUTOSCAN is running, several messages appear in the
display. While the CTS 710 searches for a signal it displays the
message: Please wait, autosetting to received signal. The CTS 710
scans all line rates and all receiver input connectors until it finds a
framed signal. When the CTS 710 finds a framed signal, the
instrument displays the message: Autosetting to received signal. If a
signal is not found, a message to that effect is displayed.
When the AUTOSCAN finishes, the CTS 710 displays the signal
structure in graphical form (see Figure 3–18). Use the knob to scroll
through the different active channels.
When the AUTOSCAN finishes, the CTS 710 displays the signal
structure in graphical form (see Figure 3–18). Use the knob to scroll
through the different active channels.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–55
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–55
Checking Signal Status
Checking Signal Status
3–56
Figure 3–18: The AUTOSCAN Dialog Box Showing Signal Structure
Figure 3–18: The AUTOSCAN Dialog Box Showing Signal Structure
Viewing the Payload (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
Viewing the Payload (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
If the received signal uses tributary mapping, then Autoscan can
display the different tributaries within the STS.
If the received signal uses tributary mapping, then Autoscan can
display the different tributaries within the STS.
To display the tributary payload, highlight an STS where VT 1.5 is
shown as the mapping and select the Show Payload choice (see
Figure 3–19).
To display the tributary payload, highlight an STS where VT 1.5 is
shown as the mapping and select the Show Payload choice (see
Figure 3–19).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–56
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Checking Signal Status
Checking Signal Status
Figure 3–19: Viewing Tributary Signal Structure
Figure 3–19: Viewing Tributary Signal Structure
Determining the Payload Pattern and Framing (Add/Drop/Test Option
Only)
Determining the Payload Pattern and Framing (Add/Drop/Test Option
Only)
To search for a pattern in the data of the received signal or determine
the framing, select Analyze VT. After you select Analyze VT, the
CTS 710 scans the selected VT in the received signal to see if it
there is a pattern within the data and if the signal is framed. If a
pattern is found, it is displayed below the payload map on the Pattern
line (for example, PRBS 2^23–1). If the CTS 710 is unable to find a
pattern within the signal, it displays Unknown on the Pattern line.
The CTS 710 will display Unframed or Framed on the Framing line.
To search for a pattern in the data of the received signal or determine
the framing, select Analyze VT. After you select Analyze VT, the
CTS 710 scans the selected VT in the received signal to see if it
there is a pattern within the data and if the signal is framed. If a
pattern is found, it is displayed below the payload map on the Pattern
line (for example, PRBS 2^23–1). If the CTS 710 is unable to find a
pattern within the signal, it displays Unknown on the Pattern line.
The CTS 710 will display Unframed or Framed on the Framing line.
To scan every VT in the received signal, select Scan All VTs. As the
CTS 710 scans the signal, it will indicate for each VT whether it has
detected an alarm, whther the VT is equipped, and whether a test
pattern was found in the VT. The key which describes each of the
indicators is located in the lower, right corner of the AutoScan dialog
box (see Figures 3–19 and 3–20).
To scan every VT in the received signal, select Scan All VTs. As the
CTS 710 scans the signal, it will indicate for each VT whether it has
detected an alarm, whther the VT is equipped, and whether a test
pattern was found in the VT. The key which describes each of the
indicators is located in the lower, right corner of the AutoScan dialog
box (see Figures 3–19 and 3–20).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–57
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–57
Checking Signal Status
Checking Signal Status
This shows that an alarm was
detected in the VT.
This shows that an alarm was
detected in the VT.
This means the VT is equipped. That is,
the signal label (in the V5 byte) is not zero,
indicating that the VT is probably carrying
traffic.
This means the VT is equipped. That is,
the signal label (in the V5 byte) is not zero,
indicating that the VT is probably carrying
traffic.
This means the transmitted test
pattern was found in the VT.
This means the transmitted test
pattern was found in the VT.
Figure 3–20: The Meaning of the Icons in the Autoscan Dialog Box
Figure 3–20: The Meaning of the Icons in the Autoscan Dialog Box
You exit the AUTOSCAN dialog box by selecting EXIT. When you
exit the AUTOSCAN dialog box, the receiver settings are set to
match the active channel most recently selected.
You exit the AUTOSCAN dialog box by selecting EXIT. When you
exit the AUTOSCAN dialog box, the receiver settings are set to
match the active channel most recently selected.
Printing the AutoScan Dialog Box
Printing the AutoScan Dialog Box
You can print the AutoScan dialog box by selecting Print. This
prints the displayed dialog box using the settings on the PRINTER
SETUP page of the UTILITY menu. The printout takes about two
minutes.
You can print the AutoScan dialog box by selecting Print. This
prints the displayed dialog box using the settings on the PRINTER
SETUP page of the UTILITY menu. The printout takes about two
minutes.
Viewing the Signal State
Viewing the Signal State
Three colors are used to indicate signal state: green, red, and yellow
(see Figure 3–21).
3–58
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Three colors are used to indicate signal state: green, red, and yellow
(see Figure 3–21).
3–58
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Checking Signal Status
Yellow history lights
indicate an event has
occurred
Red lights indicate an
event is occurring now
Green lights
indicate the
condition is true
Checking Signal Status
Yellow history lights
indicate an event has
occurred
Clear History
button clears
history of events
Red lights indicate an
event is occurring now
Green lights
indicate the
condition is true
Clear History
button clears
history of events
Figure 3–21: Front-Panel Status Lights (with Add/Drop/Test Option
Installed)
Figure 3–21: Front-Panel Status Lights (with Add/Drop/Test Option
Installed)
H Green lights indicate the condition is true. See Table 3–5.
H Green lights indicate the condition is true. See Table 3–5.
Table 3–5: Green Status Lights
Table 3–5: Green Status Lights
Label on Light
Meaning if Light is On
Label on Light
Meaning if Light is On
SIGNAL PRESENT
A signal at the line rate specified by the Receive Rate
parameter is present.
SIGNAL PRESENT
A signal at the line rate specified by the Receive Rate
parameter is present.
PATTERN LOCK
Lock to a PRBS or fixed pattern has been achieved.
PATTERN LOCK
Lock to a PRBS or fixed pattern has been achieved.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–59
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–59
Checking Signal Status
3–60
Checking Signal Status
H Red lights indicate the associated condition is valid. For example,
if the red light next to LOS is on, no signal is being received. See
Table 3–6.
H Red lights indicate the associated condition is valid. For example,
if the red light next to LOS is on, no signal is being received. See
Table 3–6.
H A yellow light is associated with each red light. The yellow lights
are turned on when an error, alarm, or failure condition first
occurs and then stay on to indicate the history even if the
condition goes away (see Table 3–6). Press the CLEAR
HISTORY button to clear the status history.
H A yellow light is associated with each red light. The yellow lights
are turned on when an error, alarm, or failure condition first
occurs and then stay on to indicate the history even if the
condition goes away (see Table 3–6). Press the CLEAR
HISTORY button to clear the status history.
Table 3–6: Red and Yellow Status Lights
Table 3–6: Red and Yellow Status Lights
Label on Light
Meaning if Light is On
Label on Light
Meaning if Light is On
LOS
Loss of received signal.
LOS
Loss of received signal.
LOF
Loss of frame of received signal.
LOF
Loss of frame of received signal.
LOP
Loss of STS or VT pointer for selected channel in
received signal.
LOP
Loss of STS or VT pointer for selected channel in
received signal.
LINE AIS
A line alarm indication signal is being received.
LINE AIS
A line alarm indication signal is being received.
LINE FERF
A line far end receive failure code is being received.
LINE FERF
A line far end receive failure code is being received.
PATH AIS
A path alarm indication signal is being received.
PATH AIS
A path alarm indication signal is being received.
PATH FERF
A path far end receive failure signal is being received.
PATH FERF
A path far end receive failure signal is being received.
VT AIS
A tributary alarm indication signal is being received.
(Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
VT AIS
A tributary alarm indication signal is being received.
(Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
VT FERF
A tributary far end receive failure is being received.
(Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
VT FERF
A tributary far end receive failure is being received.
(Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
DS1/DS3 AIS
A tributary alarm indication signal is being received.
(Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
DS1/DS3 AIS
A tributary alarm indication signal is being received.
(Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
DS1/DS3 YELLOW
A tributary yellow signal is being received. (Add/
Drop/Test Option Only)
DS1/DS3 YELLOW
A tributary yellow signal is being received. (Add/
Drop/Test Option Only)
ERROR
A bit, section, line, path, or VT parity error is detected;
or a line, path, or VT FEBE is being received.
ERROR
A bit, section, line, path, or VT parity error is detected;
or a line, path, or VT FEBE is being received.
POINTER ADJ
A pointer adjustment is being received.
POINTER ADJ
A pointer adjustment is being received.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–60
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Checking Signal Status
Checking Signal Status
Extended Status
Extended Status
The red-yellow pair of ERROR lights on the front panel turn on
when a variety of error conditions exist on the line. For more detail
about the specific error types and frequency of occurrence, see the
TEST SUMMARY, MAIN RESULTS, and ERROR ANALYSIS
pages of the RESULTS menu. For more information on this topic,
see page 3–174.
The red-yellow pair of ERROR lights on the front panel turn on
when a variety of error conditions exist on the line. For more detail
about the specific error types and frequency of occurrence, see the
TEST SUMMARY, MAIN RESULTS, and ERROR ANALYSIS
pages of the RESULTS menu. For more information on this topic,
see page 3–174.
Setting the Beeper
Setting the Beeper
You can set a beeper to sound every time a red status light turns on.
You can set a beeper to sound every time a red status light turns on.
To enable or disable the beeper:
To enable or disable the beeper:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
UTILITY
MISC SETTINGS
Beeper
On
UTILITY
MISC SETTINGS
Beeper
On
Off
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Off
3–61
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–61
Checking Signal Status
3–62
Checking Signal Status
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–62
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SONET Transmit Parameters
This section describes how to set the transmit rate, specify the STS
under test, set the payload mapping and content, and set the overhead
bytes for SONET signals.
This section describes how to set the transmit rate, specify the STS
under test, set the payload mapping and content, and set the overhead
bytes for SONET signals.
The CTS 710 SONET Test Set contains independent transmitter and
receiver modules. One set of parameters controls the transmitter
module and another set controls the receiver module. You can set the
parameters that control the transmitter independently or you can
choose to link the parameters to the receiver settings.
The CTS 710 SONET Test Set contains independent transmitter and
receiver modules. One set of parameters controls the transmitter
module and another set controls the receiver module. You can set the
parameters that control the transmitter independently or you can
choose to link the parameters to the receiver settings.
Steps for Setting Parameters
Steps for Setting Parameters
The sequence of steps for setting transmit parameters varies with the
type of signal to be transmitted. The figures that follow show the
sequence of steps required to set the transmit parameters of a
SONET signal without a mapped tributary and a SONET signal with
a mapped tributary. See page 3–89 for details on setting tributary
signal parameters (for example DS3).
Set
Rate
Set
Clock
Set Signal
Structure
Specify STS
Under Test
Set
Mapping
Set Test
Pattern
Figure 3–22: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
The sequence of steps for setting transmit parameters varies with the
type of signal to be transmitted. The figures that follow show the
sequence of steps required to set the transmit parameters of a
SONET signal without a mapped tributary and a SONET signal with
a mapped tributary. See page 3–89 for details on setting tributary
signal parameters (for example DS3).
Set
Rate
Set
Clock
Set Signal
Structure
Specify STS
Under Test
Set
Mapping
Set Test
Pattern
Figure 3–22: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters
3–63
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–63
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Set
Rate
Set
Clock
Set VT Under Test
(Mapping = VT1.5
Async only)
Set Signal
Structure
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Specify STS
Under Test
Set Payload
(Either external
add or internally
generated)
Set
Mapping
Set Test
Pattern
Set
Rate
Set Background
Pattern
(Mapping = VT1.5
Async only)
Set
Clock
Set VT Under Test
(Mapping = VT1.5
Async only)
Set Signal
Structure
Specify STS
Under Test
Set Payload
(Either external
add or internally
generated)
Set
Mapping
Set Test
Pattern
Set Background
Pattern
(Mapping = VT1.5
Async only)
Figure 3–23: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters When Mapping a
Tributary Signal
Figure 3–23: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters When Mapping a
Tributary Signal
Setting the Transmit Rate
Setting the Transmit Rate
To set the transmit rate:
3–64
To set the transmit rate:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
(see Figure 3–24
on page 3–65)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
as appropriate
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
(see Figure 3–24
on page 3–65)
Select Choice
as appropriate
H Select STS-1, STS-3, OC-1, OC-3, or OC-12 to transmit a
SONET signal.
H Select STS-1, STS-3, OC-1, OC-3, or OC-12 to transmit a
SONET signal.
H Select DS1 or DS3 to transmit a tributary signal. See page 3–89
for details on setting tributary signal parameters.
H Select DS1 or DS3 to transmit a tributary signal. See page 3–89
for details on setting tributary signal parameters.
NOTE. Even though there are output connectors for both SONET and
tributary signals on the CTS 710 front panel, the CTS 710 can
transmit only one type of signal at a time.
NOTE. Even though there are output connectors for both SONET and
tributary signals on the CTS 710 front panel, the CTS 710 can
transmit only one type of signal at a time.
Independent Transmit and Receive Settings
Independent Transmit and Receive Settings
Generally, you can set the transmit and receive settings independently. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the STS-1
Generally, you can set the transmit and receive settings independently. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the STS-1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–64
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
rate while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the OC-3
rate.
rate while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the OC-3
rate.
However, when working with tributary and DSn signals, the transmit
and receive parameters are not completely independent. You cannot
transmit a DS1 signal and receive a DS3 signal. When working with
tributary signals, you must set the mapping for transmit and receive
to the same value or to Bulk Fill No Mapping. For example, you
can transmit a DS1 signal and receive an OC-12 signal, but you must
set the mapping of the received signal to either Bulk Fill No
Mapping or DS1; it cannot be set to DS3.
However, when working with tributary and DSn signals, the transmit
and receive parameters are not completely independent. You cannot
transmit a DS1 signal and receive a DS3 signal. When working with
tributary signals, you must set the mapping for transmit and receive
to the same value or to Bulk Fill No Mapping. For example, you
can transmit a DS1 signal and receive an OC-12 signal, but you must
set the mapping of the received signal to either Bulk Fill No
Mapping or DS1; it cannot be set to DS3.
Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings
Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings
If your application requires that the transmit settings and receive
settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.
After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page will also be made to the corresponding setting in the RECEIVE SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE
menu. The inverse is also true.
If your application requires that the transmit settings and receive
settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.
After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page will also be made to the corresponding setting in the RECEIVE SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE
menu. The inverse is also true.
Available SONET
Transmit rates
Available SONET
Transmit rates
Figure 3–24: SONET Transmit Rates
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Figure 3–24: SONET Transmit Rates
3–65
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–65
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
To couple the transmit and receive settings together from the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page:
To couple the transmit and receive settings together from the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
NOTE. When settings are coupled from the TRANSMIT SETTINGS
page, the receive parameters are changed to match the transmit
parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the
RECEIVE SETTINGS page, the transmit parameters are changed to
match the receive parameters.
NOTE. When settings are coupled from the TRANSMIT SETTINGS
page, the receive parameters are changed to match the transmit
parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the
RECEIVE SETTINGS page, the transmit parameters are changed to
match the receive parameters.
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to reflect the coupling of the settings.
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to reflect the coupling of the settings.
To change transmit and receive settings so that they are no longer
coupled:
To change transmit and receive settings so that they are no longer
coupled:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Highlight
Parameter
Tx/Rx Settings
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Independent
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Independent
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.
3–66
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.
3–66
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Through Mode
Through Mode
Use Through Mode to monitor a signal without changing it. In
Through Mode, the rate and content of the transmitted signal is that
of the received signal. You cannot make changes to pointers or
timing, overhead bytes, or insert alarms or errors when the CTS 710
is in Through Mode. Through Mode does not perform clock recovery
before retransmitting the recovered signal. Through Mode is used for
nonintrusive performance monitoring of the active signal.
Use Through Mode to monitor a signal without changing it. In
Through Mode, the rate and content of the transmitted signal is that
of the received signal. You cannot make changes to pointers or
timing, overhead bytes, or insert alarms or errors when the CTS 710
is in Through Mode. Through Mode does not perform clock recovery
before retransmitting the recovered signal. Through Mode is used for
nonintrusive performance monitoring of the active signal.
To put the CTS 710 into Through Mode:
To put the CTS 710 into Through Mode:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Through Mode
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Through Mode
To indicate when the CTS 710 is in Through Mode, the transmit and
receive icons at the upper-right corner of the display have an arrow
linking them together and the parameters on the TRANSMIT
SETTINGS page are replaced by a message stating that the CTS 710
is in Through Mode (see Figure 3–25).
To indicate when the CTS 710 is in Through Mode, the transmit and
receive icons at the upper-right corner of the display have an arrow
linking them together and the parameters on the TRANSMIT
SETTINGS page are replaced by a message stating that the CTS 710
is in Through Mode (see Figure 3–25).
To take the CTS 710 out of Through Mode:
To take the CTS 710 out of Through Mode:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Independent
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Independent
Coupled
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Coupled
3–67
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–67
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Through Mode Icon
Through Mode Icon
Figure 3–25: CTS 710 in Through Mode
Figure 3–25: CTS 710 in Through Mode
Setting the Transmit Clock
Setting the Transmit Clock
To specify the transmit clock:
3–68
To specify the transmit clock:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Clock
Internal
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Clock
Internal
Recovered
Recovered
BITS
BITS
H Select Internal to set the transmit clock to the internal clock.
H Select Internal to set the transmit clock to the internal clock.
H Select Recovered to use the clock recovered from an incoming
signal.
H Select Recovered to use the clock recovered from an incoming
signal.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–68
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
H Select BITS to use the clock signal from an external BITS
reference. Attach the external BITS reference to the BITS
connector on the rear panel.
H Select BITS to use the clock signal from an external BITS
reference. Attach the external BITS reference to the BITS
connector on the rear panel.
Setting the Transmit Level
Setting the Transmit Level
To specify the transmit level for electrical signals:
To specify the transmit level for electrical signals:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Level
High
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Level
High
XConnect
XConnect
H Select High to set the line level to high.
H Select High to set the line level to high.
H Select XConnect to set the line level to the cross-connect level.
H Select XConnect to set the line level to the cross-connect level.
Setting the Signal Structure
Setting the Signal Structure
If you are transmitting an STS-3, OC-3, or OC-12 signal, you can
specify whether the signal consists of STS-1 payloads or STS-3c
payloads.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
If you are transmitting an STS-3, OC-3, or OC-12 signal, you can
specify whether the signal consists of STS-1 payloads or STS-3c
payloads.
3–69
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–69
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
To specify the structure of an STS-3, OC-3, or OC-12 signal:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Signal Structure
3 x STS-1
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Signal Structure
3 x STS-1
1 x STS-3c
1 x STS-3c
12 x STS-1
12 x STS-1
4 x STS-3c
4 x STS-3c
H Select 3 x STS-1 to set the structure of an STS-3 or OC-3
signal to three STS-1 payloads.
H Select 3 x STS-1 to set the structure of an STS-3 or OC-3
signal to three STS-1 payloads.
H Select 1 x STS-3c to set the structure of an STS-3 or OC-3
signal to one STS-3c payload.
H Select 1 x STS-3c to set the structure of an STS-3 or OC-3
signal to one STS-3c payload.
H Select 12 x STS-1 to set the structure of an OC-12 signal to
12 STS-1 payloads.
H Select 12 x STS-1 to set the structure of an OC-12 signal to
12 STS-1 payloads.
H Select 4 x STS-3c to set the structure of an OC-12 signal to
four STS-3c payloads.
H Select 4 x STS-3c to set the structure of an OC-12 signal to
four STS-3c payloads.
Specifying the STS to Test
3–70
To specify the structure of an STS-3, OC-3, or OC-12 signal:
Specifying the STS to Test
If you are using a line rate other than the basic-level rates (STS-1 or
OC-1), you must designate which STS to test.
If you are using a line rate other than the basic-level rates (STS-1 or
OC-1), you must designate which STS to test.
To designate which STS to test:
To designate which STS to test:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
STS Under Test
as appropriate
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
STS Under Test
as appropriate
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–70
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting the Payload Mapping
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting the Payload Mapping
To set the payload mapping:
To set the payload mapping:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Mapping
Select Choice
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Equipped)
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Mapping
Select Choice
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Equipped)
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Unequipped)
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Unequipped)
DS3
DS3
VT 1.5 Async
VT 1.5 Async
NOTE. Some payload mappings require options that might not be
installed in your CTS 710. Depending on the mapping you choose,
you might need to set additional parameters.
NOTE. Some payload mappings require options that might not be
installed in your CTS 710. Depending on the mapping you choose,
you might need to set additional parameters.
H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Equipped) to fill the whole
SPE with the test pattern specified and set the C2 byte to 1.
H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Equipped) to fill the whole
SPE with the test pattern specified and set the C2 byte to 1.
H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) to fill the whole
SPE with the test pattern specified and set the C2 byte to 0.
An all-zeros pattern is the recommended test pattern for
unequipped SPEs.
H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) to fill the whole
SPE with the test pattern specified and set the C2 byte to 0.
An all-zeros pattern is the recommended test pattern for
unequipped SPEs.
H Select VT 1.5 Async to map an externally supplied or an
internally generated DS1 signal to the transmitted signal. See
Mapping a Tributary Signal on page 3–72 for details.
H Select VT 1.5 Async to map an externally supplied or an
internally generated DS1 signal to the transmitted signal. See
Mapping a Tributary Signal on page 3–72 for details.
H Select DS3 to map an externally supplied or internally
generated DS3 signal to the transmitted signal. See Mapping a
Tributary Signal on page 3–72 for details.
H Select DS3 to map an externally supplied or internally
generated DS3 signal to the transmitted signal. See Mapping a
Tributary Signal on page 3–72 for details.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–71
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–71
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Unequipped Payload Mapping
Unequipped Payload Mapping
If you choose Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) payload mapping,
the CTS 710 places the unequipped code in byte C2. You can
transmit any of the pattern choices available with the Bulk Fill No
Mapping (Equipped) payload mapping. However, the default pattern
(all zeros prior to scrambling) is recommended.
If you choose Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) payload mapping,
the CTS 710 places the unequipped code in byte C2. You can
transmit any of the pattern choices available with the Bulk Fill No
Mapping (Equipped) payload mapping. However, the default pattern
(all zeros prior to scrambling) is recommended.
When a SONET network element receives a signal with an
unequipped channel, the network element should pass the signal
through without making changes to it. This treatment should be
consistent from one end of the network to the other. A loopback at
the far end of the network would then allow a sole CTS 710 to
transmit a PRBS across the payload channel and verify the error
performance of the entire link from end to end.
When a SONET network element receives a signal with an
unequipped channel, the network element should pass the signal
through without making changes to it. This treatment should be
consistent from one end of the network to the other. A loopback at
the far end of the network would then allow a sole CTS 710 to
transmit a PRBS across the payload channel and verify the error
performance of the entire link from end to end.
Mapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
Mapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
3–72
To map a tributary signal, you first set the Mapping to the appropriate tributary mapping (as described in the previous section). When
mapping a signal, you must also specify the payload. The payload
can be either an external signal connected to the appropriate IN
connector on the front panel or an internally generated signal.
To map a tributary signal, you first set the Mapping to the appropriate tributary mapping (as described in the previous section). When
mapping a signal, you must also specify the payload. The payload
can be either an external signal connected to the appropriate IN
connector on the front panel or an internally generated signal.
Mapping a Tributary with VT1.5 Floating Async Payload Mapping
Mapping a Tributary with VT1.5 Floating Async Payload Mapping
When you use the VT1.5 Floating Async mapping, you must also
specify the virtual tributary under test and payload (see Figure 3–26).
When you use the VT1.5 Floating Async mapping, you must also
specify the virtual tributary under test and payload (see Figure 3–26).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–72
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Figure 3–26: Mapping a Tributary Signal
Figure 3–26: Mapping a Tributary Signal
To configure the CTS 710 for mapping a signal:
To configure the CTS 710 for mapping a signal:
1. Set the mapping as follows:
1. Set the mapping as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Mapping
VT 1.5 Async
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Mapping
VT 1.5 Async
DS3
DS3
H Select VT 1.5 to specify VT1.5 Floating Asynchronous
mapping. An externally supplied or internally generated DS1
signal is mapped into the selected VT under test while the
other 27 VTs contain a background pattern.
H Select VT 1.5 to specify VT1.5 Floating Asynchronous
mapping. An externally supplied or internally generated DS1
signal is mapped into the selected VT under test while the
other 27 VTs contain a background pattern.
H Select DS3 to map an externally supplied or internally
generated DS3 signal to the transmitted signal.
H Select DS3 to map an externally supplied or internally
generated DS3 signal to the transmitted signal.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–73
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–73
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
2. If the Mapping is set to VT1.5 specify the VT under test as
follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
VT Under Test
VT #1
2. If the Mapping is set to VT1.5 specify the VT under test as
follows:
Press Menu
Button
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
VT Under Test
VT #1
VT #28
VT #28
Next
Next
Previous
Previous
H Select VT #1 to specify the first virtual tributary.
H Select VT #1 to specify the first virtual tributary.
H Select VT #28 to specify the last virtual tributary.
H Select VT #28 to specify the last virtual tributary.
H Select Next or Previous to change the selection to the next
higher or next lower virtual tributary.
H Select Next or Previous to change the selection to the next
higher or next lower virtual tributary.
3. Specify the payload as follows:
Press Menu
Button
3–74
Select Menu
Page
Select Menu
Page
3. Specify the payload as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Payload
as appropriate
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Payload
as appropriate
H Select DS1 Ext Add to map a DS1 signal, connected to the
DS1 IN connector on the CTS 710 front panel, into the
payload of the selected virtual tributary.
H Select DS1 Ext Add to map a DS1 signal, connected to the
DS1 IN connector on the CTS 710 front panel, into the
payload of the selected virtual tributary.
H Select DS1 Unframed to map an internally generated,
unframed DS1 signal into the payload of the selected virtual
tributary.
H Select DS1 Unframed to map an internally generated,
unframed DS1 signal into the payload of the selected virtual
tributary.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to map an internally generated DS1
signal, with D4 SuperFrame framing, into the payload of the
selected virtual tributary.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to map an internally generated DS1
signal, with D4 SuperFrame framing, into the payload of the
selected virtual tributary.
H Select DS1 ESF to map an internally generated DS1 signal,
with Extended SuperFrame framing, into the payload of the
selected virtual tributary.
H Select DS1 ESF to map an internally generated DS1 signal,
with Extended SuperFrame framing, into the payload of the
selected virtual tributary.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–74
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
H Select DS3 Ext Add to map a DS3 signal, connected to the
DS3 Input connector on the CTS 710 front panel, into the STS
payload.
H Select DS3 Ext Add to map a DS3 signal, connected to the
DS3 Input connector on the CTS 710 front panel, into the STS
payload.
H Select DS3 Unframed to map an internally generated,
unframed DS3 signal into the STS payload.
H Select DS3 Unframed to map an internally generated,
unframed DS3 signal into the STS payload.
H Select DS3 C–bit to map an internally generated DS3 signal,
with C-bit framing, into the payload of the selected virtual
tributary.
H Select DS3 C–bit to map an internally generated DS3 signal,
with C-bit framing, into the payload of the selected virtual
tributary.
H Select DS3 M13 to map an internally generated DS3 signal,
with M13 framing, into the payload of the selected virtual
tributary.
H Select DS3 M13 to map an internally generated DS3 signal,
with M13 framing, into the payload of the selected virtual
tributary.
Setting the Test Pattern
Setting the Test Pattern
You can select a test pattern to transmit in the SPE.
You can select a test pattern to transmit in the SPE.
To specify the test pattern to transmit:
To specify the test pattern to transmit:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Test Pattern
as appropriate
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Test Pattern
as appropriate
H Select 1 in 8 to set the test pattern to 01000000.
H Select 1 in 8 to set the test pattern to 01000000.
H Select 3 in 24 to set the test pattern to
01000100 00000000 00000100.
H Select 3 in 24 to set the test pattern to
01000100 00000000 00000100.
H Select User Word 8 bit, User Word 16 bit, or User Word
24 bit to set a test pattern different from the preset choices. If
you choose User Word, the test pattern description changes to
display the byte selected.
H Select User Word 8 bit, User Word 16 bit, or User Word
24 bit to set a test pattern different from the preset choices. If
you choose User Word, the test pattern description changes to
display the byte selected.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–75
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–75
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
If you select User Word 8 bit/16 bit/24 bit for the test pattern, set the
value of the User Word as follows:
If you select User Word 8 bit/16 bit/24 bit for the test pattern, set the
value of the User Word as follows:
1. Set the contents of the User Word Byte(s) as follows (see
Figure 3–27):
1. Set the contents of the User Word Byte(s) as follows (see
Figure 3–27):
Press Menu
Button
3–76
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Test Pattern
Set to 00000000
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Test Pattern
Set to 00000000
Set to 11111111
Set to 11111111
Default 10101010
Default 10101010
EDIT BYTE/
Edit XX bits
EDIT BYTE/
Edit XX bits
2. Select EDIT BYTE/Edit XX bits to specify a value different
from the preset choices.
2. Select EDIT BYTE/Edit XX bits to specify a value different
from the preset choices.
3. Select Predefined Patterns if you decide to use the standard
patterns.
3. Select Predefined Patterns if you decide to use the standard
patterns.
4. Select DONE when you are finished editing the byte.
4. Select DONE when you are finished editing the byte.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–76
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Figure 3–27: Editing the User Word Byte
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Figure 3–27: Editing the User Word Byte
Setting Overhead Bytes
Setting Overhead Bytes
To stress test a network, you sometimes need to simulate errors or
alarms. Use the controls on the ERRORS & ALARMS page of the
TRANSMIT menu to simulate errors or alarms. As an alternative,
you can edit the transport overhead and path overhead bytes directly
to simulate errors, alarms, and create other stress conditions. This
section describes how to use the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and
PATH OVERHEAD pages to edit overhead bytes.
To stress test a network, you sometimes need to simulate errors or
alarms. Use the controls on the ERRORS & ALARMS page of the
TRANSMIT menu to simulate errors or alarms. As an alternative,
you can edit the transport overhead and path overhead bytes directly
to simulate errors, alarms, and create other stress conditions. This
section describes how to use the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and
PATH OVERHEAD pages to edit overhead bytes.
How to Edit an Overhead Byte
How to Edit an Overhead Byte
The following procedure applies to editing either transport overhead
or path overhead bytes. Transport overhead is given as an example.
The following procedure applies to editing either transport overhead
or path overhead bytes. Transport overhead is given as an example.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–77
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–77
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
To edit overhead bytes:
To edit overhead bytes:
1. Display the transport overhead as follows:
1. Display the transport overhead as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
TRANSMIT
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Because only three columns of overhead are displayed at one
time, you must specify which columns you want to edit.
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Showing
Overhead for
TRANSMIT
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
2. Select the columns you wish to edit as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Choice
as appropriate
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Showing
Overhead for
3. Turn the knob to highlight the byte you want to edit. See
Figure 3–28.
3–78
Select Menu
Page
Because only three columns of overhead are displayed at one
time, you must specify which columns you want to edit.
2. Select the columns you wish to edit as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Press Menu
Button
Select Choice
as appropriate
3. Turn the knob to highlight the byte you want to edit. See
Figure 3–28.
3–78
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Bytes you can
never edit
Cannot edit
because
alarm is set
Z2 byte
selected to
edit
Figure 3–28: Editing the Z2 Transmit Overhead Byte
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Bytes you can
never edit
Cannot edit
because
alarm is set
Z2 byte
selected to
edit
Figure 3–28: Editing the Z2 Transmit Overhead Byte
There are several ways to edit the byte:
There are several ways to edit the byte:
H Select Reset Overhead to set all bytes in the overhead to
their individual default values. However, Reset Overhead
does not remove simulated error conditions that have been
set using controls in the ERRORS & ALARMS page.
A simulated error condition overrides the default value of the
overhead byte that signals that particular error condition.
H Select Reset Overhead to set all bytes in the overhead to
their individual default values. However, Reset Overhead
does not remove simulated error conditions that have been
set using controls in the ERRORS & ALARMS page.
A simulated error condition overrides the default value of the
overhead byte that signals that particular error condition.
H Select Default (XXXXXXXX) to set the selected byte to its
default value. The specific default value depends on the
selected byte and on the rate and structure of the signal.
H Select Default (XXXXXXXX) to set the selected byte to its
default value. The specific default value depends on the
selected byte and on the rate and structure of the signal.
H Select EDIT BYTE to define the byte as a value different
from the preset choices.
H Select EDIT BYTE to define the byte as a value different
from the preset choices.
4. To edit the selected byte to a value of your choice:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
4. To edit the selected byte to a value of your choice:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
EDIT BYTE
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
EDIT BYTE
3–79
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–79
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
H Define your own byte with the buttons next to 1 and 0. Use
the left and right arrow buttons to move the cursor from one
bit to the next. See Figure 3–29.
H Define your own byte with the buttons next to 1 and 0. Use
the left and right arrow buttons to move the cursor from one
bit to the next. See Figure 3–29.
H When you finish editing the byte, select DONE.
H When you finish editing the byte, select DONE.
Figure 3–29: Editing an Overhead Byte
Figure 3–29: Editing an Overhead Byte
Editing the V5 Byte
Editing the V5 Byte
To edit the V5 byte (VT1.5 Mapping Only):
To edit the V5 byte (VT1.5 Mapping Only):
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
PATH
OVERHEAD
Overhead View
VT1.5 Overhead
TRANSMIT
PATH
OVERHEAD
Overhead View
VT1.5 Overhead
Only bits 5, 6, and 7 (the signal label bits) of the V5 byte are
editable. See Table 3–7.
3–80
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Only bits 5, 6, and 7 (the signal label bits) of the V5 byte are
editable. See Table 3–7.
3–80
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Table 3–7: Choices for Bits 5, 6, and 7 of the V5 Byte
Table 3–7: Choices for Bits 5, 6, and 7 of the V5 Byte
Choice
Choice
Unequip (000)
Unequip (000)
Equipped (001)
Equipped (001)
Async (010)
Async (010)
Bit–Sync (011)
Bit–Sync (011)
Byte–Sync (100)
Byte–Sync (100)
Reserved (101)
Reserved (101)
TSS4 (110)
TSS4 (110)
VT–AIS
VT–AIS
Bytes You Cannot Edit
Bytes You Cannot Edit
Certain bytes in the transport overhead and path overhead cannot be
edited in the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD or PATH OVERHEAD
pages. These uneditable bytes have calculated values that are based
on the payload and signal structure (see Table 3–8).
Certain bytes in the transport overhead and path overhead cannot be
edited in the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD or PATH OVERHEAD
pages. These uneditable bytes have calculated values that are based
on the payload and signal structure (see Table 3–8).
Table 3–8: Overhead Bytes That Cannot Be Edited
Table 3–8: Overhead Bytes That Cannot Be Edited
Overhead Byte
Function
Overhead Byte
Function
B1
Section level parity byte
B1
Section level parity byte
B2
Line level parity byte
B2
Line level parity byte
B3
Path level parity byte
B3
Path level parity byte
G1
Path status
G1
Path status
H1, H2, H3
Identify location of payload
H1, H2, H3
Identify location of payload
H4
Multiframe indicator
H4
Multiframe indicator
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–81
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–81
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
The bytes that cannot be edited are marked with a line of asterisks on
the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD or PATH OVERHEAD pages (see
Figure 3–28 on page 3–79).
The bytes that cannot be edited are marked with a line of asterisks on
the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD or PATH OVERHEAD pages (see
Figure 3–28 on page 3–79).
In addition, there are bytes you may not be able to edit depending on
parameter settings in the CTS 710. As shown in Figure 3–28, a short
text string replaces the binary values in the byte field of the
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and PATH OVERHEAD pages when a
byte cannot be edited. Table 3–9 shows the affected bytes, the text
string, and a description of the parameter setting that prevents the
byte from being edited.
In addition, there are bytes you may not be able to edit depending on
parameter settings in the CTS 710. As shown in Figure 3–28, a short
text string replaces the binary values in the byte field of the
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and PATH OVERHEAD pages when a
byte cannot be edited. Table 3–9 shows the affected bytes, the text
string, and a description of the parameter setting that prevents the
byte from being edited.
Table 3–9: Bytes You Cannot Edit Due to Parameter Settings
Table 3–9: Bytes You Cannot Edit Due to Parameter Settings
Transport and
Path Overhead
Byte(s)
Text String that
Replaces the
Binary Values
Transport and
Path Overhead
Byte(s)
Text String that
Replaces the
Binary Values
A1, A2
LOF SET
Loss of Frame Failure is being
simulated
A1, A2
LOF SET
Loss of Frame Failure is being
simulated
D1, D2, D3
EXT ADD
Section Data Communication
Channel External Add is enabled
D1, D2, D3
EXT ADD
Section Data Communication
Channel External Add is enabled
K1, K2
LAIS SET
Line AIS is being simulated
K1, K2
LAIS SET
Line AIS is being simulated
FERF SET
Line FERF is being simulated
FERF SET
Line FERF is being simulated
D4, D5, D6, D7,
D8, D9, D10, D11,
D12
EXT ADD
Line Data Communication Channel External Add is enabled
D4, D5, D6, D7,
D8, D9, D10, D11,
D12
EXT ADD
Line Data Communication Channel External Add is enabled
S1
FEBE SET
Line FEBE is being simulated
S1
FEBE SET
Line FEBE is being simulated
G1
FERF SET
Path FERF is being simulated
G1
FERF SET
Path FERF is being simulated
FEBE SET
Path FEBE is being simulated
FEBE SET
Path FEBE is being simulated
PAIS SET
Path AIS is being simulated
PAIS SET
Path AIS is being simulated
All path overhead
bytes set to ones
3–82
Parameter Setting Affecting
Byte-Edit Capability
All path overhead
bytes set to ones
Parameter Setting Affecting
Byte-Edit Capability
Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte
Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte
The J1 Path Trace Byte carries a fixed-length, 64-byte string
intended for sending user messages. The Path Trace Byte is a string
The J1 Path Trace Byte carries a fixed-length, 64-byte string
intended for sending user messages. The Path Trace Byte is a string
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–82
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
consisting of ASCII characters (rather than the ones and zeros used
to edit the other overhead bytes).
consisting of ASCII characters (rather than the ones and zeros used
to edit the other overhead bytes).
To edit the J1 Path Trace Byte:
To edit the J1 Path Trace Byte:
1. Display the Path Trace Byte as follows:
1. Display the Path Trace Byte as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
PATH
OVERHEAD
J1 byte
Reset Overhead
TRANSMIT
PATH
OVERHEAD
J1 byte
Reset Overhead
Null Trace
Null Trace
Default Trace
Default Trace
User Trace
User Trace
EDIT TRACE
EDIT TRACE
The text string USER is shown in place of the actual byte value.
There are five ways you can change the Path Trace message.
The text string USER is shown in place of the actual byte value.
There are five ways you can change the Path Trace message.
H Select Reset Overhead to set all bytes in the path overhead to
their default values.
H Select Reset Overhead to set all bytes in the path overhead to
their default values.
NOTE. Reset Overhead does not remove simulated error conditions
that have been set using controls in the ERRORS & ALARMS page.
NOTE. Reset Overhead does not remove simulated error conditions
that have been set using controls in the ERRORS & ALARMS page.
H Select Null Trace to set all the J1 bytes in the string to the
null character.
H Select Null Trace to set all the J1 bytes in the string to the
null character.
H Select Default Trace to set the J1 byte string to the default
string “Tektronix CTS 710 SONET Test Set, hello how are
you?”
H Select Default Trace to set the J1 byte string to the default
string “Tektronix CTS 710 SONET Test Set, hello how are
you?”
H Select User Trace to set the J1 byte string to a string you can
enter using the EDIT TRACE function.
H Select User Trace to set the J1 byte string to a string you can
enter using the EDIT TRACE function.
H Select EDIT TRACE to define your own text string.
H Select EDIT TRACE to define your own text string.
2. Select EDIT TRACE to edit the path trace message (see
Figure 3–30).
2. Select EDIT TRACE to edit the path trace message (see
Figure 3–30).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–83
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–83
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
The string can contain a maximum of 64 characters, including
spaces.
3–84
The string can contain a maximum of 64 characters, including
spaces.
3. Select DONE when you have completed the entering string.
3. Select DONE when you have completed the entering string.
Figure 3–30: Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte
Figure 3–30: Editing the J1 Path Trace Byte
Adding DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes
Adding DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes
You can add data generated by an external protocol analyzer into the
Data Communication Channel (DCC) and User Channel. The data
from the protocol analyzer is added through the Overhead Add/Drop
Port located on the rear panel. See Appendix G for detailed
information on the port pin assignments.
You can add data generated by an external protocol analyzer into the
Data Communication Channel (DCC) and User Channel. The data
from the protocol analyzer is added through the Overhead Add/Drop
Port located on the rear panel. See Appendix G for detailed
information on the port pin assignments.
To add external data into the DCC:
To add external data into the DCC:
1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the
Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.
1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the
Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–84
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
2. To configure the CTS 710 to add the external data bytes:
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
2. To configure the CTS 710 to add the external data bytes:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
External Add
None
TRANSMIT
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
External Add
None
D1–D3
D1–D3
D4–D12
D4–D12
F1
F1
H Select None if you do not want to add external data.
H Select None if you do not want to add external data.
H Select D1–D3 to add data, generated by an external protocol
analyzer, to the D1–D3 bytes of the DCC.
H Select D1–D3 to add data, generated by an external protocol
analyzer, to the D1–D3 bytes of the DCC.
H Select D4–D12 to add data, generated by an external protocol
analyzer, to the D4–D12 bytes of the DCC.
H Select D4–D12 to add data, generated by an external protocol
analyzer, to the D4–D12 bytes of the DCC.
H Select F1 to add data, generated by an external protocol
analyzer, to the F1 byte of the DCC.
H Select F1 to add data, generated by an external protocol
analyzer, to the F1 byte of the DCC.
As soon as you select which bytes to add data to, the CTS 710
displays the words EXT ADD as the value for the selected bytes (see
Figure 3–31).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–85
As soon as you select which bytes to add data to, the CTS 710
displays the words EXT ADD as the value for the selected bytes (see
Figure 3–31).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–85
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Figure 3–31: Adding Data into the DCC
Figure 3–31: Adding Data into the DCC
To add external data into the User Channel:
To add external data into the User Channel:
1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the
Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.
1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the
Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.
2. To configure the CTS 710 to add the external data byte:
2. To configure the CTS 710 to add the external data byte:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
PATH
OVERHEAD
External Add
None
TRANSMIT
PATH
OVERHEAD
External Add
None
F2
F2
H Select None if you do not want to add external data.
H Select None if you do not want to add external data.
H Select F2 to add data, generated by an external protocol
analyzer, to the User Channel.
H Select F2 to add data, generated by an external protocol
analyzer, to the User Channel.
As soon as you select F2, the CTS 710 displays the words EXT ADD
as the value for F2 (see Figure 3–32).
3–86
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
As soon as you select F2, the CTS 710 displays the words EXT ADD
as the value for F2 (see Figure 3–32).
3–86
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Figure 3–32: Adding Data into the User Channel
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
Figure 3–32: Adding Data into the User Channel
3–87
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–87
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
3–88
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SDHSONET Transmit Parameters
3–88
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Tributary Signal Transmit
Parameters
Setting Tributary Signal Transmit
Parameters
This section describes how to set the transmit rate, transmit clock,
line code, framing, and test pattern for a tributary signal.
This section describes how to set the transmit rate, transmit clock,
line code, framing, and test pattern for a tributary signal.
Steps for Setting Parameters
Steps for Setting Parameters
The sequence of steps for setting transmit parameters varies
depending on the type of signal to be transmitted. Figure 3–33 shows
the sequence of steps required to set the transmit parameters for a
tributary signal (for example, DS3).
Set
Rate
Set
Clock
Set Transmit
Line Code
Set
Framing
Set Test
Pattern
Set
Rate
Figure 3–33: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal Parameters
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
The sequence of steps for setting transmit parameters varies
depending on the type of signal to be transmitted. Figure 3–33 shows
the sequence of steps required to set the transmit parameters for a
tributary signal (for example, DS3).
Set
Clock
Set Transmit
Line Code
Set
Framing
Set Test
Pattern
Figure 3–33: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal Parameters
3–89
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–89
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
Setting the Transmit Rate
Setting the Transmit Rate
To set the transmit rate:
To set the transmit rate:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
DS1
Transmit Rate
(see Figure 3–34)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
DS1
Transmit Rate
(see Figure 3–34)
DS3
3–90
Select Choice
DS3
H Select DS1 or DS3 to transmit a tributary rate signal.
H Select DS1 or DS3 to transmit a tributary rate signal.
NOTE. The CTS 710 can transmit only one signal rate at a time. The
CTS 710 can transmit either a SONET signal or a tributary signal,
but not both at the same time.
NOTE. The CTS 710 can transmit only one signal rate at a time. The
CTS 710 can transmit either a SONET signal or a tributary signal,
but not both at the same time.
Independent Transmit and Receive Settings
Independent Transmit and Receive Settings
Generally, you can set the transmit and receive settings independently. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the STS-1
rate while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the DS1
rate.
Generally, you can set the transmit and receive settings independently. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the STS-1
rate while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the DS1
rate.
However, when working with tributary and DSn signals, the transmit
and receive parameters are not completely independent. You cannot
transmit a DS1 signal and receive a DS3 signal. When working with
tributary signals, you must set the mapping for transmit and receive
to the same value or to Bulk Fill No Mapping. For example, you
can transmit a DS1 signal and receive an OC-12 signal, but you must
set the mapping of the received signal to either Bulk Fill No
Mapping or VT1.5; it cannot be set to DS3.
However, when working with tributary and DSn signals, the transmit
and receive parameters are not completely independent. You cannot
transmit a DS1 signal and receive a DS3 signal. When working with
tributary signals, you must set the mapping for transmit and receive
to the same value or to Bulk Fill No Mapping. For example, you
can transmit a DS1 signal and receive an OC-12 signal, but you must
set the mapping of the received signal to either Bulk Fill No
Mapping or VT1.5; it cannot be set to DS3.
Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings
Coupling Transmit and Receive Settings
If your application requires that the transmit settings and receive
settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.
If your application requires that the transmit settings and receive
settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–90
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page will also be made to the corresponding setting in the RECEIVE SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE
menu. The inverse is also true.
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page will also be made to the corresponding setting in the RECEIVE SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE
menu. The inverse is also true.
Available tributary
Transmit rates
Available tributary
Transmit rates
Figure 3–34: Tributary Transmit Rates
Figure 3–34: Tributary Transmit Rates
To couple the transmit and receive settings together from the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page:
To couple the transmit and receive settings together from the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–91
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–91
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
NOTE. When settings are coupled from the TRANSMIT SETTINGS
page, the receive parameters are changed to match the transmit
parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the
RECEIVE SETTINGS page, the transmit parameters are changed to
match the receive parameters.
NOTE. When settings are coupled from the TRANSMIT SETTINGS
page, the receive parameters are changed to match the transmit
parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the
RECEIVE SETTINGS page, the transmit parameters are changed to
match the receive parameters.
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to reflect the coupling of the settings.
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to reflect the coupling of the settings.
To change transmit and receive settings so that they are no longer
coupled:
To change transmit and receive settings so that they are no longer
coupled:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Independent
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Independent
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.
Setting the Transmit Clock
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.
Setting the Transmit Clock
To specify the transmit clock:
To specify the transmit clock:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Clock
Internal
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Clock
Internal
Recovered
Recovered
External BITS
External BITS
External DSn
External DSn
H Select Internal to set the transmit clock to the internal clock.
3–92
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H Select Internal to set the transmit clock to the internal clock.
3–92
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
H Select Recovered to use the clock recovered from an incoming
signal.
H Select Recovered to use the clock recovered from an incoming
signal.
H Select External BITS to use the clock signal from an external
BITS reference. Attach the external BITS reference to the BITS
connector on the rear panel.
H Select External BITS to use the clock signal from an external
BITS reference. Attach the external BITS reference to the BITS
connector on the rear panel.
H Select External DSn to use an external DS1/DS3 clock. Attach
the clock to the external clock connector located on the rear
panel.
H Select External DSn to use an external DS1/DS3 clock. Attach
the clock to the external clock connector located on the rear
panel.
Setting the Line Clock Offset
Setting the Line Clock Offset
To specify the line clock offset:
To specify the line clock offset:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
LIne Clock Offset
Max +100ppm
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
LIne Clock Offset
Max +100ppm
Stress +1.0ppm
Stress +1.0ppm
Stress –1.0ppm
Stress –1.0ppm
USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
H Select USER DEFINED to specify a clock offset different from
the preset choices.
Setting the Transmit Line Code
Setting the Transmit Line Code
To specify the transmit line code for the tributary signal:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Line
Code
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H Select USER DEFINED to specify a clock offset different from
the preset choices.
To specify the transmit line code for the tributary signal:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
as appropriate
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Line
Code
3–93
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
as appropriate
3–93
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
H Select AMI to set the line code to Alternate Mark Inversion.
H Select AMI to set the line code to Alternate Mark Inversion.
H Select B8ZS to set the line code to Binary 8-Zero Substitution.
H Select B8ZS to set the line code to Binary 8-Zero Substitution.
H B3ZS (Binary 3-Zero Substitution) is the only available line code
for the DS3 rate.
H B3ZS (Binary 3-Zero Substitution) is the only available line code
for the DS3 rate.
The line code available for selection depends on the selected
transmit rate. The available line codes and their associated rates are
listed in Table 3–10.
The line code available for selection depends on the selected
transmit rate. The available line codes and their associated rates are
listed in Table 3–10.
Table 3–10: Tributary Rate Line Codes
Table 3–10: Tributary Rate Line Codes
Transmit Rate
Line Codes Available
Transmit Rate
Line Codes Available
DS1
AMI
DS1
AMI
B8ZS
DS3
B8ZS
B3ZS
DS3
Specifying the Framing
3–94
B3ZS
Specifying the Framing
The framing choices available depend on the selected transmit rate.
The framing choices available depend on the selected transmit rate.
To set the framing for a DS1 signal:
To set the framing for a DS1 signal:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Framing
DS1 Unframed
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Framing
DS1 Unframed
DS1 SF (D4)
DS1 SF (D4)
DS1 ESF
DS1 ESF
H Select DS1 Unframed to transmit a signal without framing.
H Select DS1 Unframed to transmit a signal without framing.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to transmit a signal with Superframe
framing.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to transmit a signal with Superframe
framing.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–94
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
H Select DS1 ESF to transmit a signal with Extended Superframe
framing.
H Select DS1 ESF to transmit a signal with Extended Superframe
framing.
To set the framing for a DS3 signal:
To set the framing for a DS3 signal:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Framing
DS3 Unframed
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Framing
DS3 Unframed
DS3 C–bit
DS3 C–bit
DS3 M13
DS3 M13
H Select DS3 Unframed to transmit a signal without framing.
H Select DS3 Unframed to transmit a signal without framing.
H Select DS3 C–bit to transmit a signal with C–bit framing.
H Select DS3 C–bit to transmit a signal with C–bit framing.
H Select DS3 M13 to transmit a signal with M13 framing.
H Select DS3 M13 to transmit a signal with M13 framing.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–95
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–95
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
Specifying the Test Pattern
Specifying the Test Pattern
3–96
You can select a test pattern to transmit in the tributary signal.
You can select a test pattern to transmit in the tributary signal.
To specify the test pattern to transmit:
To specify the test pattern to transmit:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Test Pattern
Select Choice
PRBS
2^23–1
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Test Pattern
Select Choice
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
PRBS
2^15–1
QRSS
2^20–1
QRSS
2^20–1
1 in 8
1 in 8
All Ones
All Ones
All Zeros
All Zeros
User Word 8 bit
User Word 8 bit
User Word 16 bit
User Word 16 bit
User Word 24 bit
User Word 24 bit
H Select QRSS 2^20–1 to send a Quasi-Random Signal Source
sequence as the test pattern (DS1 only).
H Select QRSS 2^20–1 to send a Quasi-Random Signal Source
sequence as the test pattern (DS1 only).
H Select 1 in 8 to set the test pattern to 01000000.
H Select 1 in 8 to set the test pattern to 01000000.
H Select 3 in 24 to set the test pattern to
01000100 00000000 00000100.
H Select 3 in 24 to set the test pattern to
01000100 00000000 00000100.
H Select User Word 8 bit, User Word 16 bit, or User Word
24 bit to set a test pattern different from the preset choices. If
you choose one of the User Word choices, the test pattern
description changes to User Defined Byte.
H Select User Word 8 bit, User Word 16 bit, or User Word
24 bit to set a test pattern different from the preset choices. If
you choose one of the User Word choices, the test pattern
description changes to User Defined Byte.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–96
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
If you select User Word 8 bit/16 bit/24 bit for the test pattern, set the
value of the User Word as follows:
If you select User Word 8 bit/16 bit/24 bit for the test pattern, set the
value of the User Word as follows:
1. Set the contents of the User Word as follows:
1. Set the contents of the User Word as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Test Pattern
Set to 00000000
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Test Pattern
Set to 00000000
Set to 11111111
Set to 11111111
Default 10101010
Default 10101010
EDIT BYTE/
Edit XX bits
EDIT BYTE/
Edit XX bits
2. Select EDIT BYTE/Edit XX bits to specify a value different
from the preset choices (see Figure 3–35).
2. Select EDIT BYTE/Edit XX bits to specify a value different
from the preset choices (see Figure 3–35).
3. Select Predefined Patterns if you decide to use the standard
patterns.
3. Select Predefined Patterns if you decide to use the standard
patterns.
4. Select DONE when you are finished editing the byte.
4. Select DONE when you are finished editing the byte.
Figure 3–35: Editing the User Word
Figure 3–35: Editing the User Word
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–97
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–97
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
3–98
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Tributary SignalPDH Transmit Parameters
3–98
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONET Receive Parameters
Setting SONET Receive Parameters
This section describes how to manually set the receive line rate,
define the STS under test, set the payload mapping and content,
check the received optical signal power, and view the overhead
bytes.
This section describes how to manually set the receive line rate,
define the STS under test, set the payload mapping and content,
check the received optical signal power, and view the overhead
bytes.
The CTS 710 SONET Test Set contains independent transmit and
receive modules. One set of parameters controls the transmit module
and a separate set controls the receive module. You can set the
receive parameters independent of the transmit parameters or you
can choose to link them to the transmit settings.
The CTS 710 SONET Test Set contains independent transmit and
receive modules. One set of parameters controls the transmit module
and a separate set controls the receive module. You can set the
receive parameters independent of the transmit parameters or you
can choose to link them to the transmit settings.
Pressing AUTOSCAN sets the receive parameters automatically
based on the received signal.
Pressing AUTOSCAN sets the receive parameters automatically
based on the received signal.
Steps for Setting Parameters
Steps for Setting Parameters
The sequence of steps for setting receive parameters varies with the
type of signal to be received. Figure 3–36 shows the sequence of
steps required to set the receive parameters for a SONET signal
without demapping a tributary signal. Figure 3–37 shows the steps
required to set the receive parameters for a SONET signal when
demapping a tributary signal. See page 3–89 for details on setting
tributary signal parameters (for example DS3).
Set
Rate
Set Signal
Structure
Specify STS
Under Test
Set
Mapping
Set Test
Pattern
Set
Rate
Figure 3–36: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
The sequence of steps for setting receive parameters varies with the
type of signal to be received. Figure 3–36 shows the sequence of
steps required to set the receive parameters for a SONET signal
without demapping a tributary signal. Figure 3–37 shows the steps
required to set the receive parameters for a SONET signal when
demapping a tributary signal. See page 3–89 for details on setting
tributary signal parameters (for example DS3).
Set Signal
Structure
Specify STS
Under Test
Set
Mapping
Set Test
Pattern
Figure 3–36: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters
3–99
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–99
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Set
Rate
Set Level
(STS Rates
only)
Set VT Under Test
(Mapping = VT1.5
Async only)
Set Signal
Structure
Specify STS
Under Test
Set Payload
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async,
DS3 only)
Set
Rate
Set
Mapping
Set Tributary Drop
(Mapping = VT1.5
Async, DS3 only)
Set Level
(STS Rates
only)
Set VT Under Test
(Mapping = VT1.5
Async only)
Set Test
Pattern
Set Signal
Structure
Specify STS
Under Test
Set Payload
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async,
DS3 only)
Set
Mapping
Set Tributary Drop
(Mapping = VT1.5
Async, DS3 only)
Set Test
Pattern
Figure 3–37: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters When Demapping a
Tributary Signal
Figure 3–37: Sequence for Setting SONET Signal Parameters When Demapping a
Tributary Signal
Setting the Receive Rate
Setting the Receive Rate
To set the receive rate:
3–100
To set the receive rate:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
Receive Rate
SETTINGS
(see Figure 3–38)
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
as appropriate
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
Receive Rate
SETTINGS
(see Figure 3–38)
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
as appropriate
H Select STS-1, STS-3, OC-1, OC-3, or OC-12 to receive a
SONET signal.
H Select STS-1, STS-3, OC-1, OC-3, or OC-12 to receive a
SONET signal.
H Select DS1, DS3, or DS3→DS1 to receive a tributary rate signal.
See page 3–121 for details on setting tributary signal parameters.
H Select DS1, DS3, or DS3→DS1 to receive a tributary rate signal.
See page 3–121 for details on setting tributary signal parameters.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–100
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Available SONET
Receive Rates
Available SONET
Receive Rates
Figure 3–38: SONET Receive Rates
Figure 3–38: SONET Receive Rates
Independent Receive and Transmit Settings
Independent Receive and Transmit Settings
Generally, you can set the receive and transmit settings independently. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the STS-1
rate while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the OC-3
rate.
Generally, you can set the receive and transmit settings independently. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the STS-1
rate while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the OC-3
rate.
However, when working with tributary signals, the receive and
transmit parameters are not completely independent. You cannot
receive a DS1 signal and transmit a DS3 signal. When working with
tributary signals, you must set the mapping for receive and transmit
to the same value or to Bulk Fill No Mapping. For example, you
can receive a DS1 signal and transmit an OC-12 signal, but you must
set the mapping of the transmitted signal to either Bulk Fill No
Mapping or DS1; it cannot be set to DS3.
However, when working with tributary signals, the receive and
transmit parameters are not completely independent. You cannot
receive a DS1 signal and transmit a DS3 signal. When working with
tributary signals, you must set the mapping for receive and transmit
to the same value or to Bulk Fill No Mapping. For example, you
can receive a DS1 signal and transmit an OC-12 signal, but you must
set the mapping of the transmitted signal to either Bulk Fill No
Mapping or DS1; it cannot be set to DS3.
Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings
Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings
If your application requires that the receive settings and transmit
settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.
After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the
If your application requires that the receive settings and transmit
settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.
After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–101
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–101
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
RECEIVE SETTINGS page will also be made to the corresponding
setting in the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE menu.
The inverse is also true.
RECEIVE SETTINGS page will also be made to the corresponding
setting in the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE menu.
The inverse is also true.
To couple the receive and transmit settings together from the
RECEIVE SETTINGS page:
To couple the receive and transmit settings together from the
RECEIVE SETTINGS page:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Highlight
Parameter
Tx/Rx Settings
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Coupled
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
NOTE. When settings are coupled from the RECEIVE SETTINGS
page, the transmit parameters are changed to match the receive
parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, the receive parameters are changed to
match the transmit parameters.
NOTE. When settings are coupled from the RECEIVE SETTINGS
page, the transmit parameters are changed to match the receive
parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, the receive parameters are changed to
match the transmit parameters.
To change receive and transmit settings so that they are no longer
coupled:
To change receive and transmit settings so that they are no longer
coupled:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Independent
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Independent
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.
3–102
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.
3–102
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
NOTE. When the incoming line rate changes, a valid LOS must occur
between the old and new line rates; otherwise, the CTS 710 might
lose pattern lock and display an LOS or LOF status. If this occurs,
reselect the correct Receive line rate after the change or initiate a
valid LOS (for example, disconnect and reconnect the received signal
or assert LOS at the source).
Setting the Receive Level
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
NOTE. When the incoming line rate changes, a valid LOS must occur
between the old and new line rates; otherwise, the CTS 710 might
lose pattern lock and display an LOS or LOF status. If this occurs,
reselect the correct Receive line rate after the change or initiate a
valid LOS (for example, disconnect and reconnect the received signal
or assert LOS at the source).
Setting the Receive Level
To specify the receive level for electrical signals:
To specify the receive level for electrical signals:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Receive Level
XConnect
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Receive Level
XConnect
Low
Low
High
High
Monitor
Monitor
H Select XConnect to set the line level to the cross-connect level.
H Select XConnect to set the line level to the cross-connect level.
H Select Low to set the line level to low.
H Select Low to set the line level to low.
H Select High to set the line level to high.
H Select High to set the line level to high.
H Select Monitor to set the line level to the monitor level.
H Select Monitor to set the line level to the monitor level.
Setting the Signal Structure
Setting the Signal Structure
If you are receiving an STS-3, OC-3 or OC-12 signal, you can
specify whether the signal consists of STS-1 payloads or STS-3c
payloads.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
If you are receiving an STS-3, OC-3 or OC-12 signal, you can
specify whether the signal consists of STS-1 payloads or STS-3c
payloads.
3–103
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–103
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
To specify the structure of a received STS-3, OC-3, or OC-12 signal:
To specify the structure of a received STS-3, OC-3, or OC-12 signal:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Signal Structure
STS-1
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Signal Structure
STS-1
STS-3c
Specifying Which STS to Test
Specifying Which STS to Test
If you are using a line rate other than the SONET basic-level rates
STS-1 or OC-1, you must select one STS to test.
If you are using a line rate other than the SONET basic-level rates
STS-1 or OC-1, you must select one STS to test.
To designate which STS to test:
To designate which STS to test:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
STS Under Test
as appropriate
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
STS Under Test
as appropriate
Setting the Mapping
3–104
STS-3c
Setting the Mapping
You can specify whether the payload contains live data or not. If you
know the mapping of the received signal, you can specify what the
mapping is on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page.
You can specify whether the payload contains live data or not. If you
know the mapping of the received signal, you can specify what the
mapping is on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page.
NOTE. The CTS 710 cannot demap a tributary signal and transmit a
tributary signal at the same time.
NOTE. The CTS 710 cannot demap a tributary signal and transmit a
tributary signal at the same time.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–104
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
To specify the mapping of the received signal:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Mapping
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
To specify the mapping of the received signal:
Select Choice
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Equipped)
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Mapping
Select Choice
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Equipped)
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Unequipped)
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Unequipped)
DS3
DS3
VT1.5
VT1.5
NOTE. Some mappings require options that might not be installed in
your CTS 710. Depending on the mapping you choose, you might
need to set additional parameters.
NOTE. Some mappings require options that might not be installed in
your CTS 710. Depending on the mapping you choose, you might
need to set additional parameters.
H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Equipped) to receive an SPE that
is filled with the test pattern specified (on the Test Pattern line)
and where the C2 byte is set to 1.
H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Equipped) to receive an SPE that
is filled with the test pattern specified (on the Test Pattern line)
and where the C2 byte is set to 1.
H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) to receive an SPE
that is filled with the test pattern specified (on the Test Pattern
line) and where the C2 byte is set to 0.
H Select Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) to receive an SPE
that is filled with the test pattern specified (on the Test Pattern
line) and where the C2 byte is set to 0.
H Select VT 1.5 Async to demap a DS1 signal from the received
signal. See Demapping a Tributary Signal for details.
H Select VT 1.5 Async to demap a DS1 signal from the received
signal. See Demapping a Tributary Signal for details.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–105
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–105
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
3–106
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
NOTE. The CTS 710 will report errors incorrectly when the receive
mapping is set to VT 1.5 Async but the received signal does not
actually contain any tributary signals. For example, if the transmitted signal is an STS-3 signal using a PRBS for the payload and
the receive mapping is set to VT 1.5 Async, the CTS 710 will report
errors for VT AIS, VT FERF, VT FEBE, VT BIP, and VT LOP. This
occurs only when the received signal does not contain a tributary
signal but the CTS 710 is configured to receive a signal that contains
a tributary. This applies only to CTS 710s with the Add/Drop/Test
Option.
NOTE. The CTS 710 will report errors incorrectly when the receive
mapping is set to VT 1.5 Async but the received signal does not
actually contain any tributary signals. For example, if the transmitted signal is an STS-3 signal using a PRBS for the payload and
the receive mapping is set to VT 1.5 Async, the CTS 710 will report
errors for VT AIS, VT FERF, VT FEBE, VT BIP, and VT LOP. This
occurs only when the received signal does not contain a tributary
signal but the CTS 710 is configured to receive a signal that contains
a tributary. This applies only to CTS 710s with the Add/Drop/Test
Option.
H Select DS3 to demap a DS3 signal from the received signal. See
Demapping a Tributary Signal for details.
H Select DS3 to demap a DS3 signal from the received signal. See
Demapping a Tributary Signal for details.
H Select DS3–>DS1 to demap a DS1 signal from the received
signal. See Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Mapped in a
SONET Signal for details.
H Select DS3–>DS1 to demap a DS1 signal from the received
signal. See Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Mapped in a
SONET Signal for details.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–106
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Mapped in a SONET
Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Mapped in a SONET
Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
To demultiplex a DS1 signal from a SONET signal that uses DS3
mapping:
To demultiplex a DS1 signal from a SONET signal that uses DS3
mapping:
1. After setting the SONET signal mapping to DS3–>DS1 Demux,
specify the DS3 mapping as follows:
1. After setting the SONET signal mapping to DS3–>DS1 Demux,
specify the DS3 mapping as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
DS3 Framing
DS3 C–bit
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
DS3 Framing
DS3 C–bit
DS3 M13
DS3 M13
2. Specify the DS1 User Test as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
2. Specify the DS1 User Test as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
DS1 Under Test
DS1 #1
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
DS1 Under Test
DS1 #1
DS1 #28
DS1 #28
Next
Next
Previous
Previous
H Select DS1 #1 to specify the first DS1 signal.
H Select DS1 #1 to specify the first DS1 signal.
H Select DS1 #28 to specify the last DS1 signal.
H Select DS1 #28 to specify the last DS1 signal.
H Select Next to change the selection to the next higher DS1
signal.
H Select Next to change the selection to the next higher DS1
signal.
H Select Previous to change the selection to the next lower DS1
signal.
H Select Previous to change the selection to the next lower DS1
signal.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–107
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–107
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
3. Specify the DS1 Framing as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
3. Specify the DS1 Framing as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Framing
DS1 Unframed
Press Menu
Button
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Framing
DS1 Unframed
DS1 SF (D4)
DS1 SF (D4)
DS1 ESF
DS1 ESF
H Select DS1 Unframed to demultiplex an unframed DS1
signal or a DS1 signal whose framing is unknown.
H Select DS1 Unframed to demultiplex an unframed DS1
signal or a DS1 signal whose framing is unknown.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to demultiplex a DS1 signal in D4
Superframe format.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to demultiplex a DS1 signal in D4
Superframe format.
H Select DS1 ESF to demultiplex a DS1 signal in Extended
Superframe format.
H Select DS1 ESF to demultiplex a DS1 signal in Extended
Superframe format.
4. To drop the DS1 signal to the front panel connectors:
Press Menu
Button
3–108
Select Menu
Page
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Tributary Drop
On
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
4. To drop the DS1 signal to the front panel connectors:
Press Menu
Button
3–108
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Tributary Drop
On
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
5. Specify the received test pattern as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Test Pattern
5. Specify the received test pattern as follows:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
PRBS
2^23–1
Highlight
Parameter
Test Pattern
Select Choice
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
PRBS
2^15–1
QRSS
2^20–1
QRSS
2^20–1
All Ones
All Ones
All Zeros
All Zeros
1 in 8
1 in 8
3 in 24
3 in 24
User Word
8 Bit
User Word
8 Bit
User Word
16 Bit
User Word
16 Bit
User Word
24 Bit
User Word
24 Bit
Unknown
Unknown
H Select User Word 8 Bit, User Word 16 Bit, or User Word
24 Bit to receive test patterns different from the preset
choices. If you choose User Word, the test pattern description
changes to show the selected bit pattern. Edit the bits of the
word as needed.
H Select User Word 8 Bit, User Word 16 Bit, or User Word
24 Bit to receive test patterns different from the preset
choices. If you choose User Word, the test pattern description
changes to show the selected bit pattern. Edit the bits of the
word as needed.
H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is
being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.
H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is
being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.
The demultiplexed DS1 signal will be delivered to the DS1 OUT
connector on the front panel.
The demultiplexed DS1 signal will be delivered to the DS1 OUT
connector on the front panel.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–109
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–109
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Demapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
Demapping a Tributary Signal (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
To demap and test a tributary signal, you set Mapping to the
appropriate tributary mapping.
To demap and test a tributary signal, you set Mapping to the
appropriate tributary mapping.
NOTE. The CTS 710 cannot demap a tributary signal and transmit a
tributary signal at the same time.
NOTE. The CTS 710 cannot demap a tributary signal and transmit a
tributary signal at the same time.
When you use tributary signal mapping, you must also specify the
virtual tributary under test and payload (see Figure 3–39).
When you use tributary signal mapping, you must also specify the
virtual tributary under test and payload (see Figure 3–39).
Figure 3–39: Setting Tributary Mapping
Figure 3–39: Setting Tributary Mapping
To specify the VT Under Test and set the payload:
To specify the VT Under Test and set the payload:
6. Specify the VT Under Test as follows:
6. Specify the VT Under Test as follows:
3–110
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
VT Under Test
as appropriate
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
VT Under Test
as appropriate
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–110
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
H Select VT #1 to specify the first virtual tributary.
H Select VT #1 to specify the first virtual tributary.
H Select VT #28 to specify the last virtual tributary.
H Select VT #28 to specify the last virtual tributary.
H Select Next to change the selection to the next higher virtual
tributary.
H Select Next to change the selection to the next higher virtual
tributary.
H Select Previous to change the selection to the next lower
virtual tributary.
H Select Previous to change the selection to the next lower
virtual tributary.
7. Specify the payload as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
7. Specify the payload as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Payload
as appropriate
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Payload
as appropriate
H Select DS1 Unframed to demap an unframed DS1 signal or a
DS1 signal whose framing is unknown.
H Select DS1 Unframed to demap an unframed DS1 signal or a
DS1 signal whose framing is unknown.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to demap a DS1 signal (in D4 Superframe format) from the payload of the selected virtual
tributary.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to demap a DS1 signal (in D4 Superframe format) from the payload of the selected virtual
tributary.
H Select DS1 ESF to demap a DS1 signal (in Extended
Superframe format) from the payload of the selected virtual
tributary.
H Select DS1 ESF to demap a DS1 signal (in Extended
Superframe format) from the payload of the selected virtual
tributary.
H Select DS3 Unframed to demap an unframed DS3 signal or a
DS3 signal whose framing is unknown.
H Select DS3 Unframed to demap an unframed DS3 signal or a
DS3 signal whose framing is unknown.
H Select DS3 C-bit to demap a DS3 signal with C-bit framing.
H Select DS3 C-bit to demap a DS3 signal with C-bit framing.
H Select DS3 M13 to demap a DS3 signal with M-13 framing.
H Select DS3 M13 to demap a DS3 signal with M-13 framing.
Dropping a Tributary Signal
Dropping a Tributary Signal
To drop a signal it must be demapped, as described previously, and
you must turn on Tributary Drop.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–111
To drop a signal it must be demapped, as described previously, and
you must turn on Tributary Drop.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–111
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
To turn on Tributary Drop:
3–112
To turn on Tributary Drop:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Tributary Drop
Off
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Tributary Drop
Off
On AMI
On AMI
On B8ZS
On B8ZS
H Select On to drop the signal specified on the Payload line.
The signal will be dropped to the appropriate OUT connector
on the front panel.
H Select On to drop the signal specified on the Payload line.
The signal will be dropped to the appropriate OUT connector
on the front panel.
H Select On AMI to drop a DS1 signal using Alternate Mark
Inversion coding.
H Select On AMI to drop a DS1 signal using Alternate Mark
Inversion coding.
H Select On B8ZS to drop a DS1 signal using Binary Eight
Zero Substitution coding.
H Select On B8ZS to drop a DS1 signal using Binary Eight
Zero Substitution coding.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–112
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting the Test Pattern
Setting the Test Pattern
To specify the test pattern that will be received:
To specify the test pattern that will be received:
1. Specify the received test pattern using the following procedure:
1. Specify the received test pattern using the following procedure:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Test Pattern
Select Choice
PRBS
2^23–1
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Test Pattern
Select Choice
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
PRBS
2^15–1
PRBS
2^09–1
PRBS
2^09–1
All Ones
All Ones
All Zeros
All Zeros
User Word
User Word
Unknown
Unknown
H Select User Word to receive a test pattern different from the
preset choices. If you choose User Word, the test pattern
description changes to User Defined Byte.
H Select User Word to receive a test pattern different from the
preset choices. If you choose User Word, the test pattern
description changes to User Defined Byte.
H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is
being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.
H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is
being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.
2. Select the line containing the byte to set the value of the User
Defined Byte.
2. Select the line containing the byte to set the value of the User
Defined Byte.
3. Select a preset choice or select EDIT BYTE to enter a byte string
different from the preset choices.
3. Select a preset choice or select EDIT BYTE to enter a byte string
different from the preset choices.
When you are finished editing the byte, select DONE.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
When you are finished editing the byte, select DONE.
3–113
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–113
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Unequipped Payload Mapping
Unequipped Payload Mapping
If you choose Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) payload mapping,
the CTS 710 receiver expects to find the unequipped code in
byte C2. The received payload is ignored except for parity checks.
If you choose Bulk Fill No Mapping (Unequipped) payload mapping,
the CTS 710 receiver expects to find the unequipped code in
byte C2. The received payload is ignored except for parity checks.
Checking Received Optical Power or Received Peak Voltage
Checking Received Optical Power or Received Peak Voltage
To check the optical power or the peak voltage of the received
SONET signal:
To check the optical power or the peak voltage of the received
SONET signal:
3–114
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
SIGNAL STATUS
none
none
RECEIVE
SIGNAL STATUS
none
none
NOTE. The CTS 710 may take several seconds to respond when a
signal is connected to the input.
NOTE. The CTS 710 may take several seconds to respond when a
signal is connected to the input.
If Receive Rate, on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page, is set to an
optical rate, the SIGNAL STATUS page displays the received optical
power. If Receive Rate is set to an electrical rate, the SIGNAL
STATUS page displays the received peak voltage.
If Receive Rate, on the RECEIVE SETTINGS page, is set to an
optical rate, the SIGNAL STATUS page displays the received optical
power. If Receive Rate is set to an electrical rate, the SIGNAL
STATUS page displays the received peak voltage.
The optical power of the received signal is displayed in dBm (see
Figure 3–40). The peak voltage of the received signal is displayed in
volts. The SIGNAL STATUS page does not display results for
tributary signals.
The optical power of the received signal is displayed in dBm (see
Figure 3–40). The peak voltage of the received signal is displayed in
volts. The SIGNAL STATUS page does not display results for
tributary signals.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–114
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Figure 3–40: Displaying Received Optical Power
Figure 3–40: Displaying Received Optical Power
Viewing Overhead Bytes
Viewing Overhead Bytes
This section describes how to use the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD
and PATH OVERHEAD pages to view overhead bytes. The display
updates about once per second to track changes in the overhead. At
any time, you can pause the updating process to analyze the bytes.
This section describes how to use the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD
and PATH OVERHEAD pages to view overhead bytes. The display
updates about once per second to track changes in the overhead. At
any time, you can pause the updating process to analyze the bytes.
Viewing Transport Overhead Bytes
Viewing Transport Overhead Bytes
To view transport overhead bytes:
To view transport overhead bytes:
1. Display the transport overhead as follows:
1. Display the transport overhead as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
none
none
RECEIVE
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
none
none
If you are receiving a line rate higher than the SONET basic-level
rates STS-1 or OC-1, you must indicate which overhead, at the
STS-1 level, you want to display.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–115
If you are receiving a line rate higher than the SONET basic-level
rates STS-1 or OC-1, you must indicate which overhead, at the
STS-1 level, you want to display.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–115
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
2. Select the columns you wish to display as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Showing
Overhead for
3–116
2. Select the columns you wish to display as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Choice
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
as appropriate
Showing
Overhead for
Viewing Path Overhead Bytes
Viewing Path Overhead Bytes
To view path overhead bytes:
To view path overhead bytes:
1. Display the path overhead as follows:
1. Display the path overhead as follows:
Select Choice
as appropriate
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
Overhead View
VT1.5 Overhead
RECEIVE
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
Overhead View
VT1.5 Overhead
NOTE. The choices available depend on the mapping of the received
signal.
NOTE. The choices available depend on the mapping of the received
signal.
H Select VT1.5 Overhead to display the V5 overhead byte.
H Select VT1.5 Overhead to display the V5 overhead byte.
Displaying the J1 Path Trace Message
Displaying the J1 Path Trace Message
To view the Path Trace Message:
To view the Path Trace Message:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
PATH
none
OVERHEAD
(see Figure 3–41)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
none
RECEIVE
PATH
none
OVERHEAD
(see Figure 3–41)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–116
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
none
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Displaying the V5 Byte
Displaying the V5 Byte
To view the V5 byte:
To view the V5 byte:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
PATH
Overhead View
OVERHEAD
(see Figure 3–41)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
VT1.5 Overhead
RECEIVE
PATH
Overhead View
OVERHEAD
(see Figure 3–41)
Select Choice
VT1.5 Overhead
Figure 3–41: J1 Path Trace Message Received by the CTS 710
Figure 3–41: J1 Path Trace Message Received by the CTS 710
Dropping DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes
Dropping DCC and User Channel Overhead Bytes
You drop the contents of the Data Communications Channel (DCC)
and User Channel to an external protocol analyzer. The data from the
DCC and User Channel is dropped through the Overhead Add/Drop
Port located on the rear panel. See Appendix G for detailed
information on the port pin assignments.
You drop the contents of the Data Communications Channel (DCC)
and User Channel to an external protocol analyzer. The data from the
DCC and User Channel is dropped through the Overhead Add/Drop
Port located on the rear panel. See Appendix G for detailed
information on the port pin assignments.
To drop data from the DCC:
To drop data from the DCC:
1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the
Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.
1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the
Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–117
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–117
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
2. Configure the CTS 710 to drop the DCC data bytes:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
External Drop
None
(see Figure 3–42)
2. Configure the CTS 710 to drop the DCC data bytes:
Select Choice
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
TRANSPORT
OVERHEAD
External Drop
None
(see Figure 3–42)
Select Choice
D1–D3
D1–D3
D4–D12
D4–D12
F1
F1
H Select None if you do not want to drop the DCC bytes.
H Select None if you do not want to drop the DCC bytes.
H Select D1–D3 to drop the D1–D3 bytes of the DCC.
H Select D1–D3 to drop the D1–D3 bytes of the DCC.
H Select D4–D12 to drop the D4–D12 bytes of the DCC.
H Select D4–D12 to drop the D4–D12 bytes of the DCC.
H Select F1 to drop the F1 byte of the DCC.
H Select F1 to drop the F1 byte of the DCC.
Figure 3–42: Dropping Data from the DCC
3–118
Press Menu
Button
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Figure 3–42: Dropping Data from the DCC
3–118
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
To drop data from the User Channel:
To drop data from the User Channel:
1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the
Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.
1. Connect an external protocol analyzer to the CTS 710 using the
Overhead Add/Drop Port on the rear panel of the CTS 710.
2. Configure the CTS 710 to drop the User Channel data byte:
2. Configure the CTS 710 to drop the User Channel data byte:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
PATH
OVERHEAD
External Drop
None
(see Figure 3–43)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
PATH
OVERHEAD
External Drop
None
(see Figure 3–43)
F2
Select Choice
F2
H Select None if you do not want to drop the User Channel data.
H Select None if you do not want to drop the User Channel data.
H Select F2 to drop the User Channel byte.
H Select F2 to drop the User Channel byte.
Figure 3–43: Dropping the User Channel Data Byte
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Figure 3–43: Dropping the User Channel Data Byte
3–119
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–119
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Setting SONETSDH Receive Parameters
Controlling the Display Update
Controlling the Display Update
To pause or continue overhead byte updating:
To pause or continue overhead byte updating:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
PATH
OVERHEAD
Pause Control
Pause
RECEIVE
PATH
OVERHEAD
Pause Control
Pause
Continue
3–120
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Continue
3–120
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Tributary Receive Parameters
Setting Tributary Receive Parameters
This section describes how to manually set the receive rate, receive
level, framing, and test pattern for tributary signals.
This section describes how to manually set the receive rate, receive
level, framing, and test pattern for tributary signals.
Pressing AUTOSCAN sets the receive parameters automatically
based on the received signal.
Pressing AUTOSCAN sets the receive parameters automatically
based on the received signal.
Steps for Setting Parameters
Steps for Setting Parameters
The sequence of steps for setting receive parameters varies with
signal to be received. Figure 3–44 shows the sequence of steps
required to set the receive parameters for tributary signals (for
example, DS3). Figure 3–45 shows the sequence of steps required to
set the receive parameters for demultiplexing a DS1 signal from a
DS3 signal.
Set
Rate
Set Level
Set
Framing
Set
Rate
Set Test
Pattern
Figure 3–44: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal Parameters
Set
Rate
Set Level
Set DS3
Framing
Set DS1
Under Test
The sequence of steps for setting receive parameters varies with
signal to be received. Figure 3–44 shows the sequence of steps
required to set the receive parameters for tributary signals (for
example, DS3). Figure 3–45 shows the sequence of steps required to
set the receive parameters for demultiplexing a DS1 signal from a
DS3 signal.
Set DS1
Framing
Set Level
Set
Framing
Set Test
Pattern
Figure 3–44: Sequence for Setting Tributary Signal Parameters
Set Test
Pattern
Set
Rate
Set Level
Set DS3
Framing
Set DS1
Under Test
Set DS1
Framing
Set Test
Pattern
Figure 3–45: Sequence for Setting Signal Parameters to Demultiplex a DS1 from a
DS3
Figure 3–45: Sequence for Setting Signal Parameters to Demultiplex a DS1 from a
DS3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–121
3–121
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
Setting the Receive Rate
Setting the Receive Rate
To set the receive rate:
To set the receive rate:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
Receive Rate
SETTINGS
(see Figure 3–46)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
as appropriate
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
Receive Rate
SETTINGS
(see Figure 3–46)
H Select DS1, DS3, or DS3–>DS1 Demux to receive a tributary
rate signal.
as appropriate
Selecting DS3–>DS1 Demux will demultiplex a DS1 signal from
a received DS3 signal. All measurements are made at the DS1
level except for Loss of Signal.
Available DSn
Receive Rates
Available DSn
Receive Rates
Figure 3–46: Tributary Signal Receive Rates
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
H Select DS1, DS3, or DS3–>DS1 Demux to receive a tributary
rate signal.
Selecting DS3–>DS1 Demux will demultiplex a DS1 signal from
a received DS3 signal. All measurements are made at the DS1
level except for Loss of Signal.
3–122
Highlight
Parameter
Figure 3–46: Tributary Signal Receive Rates
3–122
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
Independent Receive and Transmit Settings
Independent Receive and Transmit Settings
Generally, you can set the receive and transmit settings independently. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the DS3 rate
while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the OC-3 rate.
Generally, you can set the receive and transmit settings independently. For example, you can receive an electrical signal at the DS3 rate
while simultaneously transmitting an optical signal at the OC-3 rate.
However, when working with tributary signals, the transmit and
receive parameters are not completely independent. You cannot
transmit a DS1 signal and receive a DS3 signal. When working with
tributary signals, you must set the mapping for transmit and receive
to the same value or to No Mapping. For example, you can transmit
a VT1.5 signal and receive an OC-12 signal, but you must set the
mapping of the received signal to either No Mapping or VT1.5; it
cannot be set to DS3.
However, when working with tributary signals, the transmit and
receive parameters are not completely independent. You cannot
transmit a DS1 signal and receive a DS3 signal. When working with
tributary signals, you must set the mapping for transmit and receive
to the same value or to No Mapping. For example, you can transmit
a VT1.5 signal and receive an OC-12 signal, but you must set the
mapping of the received signal to either No Mapping or VT1.5; it
cannot be set to DS3.
Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings
Coupling Receive and Transmit Settings
If your application requires that the receive settings and transmit
settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.
After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the
RECEIVE SETTINGS page will also be made to the corresponding
setting in the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE menu.
The inverse is also true.
If your application requires that the receive settings and transmit
settings be identical, you can save time by coupling them together.
After they are coupled, any change you make to a parameter on the
RECEIVE SETTINGS page will also be made to the corresponding
setting in the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page of the RECEIVE menu.
The inverse is also true.
To couple the receive and transmit settings together from the
RECEIVE SETTINGS page:
To couple the receive and transmit settings together from the
RECEIVE SETTINGS page:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
NOTE. When settings are coupled from the RECEIVE SETTINGS
page, the transmit parameters are changed to match the receive
parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, the receive parameters are changed to
match the transmit parameters.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–123
NOTE. When settings are coupled from the RECEIVE SETTINGS
page, the transmit parameters are changed to match the receive
parameters. Conversely, when settings are coupled from the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, the receive parameters are changed to
match the transmit parameters.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–123
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
To change receive and transmit settings so that they are no longer
coupled:
To change receive and transmit settings so that they are no longer
coupled:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Independent
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Independent
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.
Setting the Receive Level
Notice that the signal status icons, in the upper-right corner of the
display, changed to indicate that the settings are no longer coupled.
Setting the Receive Level
To specify the receive level for electrical signals:
To specify the receive level for electrical signals:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Receive Level
Normal
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Receive Level
Normal
Monitor
Monitor
Bridge
Bridge
H Select Normal to set the line level to normal.
H Select Normal to set the line level to normal.
H Select Monitor to set the line level to the monitor level.
H Select Monitor to set the line level to the monitor level.
H Select Bridge to set the line level to the bridged level.
H Select Bridge to set the line level to the bridged level.
Setting the Framing
Setting the Framing
When receiving a tributary signal you can specify the framing of the
signal.
3–124
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
When receiving a tributary signal you can specify the framing of the
signal.
3–124
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
To specify the framing of a received tributary signal:
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
To specify the framing of a received tributary signal:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Framing
as appropriate
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Framing
as appropriate
NOTE. The choices available for Framing depend on the selected
Receive Rate.
NOTE. The choices available for Framing depend on the selected
Receive Rate.
H Select DS1 Unframed to receive an unframed DS1 signal.
H Select DS1 Unframed to receive an unframed DS1 signal.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to receive a DS1 signal with SuperFrame
framing.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to receive a DS1 signal with SuperFrame
framing.
H Select DS1 ESF to receive a DS1 signal with Extended
SuperFrame framing.
H Select DS1 ESF to receive a DS1 signal with Extended
SuperFrame framing.
H Select DS3 Unframed to receive an unframed DS3 signal.
H Select DS3 Unframed to receive an unframed DS3 signal.
H Select DS3 C-bit to receive a DS3 signal using C-bit framing.
H Select DS3 C-bit to receive a DS3 signal using C-bit framing.
H Select DS3 M13 to receive a DS3 signal using M13 framing.
H Select DS3 M13 to receive a DS3 signal using M13 framing.
Specifying the Test Pattern
Specifying the Test Pattern
To specify the test pattern of the received signal:
To specify the test pattern of the received signal:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Test Pattern
as appropriate
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
Test Pattern
as appropriate
NOTE. The choices available for Test Pattern depend on the selected
Receive Rate.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–125
NOTE. The choices available for Test Pattern depend on the selected
Receive Rate.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–125
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
H Select 1 in 8 to set the test pattern to 1000 0000.
H Select 1 in 8 to set the test pattern to 1000 0000.
H Select User Word 8 bit, User Word 16 bit, or User Word
24 bit to set a test pattern different from the preset choices. If
you choose User Word, the test pattern description changes to
User Defined Byte.
H Select User Word 8 bit, User Word 16 bit, or User Word
24 bit to set a test pattern different from the preset choices. If
you choose User Word, the test pattern description changes to
User Defined Byte.
H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is
being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.
H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is
being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.
If you select User Word for the test pattern, set the value of the User
Word as follows:
If you select User Word for the test pattern, set the value of the User
Word as follows:
1. Select the line containing the byte to set the value of the User
Defined Byte.
1. Select the line containing the byte to set the value of the User
Defined Byte.
2. Define the contents of the User Defined Byte as follows:
2. Define the contents of the User Defined Byte as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
select displayed
byte
3–126
Press Menu
Button
Select Choice
Set to 00000000
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
select displayed
byte
Select Choice
Set to 00000000
Set to 11111111
Set to 11111111
Default 10101010
Default 10101010
EDIT BYTE
EDIT BYTE
H Select Set to 00000000 to set the test pattern to all zeros.
H Select Set to 00000000 to set the test pattern to all zeros.
H Select Set to 11111111 to set the test pattern to all ones.
H Select Set to 11111111 to set the test pattern to all ones.
H Select Default 10101010 to set the test pattern to alternating
ones and zeros
H Select Default 10101010 to set the test pattern to alternating
ones and zeros
3. Select EDIT BYTE to specify a value different from the preset
choices.
3. Select EDIT BYTE to specify a value different from the preset
choices.
4. Select DONE when you are finished editing the byte.
4. Select DONE when you are finished editing the byte.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–126
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Signal
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
Demultiplexing a DS1 from a DS3 Signal
To demultiplex a DS1 signal from a DS3 signal:
To demultiplex a DS1 signal from a DS3 signal:
1. After setting the Receive Rate to DS3–>DS1 Demux, specify the
DS3 framing as follows:
1. After setting the Receive Rate to DS3–>DS1 Demux, specify the
DS3 framing as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
DS3 Framing
DS3 C–bit
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
SETTINGS
DS3 Framing
DS3 C–bit
DS3 M13
DS3 M13
2. Specify the DS1 User Test as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
2. Specify the DS1 User Test as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
DS1 Under Test
DS1 #1
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
DS1 Under Test
DS1 #1
DS1 #28
DS1 #28
Next
Next
Previous
Previous
H Select DS1 #1 to specify the first DS1 signal.
H Select DS1 #1 to specify the first DS1 signal.
H Select DS1 #28 to specify the last DS1 signal.
H Select DS1 #28 to specify the last DS1 signal.
H Select Next to change the selection to the next higher DS1
signal.
H Select Next to change the selection to the next higher DS1
signal.
H Select Previous to change the selection to the next lower DS1
signal.
H Select Previous to change the selection to the next lower DS1
signal.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–127
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–127
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
3. Specify the DS1 Framing as follows:
Press Menu
Button
3–128
Select Menu
Page
3. Specify the DS1 Framing as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Framing
DS1 Unframed
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Framing
DS1 Unframed
DS1 SF (D4)
DS1 SF (D4)
DS1 ESF
DS1 ESF
H Select DS1 Unframed to demultiplex an unframed DS1
signal or a DS1 signal whose framing is unknown.
H Select DS1 Unframed to demultiplex an unframed DS1
signal or a DS1 signal whose framing is unknown.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to demultiplex a DS1 signal in D4
Superframe format.
H Select DS1 SF (D4) to demultiplex a DS1 signal in D4
Superframe format.
H Select DS1 ESF to demultiplex a DS1 signal in Extended
Superframe format.
H Select DS1 ESF to demultiplex a DS1 signal in Extended
Superframe format.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–128
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
4. Specify the received test pattern as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Test Pattern
4. Specify the received test pattern as follows:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
PRBS
2^23–1
Highlight
Parameter
Test Pattern
Select Choice
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
PRBS
2^15–1
QRSS
2^20–1
QRSS
2^20–1
All Ones
All Ones
All Zeros
All Zeros
1 in 8
1 in 8
3 in 24
3 in 24
User Word
8 Bit
User Word
8 Bit
User Word
16 Bit
User Word
16 Bit
User Word
24 Bit
User Word
24 Bit
Unknown
Unknown
H Select User Word 8 Bit, User Word 16 Bit, or User Word
24 Bit to receive test patterns different from the preset
choices. If you choose User Word, the test pattern description
changes to show the selected bit pattern. Edit the bits of the
word as needed.
H Select User Word 8 Bit, User Word 16 Bit, or User Word
24 Bit to receive test patterns different from the preset
choices. If you choose User Word, the test pattern description
changes to show the selected bit pattern. Edit the bits of the
word as needed.
H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is
being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.
H Select Unknown when you do not know what test pattern is
being transmitted or when the test pattern is not stable.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–129
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–129
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
3–130
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting TributaryPDH Receive Parameters
3–130
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
This section describes how to simulate error conditions, set alarms,
and simulate network failures. To test the response of a network, you
might need to simulate parity errors, send alarm signals, and simulate
network failures. This type of testing is simple and convenient using
the CTS 710 SONET Test Set.
Simulating Error Conditions
Simulating Error Conditions
The specific errors the CTS 710 simulates depend on the transmit
rate and payload mapping.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
This section describes how to simulate error conditions, set alarms,
and simulate network failures. To test the response of a network, you
might need to simulate parity errors, send alarm signals, and simulate
network failures. This type of testing is simple and convenient using
the CTS 710 SONET Test Set.
3–131
The specific errors the CTS 710 simulates depend on the transmit
rate and payload mapping.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–131
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Specifying the Error to Insert
Specifying the Error to Insert
Specify the type of error transmitted as follows:
Specify the type of error transmitted as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Error type set to
Section B1 BIP
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Error type set to
Section B1 BIP
Line B2 BIP
Line B2 BIP
Path B3 BIP
Path B3 BIP
Path FEBE
Path FEBE
Frame Bit
Frame Bit
VT BIP
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
VT BIP
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
VT FEBE
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
VT FEBE
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
Pattern Bit
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
Pattern Bit
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
CRC (ESF)
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
CRC (ESF)
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
P–Bit
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
P–Bit
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
C–Bit
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
C–Bit
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
NOTE. The errors available to insert depend on the Mapping and
Payload settings. Not all errors are available all the time.
3–132
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
NOTE. The errors available to insert depend on the Mapping and
Payload settings. Not all errors are available all the time.
3–132
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Inserting Errors
Inserting Errors
You can choose to insert errors manually (one at a time) or you can
have errors inserted automatically at a rate you specify.
You can choose to insert errors manually (one at a time) or you can
have errors inserted automatically at a rate you specify.
To insert a single error, press the INSERT ERROR button.
To insert a single error, press the INSERT ERROR button.
To have the CTS 710 insert errors automatically:
To have the CTS 710 insert errors automatically:
1. Turn on automatic error insertion as follows:
1. Turn on automatic error insertion as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Error rate set to
None
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Error rate set to
None
1e–3
1e–3
1e–4
1e–4
1e–5
1e–5
1e–6
1e–6
1e–7
1e–7
1e–8
1e–8
USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
H Select None to turn off automatic error insertion. However,
you can still insert errors manually using the front-panel
INSERT ERROR button.
H Select None to turn off automatic error insertion. However,
you can still insert errors manually using the front-panel
INSERT ERROR button.
H The maximum allowable error rate depends on the transmit
rate, signal structure, and error type (see Tables 3–11 and
3–12).
H The maximum allowable error rate depends on the transmit
rate, signal structure, and error type (see Tables 3–11 and
3–12).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–133
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–133
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Table 3–11: Maximum Error Rates for SONET Signals
Table 3–11: Maximum Error Rates for SONET Signals
Error Type
Error Type
Rate:
Structure
Section B1
BIP
Line B2
BIP
Path B3
BIP
Path FEBE
Pattern Bit
STS-1/OC-1: 1E–3
1 X STS-1
1E–3
1E–3
1E–3
1E–3
STS-3/OC-3: 1E–4
3 X STS-1
1E–4
1E–3
1E–3
STS-3/OC-3: 1E–4
1 X STS-3c
1E–4
1E–4
OC-12:
12 X STS-1
1E–5
1E–4
OC-12:
4 X STS-3c
1E–5
1E–4
Line B2
BIP
Path B3
BIP
Path FEBE
Pattern Bit
STS-1/OC-1: 1E–3
1 X STS-1
1E–3
1E–3
1E–3
1E–3
1E–3
STS-3/OC-3: 1E–4
3 X STS-1
1E–4
1E–3
1E–3
1E–3
1E–4
1E–3
STS-3/OC-3: 1E–4
1 X STS-3c
1E–4
1E–4
1E–4
1E–3
1E–3
1E–3
1E–3
OC-12:
12 X STS-1
1E–5
1E–4
1E–3
1E–3
1E–3
1E–4
1E–4
1E–3
OC-12:
4 X STS-3c
1E–5
1E–4
1E–4
1E–4
1E–3
Table 3–12: Maximum Error Rates for Tributary Signals
DS1
Rate:
Structure
Section B1
BIP
Table 3–12: Maximum Error Rates for Tributary Signals
DS3
DS1
DS3
Error Type
Maximum
Rate
Minimum
Rate
Maximum
Rate
Minimum
Rate
Error Type
Maximum
Rate
Minimum
Rate
Maximum
Rate
Minimum
Rate
VT BIP
1E–3
1E–10
N/A
N/A
VT BIP
1E–3
1E–10
N/A
N/A
VT FEBE
1E–4
1E–10
N/A
N/A
VT FEBE
1E–4
1E–10
N/A
N/A
Parity
N/A
N/A
1E–4
1E–9
Parity
N/A
N/A
1E–4
1E–9
CRC
1E–4
1E–8
N/A
N/A
CRC
1E–4
1E–8
N/A
N/A
Frame
1E–2
1E–5
1E–2
1E–7
Frame
1E–2
1E–5
1E–2
1E–7
Data
1E–2
1E–8
1E–2
1E–9
Data
1E–2
1E–8
1E–2
1E–9
3–134
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–134
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
NOTE. The CTS 710 can measure all the error rates it can transmit
except for DS3 Parity where the maximum measured error rate is
5e-5.
NOTE. The CTS 710 can measure all the error rates it can transmit
except for DS3 Parity where the maximum measured error rate is
5e-5.
2. Select USER DEFINED to specify an error rate different from
the preset choices. The CTS 710 enters edit mode (Figure 3–47).
2. Select USER DEFINED to specify an error rate different from
the preset choices. The CTS 710 enters edit mode (Figure 3–47).
H If the knob is assigned to Coarse, it changes the exponent.
H If the knob is assigned to Coarse, it changes the exponent.
H If the knob is assigned to Fine, it changes the decimal
number.
H If the knob is assigned to Fine, it changes the decimal
number.
3. Select DONE to enter the error rate you have specified.
3. Select DONE to enter the error rate you have specified.
Figure 3–47: Setting An Error Rate
Figure 3–47: Setting An Error Rate
Setting Alarms
Setting Alarms
The CTS 710 can simulate alarm conditions to test the response of
the network.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–135
The CTS 710 can simulate alarm conditions to test the response of
the network.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–135
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
To transmit an alarm:
3–136
To transmit an alarm:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Transmit alarm
set to
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
None
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Transmit alarm
set to
Select Choice
None
Line AIS
Line AIS
Line FERF
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path AIS
Path FERF
Path FERF
VT AIS
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
VT AIS
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
VT FERF
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
VT FERF
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
DSn Yellow
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
DSn Yellow
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
DSn AIS
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
DSn AIS
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
DS3 Idle
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
DS3 Idle
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
H Select None to stop transmitting an alarm.
H Select None to stop transmitting an alarm.
H Select Line AIS to transmit a Line AIS alarm.
H Select Line AIS to transmit a Line AIS alarm.
H Select Line FERF to transmit a Line FERF alarm.
H Select Line FERF to transmit a Line FERF alarm.
H Select Path AIS to transmit a Path AIS alarm.
H Select Path AIS to transmit a Path AIS alarm.
H Select Path FERF to transmit a Path FERF alarm.
H Select Path FERF to transmit a Path FERF alarm.
H Select VT AIS to transmit a VT AIS alarm.
H Select VT AIS to transmit a VT AIS alarm.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–136
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
H Select VT FERF to transmit a VT FERF alarm.
H Select VT FERF to transmit a VT FERF alarm.
H Select DSn Yellow to transmit a DSn Yellow alarm.
H Select DSn Yellow to transmit a DSn Yellow alarm.
H Select DSn AIS to transmit a DSn AIS alarm.
H Select DSn AIS to transmit a DSn AIS alarm.
H Select DS3 Idle to transmit a DS3 Idle alarm.
H Select DS3 Idle to transmit a DS3 Idle alarm.
NOTE. The VT AIS and VT FERF choices will be displayed only if
Mapping, on the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, is set to VT 1.5 Async.
NOTE. The VT AIS and VT FERF choices will be displayed only if
Mapping, on the TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, is set to VT 1.5 Async.
All transmit alarm choices remain in effect until they are deliberately
turned off.
All transmit alarm choices remain in effect until they are deliberately
turned off.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–137
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–137
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
Simulating Transmit Failures
Simulating Transmit Failures
3–138
The CTS 710 can simulate transmit failure conditions to test the
response of the network.
The CTS 710 can simulate transmit failure conditions to test the
response of the network.
To simulate a transmit failure:
To simulate a transmit failure:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Failure set to
None
TRANSMIT
ERRORS &
ALARMS
Failure set to
None
LOS
LOS
LOF
LOF
STS LOP
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
STS LOP
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
VT LOP
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
VT LOP
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
VT LOM
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
VT LOM
(Add/Drop/Test
Option Only)
NOTE. VT LOP and VT LOM can be selected only if Mapping, on the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, is set to VT 1.5 Async.
NOTE. VT LOP and VT LOM can be selected only if Mapping, on the
TRANSMIT SETTINGS page, is set to VT 1.5 Async.
H Select None to stop simulating failures.
H Select None to stop simulating failures.
H Select LOS to simulate a loss of signal failure.
H Select LOS to simulate a loss of signal failure.
H Select LOF to simulate a loss of frame failure.
H Select LOF to simulate a loss of frame failure.
H Select STS LOP to simulate a loss of pointer failure in the STS.
H Select STS LOP to simulate a loss of pointer failure in the STS.
H Select VT LOP to simulate a loss of pointer failure in the virtual
tributary.
H Select VT LOP to simulate a loss of pointer failure in the virtual
tributary.
H Select VT LOM to simulate a loss of multiframe failure in the
virtual tributary.
H Select VT LOM to simulate a loss of multiframe failure in the
virtual tributary.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–138
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
All transmit failures remain in effect until they are deliberately
turned off.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
All transmit failures remain in effect until they are deliberately
turned off.
3–139
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–139
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
3–140
Setting Alarms and Inserting Errors
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–140
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
This section describes how to generate pointer movements within the
transmitted signal. When stress testing a network, you may want to
move pointers or introduce a frequency offset. The CTS 710 SONET
Test Set allows you to control this type of testing five ways. You can:
This section describes how to generate pointer movements within the
transmitted signal. When stress testing a network, you may want to
move pointers or introduce a frequency offset. The CTS 710 SONET
Test Set allows you to control this type of testing five ways. You can:
H Make discrete pointer movements under manual control
H Make discrete pointer movements under manual control
H Make repetitive pointer movements at a rate you determine
H Make repetitive pointer movements at a rate you determine
H Introduce a frequency offset in the internally generated SPE
H Introduce a frequency offset in the internally generated SPE
H Introduce a frequency offset in the transmit rate
H Introduce a frequency offset in the transmit rate
H Generate sequences of pointer movements
H Generate sequences of pointer movements
Setting Pointers
Setting Pointers
To set up the CTS 710 to make discrete or repetitive pointer
movements:
To set up the CTS 710 to make discrete or repetitive pointer
movements:
1. Specify the pointer mode as follows:
1. Specify the pointer mode as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer / Timing
Mode
Pointer
Movement
The choices allow you to choose to move pointers using time
parameters or with a frequency offset. Selecting Pointer
Movements moves pointers utilizing time parameters.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer / Timing
Mode
Pointer
Movement
The choices allow you to choose to move pointers using time
parameters or with a frequency offset. Selecting Pointer
Movements moves pointers utilizing time parameters.
3–141
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–141
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
2. Specify the pointer type as follows:
2. Specify the pointer type as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer Type
STS Pointer
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer Type
STS Pointer
VT Pointer
3–142
VT Pointer
Manual Pointer Control
Manual Pointer Control
You can move pointers under manual control using the POINTER
ACTION button on the front panel. To set up for this type of control,
use the knob to highlight the Pointer Control line.
You can move pointers under manual control using the POINTER
ACTION button on the front panel. To set up for this type of control,
use the knob to highlight the Pointer Control line.
There are three types of manual pointer movements: Single, Burst,
and Continuous (see Figure 3–48). The choices are described in
detail below; some require additional setup.
There are three types of manual pointer movements: Single, Burst,
and Continuous (see Figure 3–48). The choices are described in
detail below; some require additional setup.
Figure 3–48: Manual Pointer Control Choices
Figure 3–48: Manual Pointer Control Choices
Single Pointer Movements. With Single selected, each press of the
front-panel POINTER ACTION button moves the pointer up or down
Single Pointer Movements. With Single selected, each press of the
front-panel POINTER ACTION button moves the pointer up or down
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–142
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
by one location. The first press increments the pointer, the second
press decrements it, the third press increments it, and so forth.
by one location. The first press increments the pointer, the second
press decrements it, the third press increments it, and so forth.
Burst Pointer Movements. With Burst selected, pressing the
front-panel POINTER ACTION button starts a burst of pointer
movement. Each burst consists of a series of one-location pointer
movements that are spaced four frames apart. Pressing POINTER
ACTION repeatedly alternates between an incrementing burst and a
decrementing burst (see Figure 3–49).
Burst Pointer Movements. With Burst selected, pressing the
front-panel POINTER ACTION button starts a burst of pointer
movement. Each burst consists of a series of one-location pointer
movements that are spaced four frames apart. Pressing POINTER
ACTION repeatedly alternates between an incrementing burst and a
decrementing burst (see Figure 3–49).
To set the number of pointer movements in the burst:
To set the number of pointer movements in the burst:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Control
Burst
Pointer Control
Burst
Burst Size
2
Burst Size
2
Select Menu
Page
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
To start a burst of pointer movements, press POINTER ACTION.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Press Menu
Button
3–143
To start a burst of pointer movements, press POINTER ACTION.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–143
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
First Press of
POINTER
ACTION
Example
Burst of Four
Pointer
Movements
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
First Press of
POINTER
ACTION
Next Two Presses of POINTER
ACTION
Increment
Next Two Presses of POINTER
ACTION
Increment
500 ms,
Nominal
500 ms,
Nominal
Decrement
Figure 3–49: Alternating Burst Pointer Movement
Decrement
Figure 3–49: Alternating Burst Pointer Movement
Setting Pointer to a Specific Value. With Set to Value selected, you can
move the pointer immediately to a new location, with or without a
new data flag being set. Payload data can be lost when you use jump
pointer movements of this type.
Setting Pointer to a Specific Value. With Set to Value selected, you can
move the pointer immediately to a new location, with or without a
new data flag being set. Payload data can be lost when you use jump
pointer movements of this type.
To set the new pointer value for an STS pointer:
To set the new pointer value for an STS pointer:
Press Menu
Button
3–144
Example
Burst of Four
Pointer
Movements
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Control
Pointer Value Set
to
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Set Value
Pointer Control
Set Value
Min 0
Pointer Value Set
to
Min 0
Max 782
Max 782
Default 522
Default 522
Illegal (Max + 1)
Illegal (Max + 1)
USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
H Select Min 0 to set the pointer to location zero (points to the byte
immediately following the H3 transport overhead byte). If you
choose this setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not
need to press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Min 0 to set the pointer to location zero (points to the byte
immediately following the H3 transport overhead byte). If you
choose this setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not
need to press POINTER ACTION.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–144
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
H Select Max 782 to set the pointer to location 782 (points to the
byte immediately preceding the H1 transport overhead byte of the
next frame). If you choose this setting, the pointer is moved
immediately; you do not need to press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Max 782 to set the pointer to location 782 (points to the
byte immediately preceding the H1 transport overhead byte of the
next frame). If you choose this setting, the pointer is moved
immediately; you do not need to press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Default 522 to set the pointer to location 522 (points to the
first payload byte in the next frame). If you choose this setting,
the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to press
POINTER ACTION.
H Select Default 522 to set the pointer to location 522 (points to the
first payload byte in the next frame). If you choose this setting,
the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to press
POINTER ACTION.
H Select Illegal (Max+1) to move the pointer to illegal location 783
(the maximum allowed location + 1). Choosing the illegal pointer
location may cause a loss-of-pointer failure. If you choose this
setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to
press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Illegal (Max+1) to move the pointer to illegal location 783
(the maximum allowed location + 1). Choosing the illegal pointer
location may cause a loss-of-pointer failure. If you choose this
setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to
press POINTER ACTION.
H Select USER DEFINED to set the pointer to a value different
from the preset choices.
H Select USER DEFINED to set the pointer to a value different
from the preset choices.
Selecting USER DEFINED places the CTS 710 into Edit Mode.
Selecting USER DEFINED places the CTS 710 into Edit Mode.
H Select DONE when you are finished setting the pointer value.
H Select DONE when you are finished setting the pointer value.
As soon as you press DONE, the pointer is moved; you do not
need to press POINTER ACTION.
As soon as you press DONE, the pointer is moved; you do not
need to press POINTER ACTION.
To set the new pointer value for a VT pointer:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
To set the new pointer value for a VT pointer:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Control
Set Value
Pointer Control
Set Value
Pointer Value Set
to
Min 0
Pointer Value Set
to
Min 0
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Max 103
Max 103
Default 78
Default 78
Illegal (Max + 1)
Illegal (Max + 1)
USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
3–145
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–145
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
H Select Min 0 to set the pointer to location zero. If you choose this
setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to
press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Min 0 to set the pointer to location zero. If you choose this
setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to
press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Max 103 to set the pointer to location 103. If you choose
this setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to
press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Max 103 to set the pointer to location 103. If you choose
this setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to
press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Default 78 to set the pointer to location 78. If you choose
this setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to
press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Default 78 to set the pointer to location 78. If you choose
this setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to
press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Illegal (Max+1) to move the pointer to illegal location 104
(the maximum allowed location + 1). Choosing the illegal pointer
location may cause a loss-of-pointer failure. If you choose this
setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to
press POINTER ACTION.
H Select Illegal (Max+1) to move the pointer to illegal location 104
(the maximum allowed location + 1). Choosing the illegal pointer
location may cause a loss-of-pointer failure. If you choose this
setting, the pointer is moved immediately; you do not need to
press POINTER ACTION.
3. Specify whether a New Data Flag is set with the pointer
movement as follows:
3. Specify whether a New Data Flag is set with the pointer
movement as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Set with New
Data Flag
Press Menu
Button
Select Choice
Select Menu
Page
Yes
Highlight
Parameter
Set with New
Data Flag
No
3–146
Select Menu
Page
Yes
No
4. Set the Pointer S-Bits as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Choice
4. Set the Pointer S-Bits as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer S–Bits
00
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer S–Bits
00
01
01
10
10
11
11
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–146
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Continuous Pointer Movement
Continuous Pointer Movement
To make repetitive pointer movements:
To make repetitive pointer movements:
1. Specify the type of pointer control and movement rate as follows:
1. Specify the type of pointer control and movement rate as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Control
Continuous
Pointer Control
Continuous
Pointer Rate
Max 48 ms
(Mapping = VT1.5
Async only)
Pointer Rate
Max 48 ms
(Mapping = VT1.5
Async only)
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Max 2ms
Max 2ms
Min 10000ms
Min 10000ms
Default 50ms
Default 50ms
USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
H Select Max 48ms to move the pointer one location every 48
milliseconds.
H Select Max 48ms to move the pointer one location every 48
milliseconds.
H Select Max 2ms to move the pointer one location every
sixteen frames.
H Select Max 2ms to move the pointer one location every
sixteen frames.
H Select Min 10000ms to move the pointer location one
location every 10 seconds.
H Select Min 10000ms to move the pointer location one
location every 10 seconds.
H Select Default 50ms to move the pointer one location every
50 ms.
H Select Default 50ms to move the pointer one location every
50 ms.
H Select USER DEFINED to set continuous pointer movement
at a rate different from the preset choices.
H Select USER DEFINED to set continuous pointer movement
at a rate different from the preset choices.
2. Select USER DEFINED to set the pointer movement to a value
different from the preset choices.
2. Select USER DEFINED to set the pointer movement to a value
different from the preset choices.
Selecting USER DEFINED places the CTS 710 into Edit Mode.
Now you can set the rate to the exact value you want, with 1 ms
resolution. The minimum rate is 1 ms. The maximum rate is
10000 ms.
Selecting USER DEFINED places the CTS 710 into Edit Mode.
Now you can set the rate to the exact value you want, with 1 ms
resolution. The minimum rate is 1 ms. The maximum rate is
10000 ms.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–147
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–147
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
3. Specify the pointer movement direction as follows:
Press Menu
Button
3–148
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Direction
Increment
3. Specify the pointer movement direction as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Direction
Increment
Decrement
Decrement
Alternate
Alternate
H Selecting Increment causes the pointer to increment at the set
rate.
H Selecting Increment causes the pointer to increment at the set
rate.
H Selecting Decrement causes the pointer to decrement at the
set rate.
H Selecting Decrement causes the pointer to decrement at the
set rate.
H Selecting Alternate causes pointer movements at the set rate,
but they alternate in incrementing and decrementing
directions.
H Selecting Alternate causes pointer movements at the set rate,
but they alternate in incrementing and decrementing
directions.
When using continuous pointer movement, a message line in the
display tells you the equivalent payload frequency offset in parts
per million if the pointer direction is set to either increment or
decrement (see Figure 3–50).
When using continuous pointer movement, a message line in the
display tells you the equivalent payload frequency offset in parts
per million if the pointer direction is set to either increment or
decrement (see Figure 3–50).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–148
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Figure 3–50: Incrementing Pointer Location Once Every Two Milliseconds
Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Figure 3–50: Incrementing Pointer Location Once Every Two Milliseconds
Changing Timing
As an alternative to setting pointer movements directly, you can
introduce a frequency offset in the internally-generated SPE, the
transmit line rate, or both together.
As an alternative to setting pointer movements directly, you can
introduce a frequency offset in the internally-generated SPE, the
transmit line rate, or both together.
To generate pointer movements using frequency offset:
To generate pointer movements using frequency offset:
1. Specify the pointer/timing mode as follows:
1. Specify the pointer/timing mode as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer / Timing
Mode
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Frequency Offset
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer / Timing
Mode
3–149
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
Frequency Offset
3–149
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
2. Specify the Offset Mode as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
2. Specify the Offset Mode as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Offset Mode
Line
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Offset Mode
Line
Payload
Payload
H Select Line to change the transmit line rate. With this setting,
the SPE location (pointer) does not move relative to the
transmitted frame.
H Select Line to change the transmit line rate. With this setting,
the SPE location (pointer) does not move relative to the
transmitted frame.
H Select Payload to change the offset of the payload.
H Select Payload to change the offset of the payload.
3. Specify the frequency offset as follows:
Press Menu
Button
3–150
Select Menu
Page
3. Specify the frequency offset as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Frequency Offset
Max +100ppm
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Frequency Offset
Max +100ppm
Stress +4.6ppm
Stress +4.6ppm
Stress –4.6ppm
Stress –4.6ppm
Default 0ppm
Default 0ppm
USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
H Select Max +100ppm to set the frequency offset to the
maximum available amount.
H Select Max +100ppm to set the frequency offset to the
maximum available amount.
H Select Stress +4.6ppm to set the frequency offset at the upper
stratum three limit.
H Select Stress +4.6ppm to set the frequency offset at the upper
stratum three limit.
H Select Stress –4.6ppm to set the frequency offset at the lower
stratum three limit.
H Select Stress –4.6ppm to set the frequency offset at the lower
stratum three limit.
H Select Default 0ppm to turn off frequency offset.
H Select Default 0ppm to turn off frequency offset.
H Select USER DEFINED to set a frequency offset different
from the preset choices.
H Select USER DEFINED to set a frequency offset different
from the preset choices.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–150
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Selecting USER DEFINED places the CTS 710 in Edit Mode.
The knob is assigned to change the value of the frequency offset.
Selecting USER DEFINED places the CTS 710 in Edit Mode.
The knob is assigned to change the value of the frequency offset.
H Coarse changes the frequency offset by 10.0 ppm.
H Coarse changes the frequency offset by 10.0 ppm.
H Fine changes the frequency offset by 0.1 ppm.
H Fine changes the frequency offset by 0.1 ppm.
The frequency offset can be changed by ±100.0 ppm.
The frequency offset can be changed by ±100.0 ppm.
H Select DONE to enter the frequency offset when you are
finished setting it.
H Select DONE to enter the frequency offset when you are
finished setting it.
When using a frequency offset, a message line in the display tells
you the equivalent pointer movement rate. Figure 3–51 shows an
example frequency offset and the resulting message.
When using a frequency offset, a message line in the display tells
you the equivalent pointer movement rate. Figure 3–51 shows an
example frequency offset and the resulting message.
Figure 3–51: Offsetting the Transmit Rate by +4.6 ppm
Figure 3–51: Offsetting the Transmit Rate by +4.6 ppm
Generating Pointer Sequences
Generating Pointer Sequences
In addition to the simpler pointer movements previously described,
the CTS 710 can generate pointer sequences (sequences of pointer
movements). Pointer sequences are made up of three periods: the
Initialization Period, the Cool Down Period, and the Sequence Period
(see Figure 3–52).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–151
In addition to the simpler pointer movements previously described,
the CTS 710 can generate pointer sequences (sequences of pointer
movements). Pointer sequences are made up of three periods: the
Initialization Period, the Cool Down Period, and the Sequence Period
(see Figure 3–52).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–151
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Added or Cancelled Pointer Positions
Added or Cancelled Pointer Positions
...
...
Repeating Pattern
Time
Repeating Pattern
30 s
Initialization Cool Down
3–152
Time
30 s
Initialization Cool Down
Sequence Period
Sequence Period
Figure 3–52: The Three Periods of a Pointer Sequence
Figure 3–52: The Three Periods of a Pointer Sequence
H Initialization Period – a thirty second period where the CTS 710
produces a 30 second burst of 1 pointer movement per second in
the same direction as the specified pointer sequence. The
Initialization Period can be turned on or off.
H Initialization Period – a thirty second period where the CTS 710
produces a 30 second burst of 1 pointer movement per second in
the same direction as the specified pointer sequence. The
Initialization Period can be turned on or off.
H Cool Down Period – a period at least 60 seconds long, following
the Initialization Period, where the specified pointer sequence is
running.
H Cool Down Period – a period at least 60 seconds long, following
the Initialization Period, where the specified pointer sequence is
running.
H Sequence Period – the period following the Cool Down period
where the specified pointer sequence runs continuously.
H Sequence Period – the period following the Cool Down period
where the specified pointer sequence runs continuously.
The CTS 710 generates the pointer sequences described in the
ANSI T1.105.03–1994 standard. The CTS 710 also supports the
sequences described in the ITU-T G.783 standard. An example of a
pointer sequence is shown in Figure 3–53. The details of these
sequences are shown in Table 3–13. Note that not all pointer
sequences are available all the time. Some sequences are available
only with one pointer type or with a specific mapping, as shown in
Table 3–14.
The CTS 710 generates the pointer sequences described in the
ANSI T1.105.03–1994 standard. The CTS 710 also supports the
sequences described in the ITU-T G.783 standard. An example of a
pointer sequence is shown in Figure 3–53. The details of these
sequences are shown in Table 3–13. Note that not all pointer
sequences are available all the time. Some sequences are available
only with one pointer type or with a specific mapping, as shown in
Table 3–14.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–152
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
87–3 Pattern
Pointer Adjustment
No Pointer
Adjustment
87
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
87–3 Pattern
Start of Next
87–3 Pattern
Pointer Adjustment
3
No Pointer
Adjustment
87
...
...
Figure 3–53: An Example of a Pointer Sequence
Figure 3–53: An Example of a Pointer Sequence
Start of Next
87–3 Pattern
3
Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated
Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated
Pointer
Sequence
Description
Pointer
Sequence
Description
Single
Time between pointer adjustments is 30 s.
Single
Time between pointer adjustments is 30 s.
Burst
Time between bursts of 3 pointers for STS pointers is 0.5 ms and for VT
pointers is 2 ms.
Burst
Time between bursts of 3 pointers for STS pointers is 0.5 ms and for VT
pointers is 2 ms.
Time between pointer bursts is 30 s.
Time between pointer bursts is 30 s.
Phase Transient Time between pointer movement burst of seven pointers is 0.25 s,
0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s.
Phase Transient Time between pointer movement burst of seven pointers is 0.25 s,
0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s.
Time between pointer bursts is 30 s.
Periodic
Continuous
Time between pointer bursts is 30 s.
Time between STS pointers has a range of 0.034 s to 10 s with a
resolution of 1 ms.
Periodic
Continuous
Periodic
Time between STS pointers has a range of 0.034 s to 10 s with a
Continuous with resolution of 1 ms.
Cancel
Time between cancelled pointers is equal to: (time between pointer
movements N), where N is selected to be the smallest integer that
makes the product 30 s.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–153
Time between STS pointers has a range of 0.034 s to 10 s with a
resolution of 1 ms.
Periodic
Time between STS pointers has a range of 0.034 s to 10 s with a
Continuous with resolution of 1 ms.
Cancel
Time between cancelled pointers is equal to: (time between pointer
movements N), where N is selected to be the smallest integer that
makes the product 30 s.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–153
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated (Cont.)
Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated (Cont.)
Pointer
Sequence
Pointer
Sequence
Description
Periodic
Time between added pointer movement and previous normal pointer
Continuous with movement for STS pointers is 0.5 ms and for VT1.5 pointers is 2 ms.
Add
Time between normal pointer movements is as follows:
Periodic
Time between added pointer movement and previous normal pointer
Continuous with movement for STS pointers is 0.5 ms and for VT1.5 pointers is 2 ms.
Add
Time between normal pointer movements is as follows:
D STS pointers have a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with a
D STS pointers have a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with a
resolution of 1 ms.
resolution of 1 ms.
D VT1.5 pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with a resolution
D VT1.5 pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with a resolution
of 1 ms.
Periodic 87–3
of 1 ms.
Sequence pattern is 87 pointer movements followed by 3 missing pointer
movements.
Periodic 87–3
Time between STS pointer movements has a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms.
Periodic 87–3
With Cancel
Periodic 87–3
With Add
Periodic 26–1
Sequence pattern is 87 pointer movements followed by 3 missing pointer
movements with a cancelled pointer movement at the 87th pointer.
Sequence pattern is 87 pointer movements followed by 3 missing pointer
movements.
Time between STS pointer movements has a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms.
Periodic 87–3
With Cancel
Sequence pattern is 87 pointer movements followed by 3 missing pointer
movements with a cancelled pointer movement at the 87th pointer.
Time between STS pointer movements has a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms.
Time between STS pointer movements has a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms.
Time between cancelled pointers is equal to: (time between pointers 90 N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this
product 30 s.
Time between cancelled pointers is equal to: (time between pointers 90 N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this
product 30 s.
Sequence pattern is 87 pointer movements followed by 3 missing pointer
movements with an added pointer movement after the 43rd pointer.
Periodic 87–3
With Add
Sequence pattern is 87 pointer movements followed by 3 missing pointer
movements with an added pointer movement after the 43rd pointer.
Time between STS pointer movements has a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms; time between added pointer movement and
previous normal pointer movement for STS pointers is 0.5 ms.
Time between STS pointer movements has a range of 0.34 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms; time between added pointer movement and
previous normal pointer movement for STS pointers is 0.5 ms.
Time between added pointers is equal to: (time between pointers 90
N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this
product 30 s.
Time between added pointers is equal to: (time between pointers 90
N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this
product 30 s.
Sequence pattern is 26 pointer movements followed by 1 missing pointer
movement.
Periodic 26–1
Time between VT1.5 pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms.
3–154
Description
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Sequence pattern is 26 pointer movements followed by 1 missing pointer
movement.
Time between VT1.5 pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms.
3–154
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated (Cont.)
Table 3–13: Pointer Sequences Generated (Cont.)
Pointer
Sequence
Pointer
Sequence
Periodic 26–1
With Cancel
Periodic 26–1
With Add
Description
Sequence pattern is 26 pointer movements followed by 1 missing pointer
movement with a cancelled pointer movement at the 26th pointer,
yielding a gap of 2.
Periodic 26–1
With Cancel
Description
Sequence pattern is 26 pointer movements followed by 1 missing pointer
movement with a cancelled pointer movement at the 26th pointer,
yielding a gap of 2.
Time between VT1.5 pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms.
Time between VT1.5 pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms.
Time between cancelled pointers is equal to: (time between pointers 27 N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this
product 30 s.
Time between cancelled pointers is equal to: (time between pointers 27 N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this
product 30 s.
Sequence pattern is 26 pointer movements followed by 1 missing pointer
movement with an added pointer movement after the 13th pointer.
Periodic 26–1
With Add
Sequence pattern is 26 pointer movements followed by 1 missing pointer
movement with an added pointer movement after the 13th pointer.
Time between normal pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms; time between added pointer movement and
previous normal pointer movement is 2 ms.
Time between normal pointer movements has a range of 1 s to 10 s with
a resolution of 1 ms; time between added pointer movement and
previous normal pointer movement is 2 ms.
Time between added pointers is equal to: (time between pointers 27
N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this
product 30 s.
Time between added pointers is equal to: (time between pointers 27
N) where N is selected to be the smallest integer that makes this
product 30 s.
Single
Alternating
Alternating single pointer movement. The time between pointer
movements is 30 s.
Single
Alternating
Alternating single pointer movement. The time between pointer
movements is 30 s.
Double
Alternating
Alternating double pointer movement. The time between the double
pointer movements is 2 ms, and the time between each pair of pointer
movements is 30 s.
Double
Alternating
Alternating double pointer movement. The time between the double
pointer movements is 2 ms, and the time between each pair of pointer
movements is 30 s.
Table 3–14: Availability of Pointer Sequences
Table 3–14: Availability of Pointer Sequences
Mapping
Pointer
i e Sequence
e e e
Mapping
STS
VT1.5
Single
✔
✔
Burst
✔
Phase Transient
✔
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Pointer
i e Sequence
e e e
STS
VT1.5
Single
✔
✔
✔
Burst
✔
✔
✔
Phase Transient
✔
✔
3–155
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–155
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Table 3–14: Availability of Pointer Sequences (Cont.)
Table 3–14: Availability of Pointer Sequences (Cont.)
Mapping
Mapping
Pointer Sequence
STS
VT1.5
Pointer Sequence
STS
VT1.5
Periodic Continuous
✔
✔
Periodic Continuous
✔
✔
Periodic Continuous with Cancel
✔
✔
Periodic Continuous with Cancel
✔
✔
Periodic Continuous with Add
✔
✔
Periodic Continuous with Add
✔
✔
Periodic 87–3
✔
Periodic 87–3
✔
Periodic 87–3 With Cancel
✔
Periodic 87–3 With Cancel
✔
Periodic 87–3 With Add
✔
Periodic 87–3 With Add
✔
Periodic 26–1
✔
Periodic 26–1
✔
Periodic 26–1 With Cancel
✔
Periodic 26–1 With Cancel
✔
Periodic 26–1 With Add
✔
Periodic 26–1 With Add
✔
Single Alternating
✔
✔
Single Alternating
✔
✔
Double Alternating
✔
✔
Double Alternating
✔
✔
Starting Pointer Sequences
Starting Pointer Sequences
To set up the CTS 710 to make generate pointer sequences:
To set up the CTS 710 to make generate pointer sequences:
1. Specify the pointer mode as follows:
1. Specify the pointer mode as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer / Timing
Mode
Pointer
Sequences
The choices allow you to move pointers using time parameters,
with a frequency offset, or in sequences. Selecting Pointer
Sequences moves pointers in sequential patterns.
3–156
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer / Timing
Mode
Pointer
Sequences
The choices allow you to move pointers using time parameters,
with a frequency offset, or in sequences. Selecting Pointer
Sequences moves pointers in sequential patterns.
3–156
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
2. Specify the pointer type as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
2. Specify the pointer type as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Type
STS Pointer
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Type
STS Pointer
VT Pointer
VT Pointer
3. Specify the Sequence Type as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
3. Specify the Sequence Type as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Sequence Type
as appropriate
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Sequence Type
as appropriate
NOTE. The pointer sequences available depend on the selected
Pointer Type.
NOTE. The pointer sequences available depend on the selected
Pointer Type.
4. If Sequence Type is set to anything other than Single or Double
Alternating, set the pointer direction as follows:
4. If Sequence Type is set to anything other than Single or Double
Alternating, set the pointer direction as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Direction
Increment
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Decrement
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Direction
Increment
Decrement
3–157
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–157
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
5. If Sequence Type is set to one of the continuous patterns, set the
pointer rate as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Pointer Rate
1000ms
5. If Sequence Type is set to one of the continuous patterns, set the
pointer rate as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Pointer Rate
1000ms
5000ms
5000ms
10000ms
10000ms
USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
H Select USER DEFINED to set a pointer rate different from
the preset choices.
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Initialization Time
On
6. Specify whether Initialization Time is included as part of the
pointer sequence as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Off
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Initialization Time
On
Off
NOTE. The Initialization Time is a set value (either 0 seconds or
30 seconds); it cannot be changed directly.
3–158
Select Choice
2000ms
6. Specify whether Initialization Time is included as part of the
pointer sequence as follows:
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
2000ms
H Select USER DEFINED to set a pointer rate different from
the preset choices.
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
NOTE. The Initialization Time is a set value (either 0 seconds or
30 seconds); it cannot be changed directly.
3–158
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
7. Specify whether Cool Down Time is included as part of the
pointer sequence as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
7. Specify whether Cool Down Time is included as part of the
pointer sequence as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Cool Down Time
On
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Off
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Cool Down Time
On
Off
NOTE. The Cool Down Time is a calculated value based on the
sequence type; it cannot be changed directly.
NOTE. The Cool Down Time is a calculated value based on the
sequence type; it cannot be changed directly.
8. To initiate a pointer sequence, press POINTER ACTION.
8. To initiate a pointer sequence, press POINTER ACTION.
Pointer sequences will continue to run until they are stopped.
Pointer sequences will continue to run until they are stopped.
9. To stop a pointer sequence, press POINTER ACTION.
9. To stop a pointer sequence, press POINTER ACTION.
After you press POINTER ACTION, the pointer sequence begins.
The status area at the bottom of the display will change to
indicate where the CTS 710 is within the pointer sequence; see
Figure 3–54. Table 3–15 describes the meaning of the lines in the
status display.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–159
After you press POINTER ACTION, the pointer sequence begins.
The status area at the bottom of the display will change to
indicate where the CTS 710 is within the pointer sequence; see
Figure 3–54. Table 3–15 describes the meaning of the lines in the
status display.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–159
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
Figure 3–54: Status Display While Pointer Sequences are Running
Figure 3–54: Status Display While Pointer Sequences are Running
Table 3–15: Status Lines for Pointer Sequences
Table 3–15: Status Lines for Pointer Sequences
Status Line
Description
Status Line
Description
Current State
Indicates the state of Pointer Sequences: Not Running, Initialization
State, Cool Down, or Sequences
Running
Current State
Indicates the state of Pointer Sequences: Not Running, Initialization
State, Cool Down, or Sequences
Running
Time Between Anomalies1
Indicates the time between pointer
anomalies
Time Between Anomalies1
Indicates the time between pointer
anomalies
Time Until Next Anomaly1
Indicates the time remaining until the
next anomaly occurs
Time Until Next Anomaly1
Indicates the time remaining until the
next anomaly occurs
Time Between Ptr Adj1
Indicates the time between pointer
adjustments
Time Between Ptr Adj1
Indicates the time between pointer
adjustments
Time Until Next Ptr Adj1
Indicates the time remaining until the
next pointer adjustment occurs
Time Until Next Ptr Adj1
Indicates the time remaining until the
next pointer adjustment occurs
1
3–160
Setting Pointers and Changing Timing
This information is displayed depending on sequence type. Not all information is
displayed. When this information is displayed, Time Between Anomalies is
displayed with Time Until Next Anomaly, and Time Between Prt Adj is displayed
with Time Until Next Ptr Adj.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1
3–160
This information is displayed depending on sequence type. Not all information is
displayed. When this information is displayed, Time Between Anomalies is
displayed with Time Until Next Anomaly, and Time Between Prt Adj is displayed
with Time Until Next Ptr Adj.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
This section describes how to generate Automatic Protection
Switching (APS) commands and view the network response.
This section describes how to generate Automatic Protection
Switching (APS) commands and view the network response.
APS commands are located in the K1 and K2 bytes of the transport
overhead. The K1 byte indicates a request for switch action. The K2
byte provides additional information about network architecture and
alarm conditions.
APS commands are located in the K1 and K2 bytes of the transport
overhead. The K1 byte indicates a request for switch action. The K2
byte provides additional information about network architecture and
alarm conditions.
Setting the APS Mode
Setting the APS Mode
The APS mode specifies whether the network is a ring network or a
span network. The APS mode determines how the K1 and K2 bytes
are interpreted and displayed by the CTS 710.
The APS mode specifies whether the network is a ring network or a
span network. The APS mode determines how the K1 and K2 bytes
are interpreted and displayed by the CTS 710.
To specify the APS mode:
To specify the APS mode:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
APS Mode
COMMANDS
(see Figure 3–55)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Span
TRANSMIT
APS
APS Mode
COMMANDS
(see Figure 3–55)
Ring
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Span
Ring
3–161
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–161
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Figure 3–55: The APS COMMANDS Page
Figure 3–55: The APS COMMANDS Page
Setting the K1 Byte
3–162
Setting the K1 Byte
There are two ways to edit the bits of the K1 byte. The first way is to
set the value of each bit of the byte, one bit at a time. The second
way is to assign values to the bits using preset choices, which use
mnemonics to identify bit patterns.
There are two ways to edit the bits of the K1 byte. The first way is to
set the value of each bit of the byte, one bit at a time. The second
way is to assign values to the bits using preset choices, which use
mnemonics to identify bit patterns.
To set the bit pattern of the K1 byte one bit at a time:
To set the bit pattern of the K1 byte one bit at a time:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
K1 FULL BYTE
Select Choice
Set to
00000000
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
K1 FULL BYTE
Select Choice
Set to
00000000
Set to
11111111
Set to
11111111
Default
10101010
Default
10101010
EDIT BYTE
EDIT BYTE
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–162
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
H Select EDIT BYTE to set the byte to a pattern different than the
preset choices.
H Select EDIT BYTE to set the byte to a pattern different than the
preset choices.
To set the bit pattern for the first four bits of the K1 byte:
To set the bit pattern for the first four bits of the K1 byte:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Bits 1–4: Switch
Request
(under K1 FULL
BYTE)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
as appropriate
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Bits 1–4: Switch
Request
(under K1 FULL
BYTE)
Select Choice
as appropriate
The selections available for the first four bits of the K1 byte depend
on whether the mode is set to Ring or Span. See Tables 3–16 and
3–17 for descriptions of the preset choices.
The selections available for the first four bits of the K1 byte depend
on whether the mode is set to Ring or Span. See Tables 3–16 and
3–17 for descriptions of the preset choices.
Table 3–16: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to
Ring
Table 3–16: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to
Ring
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
NR
NR No Request
0000
NR
NR No Request
0000
RR–R
RR–R Reverse Request Ring
0001
RR–R
RR–R Reverse Request Ring
0001
RR–S
RR–S Reverse Request Span
0010
RR–S
RR–S Reverse Request Span
0010
EXER–R
EXER–R Exerciser Ring
0011
EXER–R
EXER–R Exerciser Ring
0011
EXER–S
EXER–S Exerciser Span
0100
EXER–S
EXER–S Exerciser Span
0100
WTR
WTR Wait To Restore
0101
WTR
WTR Wait To Restore
0101
MS–R
MS–S Manual Switch Ring
0110
MS–R
MS–S Manual Switch Ring
0110
MS–S
MS–S Manual Switch Span
0111
MS–S
MS–S Manual Switch Span
0111
SD–R
SD–R Signal Degrade Ring
1000
SD–R
SD–R Signal Degrade Ring
1000
SD–S
SD–S Signal Degrade Span
1001
SD–S
SD–S Signal Degrade Span
1001
SD–P
SD–P Signal Degrade Protection
1010
SD–P
SD–P Signal Degrade Protection
1010
SF–R
SF–R Signal Fail Ring
1011
SF–R
SF–R Signal Fail Ring
1011
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–163
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–163
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
3–164
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Table 3–16: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to
Ring (Cont.)
Table 3–16: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to
Ring (Cont.)
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
SF–S
SF–S Signal Fail Span
1100
SF–S
SF–S Signal Fail Span
1100
FS–R
FS–R Forced Switch Ring
1101
FS–R
FS–R Forced Switch Ring
1101
FS–S
FS–S Forced Switch Span
1110
FS–S
FS–S Forced Switch Span
1110
LP–S
LP–S Lockout of Protection Span
1111
LP–S
LP–S Lockout of Protection Span
1111
Table 3–17: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to
Span
Table 3–17: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to
Span
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
NR
NR No Request
0000
NR
NR No Request
0000
DNR
DNR Do Not Revert
0001
DNR
DNR Do Not Revert
0001
RR
RR Reverse Request
0010
RR
RR Reverse Request
0010
Not Used
Not Used
0011
Not Used
Not Used
0011
EXER
EXER Exerciser
0100
EXER
EXER Exerciser
0100
Not Used
Not Used
0101
Not Used
Not Used
0101
WTR
WTR Wait to Restore
0110
WTR
WTR Wait to Restore
0110
Not Used
Not Used
0111
Not Used
Not Used
0111
MS
MS Manual Switch
1000
MS
MS Manual Switch
1000
Not Used
Not Used
1001
Not Used
Not Used
1001
SD–LP
SD Signal Degrade Low
1010
SD–LP
SD Signal Degrade Low
1010
SD–HP
SD Signal Degrade High
1011
SD–HP
SD Signal Degrade High
1011
SF–LP
SF Signal Fail Low
1100
SF–LP
SF Signal Fail Low
1100
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–164
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Table 3–17: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to
Span (Cont.)
Table 3–17: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K1 Byte When Mode is Set to
Span (Cont.)
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
SF–HP
SF Signal Fail High
1101
SF–HP
SF Signal Fail High
1101
FS
FS Forced Switch
1110
FS
FS Forced Switch
1110
LP
LP Lockout of Protection
1111
LP
LP Lockout of Protection
1111
The label for Bits 5–8, of the K1 byte, is Destination Node ID when
the mode is set to Span. The label for Bits 5–8 is Channel Requesting
when the mode is set to Ring.
The label for Bits 5–8, of the K1 byte, is Destination Node ID when
the mode is set to Span. The label for Bits 5–8 is Channel Requesting
when the mode is set to Ring.
To set the bit pattern for the last four bits of the K1 byte:
To set the bit pattern for the last four bits of the K1 byte:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Bits 5–8:
(under K1 FULL
BYTE)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
as appropriate
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Bits 5–8:
(under K1 FULL
BYTE)
3–165
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
as appropriate
3–165
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
See Table 3–18 for descriptions of the preset choices.
See Table 3–18 for descriptions of the preset choices.
Table 3–18: Choices for Bits 5–8 of the K1 Byte
Table 3–18: Choices for Bits 5–8 of the K1 Byte
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
#0
#0 (0000)
0000
#0
#0 (0000)
0000
#1
#1 (0001)
0001
#1
#1 (0001)
0001
#2
#2 (0010)
0010
#2
#2 (0010)
0010
#3
#3 (0011)
0011
#3
#3 (0011)
0011
#4
#4 (0100)
0100
#4
#4 (0100)
0100
#5
#5 (0101)
0101
#5
#5 (0101)
0101
#6
#6 (0110)
0110
#6
#6 (0110)
0110
#7
#7 (0111)
0111
#7
#7 (0111)
0111
#8
#8 (1000)
1000
#8
#8 (1000)
1000
#9
#9 (1001)
1001
#9
#9 (1001)
1001
#10
#10 (1010)
1010
#10
#10 (1010)
1010
#11
#11 (1011)
1011
#11
#11 (1011)
1011
#12
#12 (1100)
1100
#12
#12 (1100)
1100
#13
#13 (1101)
1101
#13
#13 (1101)
1101
#14
#14 (1110)
1110
#14
#14 (1110)
1110
#15
#15 (1111)
1111
#15
#15 (1111)
1111
Setting the K2 Byte
Setting the K2 Byte
There are two ways to edit the bits of the K2 byte. The first way is to
set the value of each bit of the byte, one bit at a time. The second
way is to assign values to the bits using preset choices, which use
mnemonics to identify bit patterns.
3–166
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
There are two ways to edit the bits of the K2 byte. The first way is to
set the value of each bit of the byte, one bit at a time. The second
way is to assign values to the bits using preset choices, which use
mnemonics to identify bit patterns.
3–166
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
To set the bit pattern of the K2 byte one bit at a time:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
K2 FULL BYTE
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
To set the bit pattern of the K2 byte one bit at a time:
Select Choice
Set to
00000000
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
K2 FULL BYTE
Select Choice
Set to
00000000
Set to
11111111
Set to
11111111
Default
10101010
Default
10101010
EDIT BYTE
EDIT BYTE
H Select EDIT BYTE to set the byte to a pattern different than the
preset choices.
H Select EDIT BYTE to set the byte to a pattern different than the
preset choices.
The label for Bits 1–4, of the K2 byte, is Channel Requesting when
the mode is set to Span. The label for Bits 5–8 is Source Node ID
when the mode is set to Ring.
The label for Bits 1–4, of the K2 byte, is Channel Requesting when
the mode is set to Span. The label for Bits 5–8 is Source Node ID
when the mode is set to Ring.
To set the bit pattern for the first four bits of the K2 byte:
To set the bit pattern for the first four bits of the K2 byte:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Bits 1–4:
(under K2 FULL
BYTE)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
as appropriate
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Bits 1–4:
(under K2 FULL
BYTE)
3–167
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
as appropriate
3–167
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
3–168
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
See Table 3–19 for descriptions of the preset choices.
See Table 3–19 for descriptions of the preset choices.
Table 3–19: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K2 Byte
Table 3–19: Choices for Bits 1–4 of the K2 Byte
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
#0
#0 (0000)
0000
#0
#0 (0000)
0000
#1
#1 (0001)
0001
#1
#1 (0001)
0001
#2
#2 (0010)
0010
#2
#2 (0010)
0010
#3
#3 (0011)
0011
#3
#3 (0011)
0011
#4
#4 (0100)
0100
#4
#4 (0100)
0100
#5
#5 (0101)
0101
#5
#5 (0101)
0101
#6
#6 (0110)
0110
#6
#6 (0110)
0110
#7
#7 (0111)
0111
#7
#7 (0111)
0111
#8
#8 (1000)
1000
#8
#8 (1000)
1000
#9
#9 (1001)
1001
#9
#9 (1001)
1001
#10
#10 (1010)
1010
#10
#10 (1010)
1010
#11
#11 (1011)
1011
#11
#11 (1011)
1011
#12
#12 (1100)
1100
#12
#12 (1100)
1100
#13
#13 (1101)
1101
#13
#13 (1101)
1101
#14
#14 (1110)
1110
#14
#14 (1110)
1110
#15
#15 (1111)
1111
#15
#15 (1111)
1111
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–168
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
The label for Bit 5, of the K2 byte, is Architecture when the mode is
set to Span. The label for Bit 5 is Path when the mode is set to Ring.
The label for Bit 5, of the K2 byte, is Architecture when the mode is
set to Span. The label for Bit 5 is Path when the mode is set to Ring.
To set the value of the fifth bit of the K2 byte:
To set the value of the fifth bit of the K2 byte:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Bit 5:
(under K2 FULL
BYTE)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
as appropriate
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Bit 5:
(under K2 FULL
BYTE)
Select Choice
as appropriate
See Tables 3–20 and 3–21 for descriptions of the preset choices for
Bit 5.
See Tables 3–20 and 3–21 for descriptions of the preset choices for
Bit 5.
Table 3–20: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode is Set to
Span
Table 3–20: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode is Set to
Span
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Value
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Value
1+1
1+1
0
1+1
1+1
0
1:N
1:N
1
1:N
1:N
1
Table 3–21: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode is Set to
Ring
Table 3–21: Choices for Bit 5 of the K2 Byte When Mode is Set to
Ring
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Value
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Value
SHORT
SHORT
0
SHORT
SHORT
0
LONG
LONG
1
LONG
LONG
1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–169
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–169
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
The label for Bits 6–8, of the K2 byte, is Status whether the mode is
set to Ring or Span.
The label for Bits 6–8, of the K2 byte, is Status whether the mode is
set to Ring or Span.
To set the bit pattern for the last three bits of the K2 byte:
To set the bit pattern for the last three bits of the K2 byte:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Bits 6–8:
(under K2 FULL
BYTE)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
as appropriate
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Bits 6–8:
(under K2 FULL
BYTE)
See Table 3–22 for descriptions of the preset choices.
See Table 3–22 for descriptions of the preset choices.
Table 3–22: Choices for Bits 6–8 of the K2 Byte
Table 3–22: Choices for Bits 6–8 of the K2 Byte
as appropriate
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
Main Screen
Mnemonic
Choice Text
Bit Pattern
IDLE
IDLE
000
IDLE
IDLE
000
BR
BR Bridged
001
BR
BR Bridged
001
BR&SW
BR & SW Bridged & Switched
010
BR&SW
BR & SW Bridged & Switched
010
Not Used
Not Used
011
Not Used
Not Used
011
Not Used
Not Used
100
Not Used
Not Used
100
Not Used
Not Used
101
Not Used
Not Used
101
FERF
FERF
110
FERF
FERF
110
AIS
AIS
111
AIS
AIS
111
Transmitting the K1 and K2 Bytes
Transmitting the K1 and K2 Bytes
Changing the values of the K1 and K2 bytes, shown in the USER
SETUP column, does not automatically change the values of the
transmitted K1 and K2 bytes. The TRANSMIT column shows the K1
and K2 bytes that are being transmitted.
3–170
Select Choice
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Changing the values of the K1 and K2 bytes, shown in the USER
SETUP column, does not automatically change the values of the
transmitted K1 and K2 bytes. The TRANSMIT column shows the K1
and K2 bytes that are being transmitted.
3–170
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
NOTE. You can edit the transmitted K1 and K2 bytes directly from the
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD page.
NOTE. You can edit the transmitted K1 and K2 bytes directly from the
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD page.
To transmit new K1 and K2 bytes:
To transmit new K1 and K2 bytes:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Transmit Setup
Select Choice
Transmit User
Setup
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
Transmit Setup
Select Choice
Transmit User
Setup
Transmit Default
Transmit Default
Transmit Illegal
Transmit Illegal
NOTE. You cannot transmit new values for the K1 or K2 bytes when
the CTS 710 is transmitting a Line AIS or Line FERF.
NOTE. You cannot transmit new values for the K1 or K2 bytes when
the CTS 710 is transmitting a Line AIS or Line FERF.
H Select Transmit User Setup to change the value of the K1 and
K2 bytes to that shown under USER SETUP.
H Select Transmit User Setup to change the value of the K1 and
K2 bytes to that shown under USER SETUP.
H Select Transmit Default to change all the bits in the K1 and K2
bytes to zeros.
H Select Transmit Default to change all the bits in the K1 and K2
bytes to zeros.
H Select Transmit Illegal to change all the bits in the K1 and K2
bytes to ones.
H Select Transmit Illegal to change all the bits in the K1 and K2
bytes to ones.
When you select an action from the Transmit Setup line, the
TRANSMIT column is updated.
When you select an action from the Transmit Setup line, the
TRANSMIT column is updated.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–171
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–171
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Testing Automatic Protection Switching
Viewing the Network Response to APS Commands
Viewing the Network Response to APS Commands
To view the network response to APS commands:
To view the network response to APS commands:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
none
none
TRANSMIT
APS
COMMANDS
none
none
The network response to APS commands appears under the column
labeled RECEIVE on the APS COMMANDS page (see Figure 3–56).
The network response to APS commands appears under the column
labeled RECEIVE on the APS COMMANDS page (see Figure 3–56).
The RECEIVE
Column
The RECEIVE
Column
Figure 3–56: The RECEIVE Column on the APS COMMANDS Page
3–172
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Figure 3–56: The RECEIVE Column on the APS COMMANDS Page
3–172
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
This section describes how to view, save, recall, and print test results.
This section describes how to view, save, recall, and print test results.
You can look at test results while a test is running or after it has
completed. The CTS 710 SONET Test Set can display test results as
a summary or in a more detailed tabular form. The CTS 710 also
displays measurement history in a graphical format.
You can look at test results while a test is running or after it has
completed. The CTS 710 SONET Test Set can display test results as
a summary or in a more detailed tabular form. The CTS 710 also
displays measurement history in a graphical format.
Viewing a Summary of Results
Viewing a Summary of Results
To display a summary of test results:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RESULTS
TEST SUMMARY none
To display a summary of test results:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
none
RESULTS
TEST SUMMARY none
Figure 3–57 shows the TEST SUMMARY page. The top half of the
display shows the source of the displayed results, the line rate of the
displayed results, the mapping of the displayed results, when the
displayed test results started and the duration of the test (elapsed
time). The bottom half of the display is where the TroubleScan
feature displays information. TroubleScan provides a quick overview
of test results by displaying the four most significant alarm, failure,
or error conditions that have occurred during the test. The specific
conditions that TroubleScan displays depends on the problems that
occur in the signal during the test.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–173
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
none
Figure 3–57 shows the TEST SUMMARY page. The top half of the
display shows the source of the displayed results, the line rate of the
displayed results, the mapping of the displayed results, when the
displayed test results started and the duration of the test (elapsed
time). The bottom half of the display is where the TroubleScan
feature displays information. TroubleScan provides a quick overview
of test results by displaying the four most significant alarm, failure,
or error conditions that have occurred during the test. The specific
conditions that TroubleScan displays depends on the problems that
occur in the signal during the test.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–173
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Figure 3–57: The Test Summary Page
Viewing Detailed Results
3–174
Figure 3–57: The Test Summary Page
Viewing Detailed Results
You can view results either as a summary or as a history. The
summary format displays test results in a table. The history format
displays test results in a graphical format.
You can view results either as a summary or as a history. The
summary format displays test results in a table. The history format
displays test results in a graphical format.
The summary format is displayed on two pages in the RESULTS
menu, the MAIN RESULTS page, and the ERROR ANALYSIS
page. The MAIN RESULTS page provides an overview of test
results, divided into four categories: Errors, Failures, Alarms, and
Pointers. The ERROR ANALYSIS page displays an analysis of
errors according to T1M1. Errors on the ERROR ANALYSIS page
are displayed by Section, Line, Path, VT 1.5, DSn Path, or Pattern.
The summary format is displayed on two pages in the RESULTS
menu, the MAIN RESULTS page, and the ERROR ANALYSIS
page. The MAIN RESULTS page provides an overview of test
results, divided into four categories: Errors, Failures, Alarms, and
Pointers. The ERROR ANALYSIS page displays an analysis of
errors according to T1M1. Errors on the ERROR ANALYSIS page
are displayed by Section, Line, Path, VT 1.5, DSn Path, or Pattern.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–174
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Displaying an Overview of Test Results
Displaying an Overview of Test Results
To display an overview of test results:
To display an overview of test results:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Errors
RESULTS
MAIN RESULTS
none
Errors
Failures
Failures
Alarms
Alarms
Pointers
Pointers
Table 3–23 lists all of the test results that are displayed on the MAIN
RESULTS page.
Table 3–23 lists all of the test results that are displayed on the MAIN
RESULTS page.
Table 3–23: Results Displayed on MAIN RESULTS Page
Table 3–23: Results Displayed on MAIN RESULTS Page
Category
Error Displayed
Category
Error Displayed
Errors
Parity
Errors
Parity
Failures
Section B1 BIP
Section B1 BIP
Line B2 BIP
Line B2 BIP
Path B3 BIP
Path B3 BIP
VT BIP
VT BIP
Pattern Bit
Pattern Bit
DS1 CRC
DS1 CRC
P-Bit Parity
P-Bit Parity
Line FEBE
Line FEBE
Path FEBE
Path FEBE
VT FEBE
VT FEBE
Frame Bit
Frame Bit
Loss of Signal Seconds
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Failures
3–175
Loss of Signal Seconds
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–175
Viewing Results
Table 3–23: Results Displayed on MAIN RESULTS Page (Cont.)
Table 3–23: Results Displayed on MAIN RESULTS Page (Cont.)
Category
Category
Alarms
Pointers
3–176
Viewing Results
Error Displayed
Error Displayed
Loss of Frame Seconds
Loss of Frame Seconds
Out of Frame Seconds (SEFS)
Out of Frame Seconds (SEFS)
Loss of STS Pointer Seconds
Loss of STS Pointer Seconds
Loss of Power Seconds
Loss of Power Seconds
Loss of VT Pointer Seconds
Loss of VT Pointer Seconds
VT LOM Seconds
VT LOM Seconds
Loss of Pattern Sync Seconds
Loss of Pattern Sync Seconds
DSn Loss of Frame Seconds
DSn Loss of Frame Seconds
Line AIS Seconds
Alarms
Line AIS Seconds
Line FERF Seconds
Line FERF Seconds
Path AIS Seconds
Path AIS Seconds
Path FERF Seconds
Path FERF Seconds
VT AIS Seconds
VT AIS Seconds
VT FERF Seconds
VT FERF Seconds
DSn AIS Seconds
DSn AIS Seconds
DSn Yellow Seconds
DSn Yellow Seconds
DS3 Idle Seconds
DS3 Idle Seconds
Loss of Pointer Seconds
Pointers
Loss of Pointer Seconds
New Data Flag Seconds
New Data Flag Seconds
Illegal Pointer Seconds
Illegal Pointer Seconds
Positive Justifications
Positive Justifications
Negative Justifications
Negative Justifications
Illegal Pointer Count
Illegal Pointer Count
Pointer Value
Pointer Value
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–176
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
The Errors category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays results in
three ways. The first way displays the count for each type of error.
The second way displays the error ratio for each error. The third way
displays the number of errored seconds that occurred for each type of
error during the test.
The Errors category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays results in
three ways. The first way displays the count for each type of error.
The second way displays the error ratio for each error. The third way
displays the number of errored seconds that occurred for each type of
error during the test.
The Failures category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays the
number of seconds that the failure occurred.
The Failures category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays the
number of seconds that the failure occurred.
The Alarms category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays the
number of seconds that the alarm occurred.
The Alarms category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays the
number of seconds that the alarm occurred.
The Pointers category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays the
number of seconds certain conditions existed and the number of
times certain actions occurred.
The Pointers category of the MAIN RESULTS page displays the
number of seconds certain conditions existed and the number of
times certain actions occurred.
Displaying an Analysis of Test Results
Displaying an Analysis of Test Results
To display an analysis of test results:
To display an analysis of test results:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
ERROR
ANALYSIS
none
Section
RESULTS
ERROR
ANALYSIS
none
Section
Line
Line
Path Analysis
Path Analysis
VT Analysis
VT Analysis
Pattern Analysis
Pattern Analysis
DSn Path
Analysis
DSn Path
Analysis
Tables 3–24 through 3–30 detail the error analysis that appears on
the ERROR ANALYSIS page. With the exception of the error count,
the analysis of the error conditions that appear on the ERROR
ANALYSIS page is made up of two numbers. The first number is the
number of seconds the condition existed. The second number is the
percentage of the test duration that the condition existed.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–177
Tables 3–24 through 3–30 detail the error analysis that appears on
the ERROR ANALYSIS page. With the exception of the error count,
the analysis of the error conditions that appear on the ERROR
ANALYSIS page is made up of two numbers. The first number is the
number of seconds the condition existed. The second number is the
percentage of the test duration that the condition existed.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–177
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Table 3–24: T1M1 Section Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Table 3–24: T1M1 Section Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Category
Type
Analysis Result
Category
Type
Analysis Result
Section
Section Analysis (B1 BIP)
Error Counts
Section
Section Analysis (B1 BIP)
Error Counts
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type B
Errored Seconds – Type B
Severely Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Framing
Seconds
Severely Errored Framing
Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Table 3–25: T1M1 Line Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Table 3–25: T1M1 Line Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Category
Type
Analysis Result
Category
Type
Analysis Result
Line
Line Analysis (B2 BIP)
Error Counts
Line
Line Analysis (B2 BIP)
Error Counts
Line Analysis (FEBE)
3–178
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type B
Errored Seconds – Type B
Severely Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Counts
Line Analysis (FEBE)
Error Counts
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Free Seconds
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–178
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Table 3–26: T1M1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Viewing Results
Table 3–26: T1M1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Category
Type
Analysis Result
Category
Type
Analysis Result
Path
Path Analysis (B3 BIP)
Error Counts
Path
Path Analysis (B3 BIP)
Error Counts
Path Analysis (FEBE)
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type B
Errored Seconds – Type B
Severely Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Counts
Path Analysis (FEBE)
Error Counts
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Table 3–27: T1M1 VT1.5 Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Table 3–27: T1M1 VT1.5 Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Category
Analysis Result
Category
Error Counts
VT 1.5 Analy- VT Analysis (V5 BIP)
sis
Type
VT 1.5 Analy- VT Analysis (V5 BIP)
sis
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Type
Analysis Result
Error Counts
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type B
Errored Seconds – Type B
Severely Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Free Seconds
3–179
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–179
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Table 3–27: T1M1 VT1.5 Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR
ANALYSIS Page (Cont.)
Table 3–27: T1M1 VT1.5 Analysis Results Displayed on the ERROR
ANALYSIS Page (Cont.)
Category
Category
Type
Analysis Result
VT 1.5 Analysis (FEBE)
Error Counts
Analysis Result
VT 1.5 Analysis (FEBE)
Error Counts
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Table 3–28: T1M1 Payload Analysis Results Displayed on ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Table 3–28: T1M1 Payload Analysis Results Displayed on ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Category
Type
Analysis Result
Category
Type
Analysis Result
Payload
Payload Analysis (Bit Error)
Error Counts
Payload
Payload Analysis (Bit Error)
Error Counts
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type B
Errored Seconds – Type B
Severely Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Free Seconds
NOTE. There is no analysis performed on unframed DS1 or DS3
signals.
3–180
Type
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
NOTE. There is no analysis performed on unframed DS1 or DS3
signals.
3–180
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Table 3–29: DS1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Table 3–29: DS1 Path Analysis Results Displayed on ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Category
Type
Analysis Result
Category
Type
Analysis Result
DS1 Path
DS1 Analysis (Frame Bit)
Error Counts
DS1 Path
DS1 Analysis (Frame Bit)
Error Counts
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type B
Errored Seconds – Type B
Severely Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Table 3–30: DS3 Path Analysis Results Displayed on ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Table 3–30: DS3 Path Analysis Results Displayed on ERROR
ANALYSIS Page
Category
Type
Analysis Result
Category
Type
Analysis Result
DS3 Path
DS3 Analysis (P-Bit Parity)
Error Counts
DS3 Path
DS3 Analysis (P-Bit Parity)
Error Counts
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type A
Errored Seconds – Type B
Errored Seconds – Type B
Severely Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Error Free Seconds
Viewing Measurement Histories
Viewing Measurement Histories
The CTS 710 records measurement histories whenever you run a test.
Measurement histories are displayed as graphs. The graph displays
how an individual measurement changed over time. The vertical axis
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–181
The CTS 710 records measurement histories whenever you run a test.
Measurement histories are displayed as graphs. The graph displays
how an individual measurement changed over time. The vertical axis
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–181
Viewing Results
3–182
Viewing Results
of a graph depends on what is displayed, but the horizontal axis
always displays time.
of a graph depends on what is displayed, but the horizontal axis
always displays time.
To display a history graph:
To display a history graph:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
HISTORY
GRAPHS
none
none
RESULTS
HISTORY
GRAPHS
none
none
Types of Graphs
Types of Graphs
There are three types of history graphs: bar graphs, line graphs, and
on/off graphs.
There are three types of history graphs: bar graphs, line graphs, and
on/off graphs.
Bar Graphs. Bar graphs are used for most measurements (see
Figure 3–58). There are two kinds of bar graphs: a count graph that
displays code violations and pointer justifications and an errored
seconds graph that displays errored seconds. Table 3–31 lists the
different bar graphs that can be displayed.
Bar Graphs. Bar graphs are used for most measurements (see
Figure 3–58). There are two kinds of bar graphs: a count graph that
displays code violations and pointer justifications and an errored
seconds graph that displays errored seconds. Table 3–31 lists the
different bar graphs that can be displayed.
Figure 3–58: Bar Graphs Showing Code Violations and Errored Seconds
Figure 3–58: Bar Graphs Showing Code Violations and Errored Seconds
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–182
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Table 3–31: Measurements Displayed as Bar Graphs
Table 3–31: Measurements Displayed as Bar Graphs
Measurement
Measurement
Section B1 Error Counts
Section B1 Error Counts
Section B1 Errored Secs
Section B1 Errored Secs
Line B2 Error Counts
Line B2 Error Counts
Line B2 Errored Secs
Line B2 Errored Secs
Line FEBE Error Counts
Line FEBE Error Counts
Path B3 Error Counts
Path B3 Error Counts
Path B3 Errored Secs
Path B3 Errored Secs
Path FEBE Error Counts
Path FEBE Error Counts
Pattern Error Counts
Pattern Error Counts
Pattern Errored Secs
Pattern Errored Secs
STS Pointer Justifications
STS Pointer Justifications
VT Pointer Justifications
VT Pointer Justifications
VT BIP2 Errors
VT BIP2 Errors
VT BIP2 Errored Secs
VT BIP2 Errored Secs
VT FEBE Error Count
VT FEBE Error Count
VT FEBE Errored Secs
VT FEBE Errored Secs
CRC/Parity Errored Seconds
CRC/Parity Errored Seconds
Frame Errored Seconds
Frame Errored Seconds
Line Graphs. A line graph is used to display pointer movement
history (see Figure 3–59). The vertical axis of the line graph ranges
from 0 to the maximum, which is different for SPEs and VTs. There
is only one measurement displayed as a line graph, as shown in
Table 3–32.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–183
Line Graphs. A line graph is used to display pointer movement
history (see Figure 3–59). The vertical axis of the line graph ranges
from 0 to the maximum, which is different for SPEs and VTs. There
is only one measurement displayed as a line graph, as shown in
Table 3–32.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–183
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Figure 3–59: Line Graph Showing Pointer Value
Figure 3–59: Line Graph Showing Pointer Value
Table 3–32: Measurements Displayed as a Line Graph
Table 3–32: Measurements Displayed as a Line Graph
Displayed Value
Displayed Value
STS Pointer Value
STS Pointer Value
VT Pointer Value
VT Pointer Value
On/Off Graphs. On/off graphs indicate whether alarms and failures
were on or off (see Figure 3–60). There are only two types of on/off
graphs, as shown in Table 3–33. One type displays alarms and the
other type displays failures.
3–184
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
On/Off Graphs. On/off graphs indicate whether alarms and failures
were on or off (see Figure 3–60). There are only two types of on/off
graphs, as shown in Table 3–33. One type displays alarms and the
other type displays failures.
3–184
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Figure 3–60: On/Off Graphs Showing Failures and Alarms
Figure 3–60: On/Off Graphs Showing Failures and Alarms
Table 3–33: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs for SONET
Rates
Table 3–33: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs for SONET
Rates
Graph Type
Displayed Value
Graph Type
Displayed Value
Failures
LOS
Failures
LOS
SONET Alarms
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
LOF
LOF
OOF
OOF
STS LOP
STS LOP
VT LOP
VT LOP
VT LOM
VT LOM
Power
Power
L-AIS
SONET Alarms
L-AIS
L-FERF
L-FERF
P-AIS
P-AIS
P-FERF
P-FERF
3–185
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–185
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Table 3–33: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs for SONET
Rates (Cont.)
Table 3–33: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs for SONET
Rates (Cont.)
Graph Type
Graph Type
Displayed Value
Displayed Value
VT AIS
VT AIS
VT FERF
VT FERF
Pattern
Pattern
Table 3–34: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs for Tributary
Rates
Table 3–34: Measurements Displayed as On/Off Graphs for Tributary
Rates
Graph Type
Displayed Value
Graph Type
Displayed Value
DSn Alarms
Idle
DSn Alarms
Idle
AIS
AIS
Yellow
Yellow
Elements of the History Graph Display
Elements of the History Graph Display
3–186
Figure 3–61 shows the elements of a typical history graph display.
The HISTORY GRAPHS page always displays two graphs. The two
graphs can be changed to display any measurement taken during a
test.
Figure 3–61 shows the elements of a typical history graph display.
The HISTORY GRAPHS page always displays two graphs. The two
graphs can be changed to display any measurement taken during a
test.
Graph Name
Graph Name
Above each graph is a name that identifies the measurement the
graph illustrates.
Above each graph is a name that identifies the measurement the
graph illustrates.
History Resolution
History Resolution
Above the graph name is a line that states the minimum resolution at
which the graph can be displayed. The minimum resolution is set at
the time the test is run.
Above the graph name is a line that states the minimum resolution at
which the graph can be displayed. The minimum resolution is set at
the time the test is run.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–186
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Power Out Indicator
Power Out Indicator
If the power to the CTS 710 fails while a test is running, the
CTS 710 displays the words “POWEROUT” on the history graph.
POWEROUT is displayed vertically on the graph and spans the
period of time the CTS 710 was without power.
If the power to the CTS 710 fails while a test is running, the
CTS 710 displays the words “POWEROUT” on the history graph.
POWEROUT is displayed vertically on the graph and spans the
period of time the CTS 710 was without power.
Cursor
Cursor
The cursor is a line that is scrolled across the graph using the knob.
The cursor is a line that is scrolled across the graph using the knob.
Cursor Position
Cursor Position
Just below the menu name is a line that identifies the position of the
cursor. Cursor position is identified by time and date.
Just below the menu name is a line that identifies the position of the
cursor. Cursor position is identified by time and date.
Measurement Results at Cursor Position
Measurement Results at Cursor Position
To the right of the graph name is a box that displays the value of the
measurement at the cursor location (the box is not displayed for
history graphs of alarms or failures). If the displayed graph
represents errored seconds, the measurement results box displays the
number of errored seconds that occurred during the interval
indicated. If the displayed graph represents an error count, the
measurement results box displays the number of errors counted
during the indicated interval and the resulting bit error rate (BER).
To the right of the graph name is a box that displays the value of the
measurement at the cursor location (the box is not displayed for
history graphs of alarms or failures). If the displayed graph
represents errored seconds, the measurement results box displays the
number of errored seconds that occurred during the interval
indicated. If the displayed graph represents an error count, the
measurement results box displays the number of errors counted
during the indicated interval and the resulting bit error rate (BER).
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–187
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–187
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Graph name
Cursor position
Graph name
History
Resolution
Cursor position
History
Resolution
Measurement
results at
cursor position
Cursor
Power
Out
Indicator
Cross-hatch
means the test
was not running
during this time
Measurement
results at
cursor position
Cursor
Power
Out
Indicator
Cross-hatch
means the test
was not running
during this time
Figure 3–61: Elements of a History Graph
Figure 3–61: Elements of a History Graph
Zooming History Graphs
Zooming History Graphs
3–188
History graphs display measurement history in intervals. Each
interval is represented by a bar on the history graph. The interval of
time represented by a bar can be changed. Changing the interval a
bar represents is called zooming. History graphs can be zoomed out
or in. When a history graph is zoomed out, a bar represents a
increasingly longer period of time. When a history graph is zoomed
in, a bar represents a decreasingly shorter period of time. Table 3–35
lists the intervals a bar can represent, depending on the history
resolution setting when the test was run.
History graphs display measurement history in intervals. Each
interval is represented by a bar on the history graph. The interval of
time represented by a bar can be changed. Changing the interval a
bar represents is called zooming. History graphs can be zoomed out
or in. When a history graph is zoomed out, a bar represents a
increasingly longer period of time. When a history graph is zoomed
in, a bar represents a decreasingly shorter period of time. Table 3–35
lists the intervals a bar can represent, depending on the history
resolution setting when the test was run.
Table 3–35: Time Represented by Bars on History Graph
Table 3–35: Time Represented by Bars on History Graph
History Resolution = Normal
(1 min samples)
History Resolution = Low
(15 min samples)
History Resolution = Normal
(1 min samples)
History Resolution = Low
(15 min samples)
1 minute
15 minutes
1 minute
15 minutes
5 minutes
60 minutes
5 minutes
60 minutes
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–188
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Table 3–35: Time Represented by Bars on History Graph (Cont.)
Table 3–35: Time Represented by Bars on History Graph (Cont.)
History Resolution = Normal
(1 min samples)
History Resolution = Low
(15 min samples)
History Resolution = Normal
(1 min samples)
History Resolution = Low
(15 min samples)
15 minutes
4 hours
15 minutes
4 hours
60 minutes
12 hours
60 minutes
12 hours
There are 56 intervals of a history graph displayed on the screen at a
time. At a resolution of one minute per bar, a history graph displays
test results for a period of 56 minutes. At a resolution of 15 minutes
per bar, a history graph displays test results for a period of 840
minutes, or 14 hours.
There are 56 intervals of a history graph displayed on the screen at a
time. At a resolution of one minute per bar, a history graph displays
test results for a period of 56 minutes. At a resolution of 15 minutes
per bar, a history graph displays test results for a period of 840
minutes, or 14 hours.
The minimum test duration required to display results on a history
graph is one minute. Tests shorter than one minute will not display
any results on the HISTORY GRAPHS page. However, test results
do appear on the MAIN RESULTS and ERROR ANALYSIS pages
for tests shorter than one minute.
The minimum test duration required to display results on a history
graph is one minute. Tests shorter than one minute will not display
any results on the HISTORY GRAPHS page. However, test results
do appear on the MAIN RESULTS and ERROR ANALYSIS pages
for tests shorter than one minute.
The longest period for which test results are displayed is 72 hours
(3 days) at a History Resolution of 1 minute or 1080 hours (45 days)
at a History Resolution of 15 minutes. If you run a test continuously,
only results for the last 72 hours (1 minute resolution) or 1080 hours
(15 minutes resolution) are maintained in memory.
The longest period for which test results are displayed is 72 hours
(3 days) at a History Resolution of 1 minute or 1080 hours (45 days)
at a History Resolution of 15 minutes. If you run a test continuously,
only results for the last 72 hours (1 minute resolution) or 1080 hours
(15 minutes resolution) are maintained in memory.
To zoom in a history graph, select Zoom In.
To zoom in a history graph, select Zoom In.
To zoom out a history graph, select Zoom Out.
To zoom out a history graph, select Zoom Out.
NOTE. When viewing long test durations (for example, three days) at
a resolution of one minute, you might see a timestamp error. For
example, you might see two one-minute intervals stamped with the
same time. The timestamp error is simply revealing the clock
accuracy. The correct number of intervals for the test duration are
present.
NOTE. When viewing long test durations (for example, three days) at
a resolution of one minute, you might see a timestamp error. For
example, you might see two one-minute intervals stamped with the
same time. The timestamp error is simply revealing the clock
accuracy. The correct number of intervals for the test duration are
present.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–189
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–189
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Panning History Graphs
Panning History Graphs
You can display different portions of a history graph by panning the
graph. Panning a history graph shifts the displayed section of the
graph to the left or right.
You can display different portions of a history graph by panning the
graph. Panning a history graph shifts the displayed section of the
graph to the left or right.
At the maximum resolution of one minute per bar, a history graph
can display only about one hour of test results. To maintain
maximum resolution, you can display the graph at maximum
resolution (one minute per bar) and pan to other portions of the
history graph as necessary.
At the maximum resolution of one minute per bar, a history graph
can display only about one hour of test results. To maintain
maximum resolution, you can display the graph at maximum
resolution (one minute per bar) and pan to other portions of the
history graph as necessary.
To pan a history graph, turn the knob.
To pan a history graph, turn the knob.
When the knob is turned, the cursor moves across the history graph.
If the history graph contains more data than will fit on the display,
the history graph shifts to display additional information. The
direction the display shifts depends on which direction the knob is
turning.
When the knob is turned, the cursor moves across the history graph.
If the history graph contains more data than will fit on the display,
the history graph shifts to display additional information. The
direction the display shifts depends on which direction the knob is
turning.
Changing the Displayed History Graph
Changing the Displayed History Graph
To change the displayed history graph:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
RESULTS
HISTORY
GRAPHS
Highlight
Parameter
To change the displayed history graph:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Show Next Top
RESULTS
HISTORY
GRAPHS
Select Choice
Show Next Top
Change Top
Change Top
Change Bottom
Change Bottom
select graph with Select Graph
knob
(see Figure 3–62)
3–190
Highlight
Parameter
select graph with Select Graph
knob
(see Figure 3–62)
H Select Show Next Top to automatically display the next graph on
the top half of the screen.
H Select Show Next Top to automatically display the next graph on
the top half of the screen.
H Select Change Top to select a different graph for display on the
top half of the screen.
H Select Change Top to select a different graph for display on the
top half of the screen.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–190
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
H Select Change Bottom to select a different graph for display on
the bottom half of the screen.
H Select Change Bottom to select a different graph for display on
the bottom half of the screen.
H Select Cancel if you decide not to change the displayed graph.
H Select Cancel if you decide not to change the displayed graph.
Displaying Mini-Graphs
Displaying Mini-Graphs
When you select either Change Top or Change Bottom from the
HISTORY GRAPHS page, the selected graph is replaced by three
mini-graphs (see Figure 3–62). Each mini-graph is a reduced-size
version of a normal graph. Turn the knob to display a different graph.
The middle graph, which is highlighted, is the graph that will be
displayed full-size when you choose Select Graph. When you turn
the knob, the mini-graphs scroll either up or down depending on
which direction you turn the knob. Whether the next mini-graph
appears at the top or the bottom depends on the direction the knob
turns.
When you select either Change Top or Change Bottom from the
HISTORY GRAPHS page, the selected graph is replaced by three
mini-graphs (see Figure 3–62). Each mini-graph is a reduced-size
version of a normal graph. Turn the knob to display a different graph.
The middle graph, which is highlighted, is the graph that will be
displayed full-size when you choose Select Graph. When you turn
the knob, the mini-graphs scroll either up or down depending on
which direction you turn the knob. Whether the next mini-graph
appears at the top or the bottom depends on the direction the knob
turns.
Use the mini-graph capability to view several results at once. With
mini-graphs displayed, the CTS 710 displays four graphs at the same
time. This will enable you to see relationships between different
results that might otherwise be difficult to spot.
Use the mini-graph capability to view several results at once. With
mini-graphs displayed, the CTS 710 displays four graphs at the same
time. This will enable you to see relationships between different
results that might otherwise be difficult to spot.
Figure 3–62: Changing the Displayed History Graph
Figure 3–62: Changing the Displayed History Graph
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–191
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–191
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Saving and Recalling Results
Saving and Recalling Results
3–192
You can save test results to disk and recall the test results for later
display and analysis. The CTS 710 automatically saves the results of
the last two tests in memory. If you want to save test results
permanently, you must save the test results to disk.
You can save test results to disk and recall the test results for later
display and analysis. The CTS 710 automatically saves the results of
the last two tests in memory. If you want to save test results
permanently, you must save the test results to disk.
Saving Test Results to Disk
Saving Test Results to Disk
NOTE. The CTS 710 saves only the last 3 days (at a History
Resolution of Normal) or 45 days (at a History Resolution of Low) of
test results. If a test runs longer than these limits, the results older
than 3 days/45 days are discarded.
NOTE. The CTS 710 saves only the last 3 days (at a History
Resolution of Normal) or 45 days (at a History Resolution of Low) of
test results. If a test runs longer than these limits, the results older
than 3 days/45 days are discarded.
To save test results to disk:
To save test results to disk:
1. Name the test results file as follows:
1. Name the test results file as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RESULTS
SAVE RESULTS Name
(see Figure 3–63)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RESLT_XX
RESULTS
SAVE RESULTS Name
(see Figure 3–63)
Select Choice
RESLT_XX
Clear
Clear
EDIT NAME
EDIT NAME
H If you wish to name the results file as RESLT<Number>, you
can save time by selecting RESLT_XX. Once you select
RESLT_XX, select EDIT NAME and edit XX to the desired
number (or letter). Select DONE when you are finished
editing the setup name.
H If you wish to name the results file as RESLT<Number>, you
can save time by selecting RESLT_XX. Once you select
RESLT_XX, select EDIT NAME and edit XX to the desired
number (or letter). Select DONE when you are finished
editing the setup name.
H Select Clear to remove an existing name. A message appears
to remind you that you cannot save results to disk without a
name.
H Select Clear to remove an existing name. A message appears
to remind you that you cannot save results to disk without a
name.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–192
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
H Select EDIT NAME to enter a name other than RESLT_XX
for the pass/fail test. Select DONE when you are finished
editing the test name.
Viewing Results
H Select EDIT NAME to enter a name other than RESLT_XX
for the pass/fail test. Select DONE when you are finished
editing the test name.
Figure 3–63: The SAVE RESULTS Page
Figure 3–63: The SAVE RESULTS Page
2. Enter a description of the test results file as follows:
2. Enter a description of the test results file as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
SAVE RESULTS
Description
EDIT TEXT
RESULTS
SAVE RESULTS
Description
EDIT TEXT
None
None
Clear
Clear
H Select EDIT TEXT to enter a description of the test results,
up to 24 characters long. Select DONE when you are finished
editing the description.
H Select EDIT TEXT to enter a description of the test results,
up to 24 characters long. Select DONE when you are finished
editing the description.
H Select None if you do not want to use a description.
H Select None if you do not want to use a description.
H Select Clear to remove an existing description.
H Select Clear to remove an existing description.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–193
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–193
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
3. Save the test results to disk as follows:
3. Save the test results to disk as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
RESULTS
SAVE RESULTS
Save to Disk
Save Current
RESULTS
SAVE RESULTS
Save to Disk
Save Current
Save Previous
Save Previous
At the bottom of the SAVE RESULTS page are two lines that
identify the current and previous tests by start time/date and by
duration.
At the bottom of the SAVE RESULTS page are two lines that
identify the current and previous tests by start time/date and by
duration.
H Select Save Current to save the current (most recent) test
results.
H Select Save Current to save the current (most recent) test
results.
H Select Save Previous to save the previous test results.
H Select Save Previous to save the previous test results.
Recalling Test Results from Disk
Recalling Test Results from Disk
To recall test results from disk:
To recall test results from disk:
1. Insert the disk containing the test results into the disk drive.
1. Insert the disk containing the test results into the disk drive.
2. Select and recall the test results file as follows:
2. Select and recall the test results file as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
RESULTS
RECALL
RESULTS
(see Figure 3–64)
select disk file
name
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Disk
RESULTS
RECALL
RESULTS
(see Figure 3–64)
Recall Result
Recall Result
NOTE. The Disk action displays only files with the extensions .HST
and .MST. It does not display any other files on the disk.
To verify that the file has been recalled, select the TEST
SUMMARY page and look at the Results Source line at the top of
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
Disk
select disk file
name
NOTE. The Disk action displays only files with the extensions .HST
and .MST. It does not display any other files on the disk.
3–194
Highlight
Parameter
To verify that the file has been recalled, select the TEST
SUMMARY page and look at the Results Source line at the top of
3–194
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
the page. The Results Source line will display the name of the file
recalled.
Viewing Results
the page. The Results Source line will display the name of the file
recalled.
Figure 3–64: The RECALL RESULTS Page
Figure 3–64: The RECALL RESULTS Page
Deleting Test Results from Disk
Deleting Test Results from Disk
To delete test results from disk:
To delete test results from disk:
1. Insert the disk containing the test results into the disk drive.
1. Insert the disk containing the test results into the disk drive.
2. Select the test results file to be deleted, as follows:
2. Select the test results file to be deleted, as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
RESULTS
RECALL
RESULTS
(see Figure 3–64)
Highlight
Parameter
select disk file
name
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Disk
RESULTS
RECALL
RESULTS
(see Figure 3–64)
Delete File
Highlight
Parameter
Disk
select disk file
name
3–195
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Select Choice
Delete File
3–195
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Recalling Test Results from Memory
Recalling Test Results from Memory
To recall test results from memory:
To recall test results from memory:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
RESULTS
RECALL
RESULTS
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Memory
(see Figure 3–64)
select Current or
Previous
Select Menu
Page
RESULTS
RECALL
RESULTS
Recall Result
Printing Results
3–196
Press Menu
Button
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Memory
(see Figure 3–64)
select Current or
Previous
Recall Result
Printing Results
There are two ways to print out the results of the current test. One
way is to tell the CTS 710 which results to print from the print dialog
box. The second way is to display the results you wish to print out
and then print the displayed screen (this is the only way to print out
history graphs).
There are two ways to print out the results of the current test. One
way is to tell the CTS 710 which results to print from the print dialog
box. The second way is to display the results you wish to print out
and then print the displayed screen (this is the only way to print out
history graphs).
Results are printed according to the Printer Type, which is set on the
PRINTER SETUP page (see page 3–203). Results can be printed to a
printer or to a disk file. Results are printed to disk in three formats:
Windows BMP format, Interleaf image format, and Encapsulated
PostScript format.
Results are printed according to the Printer Type, which is set on the
PRINTER SETUP page (see page 3–203). Results can be printed to a
printer or to a disk file. Results are printed to disk in three formats:
Windows BMP format, Interleaf image format, and Encapsulated
PostScript format.
Printing Main Results or Error Analysis
Printing Main Results or Error Analysis
When the CTS 710 prints test results, it prints out the contents of the
MAIN RESULTS page or the ERROR ANALYSIS page. The printed
results are reformatted so that all results fit on a single page.
When the CTS 710 prints test results, it prints out the contents of the
MAIN RESULTS page or the ERROR ANALYSIS page. The printed
results are reformatted so that all results fit on a single page.
Before printing results, check that the printer setup is correct. The
printer setup is displayed on the PRINTER SETUP page of the
UTILITY menu.
Before printing results, check that the printer setup is correct. The
printer setup is displayed on the PRINTER SETUP page of the
UTILITY menu.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–196
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
To print the results of the current test:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
PRINT
(see Figure 3–65)
Highlight
Parameter
To print the results of the current test:
Select Choice
Print Main
Results
Print Error
Analysis
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
PRINT
(see Figure 3–65)
Print
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Print Main
Results
Print Error
Analysis
Print
Abort
Abort
EXIT
EXIT
H Highlight Print Main Results and then select Print to print the
contents of the MAIN RESULTS page.
H Highlight Print Main Results and then select Print to print the
contents of the MAIN RESULTS page.
H Highlight Print Error Analysis and then select Print to print the
contents of the ERROR ANALYSIS page.
H Highlight Print Error Analysis and then select Print to print the
contents of the ERROR ANALYSIS page.
H Select Abort to cancel a printout in process.
H Select Abort to cancel a printout in process.
H Select EXIT if you decide not to print out any test results.
H Select EXIT if you decide not to print out any test results.
Figure 3–65: The PRINT CONTROL Dialog Box
Figure 3–65: The PRINT CONTROL Dialog Box
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–197
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–197
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
To print the results of a test saved on disk, recall the results (see
page 3–194) and then print as previously described.
To print the results of a test saved on disk, recall the results (see
page 3–194) and then print as previously described.
To print the results of the previous test, recall the previous test (see
page 3–196) and then print as previously described.
To print the results of the previous test, recall the previous test (see
page 3–196) and then print as previously described.
Printing History Graphs
Printing History Graphs
To print a history graph from the CTS 710:
To print a history graph from the CTS 710:
1. Display the history graph you want to print.
1. Display the history graph you want to print.
The history graph can be for the current test or the previous test
or it can be recalled from disk.
The history graph can be for the current test or the previous test
or it can be recalled from disk.
2. Print the history graph as follows:
Press Menu
Button
PRINT
(see Figure 3–65)
3–198
Select Menu
Page
2. Print the history graph as follows:
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Print Last Screen
Print
Press Menu
Button
PRINT
(see Figure 3–65)
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Print Last Screen
Print
Abort
Abort
EXIT
EXIT
H Select Print to print the displayed history graph using the
settings on the PRINTER SETUP page of the UTILITY
menu.
H Select Print to print the displayed history graph using the
settings on the PRINTER SETUP page of the UTILITY
menu.
H Select EXIT if you decide not to print any test results.
H Select EXIT if you decide not to print any test results.
H Select Abort to cancel a printout in process.
H Select Abort to cancel a printout in process.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–198
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Changing Instrument Settings
Changing Instrument Settings
This section describes how to change the date and time settings,
printer settings, and the GPIB and RS-232 parameters. This section
describes how to display a screen that details the CTS 710 configuration. You will also find a description of how to run the instrument
self-test in this section.
Viewing the Instrument Configuration
This section describes how to change the date and time settings,
printer settings, and the GPIB and RS-232 parameters. This section
describes how to display a screen that details the CTS 710 configuration. You will also find a description of how to run the instrument
self-test in this section.
Viewing the Instrument Configuration
You can display a page that describes how the CTS 710 is configured
as well as the installed options and the hardware and firmware
revision level.
You can display a page that describes how the CTS 710 is configured
as well as the installed options and the hardware and firmware
revision level.
To display the instrument configuration:
To display the instrument configuration:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
UTILITY
INSTR CONFIG
none
none
UTILITY
INSTR CONFIG
none
none
Table 3–36 describes the lines of the INSTR CONFIG page.
Table 3–36 describes the lines of the INSTR CONFIG page.
Table 3–36: Lines of the Instrument Configuration Page
Table 3–36: Lines of the Instrument Configuration Page
Line
Description
Line
Description
Model
The model number of the instrument.
Model
The model number of the instrument.
Serial Number
The serial number of the instrument.
Serial Number
The serial number of the instrument.
Hardware Revision
The version of hardware.
Hardware Revision
The version of hardware.
Firmware Revision
The version of firmware.
Firmware Revision
The version of firmware.
Options
Separates information that applies to
every instrument from information
about optional configurations.
Options
Separates information that applies to
every instrument from information
about optional configurations.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–199
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–199
Changing Instrument Settings
Changing Instrument Settings
Table 3–36: Lines of the Instrument Configuration Page (Cont.)
Table 3–36: Lines of the Instrument Configuration Page (Cont.)
Line
Description
Line
Description
Interface Module
Displays which interface module is
installed (supported transmit and
receive rates) and wavelength of
module, if optical.
Interface Module
Displays which interface module is
installed (supported transmit and
receive rates) and wavelength of
module, if optical.
DS1/DS3 Option
Indicates whether the DS1/DS3
Add/Drop/Test option is installed.
DS1/DS3 Option
Indicates whether the DS1/DS3
Add/Drop/Test option is installed.
Setting the Display Brightness
3–200
Setting the Display Brightness
You can set the display brightness to three levels: Low, Medium, and
High.
You can set the display brightness to three levels: Low, Medium, and
High.
To set the display brightness:
To set the display brightness:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
UTILITY
MISC SETTINGS
(see Figure 3–66)
Display
Brightness
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Low
UTILITY
MISC SETTINGS
(see Figure 3–66)
Display
Brightness
Select Choice
Low
Medium
Medium
High
High
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–200
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Changing Instrument Settings
Figure 3–66: The MISC SETTINGS Page
Changing Instrument Settings
Figure 3–66: The MISC SETTINGS Page
Turning the Beeper On and Off
Turning the Beeper On and Off
The CTS 710 has a beeper. The beeper is used alert you when a
pass/fail test has completed, or when certain conditions occur. You
can turn off the beeper if you wish.
The CTS 710 has a beeper. The beeper is used alert you when a
pass/fail test has completed, or when certain conditions occur. You
can turn off the beeper if you wish.
To turn the beeper on or off:
To turn the beeper on or off:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
UTILITY
MISC SETTINGS
(see Figure 3–66)
Beeper
On
UTILITY
MISC SETTINGS
(see Figure 3–66)
Beeper
On
Off
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Off
3–201
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–201
Changing Instrument Settings
Changing Instrument Settings
Setting the Date
Setting the Date
The date is used when writing files to disk, it is used to track
measurement history, and it is used when displaying history graphs.
The date is used when writing files to disk, it is used to track
measurement history, and it is used when displaying history graphs.
To set the date:
To set the date:
1. Display the current date setting as follows:
1. Display the current date setting as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
UTILITY
MISC SETTINGS
Current Date
SET DATE
UTILITY
MISC SETTINGS
Current Date
SET DATE
After you select SET DATE, the CTS 710 enters Edit Mode.
After you select SET DATE, the CTS 710 enters Edit Mode.
2. Assign the knob by selecting Year, Month, or Day as necessary.
2. Assign the knob by selecting Year, Month, or Day as necessary.
3. Turn the knob to change the setting.
3. Turn the knob to change the setting.
4. Select CANCEL to abort any changes and exit Edit Mode.
4. Select CANCEL to abort any changes and exit Edit Mode.
5. Select DONE to enter your changes and exit Edit Mode.
5. Select DONE to enter your changes and exit Edit Mode.
Setting the Time
Setting the Time
The time is used when writing files to disk, it is used to track
measurement history, and it is used when displaying history graphs.
The time is used when writing files to disk, it is used to track
measurement history, and it is used when displaying history graphs.
To set the time:
To set the time:
1. Display the current time as follows:
1. Display the current time as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
UTILITY
MISC SETTINGS
(see Figure 3–66)
Current Time
SET TIME
UTILITY
MISC SETTINGS
(see Figure 3–66)
Current Time
SET TIME
After you select SET TIME, the CTS 710 enters Edit Mode.
3–202
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
After you select SET TIME, the CTS 710 enters Edit Mode.
3–202
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Changing Instrument Settings
Changing Instrument Settings
NOTE. While you set the time in Edit Mode, the clock stops running.
NOTE. While you set the time in Edit Mode, the clock stops running.
2. Assign the knob by selecting Hour, Minute, or Second as
necessary.
2. Assign the knob by selecting Hour, Minute, or Second as
necessary.
3. Turn the knob to change the setting.
3. Turn the knob to change the setting.
4. Select CANCEL to abort any changes and exit Edit Mode.
4. Select CANCEL to abort any changes and exit Edit Mode.
5. Select DONE to enter your changes and exit Edit Mode.
5. Select DONE to enter your changes and exit Edit Mode.
Changing the Printer Setup
Changing the Printer Setup
The CTS 710 prints to Tek DPU-411 printers, Epson-compatible
printers, and Hewlett-Packard Thinkjet printers. It can also print to a
file on disk. The print parameters are located on the PRINTER
SETUP page of the UTILITY menu (see Figure 3–67). Printers are
supported only by an RS-232 connection.
The CTS 710 prints to Tek DPU-411 printers, Epson-compatible
printers, and Hewlett-Packard Thinkjet printers. It can also print to a
file on disk. The print parameters are located on the PRINTER
SETUP page of the UTILITY menu (see Figure 3–67). Printers are
supported only by an RS-232 connection.
Figure 3–67: The PRINTER SETUP Page
Figure 3–67: The PRINTER SETUP Page
Setting up the CTS 710 for a printer consists of two steps, specifying
the printer or file type and setting RS-232 parameters. Additionally,
Setting up the CTS 710 for a printer consists of two steps, specifying
the printer or file type and setting RS-232 parameters. Additionally,
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–203
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–203
Changing Instrument Settings
3–204
Changing Instrument Settings
you can specify two lines of text to be included on any printout. The
two lines of text identify the user name and the company name.
you can specify two lines of text to be included on any printout. The
two lines of text identify the user name and the company name.
Specifying the Printer or File Type
Specifying the Printer or File Type
To set the printer or file type:
To set the printer or file type:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
UTILITY
PRINTER
SETUP
Printer Type
Tek DPU-411
UTILITY
PRINTER
SETUP
Printer Type
Tek DPU-411
Epson
Epson
Thinkjet
Thinkjet
To Disk
BMP Format
To Disk
BMP Format
To Disk
Ileaf Format
To Disk
Ileaf Format
To Disk
EPS Format
To Disk
EPS Format
H Select To Disk BMP Format to print a file to disk in Windows
bitmap format.
H Select To Disk BMP Format to print a file to disk in Windows
bitmap format.
H Select To Disk Ileaf Format to print a file to disk in Interleaf
image format.
H Select To Disk Ileaf Format to print a file to disk in Interleaf
image format.
H Select To Disk EPS Format to print a file to disk in Encapsulated PostScript format.
H Select To Disk EPS Format to print a file to disk in Encapsulated PostScript format.
Setting RS-232 Parameters
Setting RS-232 Parameters
To determine the correct RS-232 settings for your printer, refer to the
manual that came with your printer.
To determine the correct RS-232 settings for your printer, refer to the
manual that came with your printer.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–204
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Changing Instrument Settings
To set the RS-232 parameters for the printer:
Changing Instrument Settings
To set the RS-232 parameters for the printer:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
UTILITY
PRINTER
SETUP
Baud Rate
1200
UTILITY
PRINTER
SETUP
Baud Rate
1200
Stop Bits
2400
2400
4800
4800
9600
9600
1
Stop Bits
2
Parity
Flow Control
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1
2
None
Parity
None
Odd
Odd
Even
Even
None
Flow Control
None
Software
Software
Hardware
Hardware
H/W & S/W
H/W & S/W
3–205
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–205
Changing Instrument Settings
Changing Instrument Settings
Setting the Print User & Company Text
Setting the Print User & Company Text
You can have the CTS 710 include text on a printout that identifies
the user name and company name. Including this text is optional.
You can have the CTS 710 include text on a printout that identifies
the user name and company name. Including this text is optional.
To set the user name and company name:
To set the user name and company name:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
UTILITY
PRINTER
SETUP
Print User &
Company
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
On
UTILITY
PRINTER
SETUP
Print User &
Company
Off
On
Off
User Name
EDIT TEXT
User Name
EDIT TEXT
Company Name
EDIT TEXT
Company Name
EDIT TEXT
H The User Name and Company Name fields are 20 characters
long. Select DONE when you are finished editing the name.
Setting Remote Control Parameters
H The User Name and Company Name fields are 20 characters
long. Select DONE when you are finished editing the name.
Setting Remote Control Parameters
You can control the CTS 710 using a General Purpose Interface Bus
(GPIB) or an RS-232 connection. For information on remote control
commands, refer to the CTS 710 Programmer Manual.
3–206
Select Choice
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
You can control the CTS 710 using a General Purpose Interface Bus
(GPIB) or an RS-232 connection. For information on remote control
commands, refer to the CTS 710 Programmer Manual.
3–206
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Changing Instrument Settings
Changing Instrument Settings
Setting the GPIB Address
Setting the GPIB Address
To set the CTS 710 GPIB address:
To set the CTS 710 GPIB address:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
UTILITY
REMOTE
CONTROL
GPIB Primary
Address (see
Figure 3–68)
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Default 4
UTILITY
REMOTE
CONTROL
GPIB Primary
Address (see
Figure 3–68)
Select Choice
Default 4
Inc
Inc
Dec
Dec
Offline
Offline
H Select Default 4 to set the GPIB address to its default value.
H Select Default 4 to set the GPIB address to its default value.
H Select Inc to increment the GPIB address.
H Select Inc to increment the GPIB address.
H Select Dec to decrement the GPIB address.
H Select Dec to decrement the GPIB address.
H Select Offline to place the CTS 710 in the offline state.
H Select Offline to place the CTS 710 in the offline state.
H The maximum GPIB address value is 30. The minimum GPIB
address value is 0.
H The maximum GPIB address value is 30. The minimum GPIB
address value is 0.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–207
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–207
Changing Instrument Settings
Changing Instrument Settings
3–208
Figure 3–68: The REMOTE CONTROL Page
Figure 3–68: The REMOTE CONTROL Page
Setting RS-232 Parameters
Setting RS-232 Parameters
The appropriate settings for RS-232 parameters depend on how the
controller is set up. Refer to the user manual that came with your
controller to determine the correct settings.
The appropriate settings for RS-232 parameters depend on how the
controller is set up. Refer to the user manual that came with your
controller to determine the correct settings.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–208
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Changing Instrument Settings
To set the remote control RS-232 parameters:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
UTILITY
REMOTE
Baud Rate
CONTROL
(see Figure 3–68)
Stop Bits
Changing Instrument Settings
To set the remote control RS-232 parameters:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
1200
UTILITY
REMOTE
Baud Rate
CONTROL
(see Figure 3–68)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1200
2400
2400
4800
4800
9600
9600
1
Stop Bits
2
Parity
Select Choice
1
2
None
Parity
None
Odd
Odd
Even
Even
Hardware
Handshake
Ha sha e
Off
Software
Handshake
Ha sha e
None
Data Carrier
Dete t
Detect
Off
Tx Delay
(Seconds)
e o s
0
On
Xon/Xoff
On
1
Hardware
Handshake
Ha sha e
Off
Software
Handshake
Ha sha e
None
Data Carrier
Dete t
Detect
Off
Tx Delay
(Seconds)
e o s
0
On
Xon/Xoff
On
1
5
5
Inc
Inc
Dec
Dec
3–209
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–209
Changing Instrument Settings
Changing Instrument Settings
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Tx Terminator
LF
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Tx Terminator
LF
CR
CR
CR/LF
CR/LF
LF/CR
LF/CR
H For Tx Delay, select one of the preset choices or use Inc and Dec
to specify a value different from the preset choices.
H For Tx Delay, select one of the preset choices or use Inc and Dec
to specify a value different from the preset choices.
H The maximum value for Tx Delay is 60. The minimum value
is 0.
H The maximum value for Tx Delay is 60. The minimum value
is 0.
Running Instrument Self Tests
3–210
Press Menu
Button
Running Instrument Self Tests
The CTS 710 provides self-contained tests that can be run any time
you suspect the CTS 710 may not be performing properly.
The CTS 710 provides self-contained tests that can be run any time
you suspect the CTS 710 may not be performing properly.
The only test you might need to perform is the Power up Self Test.
The other self tests available for selection are for servicing the
instrument. Complete details on the self tests are located in the
CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service manual.
The only test you might need to perform is the Power up Self Test.
The other self tests available for selection are for servicing the
instrument. Complete details on the self tests are located in the
CTS 710 SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service manual.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–210
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Changing Instrument Settings
Changing Instrument Settings
Running the Power Up Self Test
Running the Power Up Self Test
To run the power up self test:
To run the power up self test:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
UTILITY
SELF TEST
Self Test Group
Power up
Self Test
UTILITY
SELF TEST
Self Test Group
Power up
Self Test
Self Test Loop
Once
Self Test Loop
Once
Self Test Control
Run
Self Test Control
Run
Select Choice
Select Choice
H Select Abort to stop a self test in progress.
H Select Abort to stop a self test in progress.
If your CTS 710 fails the self test, contact the nearest Tektronix
Service Center.
If your CTS 710 fails the self test, contact the nearest Tektronix
Service Center.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–211
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–211
Changing Instrument Settings
3–212
Changing Instrument Settings
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
3–212
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendices
Appendices
Appendix A: Menu Maps
Appendix A: Menu Maps
TEST CONTROL Page
TEST CONTROL Page
Test Duration
History Resolution
5 min
15 min
1 hour
Continuous
USER
DEFINED
Test Duration
History Resolution
Normal
(1 min)
Low
(15 min)
5 min
15 min
1 hour
Continuous
USER
DEFINED
Normal
(1 min)
Low
(15 min)
RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page
RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page
Memory
0. DEFAULT
1. Named when saved
2. Named when saved
3. Named when saved
4. Named when saved
5. Named when saved
Disk
Choices depend on disk content
Memory
0. DEFAULT
1. Named when saved
2. Named when saved
3. Named when saved
4. Named when saved
5. Named when saved
Disk
Choices depend on disk content
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Recall
Setup
Recall
Setup
Delete File
A–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Recall
Setup
Recall
Setup
Delete File
A–1
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS Page
Disk
Choices depend on disk content
RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS Page
Disk
Choices depend on disk content
Recall &
Run Test
Delete File
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page
Name
Description
Save to Memory
Save To Disk
A–2
Recall &
Run Test
Delete File
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS Page
SETUP_XX
Clear
EDIT NAME
Name
Description
Save to Memory
Save To Disk
SETUP_XX
Clear
EDIT NAME
None
Clear
EDIT TEXT
None
Clear
EDIT TEXT
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
Memory 5
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
Memory 5
Save File
Save File
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page
Name
Description
Operator Start Prompt
Test Duration
Fail If
Operator End Prompt
On Test Completion
Save to Disk
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS Page
TEST_XX
Clear
EDIT NAME
Name
Description
Operator Start Prompt
Test Duration
Fail If
Operator End Prompt
On Test Completion
Save to Disk
None
Clear
EDIT TEXT
TEST_XX
Clear
EDIT NAME
None
Clear
EDIT TEXT
Default
Clear
Preview
EDIT TEXT
Default
Clear
Preview
EDIT TEXT
5 min
15 min
1 hour
Continuous
USER
DEFINED
5 min
15 min
1 hour
Continuous
USER
DEFINED
Up to four fail if
conditions can be
specified
Up to four fail if
conditions can be
specified
Default
Clear
Preview
EDIT TEXT
Default
Clear
Preview
EDIT TEXT
Do
Nothing
Print
Summary
Save to
Disk
Do
Nothing
Print
Summary
Save to
Disk
Save File
Save File
A–3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–3
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (1 of 2)
TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (1 of 2)
STS-1
STS-3
OC-1
OC-3
OC-12
DS1
DS3
Transmit Rate
Transmit Clock
Transmit Level
Signal Structure
STS Under Test
Mapping
VT Under Test
Payload
Test Pattern
Background Pattern
Tx/Rx Settings
STS-1
STS-3
OC-1
OC-3
OC-12
DS1
DS3
Transmit Rate
Transmit Clock
Transmit Level
Signal Structure
STS Under Test
Mapping
VT Under Test
Payload
Test Pattern
Background Pattern
Tx/Rx Settings
Internal
Recovered
External
BITS
Internal
Recovered
External
BITS
(Rate=STS-1 and
STS-3 only)
Cross
Connect
High
A–4
(Rate=STS-1 and
STS-3 only)
Cross
Connect
High
(Rate=STS-1/
OC-1)
1 x STS-1
(Rate=STS-3/
OC-3)
3 x STS-1
1 x STS-3c
(Rate=OC-12)
12 x STS-1
4 x STS-3c
(Rate=STS-1/
OC-1)
1 x STS-1
(Rate=STS-3/
OC-3)
3 x STS-1
1 x STS-3c
(Rate=OC-12)
12 x STS-1
4 x STS-3c
(Structure=
1 x STS-1)
1
(Structure=
3 x STS-1)
1
2
3
(Structure=
1 x STS-3c)
1
(Structure=
1 x STS-1)
1
(Structure=
3 x STS-1)
1
2
3
(Structure=
1 x STS-3c)
1
(Structure=
12 x STS-1)
1
..
.
12
(Structure= 4 x STS-3c)
1
2
3
4
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Equipped)
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(UnEquipped)
VT1.5
Async
DS3
(Structure=
12 x STS-1)
1
..
.
12
(Structure= 4 x STS-3c)
1
2
3
4
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(Equipped)
Bulk Fill
No Mapping
(UnEquipped)
VT1.5
Async
DS3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (2 of 2)
Transmit Rate
Transmit Clock
Transmit Level
Signal Structure
STS Under Test
Mapping
VT Under Test
Payload
Test Pattern
Background Pattern
Tx/Rx Settings
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
TRANSMIT SETTINGS Page (2 of 2)
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async)
VT #1
VT #28
Next
Previous
(Mapping=VT1.5 Async)
DS1
Ext Add
DS1
Unframed
DS1
SF (D4)
DS1 ESF
(Mapping=DS3)
DS3
Ext Add
DS3
Unframed
DS3
C–bit
DS3 M13
(Mapping=VT1.5 Async)
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
QRSS
2^20–1
All Ones
All Zeros
1 in 8
3 in 24
User Word
8 bit
User Word
16 bit
User Word
24 bit
(Mapping=DS3)
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
All Ones
All Zeros
User Word
8 bit
User Word
16 bit
User Word
24 bit
Menu Maps
Transmit Rate
Transmit Clock
Transmit Level
Signal Structure
STS Under Test
Mapping
VT Under Test
Payload
Test Pattern
Background Pattern
Tx/Rx Settings
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async)
VT #1
VT #28
Next
Previous
(Mapping=VT1.5 Async)
DS1
Ext Add
DS1
Unframed
DS1
SF (D4)
DS1 ESF
(Mapping=DS3)
DS3
Ext Add
DS3
Unframed
DS3
C–bit
DS3 M13
(Mapping=VT1.5 Async)
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
QRSS
2^20–1
All Ones
All Zeros
1 in 8
3 in 24
User Word
8 bit
User Word
16 bit
User Word
24 bit
(Mapping=DS3)
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
All Ones
All Zeros
User Word
8 bit
User Word
16 bit
User Word
24 bit
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async)
QRSS
2^20–1
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async)
QRSS
2^20–1
Independent
Coupled
Through
Mode
Independent
Coupled
Through
Mode
A–5
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–5
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (1 of 4)
Error Type set to
Error Rate set to
Transmit Alarm set to
Transmit Failure set to
A–6
(Mapping=
No Mapping)
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Pattern Bit
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (1 of 4)
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async)
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
VT BIP
VT FEBE
Pattern Bit
(Mapping=DS3)
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Pattern Bit
(Mapping=VT1.5 Async
& Payload=
DS1 SF (D4))
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Frame Bit
VT BIP
VT FEBE
Pattern Bit
(Mapping=VT1.5 Async
& Payload=DS1 ESF)
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Frame Bit
VT BIP
VT FEBE
Pattern Bit
CRC (ESF)
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async)
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
VT BIP
VT FEBE
Pattern Bit
(Mapping=DS3)
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Pattern Bit
(Mapping=DS3 &
Payload=
DS3 C–bit)
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Frame Bit
Pattern Bit
C–Bit
(Mapping=VT1.5 Async
& Payload=
DS1 SF (D4))
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Frame Bit
VT BIP
VT FEBE
Pattern Bit
(Mapping=DS3 &
Payload=
DS3 C–bit)
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Frame Bit
Pattern Bit
C–Bit
(Mapping=DS3 &
Payload=DS3 M13)
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Frame Bit
Pattern Bit
P–Bit
(Mapping=VT1.5 Async
& Payload=DS1 ESF)
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Frame Bit
VT BIP
VT FEBE
Pattern Bit
CRC (ESF)
(Mapping=DS3 &
Payload=DS3 M13)
None
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Frame Bit
Pattern Bit
P–Bit
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Error Type set to
Error Rate set to
Transmit Alarm set to
Transmit Failure set to
A–6
(Mapping=
No Mapping)
Section B1
Line B2
Path B3
Path FEBE
Pattern Bit
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (2 of 4)
Error Type set to
Error Rate set to
Transmit Alarm set to
Transmit Failure set to
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (2 of 4)
None
1e–3
1e–4
1e–5
1e–6
1e–7
1e–8
USER
DEFINED
A–7
Error Type set to
Error Rate set to
Transmit Alarm set to
Transmit Failure set to
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
None
1e–3
1e–4
1e–5
1e–6
1e–7
1e–8
USER
DEFINED
A–7
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (3 of 4)
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (3 of 4)
Error Type set to
Error Rate set to
Transmit Alarm set to
Transmit Failure set to
Error Type set to
Error Rate set to
Transmit Alarm set to
Transmit Failure set to
(Mapping=
No Mapping)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async &
Payload=DS1
Ext Add)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
VT AIS
VT FERF
(Mapping=DS3)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
(Mapping=VT1.5
Async & Payload=
DS1 Unframed)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
VT AIS
VT FERF
DSn AIS
(Mapping=DS3 &
Payload=DS3 C–bit or
DS3 M13)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
DSn Yellow
DSn AIS
DSn Idle
(Mapping=VT1.5
Async & Payload=
DS1 SF (D4) or
DS1 ESF)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
VT AIS
VT FERF
DSn Yellow
DSn AIS
A–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
(Mapping=
No Mapping)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async &
Payload=DS1
Ext Add)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
VT AIS
VT FERF
(Mapping=DS3)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
(Mapping=VT1.5
Async & Payload=
DS1 Unframed)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
VT AIS
VT FERF
DSn AIS
(Mapping=DS3 &
Payload=DS3 C–bit or
DS3 M13)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
DSn Yellow
DSn AIS
DSn Idle
(Mapping=VT1.5
Async & Payload=
DS1 SF (D4) or
DS1 ESF)
None
Line AIS
Line FERF
Path AIS
Path FERF
VT AIS
VT FERF
DSn Yellow
DSn AIS
A–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (4 of 4)
ERRORS & ALARMS Page (4 of 4)
Error Type set to
Error Rate set to
Transmit Alarm set to
Transmit Failure set to
Error Type set to
Error Rate set to
Transmit Alarm set to
Transmit Failure set to
(Mapping=
No Mapping)
None
LOS
LOF
STS LOP
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async)
None
LOS
LOF
STS LOP
VT LOP
VT LOM
(Mapping=DS3)
None
LOS
LOF
STS LOP
A–9
(Mapping=
No Mapping)
None
LOS
LOF
STS LOP
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
(Mapping=
VT1.5 Async)
None
LOS
LOF
STS LOP
VT LOP
VT LOM
(Mapping=DS3)
None
LOS
LOF
STS LOP
A–9
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
POINTERS & TIMING Page (1 of 3)
POINTERS & TIMING Page (1 of 3)
Pointer/Timing Mode
Offset Mode
Frequency Offset
Pointer Type
Sequence Type
Pointer Control
Pointer Value Set to
Set with New Data Flag
Pointer Rate
Pointer Direction
Burst Size
Initialization Time
Cool Down Time
Pointer/Timing Mode
Offset Mode
Frequency Offset
Pointer Type
Sequence Type
Pointer Control
Pointer Value Set to
Set with New Data Flag
Pointer Rate
Pointer Direction
Burst Size
Initialization Time
Cool Down Time
Pointer
Movement
Frequency
Offset
Pointer
Sequences
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Frequency Offset)
Line
Payload
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Frequency Offset)
Max +100ppm
Stress +4.6ppm
Stress –4.6ppm
Default 0ppm
USER DEFINED
STS Pointer
VT Pointer
A–10
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Pointer
Movement
Frequency
Offset
Pointer
Sequences
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Frequency Offset)
Line
Payload
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Frequency Offset)
Max +100ppm
Stress +4.6ppm
Stress –4.6ppm
Default 0ppm
USER DEFINED
STS Pointer
VT Pointer
A–10
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
POINTERS & TIMING Page (2 of 3)
Pointer/Timing Mode
Offset Mode
Frequency Offset
Pointer Type
Sequence Type
Pointer Control
Pointer Value Set to
Set with New Data Flag
Pointer S-Bits
Pointer Rate
Pointer Direction
Burst Size
Initialization Time
Cool Down Time
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Pointer Sequences &
Pointer Type=
STS Pointer)
Single
Burst
Phase
Transient
Periodic
Continuous
Periodic
Continuous
With Cancel
Periodic
Continuous
With Add
Periodic
87–3
Periodic
87–3
With Cancel
Periodic
87-3
With Add
Single
Alternating
Double
Alternating
Menu Maps
POINTERS & TIMING Page (2 of 3)
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Pointer Sequences &
Pointer Type=
VT Pointer)
Single
Burst
Phase
Transient
Periodic
Continuous
Periodic
Continuous
With Cancel
Periodic
Continuous
With Add
Periodic
26–1
Periodic
26–1
With Cancel
Periodic
26-1
With Add
Single
Alternating
Double
Alternating
Pointer/Timing Mode
Offset Mode
Frequency Offset
Pointer Type
Sequence Type
Pointer Control
Pointer Value Set to
Set with New Data Flag
Pointer S-Bits
Pointer Rate
Pointer Direction
Burst Size
Initialization Time
Cool Down Time
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Pointer Sequences &
Pointer Type=
STS Pointer)
Single
Burst
Phase
Transient
Periodic
Continuous
Periodic
Continuous
With Cancel
Periodic
Continuous
With Add
Periodic
87–3
Periodic
87–3
With Cancel
Periodic
87-3
With Add
Single
Alternating
Double
Alternating
Single
Burst
Set Value
Continuous
Single
Burst
Set Value
Continuous
(Pointer Control=Set Value)
Min 0
Max 782
Default
522
Illegal
(Max +1)
USER
DEFINED
(Pointer Control=Set Value)
Min 0
Max 782
Default
522
Illegal
(Max +1)
USER
DEFINED
A–11
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Pointer Sequences &
Pointer Type=
VT Pointer)
Single
Burst
Phase
Transient
Periodic
Continuous
Periodic
Continuous
With Cancel
Periodic
Continuous
With Add
Periodic
26–1
Periodic
26–1
With Cancel
Periodic
26-1
With Add
Single
Alternating
Double
Alternating
A–11
Menu Maps
A–12
Menu Maps
POINTERS & TIMING Page (3 of 3)
POINTERS & TIMING Page (3 of 3)
Pointer/Timing Mode
Offset Mode
Frequency Offset
Pointer Type
Sequence Type
Pointer Control
Pointer Value Set to
Set with New Data Flag
Pointer S-Bits
Pointer Rate
Pointer Direction
Burst Size
Initialization Time
Cool Down Time
Pointer/Timing Mode
Offset Mode
Frequency Offset
Pointer Type
Sequence Type
Pointer Control
Pointer Value Set to
Set with New Data Flag
Pointer S-Bits
Pointer Rate
Pointer Direction
Burst Size
Initialization Time
Cool Down Time
(Pointer Control=Set Value)
Yes
No
(Pointer Control=Set Value)
00
01
10
11
(Pointer Control=
Continuous)
Max
2ms
Min
10000ms
Default
50ms
USER
DEFINED
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Pointer Sequences &
Sequence Type=Periodic
type)
34 ms
100 ms
1000 ms
10000ms
USER
DEFINED
(Pointer Control=
Continuous)
Increment
Decrement
Alternate
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Pointer Sequences)
Increment
Decrement
(Pointer Control=Set Value)
Yes
No
(Pointer Control=Set Value)
00
01
10
11
(Pointer Control=
Continuous)
Max
2ms
Min
10000ms
Default
50ms
USER
DEFINED
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Pointer Sequences &
Sequence Type=Periodic
type)
34 ms
100 ms
1000 ms
10000ms
USER
DEFINED
(Pointer Control=
Continuous)
Increment
Decrement
Alternate
(Pointer/Timing Mode=
Pointer Sequences)
Increment
Decrement
(Pointer Control=Burst)
2
.
.
.
8
(Pointer Control=Burst)
2
.
.
.
8
(Pointer/Timing
Mode=Pointer Sequences)
On
Off
(Pointer/Timing
Mode=Pointer Sequences)
On
Off
(Pointer/Timing
Mode=Pointer Sequences)
On
Off
(Pointer/Timing
Mode=Pointer Sequences)
On
Off
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–12
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
APS COMMANDS Page (1 of 3)
APS COMMANDS Page (1 of 3)
APS Mode
K1 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bits 5–8:
K2 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bit 5:
Bits 6–8:
Transmit Setup
APS Mode
K1 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bits 5–8:
K2 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bit 5:
Bits 6–8:
Transmit Setup
Span
Ring
Set to
00000000
Set to
11111111
Default
10101010
EDIT BYTE
(APS Mode=Ring)
NR No Request
RR–R Reverse Request Ring
RR–S Reverse Request Span
EXER–R Exerciser Ring
EXER–S Exerciser Span
WTR Wait To Restore
MS–S Manual Switch Ring
MS–S Manual Switch Span
SD–R Signal Degrade Ring
SD–S Signal Degrade Span
SD–P Signal Degrade Protection
SF–R Signal Fail Ring
SF–S Signal Fail Span
FS–R Forced Switch Ring
FS–S Forced Switch Span
LP–S Lockout of Protection Span
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
(APS Mode=Span)
NR No Request
DNR Do Not Revert
RR Reverse Request
Not Used
EXER Exerciser
Not Used
WTR Wait to Restore
Not Used
MS Manual Switch
Not Used
SD Signal Degrade Low
SD Signal Degrade High
SF Signal Fail Low
SF Signal Fail High
FS Forced Switch
LP Lockout of Protection
A–13
Span
Ring
Set to
00000000
Set to
11111111
Default
10101010
EDIT BYTE
(APS Mode=Ring)
NR No Request
RR–R Reverse Request Ring
RR–S Reverse Request Span
EXER–R Exerciser Ring
EXER–S Exerciser Span
WTR Wait To Restore
MS–S Manual Switch Ring
MS–S Manual Switch Span
SD–R Signal Degrade Ring
SD–S Signal Degrade Span
SD–P Signal Degrade Protection
SF–R Signal Fail Ring
SF–S Signal Fail Span
FS–R Forced Switch Ring
FS–S Forced Switch Span
LP–S Lockout of Protection Span
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
(APS Mode=Span)
NR No Request
DNR Do Not Revert
RR Reverse Request
Not Used
EXER Exerciser
Not Used
WTR Wait to Restore
Not Used
MS Manual Switch
Not Used
SD Signal Degrade Low
SD Signal Degrade High
SF Signal Fail Low
SF Signal Fail High
FS Forced Switch
LP Lockout of Protection
A–13
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
APS COMMANDS Page (2 of 3)
APS COMMANDS Page (2 of 3)
APS Mode
K1 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bits 5–8:
K2 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bit 5:
Bits 6–8:
Transmit Setup
APS Mode
K1 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bits 5–8:
K2 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bit 5:
Bits 6–8:
Transmit Setup
#0 (0000)
#1 (0001)
#2 (0010)
#3 (0011)
#4 (0100)
#5 (0101)
#6 (0110)
#7 (0111)
#8 (1000)
#9 (1001)
#10 (1010)
#11 (1011)
#12 (1100)
#13 (1101)
#14 (1110)
#15 (1111)
Set to
00000000
Set to
11111111
Default
10101010
EDIT BYTE
A–14
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
#0 (0000)
#1 (0001)
#2 (0010)
#3 (0011)
#4 (0100)
#5 (0101)
#6 (0110)
#7 (0111)
#8 (1000)
#9 (1001)
#10 (1010)
#11 (1011)
#12 (1100)
#13 (1101)
#14 (1110)
#15 (1111)
Set to
00000000
Set to
11111111
Default
10101010
EDIT BYTE
A–14
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
APS COMMANDS Page (3 of 3)
APS COMMANDS Page (3 of 3)
APS Mode
K1 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bits 5–8:
K2 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bit 5:
Bits 6–8:
Transmit Setup
APS Mode
K1 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bits 5–8:
K2 Full Byte
Bits 1–4:
Bit 5:
Bits 6–8:
Transmit Setup
#0 (0000)
#1 (0001)
#2 (0010)
#3 (0011)
#4 (0100)
#5 (0101)
#6 (0110)
#7 (0111)
#8 (1000)
#9 (1001)
#10 (1010)
#11 (1011)
#12 (1100)
#13 (1101)
#14 (1110)
#15 (1111)
(APS Mode=Span)
1+1
1:N
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
(APS Mode=Ring)
Short
Long
#0 (0000)
#1 (0001)
#2 (0010)
#3 (0011)
#4 (0100)
#5 (0101)
#6 (0110)
#7 (0111)
#8 (1000)
#9 (1001)
#10 (1010)
#11 (1011)
#12 (1100)
#13 (1101)
#14 (1110)
#15 (1111)
(APS Mode=Span)
1+1
1:N
(APS Mode=Ring)
Short
Long
IDLE
BR Bridged
BR & SW Bridged & Switched
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
FERF
AIS
IDLE
BR Bridged
BR & SW Bridged & Switched
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
FERF
AIS
Transmit User Setup
Transmit Default
Transmit Illegal
Transmit User Setup
Transmit Default
Transmit Illegal
A–15
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–15
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page
A–16
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page
Showing Overhead for
External Add
Choices depend on
transmit rate
A1
None
D1–D3
D4–D12
F1
D1
A2
E1
D2
C1
F1
D3
D4
D7
D10
S1
K1
D5
D8
D11
M0
K2
D6
D9
D12
E2
Reset
Overhead
Set to
10101010
Set to
11111111
Default
xxxxxxxx
EDIT BYTE
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–16
Showing Overhead for
External Add
Choices depend on
transmit rate
A1
None
D1–D3
D4–D12
F1
D1
A2
E1
D2
C1
F1
D3
D4
D7
D10
S1
K1
D5
D8
D11
M0
K2
D6
D9
D12
E2
Reset
Overhead
Set to
10101010
Set to
11111111
Default
xxxxxxxx
EDIT BYTE
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
PATH OVERHEAD Page
Overhead View
External Add
(Overhead View=
STS Path Overhead)
J1
C2
F2
Z3
Z4
Z5
(Overhead View=
V5 Byte)
V5
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
PATH OVERHEAD Page
Overhead View
External Add
STS Path
Overhead
V5
Byte
None
F2
(Overhead View=
STS Path Overhead)
J1
C2
F2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Reset
Overhead
Set to
10101010
Set to
11111111
Default
xxxxxxxx
EDIT BYTE
(Overhead View=
V5 Byte)
V5
Reset
Overhead
Set to
10101010
Set to
11111111
Default
xxxxxxxx
EDIT BYTE
A–17
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
STS Path
Overhead
V5
Byte
None
F2
Reset
Overhead
Set to
10101010
Set to
11111111
Default
xxxxxxxx
EDIT BYTE
Reset
Overhead
Set to
10101010
Set to
11111111
Default
xxxxxxxx
EDIT BYTE
A–17
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (1 of 2)
RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (1 of 2)
Receive Rate
Receive Level
Signal Structure
STS Under Test
Mapping
VT Under Test
Payload
Tributary Drop
Test Pattern
Tx/Rx Settings
Receive Rate
Receive Level
Signal Structure
STS Under Test
Mapping
VT Under Test
Payload
Tributary Drop
Test Pattern
Tx/Rx Settings
STS-1
STS-3
OC-1
OC-3
OC-12
DS1
DS3
DS3DS1 Demux
(Rate=
STS-1/STS-3)
Cross
Connect
Low
(Rate=
STS-1/OC-1)
STS-1
A–18
(Rate=
DS3)
Normal
Monitor
(Rate=
STS-3/OC-3)
STS-1
STS-3C
(Rate=
DS1)
Normal
Monitor
Bridge
(Rate=
OC-12)
STS-1
STS-3C
STS-1
STS-3
OC-1
OC-3
OC-12
DS1
DS3
DS3DS1 Demux
(Rate=
STS-1/STS-3)
Cross
Connect
Low
(Rate=
STS-1/OC-1)
STS-1
(Rate=
DS3)
Normal
Monitor
(Rate=
STS-3/OC-3)
STS-1
STS-3C
1 ... 12
(depending on Rate
and Structure)
1 ... 12
(depending on Rate
and Structure)
No
Mapping
(Equipped)
No
Mapping
(UnEquipped)
VT1.5
Async
DS3
No
Mapping
(Equipped)
No
Mapping
(UnEquipped)
VT1.5
Async
DS3
(Mapping=VT1.5)
VT #1
VT #28
Next
Previous
(Mapping=VT1.5)
VT #1
VT #28
Next
Previous
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–18
(Rate=
DS1)
Normal
Monitor
Bridge
(Rate=
OC-12)
STS-1
STS-3C
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (2 of 2)
Receive Rate
Signal Structure
STS Under Test
Mapping
VT Under Test
Payload
Tributary Drop
Test Pattern
Tx/Rx Settings
(Mapping=DS3)
DS3
Unframed
DS3 C–bit
DS3 M13
(Mapping=VT1.5)
DS1
Unframed
DS1 SF (D4)
DS1 ESF
(Mapping=DS3)
On
Off
(Mapping=VT1.5)
On AMI
On B8ZS
Off
(Mapping=
No Mapping)
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
PRBS
2^09–1
All Ones
All Zeros
User Word
Unknown
(Mapping=VT1.5
Rate=DS3)
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
QRSS
2^20–1
All Ones
All Zeros
1 in 8
3 in 24
User Word
8 bit
User Word
16 bit
User Word
24 bit
Unknown
Menu Maps
RECEIVE SETTINGS Page (2 of 2)
Receive Rate
Signal Structure
STS Under Test
Mapping
VT Under Test
Payload
Tributary Drop
Test Pattern
Tx/Rx Settings
(Mapping= DS3)
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
All Ones
All Zeros
User Word
8 bit
User Word
16 bit
User Word
24 bit
Unknown
(Mapping=DS3)
DS3
Unframed
DS3 C–bit
DS3 M13
(Mapping=VT1.5)
DS1
Unframed
DS1 SF (D4)
DS1 ESF
(Mapping=DS3)
On
Off
(Mapping=VT1.5)
On AMI
On B8ZS
Off
(Mapping=
No Mapping)
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
PRBS
2^09–1
All Ones
All Zeros
User Word
Unknown
(Mapping=VT1.5
Rate=DS3)
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
QRSS
2^20–1
All Ones
All Zeros
1 in 8
3 in 24
User Word
8 bit
User Word
16 bit
User Word
24 bit
Unknown
Independ–
ent
Coupled
Through
Mode
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–19
(Mapping= DS3)
PRBS
2^23–1
PRBS
2^20–1
PRBS
2^15–1
All Ones
All Zeros
User Word
8 bit
User Word
16 bit
User Word
24 bit
Unknown
Independ–
ent
Coupled
Through
Mode
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–19
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
SIGNAL STATUS Page
SIGNAL STATUS Page
Expected Receive Rate
Received Optical Power
Received Peak Voltage
Expected Receive Rate
Received Optical Power
Received Peak Voltage
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD Page
Showing Overhead for
External Drop
Pause Control
Showing Overhead for
External Drop
Pause Control
Choices depend on
receive rate
Choices depend on
receive rate
None
D1–D3
D4–D12
F1
A1
B1
D1
H1
B2
D4
D7
D10
S1
A–20
A2
E1
D2
H2
K1
D5
D8
D11
M0
C1
F1
D3
H3
K2
D6
D9
D12
E2
None
D1–D3
D4–D12
F1
A1
B1
D1
H1
B2
D4
D7
D10
S1
Pause
Continue
Bytes that can be viewed on this page
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–20
A2
E1
D2
H2
K1
D5
D8
D11
M0
C1
F1
D3
H3
K2
D6
D9
D12
E2
Pause
Continue
Bytes that can be viewed on this page
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
PATH OVERHEAD Page
Overhead View
External Drop
Pause Control
(Overhead View=
V5 Byte)
V5
PATH OVERHEAD Page
Overhead View
External Drop
Pause Control
STS Path
Overhead
V5 Byte
(Overhead View=
STS Path Overhead)
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2
View Only
H4
Z3
Z4
Z5
Menu Maps
STS Path
Overhead
V5 Byte
(Overhead View=
STS Path Overhead)
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2
View Only
H4
Z3
Z4
Z5
None
F2
None
F2
(Overhead View=
V5 Byte)
V5
View Only
TEST SUMMARY Page
Results Source:
Results Rate:
Results Mapping:
Test Started:
Elapsed Time:
Results Source:
Results Rate:
Results Mapping:
Test Started:
Elapsed Time:
TROUBLE SCAN
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
None
F2
View Only
TEST SUMMARY Page
Displayed information is
taken from last test run.
None
F2
Displayed information is
taken from last test run.
TROUBLE SCAN
A–21
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–21
Menu Maps
A–22
Menu Maps
MAIN RESULTS Page
MAIN RESULTS Page
Errors
Failures
Alarms
Pointers
Errors
Failures
Alarms
Pointers
ERROR ANALYSIS Page
ERROR ANALYSIS Page
Section
Analysis
Line
Analysis
Path
Analysis
VT1.5
Analysis
DS3
Analysis
Payload
Analysis
DS1
Analysis
Section
Analysis
Line
Analysis
Path
Analysis
VT1.5
Analysis
DS3
Analysis
Payload
Analysis
DS1
Analysis
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–22
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
HISTORY GRAPHS Page
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Show
Next Top
Change
Top
Change
Bottom
HISTORY GRAPHS Page
(History Resolution=
Normal (1 min))
1 mins/bar
5 mins/bar
15 mins/bar
60 mins/bar
(History Resolution=
Low (15 min))
15 mins/bar
60 mins/bar
4 hrs/bar
12 hrs/bar
(Receive Rate=
SONET Rate)
Failures
SONET Alarms
DS3 Alarms
DS1 Alarms
Section B1 Error Counts
Section B1 Errored Secs
Line B2 Error Counts
Line B2 Errored Secs
Line FEBE Error Counts
Path B3 Error Counts
Path B3 Errored Secs
Path FEBE Error Counts
Pattern Error Counts
Pattern Errored Secs
VT BIP2 Error Counts
VT BIP2 Errored Secs
VT FEBE Error Count
VT FEBE Errored Secs
STS Pointer Justification
STS Pointer Value
VT Pointer Justification
VT1.5 Pointer Value
(Receive Rate=
DS1/DS3)
DS1/DS3 Alarms & Failures
Pattern Error Counts
Pattern Errored Secs
Frame Error Counts
Frame Error Seconds
CRC Error Counts
CRC Error Seconds
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Show
Next Top
Change
Top
Change
Bottom
Cancel
Select
Graph
Cancel
Select
Graph
A–23
(History Resolution=
Normal (1 min))
1 mins/bar
5 mins/bar
15 mins/bar
60 mins/bar
(History Resolution=
Low (15 min))
15 mins/bar
60 mins/bar
4 hrs/bar
12 hrs/bar
(Receive Rate=
SONET Rate)
Failures
SONET Alarms
DS3 Alarms
DS1 Alarms
Section B1 Error Counts
Section B1 Errored Secs
Line B2 Error Counts
Line B2 Errored Secs
Line FEBE Error Counts
Path B3 Error Counts
Path B3 Errored Secs
Path FEBE Error Counts
Pattern Error Counts
Pattern Errored Secs
VT BIP2 Error Counts
VT BIP2 Errored Secs
VT FEBE Error Count
VT FEBE Errored Secs
STS Pointer Justification
STS Pointer Value
VT Pointer Justification
VT1.5 Pointer Value
(Receive Rate=
DS1/DS3)
DS1/DS3 Alarms & Failures
Pattern Error Counts
Pattern Errored Secs
Frame Error Counts
Frame Error Seconds
CRC Error Counts
CRC Error Seconds
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Cancel
Select
Graph
Cancel
Select
Graph
A–23
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
SAVE RESULTS Page
Name
Description
Save To Disk
SAVE RESULTS Page
RESLT_XX
Clear
EDIT NAME
Name
Description
Save To Disk
None
Clear
EDIT TEXT
None
Clear
EDIT TEXT
Save
Current
Save
Previous
Save
Current
Save
Previous
RECALL RESULTS Page
RECALL RESULTS Page
Memory
Current
Previous
Memory
Current
Previous
Recall
Result
Disk
Choices depend on disk content
Display Brightness
Beeper
Current Date
Current Time
Recall
Result
Disk
Choices depend on disk content
Recall
Result
Delete File
MISC SETTINGS Page
A–24
RESLT_XX
Clear
EDIT NAME
Recall
Result
Delete File
MISC SETTINGS Page
Low
Medium
High
Display Brightness
Beeper
Current Date
Current Time
Low
Medium
High
On
Off
On
Off
SET DATE
SET DATE
SET TIME
SET TIME
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–24
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
PRINTER SETUP Page
Printer Type
RS–232
Baud Rate
Stop Bits
Parity
Flow Control
Printer User & Company
User Name
Company Name
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
PRINTER SETUP Page
Printer Type
RS–232
Baud Rate
Stop Bits
Parity
Flow Control
Printer User & Company
User Name
Company Name
Tek
DPU–411
Epson
Thinkjet
To Disk
BMP Format
To Disk
Ileaf Format
To Disk
EPS Format
Tek
DPU–411
Epson
Thinkjet
To Disk
BMP Format
To Disk
Ileaf Format
To Disk
EPS Format
1200
2400
4800
9600
1200
2400
4800
9600
1
2
1
2
None
Odd
Even
None
Odd
Even
None
Software
Hardware
H/W & S/W
None
Software
Hardware
H/W & S/W
Off
On
Off
On
EDIT TEXT
EDIT TEXT
EDIT TEXT
EDIT TEXT
A–25
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–25
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
REMOTE CONTROL Page
GPIB Primary Address
RS–232
Baud Rate
Stop Bits
Parity
Hardware Handshake
Software Handshake
Data Carrier Detect
Tx Delay (Seconds)
Tx Terminator
A–26
REMOTE CONTROL Page
Default 4
Inc
Dec
Offline
GPIB Primary Address
RS–232
Baud Rate
Stop Bits
Parity
Hardware Handshake
Software Handshake
Data Carrier Detect
Tx Delay (Seconds)
Tx Terminator
1200
2400
4800
9600
Default 4
Inc
Dec
Offline
1200
2400
4800
9600
1
2
1
2
None
Odd
Even
None
Odd
Even
Off
On
Off
On
None
Xon/Xoff
None
Xon/Xoff
Off
On
Off
On
0
1
5
Inc
Dec
0
1
5
Inc
Dec
LF
CR
CR/LF
LF/CR
LF
CR
CR/LF
LF/CR
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–26
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
INSTR CONFIG Page
INSTR CONFIG Page
Model:
Serial Number:
Hardware Revision:
Option Revision:
Firmware Revision:
Options:
Interface Module:
DS1/DS3 Option:
Model:
Serial Number:
Hardware Revision:
Option Revision:
Firmware Revision:
Options:
Interface Module:
DS1/DS3 Option:
Displayed information depends on instrument
SELF TEST Page
Self Test Control
Self Test Group
Self Test Routine
Self Test Loop control
View Results
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Displayed information depends on instrument
SELF TEST Page
Run
Abort
Self Test Control
Self Test Group
Self Test Routine
Self Test Loop control
View Results
Self Test
SYS Int.
SYS Ext.
Protocol Bd
Clock Bd
O/E Mod.
Tributary
CPU
Display
Front Panel
Disk
Run
Abort
Self Test
SYS Int.
SYS Ext.
Protocol Bd
Clock Bd
O/E Mod.
Tributary
CPU
Display
Front Panel
Disk
All
All
Once
Ten
Thousand
Until Error
Forever
Once
Ten
Thousand
Until Error
Forever
Page Up
Page Down
Page Up
Page Down
A–27
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–27
Menu Maps
A–28
Menu Maps
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
A–28
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
This appendix describes the status and error messages that appear on
the CTS 710 display. Status messages are statements about actions
the CTS 710 has completed. Status messages appear during normal
operation. Error messages are statements about actions the CTS 710
was unable to complete. Error messages appear when the CTS 710 is
unable to perform a requested action.
Status Messages
This appendix describes the status and error messages that appear on
the CTS 710 display. Status messages are statements about actions
the CTS 710 has completed. Status messages appear during normal
operation. Error messages are statements about actions the CTS 710
was unable to complete. Error messages appear when the CTS 710 is
unable to perform a requested action.
Status Messages
Autoscan complete. The CTS 710 has successfully completed the
Autoscan sequence.
Autoscan complete. The CTS 710 has successfully completed the
Autoscan sequence.
Burst pointer movement transmitted. The POINTER ACTION button
was pressed with the Pointer Control set to Burst.
Burst pointer movement transmitted. The POINTER ACTION button
was pressed with the Pointer Control set to Burst.
Disk root directory read. The CTS 710 has successfully read the disk
directory.
Disk root directory read. The CTS 710 has successfully read the disk
directory.
Factory settings restored, non-volatile settings cleared. This message
appears when the instrument is turned on after it was turned off
during a state change. The instrument settings were corrupted during
the shutdown and so the factory default settings were loaded at
turn-on and all information stored in RAM was cleared.
Factory settings restored, non-volatile settings cleared. This message
appears when the instrument is turned on after it was turned off
during a state change. The instrument settings were corrupted during
the shutdown and so the factory default settings were loaded at
turn-on and all information stored in RAM was cleared.
File has been deleted. The CTS 710 has successfully deleted the
selected file.
File has been deleted. The CTS 710 has successfully deleted the
selected file.
Hardcopy complete. The CTS 710 has successfully completed a
printout.
Hardcopy complete. The CTS 710 has successfully completed a
printout.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–1
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
B–2
Instrument factory reset complete. The recall of default factory
settings, from the RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS page, was
completed successfully.
Instrument factory reset complete. The recall of default factory
settings, from the RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS page, was
completed successfully.
Instrument returned to previous setup. This message appears if you
select Cancel while an Autoscan is in progress.
Instrument returned to previous setup. This message appears if you
select Cancel while an Autoscan is in progress.
Instrument setup for received signal. The CTS 710 has completed an
Autoscan and has changed its settings to match those of the received
signal.
Instrument setup for received signal. The CTS 710 has completed an
Autoscan and has changed its settings to match those of the received
signal.
Internal diagnostics completed. An instrument self test has been
initiated and completed successfully.
Internal diagnostics completed. An instrument self test has been
initiated and completed successfully.
No Setup file with ’.SET’ extension found. You selected the Disk action
on the RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS page and no instrument
setup files were found on the disk.
No Setup file with ’.SET’ extension found. You selected the Disk action
on the RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS page and no instrument
setup files were found on the disk.
Previous power down instrument state restored. This message appears
when the CTS 710 turns on. It means that the settings in effect when
the CTS 710 was last turned off have been successfully restored.
Previous power down instrument state restored. This message appears
when the CTS 710 turns on. It means that the settings in effect when
the CTS 710 was last turned off have been successfully restored.
Reading disk.... The CTS 710 is reading the disk directory.
Reading disk.... The CTS 710 is reading the disk directory.
Recall of instrument setup complete. This message confirms that the
recall of an instrument setup was successfully completed.
Recall of instrument setup complete. This message confirms that the
recall of an instrument setup was successfully completed.
Recall of measurement results/histories complete. The CTS 710 has
successfully recalled the selected results from disk.
Recall of measurement results/histories complete. The CTS 710 has
successfully recalled the selected results from disk.
Recall of pass/fail test complete. The CTS 710 has successfully
recalled the selected pass/fail test from disk.
Recall of pass/fail test complete. The CTS 710 has successfully
recalled the selected pass/fail test from disk.
Save of instrument setup complete. This message confirms that an
instrument setup was successfully written to disk.
Save of instrument setup complete. This message confirms that an
instrument setup was successfully written to disk.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Save of measurement results/histories complete. The CTS 710 has
successfully saved test results to disk.
Save of measurement results/histories complete. The CTS 710 has
successfully saved test results to disk.
Save of pass/fail test complete. The CTS 710 has successfully saved
the pass/fail test to disk.
Save of pass/fail test complete. The CTS 710 has successfully saved
the pass/fail test to disk.
Single pointer movement transmitted. You pressed the POINTER
ACTION button with the Pointer Control set to Single.
Single pointer movement transmitted. You pressed the POINTER
ACTION button with the Pointer Control set to Single.
Test restarted due to change in receiver settings. You changed the
receive settings while a test was running. When any settings are
changed, a running test is restarted.
Test restarted due to change in receiver settings. You changed the
receive settings while a test was running. When any settings are
changed, a running test is restarted.
Transmit rate change complete. The CTS 710 has successfully
changed transmit rate. This message can occur when an instrument
setup file is recalled from disk.
Transmit rate change complete. The CTS 710 has successfully
changed transmit rate. This message can occur when an instrument
setup file is recalled from disk.
Error Messages
Error Messages
Alarm generation invalid while in through mode. You attempted to
transmit an alarm while the CTS 710 was in Through Mode.
Transmit settings cannot be changed while the transmit rate is set to
Through Mode.
Alarm generation invalid while in through mode. You attempted to
transmit an alarm while the CTS 710 was in Through Mode.
Transmit settings cannot be changed while the transmit rate is set to
Through Mode.
Autoscan already in progress. You pressed the Autoscan front-panel
button while an Autoscan was in progress.
Autoscan already in progress. You pressed the Autoscan front-panel
button while an Autoscan was in progress.
Button disabled in edit mode. You pressed a front-panel button while
the CTS 710 was in edit mode. You must exit edit mode before you
can use the front-panel buttons.
Button disabled in edit mode. You pressed a front-panel button while
the CTS 710 was in edit mode. You must exit edit mode before you
can use the front-panel buttons.
Button disabled when dialog box is displayed. You pressed a
front-panel button while a dialog box (for example, PRINT
CONTROL) was displayed. Some front-panel buttons are disabled
while a dialog box is displayed. Exit the dialog box to enable all the
front-panel buttons.
Button disabled when dialog box is displayed. You pressed a
front-panel button while a dialog box (for example, PRINT
CONTROL) was displayed. Some front-panel buttons are disabled
while a dialog box is displayed. Exit the dialog box to enable all the
front-panel buttons.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–3
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
B–4
Can not insert tributary error/alarm while adding external signal. An
attempt was made to insert a tributary error or alarm while adding an
external signal.
Can not insert tributary error/alarm while adding external signal. An
attempt was made to insert a tributary error or alarm while adding an
external signal.
Could not create disk file. The CTS 710 was unable to create a file on
the disk. Try saving the file on a different disk.
Could not create disk file. The CTS 710 was unable to create a file on
the disk. Try saving the file on a different disk.
Could not delete file. You attempted to a delete a file and a disk error
occurred that prevented the CTS 710 from deleting the file. The file
is probably corrupted, though you might be able to fix the problem
with an MS-DOS disk recovery program.
Could not delete file. You attempted to a delete a file and a disk error
occurred that prevented the CTS 710 from deleting the file. The file
is probably corrupted, though you might be able to fix the problem
with an MS-DOS disk recovery program.
Could not open disk file. The CTS 710 has attempted to read a file
from disk and was unable to do so. The file is probably corrupted,
though you might be able to recover the file using an MS-DOS file
recovery program.
Could not open disk file. The CTS 710 has attempted to read a file
from disk and was unable to do so. The file is probably corrupted,
though you might be able to recover the file using an MS-DOS file
recovery program.
Could not read disk’s root directory. The CTS 710 was unable to read
the disk directory. The disk directory is probably corrupted, though
you might be able to recover files from the disk with an MS-DOS
disk recovery utility.
Could not read disk’s root directory. The CTS 710 was unable to read
the disk directory. The disk directory is probably corrupted, though
you might be able to recover files from the disk with an MS-DOS
disk recovery utility.
Diagnostics invalid while disk or autoscan busy. You tried to run Self
Test diagnostics while accessing the disk or completing an Autoscan.
Wait until disk access is complete or the Autoscan is complete before
running a self test routine.
Diagnostics invalid while disk or autoscan busy. You tried to run Self
Test diagnostics while accessing the disk or completing an Autoscan.
Wait until disk access is complete or the Autoscan is complete before
running a self test routine.
Disk file too large for memory buffer, truncated. You recalled a file and
it was too large to load into memory. This can occur if an instrument
settings file is recalled that has been edited on a PC and the edited
file is larger than the original file.
Disk file too large for memory buffer, truncated. You recalled a file and
it was too large to load into memory. This can occur if an instrument
settings file is recalled that has been edited on a PC and the edited
file is larger than the original file.
Disk has changed, operation aborted. You attempted to recall a disk
file and the disk has been changed since the directory was read.
Reinsert the original disk and recall the file again.
Disk has changed, operation aborted. You attempted to recall a disk
file and the disk has been changed since the directory was read.
Reinsert the original disk and recall the file again.
Disk is busy. You tried to save a file to disk while the disk was active.
Wait until the disk activity light turns off and save to disk again.
Disk is busy. You tried to save a file to disk while the disk was active.
Wait until the disk activity light turns off and save to disk again.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Disk is full. You tried to save a file to disk and there is not enough
room on the disk for the file. Insert a disk with space available and
save the file again.
Disk is full. You tried to save a file to disk and there is not enough
room on the disk for the file. Insert a disk with space available and
save the file again.
Disk not present in drive. You tried to save a file to disk, but no disk is
in the drive. Insert a formatted disk and save the file again.
Disk not present in drive. You tried to save a file to disk, but no disk is
in the drive. Insert a formatted disk and save the file again.
Disk is write-protected, cannot write to file. You tried to save a file to a
disk that is write-protected.
Disk is write-protected, cannot write to file. You tried to save a file to a
disk that is write-protected.
Disk operation failed. A disk error occurred while reading or writing
to the disk. If you were trying to save a file to disk, save the file to a
different disk. If you were trying to read a file from disk, you might
be able to recover the file using an MS-DOS disk recovery program.
Disk operation failed. A disk error occurred while reading or writing
to the disk. If you were trying to save a file to disk, save the file to a
different disk. If you were trying to read a file from disk, you might
be able to recover the file using an MS-DOS disk recovery program.
Error insertion disabled while in Through Mode. You pressed the
INSERT ERROR button while the CTS 710 was in Through Mode.
You cannot insert errors while the CTS 710 is in Through Mode
because the transmit signal must match the received signal.
Error insertion disabled while in Through Mode. You pressed the
INSERT ERROR button while the CTS 710 was in Through Mode.
You cannot insert errors while the CTS 710 is in Through Mode
because the transmit signal must match the received signal.
Errors in test recall, test not loaded. The CTS 710 encountered disk
errors while recalling a pass/fail test and the operation was aborted.
You might be able to recover the file with an MS-DOS disk recovery
program.
Errors in test recall, test not loaded. The CTS 710 encountered disk
errors while recalling a pass/fail test and the operation was aborted.
You might be able to recover the file with an MS-DOS disk recovery
program.
Extra data in history file ignored. You recalled a history file that
contains extra data. This can occur if the history file has been edited
with a file editor and the edited file contains inappropriate information.
Extra data in history file ignored. You recalled a history file that
contains extra data. This can occur if the history file has been edited
with a file editor and the edited file contains inappropriate information.
Failure generation invalid while in through mode. You attempted to
transmit a failure while the CTS 710 was in Through Mode. Transmit
settings cannot be changed while the transmit rate is set to Through
Mode.
Failure generation invalid while in through mode. You attempted to
transmit a failure while the CTS 710 was in Through Mode. Transmit
settings cannot be changed while the transmit rate is set to Through
Mode.
File name required. You entered a name for an instrument setup, a
pass/fail test, or a results file and then you removed the name by
selecting Clear. This message is just a reminder that a name must be
File name required. You entered a name for an instrument setup, a
pass/fail test, or a results file and then you removed the name by
selecting Clear. This message is just a reminder that a name must be
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–5
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–5
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
B–6
entered for the file to be saved to disk; that is, there is no default file
name.
entered for the file to be saved to disk; that is, there is no default file
name.
Filename not found. This message appears if the disk was swapped
after the directory was read and you attempted to recall a file. Insert
the original disk and recall the file again.
Filename not found. This message appears if the disk was swapped
after the directory was read and you attempted to recall a file. Insert
the original disk and recall the file again.
File not read. A disk error occurred while reading a file. The file is
probably corrupted, though you might be able to recover the file with
an MS-DOS disk recovery program.
File not read. A disk error occurred while reading a file. The file is
probably corrupted, though you might be able to recover the file with
an MS-DOS disk recovery program.
Frequency offset disabled with current transmit clock. You attempted
to change from Pointer/Timing Mode to Frequency Offset while the
transmit clock was set to External. Frequency Offset can be selected
only when the transmit clock is set to Internal or Recovered.
Frequency offset disabled with current transmit clock. You attempted
to change from Pointer/Timing Mode to Frequency Offset while the
transmit clock was set to External. Frequency Offset can be selected
only when the transmit clock is set to Internal or Recovered.
Hardcopy already in progress. You tried to start a printout while a
printout was already in progress. Wait until the current printout
completes and then select Print again.
Hardcopy already in progress. You tried to start a printout while a
printout was already in progress. Wait until the current printout
completes and then select Print again.
Instrument unable to drop signal while transmitting current rate. You
attempted to turn on tributary drop while the transmit rate was set to
a tributary rate. Because the tributary transmit connector and
tributary drop connector are the same connector, you cannot transmit
a tributary signal and drop a tributary signal at the same time.
Instrument unable to drop signal while transmitting current rate. You
attempted to turn on tributary drop while the transmit rate was set to
a tributary rate. Because the tributary transmit connector and
tributary drop connector are the same connector, you cannot transmit
a tributary signal and drop a tributary signal at the same time.
Internal diagnostics failed. A malfunction has occurred that requires
servicing. Contact a Tektronix representative for assistance.
Internal diagnostics failed. A malfunction has occurred that requires
servicing. Contact a Tektronix representative for assistance.
Internal Error N: Contact Tektronix Service. A hardware malfunction
has occurred that requires servicing. Contact a Tektronix representative for assistance.
Internal Error N: Contact Tektronix Service. A hardware malfunction
has occurred that requires servicing. Contact a Tektronix representative for assistance.
Internal format of file incorrect; file not read. You recalled a file that
does not contain data in the correct format. This occurs when a file is
recalled that happens to have the same extension as the type of
CTS 710 file being recalled, but it is not a CTS 710 file.
Internal format of file incorrect; file not read. You recalled a file that
does not contain data in the correct format. This occurs when a file is
recalled that happens to have the same extension as the type of
CTS 710 file being recalled, but it is not a CTS 710 file.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–6
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Invalid history data format in file. You recalled a file that does not
contain data in the correct format. This occurs when a file is recalled
that happens to have the correct extension for a history file (and thus
shows up on the RECALL RESULTS page) even though it is not a
CTS 710 history file.
Invalid history data format in file. You recalled a file that does not
contain data in the correct format. This occurs when a file is recalled
that happens to have the correct extension for a history file (and thus
shows up on the RECALL RESULTS page) even though it is not a
CTS 710 history file.
Loss of added signal. You have selected an externally generated
tributary signal, but no valid signal is present.
Loss of added signal. You have selected an externally generated
tributary signal, but no valid signal is present.
Loss of external clock. You have selected an external clock source
that does not have a valid clock source attached.
Loss of external clock. You have selected an external clock source
that does not have a valid clock source attached.
Measurements are running, recall not allowed. You tried to recall
instrument setups from memory or disk while a test is running. Wait
until the test is completed and then recall the file.
Measurements are running, recall not allowed. You tried to recall
instrument setups from memory or disk while a test is running. Wait
until the test is completed and then recall the file.
Measurements are running, results cannot be saved. You attempted to
save results to disk while a test was running. Wait until the test is
completed and then save the results to disk.
Measurements are running, results cannot be saved. You attempted to
save results to disk while a test was running. Wait until the test is
completed and then save the results to disk.
No Result file with ’.RES’ extension found. This message appears when
you select Disk (on the RECALL RESULTS page) but the disk does
not contain any results files.
No Result file with ’.RES’ extension found. This message appears when
you select Disk (on the RECALL RESULTS page) but the disk does
not contain any results files.
Not available without tributary option. The requested action requires
that the Add/Drop/Test tributary option be installed.
Not available without tributary option. The requested action requires
that the Add/Drop/Test tributary option be installed.
No Test file with ’.TST’ extension found. This message appears when
you select Disk (on the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS page) but the
disk does not contain any pass/fail test files.
No Test file with ’.TST’ extension found. This message appears when
you select Disk (on the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS page) but the
disk does not contain any pass/fail test files.
Numeric value greater than maximum limit. You attempted to enter a
numeric value larger than the maximum value.
Numeric value greater than maximum limit. You attempted to enter a
numeric value larger than the maximum value.
Numeric value less than minimum limit. You attempted to enter a
numeric value smaller than the minimum value.
Numeric value less than minimum limit. You attempted to enter a
numeric value smaller than the minimum value.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–7
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–7
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
Appendix B: Status and Error Messages
B–8
Operation invalid while a test is running. You tried to perform an
action that cannot be completed while a test is running. For example,
this message would appear if you attempted to recall instrument
settings while a test is running.
Operation invalid while a test is running. You tried to perform an
action that cannot be completed while a test is running. For example,
this message would appear if you attempted to recall instrument
settings while a test is running.
Optical power has been overloaded. You have connected an optical
signal that has saturated the CTS 710 optical receiver.
Optical power has been overloaded. You have connected an optical
signal that has saturated the CTS 710 optical receiver.
Pointer burst active, request ignored. You pressed the POINTER
ACTION button while a pointer burst movement was occurring.
Pointer burst active, request ignored. You pressed the POINTER
ACTION button while a pointer burst movement was occurring.
Pointer movements disabled while in Through Mode. You pressed the
POINTER ACTION button while the CTS 710 was in Through
Mode. Pointer movements are not allowed while the CTS 710 is in
Through Mode because the transmit signal must match the received
signal.
Pointer movements disabled while in Through Mode. You pressed the
POINTER ACTION button while the CTS 710 was in Through
Mode. Pointer movements are not allowed while the CTS 710 is in
Through Mode because the transmit signal must match the received
signal.
Root directory is full. You tried to save a file to disk but the directory
shows that the disk is full. Insert a disk with space available and save
the file again.
Root directory is full. You tried to save a file to disk but the directory
shows that the disk is full. Insert a disk with space available and save
the file again.
Through Mode invalid while receiving a tributary signal. You attempted
to change the transmit rate to Through Mode while a test was
running at a tributary rate. Any change in settings would invalidate
the test, so no change was made.
Through Mode invalid while receiving a tributary signal. You attempted
to change the transmit rate to Through Mode while a test was
running at a tributary rate. Any change in settings would invalidate
the test, so no change was made.
Unexpected End Of File, file not read. You tried to recall an instrument
setup file, a pass/fail file, or a history file and a disk error occurred.
The file is corrupted and cannot be recovered.
Unexpected End Of File, file not read. You tried to recall an instrument
setup file, a pass/fail file, or a history file and a disk error occurred.
The file is corrupted and cannot be recovered.
Warning: No received signal currently identified. You started a test
while there was no received signal.
Warning: No received signal currently identified. You started a test
while there was no received signal.
Write Failure on Disk. The CTS 710 was unable to write to the disk.
Try saving the file on a different disk.
Write Failure on Disk. The CTS 710 was unable to write to the disk.
Try saving the file on a different disk.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
B–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix C: Default Factory Settings
Appendix C: Default Factory Settings
Table C–1 lists the instrument settings after Default Factory Settings
have been recalled.
Table C–1 lists the instrument settings after Default Factory Settings
have been recalled.
Table C–1: Default Factory Settings
Table C–1: Default Factory Settings
Parameter
Default Value
Parameter
Default Value
Transmit Rate
STS-1
Transmit Rate
STS-1
Transmit Clock
Internal
Transmit Clock
Internal
Transmit Level
Cross Connect
Transmit Level
Cross Connect
STS Under Test
1
STS Under Test
1
Mapping
Bulk Fill No Mapping (Equipped)
Mapping
Bulk Fill No Mapping (Equipped)
Transmit Test Pattern
PRBS 2^23–1
Transmit Test Pattern
PRBS 2^23–1
Transmit Overhead Path Trace
“”
Transmit Overhead Path Trace
“”
Transmit Overhead External Add
None
Transmit Overhead External Add
None
Transmit Error Rate
None
Transmit Error Rate
None
Transmit Error Type
Section B1 BIP Error
Transmit Error Type
Section B1 BIP Error
Transmit Alarm
None
Transmit Alarm
None
Transmit Failure
None
Transmit Failure
None
Transmit Pointer/Timing Mode
Pointer Movements
Transmit Pointer/Timing Mode
Pointer Movements
Transmit Pointer Type
STS
Transmit Pointer Type
STS
Transmit Pointer Control
Single
Transmit Pointer Control
Single
Transmit Pointer Value
522
Transmit Pointer Value
522
Transmit Pointer Set with New Data Flag
Yes
Transmit Pointer Set with New Data Flag
Yes
APS Mode
RING
APS Mode
RING
Receive Rate
STS-1
Receive Rate
STS-1
Receive Level
Cross Connect
Receive Level
Cross Connect
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
(64 null characters)
C–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
(64 null characters)
C–1
Appendix C: Default Factory Settings
C–2
Appendix C: Default Factory Settings
Table C–1: Default Factory Settings (Cont.)
Table C–1: Default Factory Settings (Cont.)
Parameter
Default Value
Parameter
Default Value
Receive STS Under Test
1
Receive STS Under Test
1
Receive Mapping
No Mapping (Equipped)
Receive Mapping
No Mapping (Equipped)
Receive Tributary Drop
Off
Receive Tributary Drop
Off
Receive Test Pattern
PRBS 2^23–1
Receive Test Pattern
PRBS 2^23–1
Test Duration
Continuous
Test Duration
Continuous
Receive Path Overhead External Drop
None
Receive Path Overhead External Drop
None
Beeper
Off
Beeper
Off
Display Brightness
Medium
Display Brightness
Medium
Printer Type
TEK DPU-411
Printer Type
TEK DPU-411
Print User & Company
Off
Print User & Company
Off
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
C–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
Generator Output
Generator Output
Electrical Output
Electrical Output
Data Rates
STS-1:
STS-3:
51.84 Mb/s
155.52 Mb/s
Data Formats
STS-1: AMI, B3ZS
STS-3/STS-3c: CMI
Signal Level at Transmit Output
STS-1 Hi:
STSX-1:
±1.0 Vpk ±10% into 75 W
with 450 feet of cable loss
STS-3 Hi:
STSX-3:
±0.5 Vpk ±10% into 75 W
with 225 feet of cable loss
Description
Data Rates
STS-1:
STS-3:
51.84 Mb/s
155.52 Mb/s
Data Formats
STS-1: AMI, B3ZS
STS-3/STS-3c: CMI
Signal Level at Transmit Output
STS-1 Hi:
STSX-1:
±1.0 Vpk ±10% into 75 W
with 450 feet of cable loss
STS-3 Hi:
STSX-3:
±0.5 Vpk ±10% into 75 W
with 225 feet of cable loss
Pulse Shape at Transmit Output
Meets ANSI T1-102, Bellcore GR-NWT-000253
Eye Pattern Masks
Pulse Shape at Transmit Output
Meets ANSI T1-102, Bellcore GR-NWT-000253
Eye Pattern Masks
Return Loss
>15 dB
Return Loss
>15 dB
Connector
Unbalanced, 75 W BNC
Connector
Unbalanced, 75 W BNC
Optical Output
Optical Output
Data Rates
OC-1:
OC-3:
OC-12:
Optical Module Options
Data Rates
OC-1:
OC-3:
OC-12:
Opt. 03, 1310 nm, IR, OC-1/3
Opt. 04, 1310 nm, IR, OC-1/3/12
Opt. 05, 1550 nm, LR, OC-1/3/12
Opt. 06, 1310/1550 nm, OC-1/3/12
Optical Module Options
Opt. 03, 1310 nm, IR, OC-1/3
Opt. 04, 1310 nm, IR, OC-1/3/12
Opt. 05, 1550 nm, LR, OC-1/3/12
Opt. 06, 1310/1550 nm, OC-1/3/12
Signal Level & Wavelength
–10 dBm, typical 1310 nm (Opt. 03, 04, 06)
0 dBm, typical, 1550 nm (Opt. 05, 06)
Signal Level & Wavelength
–10 dBm, typical 1310 nm (Opt. 03, 04, 06)
0 dBm, typical, 1550 nm (Opt. 05, 06)
Pulse Shape
Meets Bellcore GR-253-CORE Eye Pattern Masks
Pulse Shape
Meets Bellcore GR-253-CORE Eye Pattern Masks
Wavelength
1308 nm, typical (Opt. 03, 04, 06)
1550 nm, typical (Opt. 05, 06)
Wavelength
1308 nm, typical (Opt. 03, 04, 06)
1550 nm, typical (Opt. 05, 06)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
51.84 Mb/s
155.52 Mb/s
622.08 Mb/s
D–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
51.84 Mb/s
155.52 Mb/s
622.08 Mb/s
D–1
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
Description
Spectral Width
≤ 4 nm, 1310 nm (Opt. 03, 04, 06)
≤ 1 nm, 1550 nm (Opt. 05, 06)
Spectral Width
≤ 4 nm, 1310 nm (Opt. 03, 04, 06)
≤ 1 nm, 1550 nm (Opt. 05, 06)
Laser Classification
Class 1 laser, complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and
1040.11, complies with IEC 825, Section 9.4
Laser Classification
Class 1 laser, complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and
1040.11, complies with IEC 825, Section 9.4
Connectors
FC-PC Standard: Optical Connector kit with ST,
SC, and DIN 47256 included
Connectors
FC-PC Standard: Optical Connector kit with ST,
SC, and DIN 47256 included
Signal Structure
Signal Structure
Standards Compliance
Meets the requirements of ANSI T1.105A,
Section 8 and Bellcore GR-NWT-000253
Standards Compliance
Meets the requirements of ANSI T1.105A,
Section 8 and Bellcore GR-NWT-000253
Payload Channel (SPE)
One active STS-1 in STS-3 Selection
(The other 2 channels are unequipped)
One active STS-1 in STS-12
(The other 11 channels are unequipped)
One active STS-3c in STS-12
(The other 3 channels are unequipped)
Payload Channel (SPE)
One active STS-1 in STS-3 Selection
(The other 2 channels are unequipped)
One active STS-1 in STS-12
(The other 11 channels are unequipped)
One active STS-3c in STS-12
(The other 3 channels are unequipped)
Unequipped Payload
C2 byte is set to 00
Unequipped Payload
C2 byte is set to 00
Internal Pattern Generator
Patterns
Bulk Fill in a selected SPE channel
(STS-1 or STS-3c)
Internal Pattern Generator
PRBS: 29–1, 215–1, 220–1, 223–1;
All 1s, All 0s, 8-bit programmable word
Patterns
Bulk Fill in a selected SPE channel
(STS-1 or STS-3c)
PRBS: 29–1, 215–1, 220–1, 223–1;
All 1s, All 0s, 8-bit programmable word
Errors
Single or Continuous
Section BIP (B1)
Line BIP (B2)
Path BIP (B3), Path FEBE
Payload pattern bit
Errors
Single or Continuous
Section BIP (B1)
Line BIP (B2)
Path BIP (B3), Path FEBE
Payload pattern bit
Error Rate Range
1 × 10–3 to 1 × 10–10 with 0.1 resolution1
Error Rate Range
1 × 10–3 to 1 × 10–10 with 0.1 resolution1
Alarms
Line AIS, Line FERF
Path AIS, Path FERF
Alarms
Line AIS, Line FERF
Path AIS, Path FERF
Failures
LOS, LOF, LOP
Failures
LOS, LOF, LOP
Transmitter Clock
Transmitter Clock
Internal Clock
Internal Clock
1
1
D–2
Depends on error type.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–2
Depends on error type.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Characteristic
Characteristic
Accuracy
Description
±4.6 ppm, for instrument calibrated within 24
months
Accuracy
External Clock Reference
Description
±4.6 ppm, for instrument calibrated within 24
months
External Clock Reference
Rate
1.544 MHz ±40 ppm
Rate
1.544 MHz ±40 ppm
Input
Balanced, 100 W ±5%, Bantam connector
Input
Balanced, 100 W ±5%, Bantam connector
Recovered Clock
Loop timing
Recovered Clock
Clock is recovered from received signal
Loop timing
Transmit Line Frequency Offset
Frequency offset rate
Clock is recovered from received signal
Transmit Line Frequency Offset
±100 ppm of nominal line rate
Frequency offset rate
Receive Input
Receive Input
Electrical Input
Electrical Input
Data Rates
STS-1:
STS-3:
Data Formats
Signal Sensitivity
51.84 Mb/s ±100 ppm
155.52 Mb/s ±100 ppm
±100 ppm of nominal line rate
51.84 Mb/s ±100 ppm
155.52 Mb/s ±100 ppm
Data Rates
STS-1:
STS-3:
STS-1E: AMI, B3ZS coded
STS-3/STS-3c: CMI
Data Formats
STS-1E: AMI, B3ZS coded
STS-3/STS-3c: CMI
STS-1 Hi:
STSX-1:
STS-1 Lo:
STS-1 Monitor:
0.5 Vpk min to 1.2 Vpk max
0.25 Vpk min to 0.6 Vpk max
0.125 Vpk min to 0.35 Vpk max
20 dB of flat loss below Xcon
Signal Sensitivity
STS-1 Hi:
STSX-1:
STS-1 Lo:
STS-1 Monitor:
0.5 Vpk min to 1.2 Vpk max
0.25 Vpk min to 0.6 Vpk max
0.125 Vpk min to 0.35 Vpk max
20 dB of flat loss below Xcon
STS-3:
STSX-3:
STS-1 Lo:
STS-3 Monitor:
0.35 Vpk min to 0.6 Vpk max
0.35 Vpk min to 0.6 Vpk max
0.07 Vpk min to 0.3 Vpk max
26 dB of flat loss below Hi
STS-3:
STSX-3:
STS-1 Lo:
STS-3 Monitor:
0.35 Vpk min to 0.6 Vpk max
0.35 Vpk min to 0.6 Vpk max
0.07 Vpk min to 0.3 Vpk max
26 dB of flat loss below Hi
Signal Level Display
Readout for: Electrical signal level in mV
Signal Level Display
Readout for: Electrical signal level in mV
Signal Equalization
STS-1:
Cross-connect equalization for 450 feet of AT&T
728A cable
Low-level equalization for 900 feet of AT&T 728A
cable
Signal Equalization
STS-1:
Cross-connect equalization for 450 feet of AT&T
728A cable
Low-level equalization for 900 feet of AT&T 728A
cable
STS-3:
Automatic equalization for 0 to 450 feet of cable
loss to ITU-T Rec. G.708 and ANSI TI-102
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
STS-3:
Automatic equalization for 0 to 450 feet of cable
loss to ITU-T Rec. G.708 and ANSI TI-102
D–3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–3
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
Description
Return Loss
>15 dB
Return Loss
>15 dB
Connector
Unbalanced, 75 W BNC
Connector
Unbalanced, 75 W BNC
Optical Input
Optical Input
Data Rates
OC-1:
OC-3:
OC-12:
Maximum Input Power
51.84 Mb/s (±100 ppm)
155.52 Mb/s (±100 ppm)
622.08 Mb/s (±100 ppm)
Data Rates
OC-1:
OC-3:
OC-12:
51.84 Mb/s (±100 ppm)
155.52 Mb/s (±100 ppm)
622.08 Mb/s (±100 ppm)
–7 dBm:
Opt. 05 and 06 include a 10 dB attenuator
Maximum Input Power
–7 dBm:
Opt. 05 and 06 include a 10 dB attenuator
Operating Wavelength
1310 nm and 1550 nm:
1100 nm to 1570 nm operating range
Operating Wavelength
1310 nm and 1550 nm:
1100 nm to 1570 nm operating range
Signal Sensitivity
–28 dBm for BER ≤10–10
Signal Sensitivity
–28 dBm for BER ≤10–10
Optical Power Meter Accuracy
2 dBm, Typical:
For input power in a range of –30 dBm to –6 dBm
Optical Power Meter Accuracy
2 dBm, Typical:
For input power in a range of –30 dBm to –6 dBm
Connectors
FC-PC standard:
Optical connector kit with ST, SC, and DIN 27256
included
Connectors
FC-PC standard:
Optical connector kit with ST, SC, and DIN 27256
included
Through Mode
Monitors a selected channel and passes the signal
through unchanged
Through Mode
Monitors a selected channel and passes the signal
through unchanged
Transmit and Receive Functional Specifications
Transmit and Receive Functional Specifications
Transport Overhead
Transport Overhead
D–4
Access
Set overhead bytes to any value from binary
00000000 to 11111111:
A1, A2, C1, E1, F1, D1–D3, K1, K2, D4–D12, S1,
Z2, M2, E2
View all Transport Overhead bytes
Access
Set overhead bytes to any value from binary
00000000 to 11111111:
A1, A2, C1, E1, F1, D1–D3, K1, K2, D4–D12, S1,
Z2, M2, E2
View all Transport Overhead bytes
Add/Drop
Insert data from the Overhead Add/Drop connector
into the Section DCC, Line DCC or F1 user byte.
Drops data from the Section DCC, Line DCC, or F1
user byte out to the Overhead Add/Drop connector.
Add/Drop
Insert data from the Overhead Add/Drop connector
into the Section DCC, Line DCC or F1 user byte.
Drops data from the Section DCC, Line DCC, or F1
user byte out to the Overhead Add/Drop connector.
K1 and K2 (APS)
Set the APS Bytes, K1 and K2, to any code defined
in ANSI T1.105A
Selectable by text description for all Span and Ring
messages
K1 and K2 (APS)
Set the APS Bytes, K1 and K2, to any code defined
in ANSI T1.105A
Selectable by text description for all Span and Ring
messages
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
Path Overhead
Description
Path Overhead
Access
Set Path Overhead bytes to any value from binary
00000000 to 11111111:
C2, F2, Z3, Z4, and Z5
View all Path Overhead bytes
Access
Set Path Overhead bytes to any value from binary
00000000 to 11111111:
C2, F2, Z3, Z4, and Z5
View all Path Overhead bytes
Add/Drop
Insert data from the Overhead Add/Drop connector
into the F2 user byte
Drop data from the F2 user byte out to the
Overhead Add/Drop connector
Add/Drop
Insert data from the Overhead Add/Drop connector
into the F2 user byte
Drop data from the F2 user byte out to the
Overhead Add/Drop connector
Path Trace Byte J1
Send user-defined 64-byte sequence, or set to
00000000
View Path Trace J1
Path Trace Byte J1
Send user-defined 64-byte sequence, or set to
00000000
View Path Trace J1
Pointer Movement
Pointer Movement
Single
Single pointer justification (increment or decrement)
Single
Single pointer justification (increment or decrement)
Burst
Bursts of two to eight pointer justifications spaced
four frames apart. All adjustments within a given
burst are in the same direction. Subsequent bursts
are in alternating directions
Burst
Bursts of two to eight pointer justifications spaced
four frames apart. All adjustments within a given
burst are in the same direction. Subsequent bursts
are in alternating directions
Continuous
Pointer justifications occur continuously at a
predetermined rate in an incrementing, decrementing, or alternating direction.
Rate between movements: 2 ms to 10 s, with a
resolution of 1 ms.
Continuous
Pointer justifications occur continuously at a
predetermined rate in an incrementing, decrementing, or alternating direction.
Rate between movements: 2 ms to 10 s, with a
resolution of 1 ms.
Set to Value
Set to a new location with or without the NDF being
set.
Range is 0 to 1023 (783 – 1023 are illegal
locations).
Set to Value
Set to a new location with or without the NDF being
set.
Range is 0 to 1023 (783 – 1023 are illegal
locations).
Pointer Test Sequences
Pointer Test Sequences
Single pointer adjustment
Time between pointer adjustments: 30 s.
Single pointer adjustment
Time between pointer adjustments: 30 s.
Alternating pointer adjustment
Alternating, single
Alternate, double
Alternating pointer adjustment
Alternating, single
Alternate, double
Pointer adjustment burst
Time between 3 pointers is 0.5 ms, 0.5 ms
Time between pointer burst: 30 s
Pointer adjustment burst
Time between 3 pointers is 0.5 ms, 0.5 ms
Time between pointer burst: 30 s
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–5
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–5
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Characteristic
Description
Characteristic
Description
Phase transient pointer adjustment
burst
Time between 7 pointers is 0.25 s, 0.25 s, 0.5 s,
0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s.
Time between pointer burst: 30 s.
Phase transient pointer adjustment
burst
Time between 7 pointers is 0.25 s, 0.25 s, 0.5 s,
0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s.
Time between pointer burst: 30 s.
Periodic pointer adjustment
– 87–3 pattern
– 87–3 pattern
– 87–3 pattern with Cancelled pointer movement
number 87
– 87–3 pattern with Added pointer after the 43rd
pointer
Periodic pointer adjustment
– 87–3 pattern
– 87–3 pattern
– 87–3 pattern with Cancelled pointer movement
number 87
– 87–3 pattern with Added pointer after the 43rd
pointer
Periodic pointer adjustment
– continuous pattern
– continuous pattern
– continuous pattern with cancellation of one
pointer
– continuous pattern with added pointer
Periodic pointer adjustment
– continuous pattern
– continuous pattern
– continuous pattern with cancellation of one
pointer
– continuous pattern with added pointer
Pointer Direction
Positive or Negative
Pointer Direction
Positive or Negative
Initialization Period
On or Off
Thirty second burst of 1 pointer per second in the
same direction as the selected test
Initialization Period
On or Off
Thirty second burst of 1 pointer per second in the
same direction as the selected test
Cool Down Period
On or Off
This will last at least 60 seconds
Cool Down Period
On or Off
This will last at least 60 seconds
Measurements
Measurements
Error Count, Error Rate, and
Errored Seconds for:
B1, B2, B3, Payload, Line-FEBE, Path-FEBE
Error Count, Error Rate, and
Errored Seconds for:
B1, B2, B3, Payload, Line-FEBE, Path-FEBE
Alarm and Failure Seconds for
LOS, OOF, LOF, SPE LOP, Line AIS & FERF, Path
AIS & FERF, Loss of Power, Loss of Pattern Sync
Alarm and Failure Seconds for
LOS, OOF, LOF, SPE LOP, Line AIS & FERF, Path
AIS & FERF, Loss of Power, Loss of Pattern Sync
STS SPE Pointer Measurements
Seconds:
LOP
Illegal pointers
NDF
STS SPE Pointer Measurements
Seconds:
LOP
Illegal pointers
NDF
Count:
Illegal pointers
Positive justifications
Negative justifications
T1M1.3 Analysis
D–6
Count:
Illegal pointers
Positive justifications
Negative justifications
T1M1.3 Analysis
Section B1
Seconds and ratio
Error Blocks, ES, SES, UAS
Background Block Errors
Section B1
Seconds and ratio
Error Blocks, ES, SES, UAS
Background Block Errors
Line B2 & FEBE
Seconds and % of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS
FEBE-Count, FEBE-ES, FEBE-UAS, FEBE-EFS
Line B2 & FEBE
Seconds and % of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS
FEBE-Count, FEBE-ES, FEBE-UAS, FEBE-EFS
Path B3 & FEBE
Seconds and % of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS
FEBE-Count, FEBE-ES, FEBE-UAS, FEBE-EFS
Path B3 & FEBE
Seconds and % of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS
FEBE-Count, FEBE-ES, FEBE-UAS, FEBE-EFS
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–6
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Characteristic
Characteristic
Pattern Bit Seconds
and % of total time
Description
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS
Pattern Bit Seconds
and % of total time
LEDs
Status Indicators
Description
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS
LEDs
LOS, LOF, LOP, Line AIS, Line FERF, Path AIS,
Path FERF, Errors, Pointer Adjust, Signal Present,
Pattern Lock
Histograms
Status Indicators
LOS, LOF, LOP, Line AIS, Line FERF, Path AIS,
Path FERF, Errors, Pointer Adjust, Signal Present,
Pattern Lock
Histograms
Error Count,
Bit Error Rate and
Errored Seconds
B1, B2, B3, Line-FEBE, Path-FEBE,
Pattern Bit
Error Count,
Bit Error Rate and
Errored Seconds
B1, B2, B3, Line-FEBE, Path-FEBE,
Pattern Bit
Alarms & Failures
On/Off
LOS, OOF, LOF, SPE-LOP,
Line-AIS, Line-FERF,
Path-AIS, Path-FERF,
Pattern Loss, Loss of Power
Alarms & Failures
On/Off
LOS, OOF, LOF, SPE-LOP,
Line-AIS, Line-FERF,
Path-AIS, Path-FERF,
Pattern Loss, Loss of Power
Pointers
STS Pointer Value, Pointer Justification
Pointers
STS Pointer Value, Pointer Justification
Measurement Utilities
Measurement Utilities
Measurement Control
Manual Start/Stop
Timed: 1 s to 99 days with 1 s resolution Continuous
Measurement Control
Manual Start/Stop
Timed: 1 s to 99 days with 1 s resolution Continuous
Histogram Display Resolution
1 min, 5 min, 15 min, 1 hour
(displays 72 hours with 1 min resolution)
15 min, 60 min, 4 hrs, 12 hrs
(displays 45 days with 15 min resolution)
Histogram Display Resolution
1 min, 5 min, 15 min, 1 hour
(displays 72 hours with 1 min resolution)
15 min, 60 min, 4 hrs, 12 hrs
(displays 45 days with 15 min resolution)
Result Logging
All measurements are recorded with start, stop time
and date.
The current and previous results are stored in
memory both totalized and graphical.
Both graphical and totalized results can be stored
on a disk.
Result Logging
All measurements are recorded with start, stop time
and date.
The current and previous results are stored in
memory both totalized and graphical.
Both graphical and totalized results can be stored
on a disk.
Utilities
TroubleScan
Utilities
Scans all measurement results for key violations
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
TroubleScan
D–7
Scans all measurement results for key violations
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–7
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Characteristic
Description
Characteristic
Description
AutoScan
AutoScan to incoming signal (rate, mapping,
framing, and pattern).
Identifies incoming signal and presents graphical
display of SPE and VT structure.
Identifies VT signal status by showing VT number,
equipped vs unequipped, alarms and pattern.
AutoScan
AutoScan to incoming signal (rate, mapping,
framing, and pattern).
Identifies incoming signal and presents graphical
display of SPE and VT structure.
Identifies VT signal status by showing VT number,
equipped vs unequipped, alarms and pattern.
Stored Setups
5 front panel setups in memory
200 front panel setups per disk
Stored Setups
5 front panel setups in memory
200 front panel setups per disk
Pass/Fail Tests
Predefined Pass/Fail Tests can be created, stored
and executed
Pass/Fail tests are stored on disk
200 Pass/Fail test setups per disk
Pass/Fail Tests
Predefined Pass/Fail Tests can be created, stored
and executed
Pass/Fail tests are stored on disk
200 Pass/Fail test setups per disk
Add/Drop Interface for
Data Communication Channels and
User Channels
A DB-37 female connector provides the interface to
an external protocol analyzer.
Clock and data signals are differential TTL, conform
to RS-422 specifications, and are also compatible
with single-ended TTL signals.
Add/Drop: D1–D3, D4–D12, F1, F2
Connector: 37 Pin DIN (DTE and DCE)
Add/Drop Interface for
Data Communication Channels and
User Channels
A DB-37 female connector provides the interface to
an external protocol analyzer.
Clock and data signals are differential TTL, conform
to RS-422 specifications, and are also compatible
with single-ended TTL signals.
Add/Drop: D1–D3, D4–D12, F1, F2
Connector: 37 Pin DIN (DTE and DCE)
Triggering
Pulse at start of each frame, (Tx and Rx),
Connector: 37 Pin DIN
Triggering
Pulse at start of each frame, (Tx and Rx),
Connector: 37 Pin DIN
Disk Drive
3.5 inch, 1.44 MB, DOS compatible
Measurement Result stored in ASCII
Stored Setups and Pass/Fail Tests in IEEE 488.2
format
Disk Drive
3.5 inch, 1.44 MB, DOS compatible
Measurement Result stored in ASCII
Stored Setups and Pass/Fail Tests in IEEE 488.2
format
Printer
Optional printer in pouch (thermal): HC 411
Printer support: Epson, HP Thinkjet
Serial Printer Port: RS-232
Print to disk: BMP format, Interleaf format, and
Encapsulated PostScript
Printer
Optional printer in pouch (thermal): HC 411
Printer support: Epson, HP Thinkjet
Serial Printer Port: RS-232
Print to disk: BMP format, Interleaf format, and
Encapsulated PostScript
Computer Interface
IEEE-488.2 interface
RS-232-C interface (DB9)
Computer Interface
IEEE-488.2 interface
RS-232-C interface (DB9)
D–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Table D–1: Standard CTS 710 Specifications (Cont.)
Characteristic
Description
Characteristic
Description
Help Mode
Online task-oriented help
Help Mode
Online task-oriented help
Display
7 inch diagonal CRT, magnetic deflection
Horizontal raster-scan green phosphor
Resolution: 640 by 480 pixels
VGA output: 15 pin connector
Display
7 inch diagonal CRT, magnetic deflection
Horizontal raster-scan green phosphor
Resolution: 640 by 480 pixels
VGA output: 15 pin connector
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–9
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–9
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
DS1/DS3 Generator
DS1/DS3 Generator
Electrical Output
Electrical Output
Description
Data Rates
DS1 (1.544 Mb/s)
DS3 (44.736 Mb/s)
Data Rates
DS1 (1.544 Mb/s)
DS3 (44.736 Mb/s)
Formats
DS1:
DS3:
AMI, B8ZS coded
B3ZS coded
Formats
DS1:
DS3:
AMI, B8ZS coded
B3ZS coded
Signal Level
DS1:
DS3:
3 V peak ±0.6 V into 100 W
0.6 V peak ±0.24 V into 75 W
Signal Level
DS1:
DS3:
3 V peak ±0.6 V into 100 W
0.6 V peak ±0.24 V into 75 W
Pulse Shape
Meets ANSI T1-102 Pulse Masks
Pulse Shape
Meets ANSI T1-102 Pulse Masks
Connectors
DS1:
DS3:
Bantam 100 W
BNC 75 W
Connectors
DS1:
DS3:
Bantam 100 W
BNC 75 W
Data Source
DS1:
DS1 Generator
SONET VT1.5 Drop
DS3 Generator
SONET SPE Drop
Data Source
DS1:
DS1 Generator
SONET VT1.5 Drop
DS3 Generator
SONET SPE Drop
DS3:
DS1/DS3 Internal Pattern Generator
Framing
DS3:
DS1/DS3 Internal Pattern Generator
DS1:
DS3:
SF(D4)
ESF
Unframed
M13
C-bit Parity
Unframed
Framing
DS1:
DS3:
SF(D4)
ESF
Unframed
M13
C-bit Parity
Unframed
Patterns
PRBS: 215–1, 220–1, 223–1; All 1’s, All 0’s, Fixed
Pattern 8 bit, Fixed Pattern 16 bit, Fixed Pattern 24
bit, QRSS (DS1 only), 1 in 8 (DS1 only),
3 in 24 (DS1 only)
Patterns
PRBS: 215–1, 220–1, 223–1; All 1’s, All 0’s, Fixed
Pattern 8 bit, Fixed Pattern 16 bit, Fixed Pattern 24
bit, QRSS (DS1 only), 1 in 8 (DS1 only),
3 in 24 (DS1 only)
Errors
Single or Continuous
DS1:
Errors
Single or Continuous
DS1:
DS3:
D–10
Frame Bit Error
CRC-6 Error (ESF only)
Pattern Bit Error
Frame Bit Error
P Parity Bit Error (M13 framing only)
C Parity Bit Error (C-Bit parity only)
Pattern Bit Error
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
DS3:
D–10
Frame Bit Error
CRC-6 Error (ESF only)
Pattern Bit Error
Frame Bit Error
P Parity Bit Error (M13 framing only)
C Parity Bit Error (C-Bit parity only)
Pattern Bit Error
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Characteristic
Description
Characteristic
Description
Error Rate Range
1 × 10–2 to 1 × 10–8 with 0.1 resolution1
Error Rate Range
1 × 10–2 to 1 × 10–8 with 0.1 resolution1
Alarms and Failures
DS1:
Alarms and Failures
DS1:
DS3:
Yellow
AIS
Yellow
AIS (DS3 blue)
Idle
DS3:
VT1.5/DS3 Mapping
Yellow
AIS
Yellow
AIS (DS3 blue)
Idle
VT1.5/DS3 Mapping
VT1.5 Map Signal Source
Internal DS1 Generator
Received DS1 signal
VT1.5 Map Signal Source
Internal DS1 Generator
Received DS1 signal
VT1.5 Mapping
Floating Asynch
VT1.5 Mapping
Floating Asynch
VT1.5 Active Map Channel Selection
Allows selection of any one of 28 VT channels
Remaining 27 VT channels are background
VT1.5 Active Map Channel Selection
Allows selection of any one of 28 VT channels
Remaining 27 VT channels are background
VT1.5 Background Channels
VT1.5 Background Channels
Background Channel Content
When internal DS1 generator is used:
QRSS or Idle pattern (11010101)
When external source is used: QRSS
Background Channel Content
When internal DS1 generator is used:
QRSS or Idle pattern (11010101)
When external source is used: QRSS
Background Channel Framing
When internal DS1 generator is used: Same as
active channel
When external source is used: Unframed
Background Channel Framing
When internal DS1 generator is used: Same as
active channel
When external source is used: Unframed
VT1.5 Errors
(Signal or Continuous)
VT BIP-2
VT FEBE
VT1.5 Errors
(Signal or Continuous)
VT BIP-2
VT FEBE
VT1.5 Alarms and Failures
VT AIS
VT FERF
VT Loss of Pointer
VT Loss of Multiframe
VT1.5 Alarms and Failures
VT AIS
VT FERF
VT Loss of Pointer
VT Loss of Multiframe
DS3 SPE Add Source
Internal DS3 Generator
Received DS3 signal
DS3 SPE Add Source
Internal DS3 Generator
Received DS3 signal
Transmitter Clock
Transmitter Clock
Internal Clock
Internal Clock
Accuracy
1
±4.6 ppm, for instrument calibrated within 24
months
Accuracy
1
Depends on error type.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–11
±4.6 ppm, for instrument calibrated within 24
months
Depends on error type.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–11
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
External Clock Reference
Description
External Clock Reference
Rates
1.544 MHz ±40 ppm
Rates
1.544 MHz ±40 ppm
Input
Balanced, 100 W ±5%, DS1 Bantam connector
Input
Balanced, 100 W ±5%, DS1 Bantam connector
Recovered Clock
Loop timing
Recovered Clock
Clock is recovered from received signal
Transmit Line Frequency Offset
Frequency offset rate
External DS1/DS3
Loop timing
Clock is recovered from received signal
Transmit Line Frequency Offset
±100 ppm of nominal line rate with 0.1 ppm
resolution
Clock Input (for Jitter Generation)
Frequency offset rate
External DS1/DS3
±100 ppm of nominal line rate with 0.1 ppm
resolution
Clock Input (for Jitter Generation)
Rates
1.544 Mb/s, 44.736 Mb/s
Rates
1.544 Mb/s, 44.736 Mb/s
Input
Unbalanced, 75 W BNC, AC coupled
Input
Unbalanced, 75 W BNC, AC coupled
Signal Level
0.5 volts to 1.5 volts peak to peak
Signal Level
0.5 volts to 1.5 volts peak to peak
DS1/DS3 Receiver
DS1/DS3 Receiver
Electrical Input
Electrical Input
Data Rates
DS1: (1.544 MHz) ±150 ppm
DS3: (44.736 MHz) ±150 ppm
Data Rates
DS1: (1.544 MHz) ±150 ppm
DS3: (44.736 MHz) ±150 ppm
Formats
DS1:
DS3:
Formats
DS1:
DS3:
Impedance
DS1:
DS1 Bridged:
DS3:
100 W balanced
1 kW balanced
75 W to ground, unbalanced
Impedance
DS1:
DS1 Bridged:
DS3:
100 W balanced
1 kW balanced
75 W to ground, unbalanced
Signal Level
DSX-1:
DS-1 Monitor:
DSX-3:
DS-3 Monitor:
3 Vpk ±0.6 V into 100 W
20 dB flat loss below DSX-1
0.6 Vpk ±0.24 V into 75 W
20 dB flat loss below DSX-3
Signal Level
DSX-1:
DS-1 Monitor:
DSX-3:
DS-3 Monitor:
3 Vpk ±0.6 V into 100 W
20 dB flat loss below DSX-1
0.6 Vpk ±0.24 V into 75 W
20 dB flat loss below DSX-3
Connectors
DS1:
DS3:
Connectors
DS1:
DS3:
D–12
AMI, B8ZS
B3ZS
Bantam 100 W
BNC 75 W
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–12
AMI, B8ZS
B3ZS
Bantam 100 W
BNC 75 W
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
DS1/DS3 Internal Pattern Receiver
Pattern Receiver Source
DS1/DS3 Internal Pattern Receiver
DS1:
DS3:
Framing
DS1:
DS3:
Rx Signal (ext)
VT1.5 Drop
Rx Signal (ext)
SONET SPE Drop
Pattern Receiver Source
SF(D4)
ESF
Unframed
M13
C-bit Parity
Unframed
Framing
DS1:
DS3:
DS1:
DS3:
Demultiplexing
Demux DS3 to DS1
Description
Rx Signal (ext)
VT1.5 Drop
Rx Signal (ext)
SONET SPE Drop
SF(D4)
ESF
Unframed
M13
C-bit Parity
Unframed
Demultiplexing
Allows selection of any one of 28 DS1 channels
from a DS3
VT1.5/DS3 Demapping
Demux DS3 to DS1
Allows selection of any one of 28 DS1 channels
from a DS3
VT1.5/DS3 Demapping
VT1.5 Demapping
Floating Async
VT1.5 Demapping
Floating Async
VT1.5 Active Demap Channel
Selection
Allows selection of any one of 28 VT channels
VT1.5 Active Demap Channel
Selection
Allows selection of any one of 28 VT channels
Drop VT1.5 to
Internal DS1 Receiver
External DS1 signal output
Drop VT1.5 to
Internal DS1 Receiver
External DS1 signal output
Drop DS3 from
Selected STS-1 Channel
Drop DS3 from
Selected STS-1 Channel
Drop DS3 to
Internal DS3 Receiver
External DS3 signal output
Drop DS3 to
Internal DS3 Receiver
External DS3 signal output
VT Path Overhead
VT Path Overhead
VT1.5 Path Overhead Access
V5 control (–––xxxx–)
Set VT Path Overhead bytes to any value from
binary 00000000 to 11111111:
Z3, Z4, and Z5
View all Path Overhead bytes
VT1.5 Path Overhead Access
V5 control (–––xxxx–)
Set VT Path Overhead bytes to any value from
binary 00000000 to 11111111:
Z3, Z4, and Z5
View all Path Overhead bytes
VT1.5 Path Trace Byte J2
Send user-defined 16-byte sequence, or set to
00000000
View Path Trace J2
VT1.5 Path Trace Byte J2
Send user-defined 16-byte sequence, or set to
00000000
View Path Trace J2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–13
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–13
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
VT Pointer Movement
Description
VT Pointer Movement
VT1.5 Pointer Interaction
VT1.5 or STS, but not both at the same time
VT1.5 Pointer Interaction
VT1.5 or STS, but not both at the same time
Single
Single pointer justification
(increment or decrement)
Single
Single pointer justification
(increment or decrement)
Burst
Bursts of two to eight pointer justifications spaced
four multi-frames apart. All adjustments within a
given burst are in the same direction. Subsequent
bursts are in alternating directions
Burst
Bursts of two to eight pointer justifications spaced
four multi-frames apart. All adjustments within a
given burst are in the same direction. Subsequent
bursts are in alternating directions
Continuous
Pointer justifications occur continuously at a
predetermined rate in an incrementing, decrementing, or alternating direction.
Rate between movements: 48 ms to 1 s, with a
resolution of 1 ms
Continuous
Pointer justifications occur continuously at a
predetermined rate in an incrementing, decrementing, or alternating direction.
Rate between movements: 48 ms to 1 s, with a
resolution of 1 ms
Set to Value
Set to a new location with or without the NDF being
set.
Range is from 0 to 1023 (104 – 1023 are illegal
locations).
Set to Value
Set to a new location with or without the NDF being
set.
Range is from 0 to 1023 (104 – 1023 are illegal
locations).
VT Pointer Test Sequences
VT Pointer Test Sequences
Single pointer adjustment
Time between pointer adjustments: 30 s
Single pointer adjustment
Time between pointer adjustments: 30 s
Alternating pointer adjustment
Single
Double
Alternating pointer adjustment
Single
Double
Pointer adjustment burst
Time between 3 pointers is 2 ms, 2 ms
Time between pointer burst: 30 s
Pointer adjustment burst
Time between 3 pointers is 2 ms, 2 ms
Time between pointer burst: 30 s
Phase transient pointer adjustment burst
Time between 7 pointers is 0.25 s, 0.25 s, 0.5 s,
0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s
Time between pointer burst: 30 s
Phase transient pointer adjustment burst
Time between 7 pointers is 0.25 s, 0.25 s, 0.5 s,
0.5 s, 0.5 s, 0.5 s
Time between pointer burst: 30 s
Periodic pointer adjustment test
sequence – 26–1 pattern
– 26–1 pattern
– 26–1 pattern with Cancelled pointer movement
number 26
– 26–1 pattern with Added pointer after the 13th
pointer
Periodic pointer adjustment test
sequence – 26–1 pattern
– 26–1 pattern
– 26–1 pattern with Cancelled pointer movement
number 26
– 26–1 pattern with Added pointer after the 13th
pointer
D–14
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–14
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
Description
Periodic pointer adjustment
– continuous pattern
– continuous pattern
– continuous pattern with cancellation of one
pointer
– continuous pattern with added pointer
Periodic pointer adjustment
– continuous pattern
– continuous pattern
– continuous pattern with cancellation of one
pointer
– continuous pattern with added pointer
Pointer Direction
Positive or Negative
Pointer Direction
Positive or Negative
Initialization Period
On or Off
Thirty second burst of 1 pointer per second in the
same direction as the selected test.
Initialization Period
On or Off
Thirty second burst of 1 pointer per second in the
same direction as the selected test.
Cool Down Period
On or Off
This will last at least 60 seconds.
Cool Down Period
On or Off
This will last at least 60 seconds.
Measurements
Measurements
DS1 Error Count, Error Rate and
Error seconds for
Frame Bit
CRC-6 (ESF only)
Pattern Bit
DS1 Error Count, Error Rate and
Error seconds for
Frame Bit
CRC-6 (ESF only)
Pattern Bit
DS3 Error Count, Error Rate and
Error seconds for
Frame Bit
P Parity Bit (M13 framing only)
C Parity Bit (C-Bit parity only)
Pattern Bit
DS3 Error Count, Error Rate and
Error seconds for
Frame Bit
P Parity Bit (M13 framing only)
C Parity Bit (C-Bit parity only)
Pattern Bit
VT1.5 Error Count, Error Rate and
Error seconds for
VT BIP-2
VT FEBE
VT1.5 Error Count, Error Rate and
Error seconds for
VT BIP-2
VT FEBE
DS1 Alarm and Failure Seconds for
AIS
Yellow
Loss of Pattern Sync
Loss of Frame
Loss of Signal
DS1 Alarm and Failure Seconds for
AIS
Yellow
Loss of Pattern Sync
Loss of Frame
Loss of Signal
DS3 Alarm and Failure Seconds for
AIS (DS3 Blue)
Yellow (DS3 FERF)
Idle
Loss of Pattern Sync
Loss of Frame
Loss of Signal
DS3 Alarm and Failure Seconds for
AIS (DS3 Blue)
Yellow (DS3 FERF)
Idle
Loss of Pattern Sync
Loss of Frame
Loss of Signal
VT1.5 Alarm and Failure Seconds for VT AIS
VT FERF
VT Loss of Pointer
VT Loss of Multiframe
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
VT1.5 Alarm and Failure Seconds for VT AIS
VT FERF
VT Loss of Pointer
VT Loss of Multiframe
D–15
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–15
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Characteristic
Description
Characteristic
Description
VT1.5 Pointer Measurements
Seconds:
LOP
Illegal pointers
NDF
VT1.5 Pointer Measurements
Seconds:
LOP
Illegal pointers
NDF
Count:
Illegal pointers
Positive justifications
Negative justifications
T1M1.3 Analysis
Count:
Illegal pointers
Positive justifications
Negative justifications
T1M1.3 Analysis
VT1.5 BIP-2 & FEBE Seconds and
% of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES UAS, EFS,
FEBE-Count, FEBE-ES, FEBE-UAS, FEBE-EFS
VT1.5 BIP-2 & FEBE Seconds and
% of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES UAS, EFS,
FEBE-Count, FEBE-ES, FEBE-UAS, FEBE-EFS
DS1 Frame Error (SF) &
CRC-6 Error (ESF), Seconds and %
of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS
DS1 Frame Error (SF) &
CRC-6 Error (ESF), Seconds and %
of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS
DS3 P-Bit Error (M13) &
C-Parity Error (C-Bit Parity),
Seconds and % of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS
DS3 P-Bit Error (M13) &
C-Parity Error (C-Bit Parity),
Seconds and % of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES, UAS, EFS
DS1/DS3 Payload (Pattern Bit
Errors), Seconds and % of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES,UAS, EFS
DS1/DS3 Payload (Pattern Bit
Errors), Seconds and % of total time
Error-Count, ES, ES-A, ES-B, SES,UAS, EFS
LEDs
Status Indicators
LEDs
VT AIS
VT FERF
VT BIP-2 ERROR
DS1/DS3 AIS
DS1/DS3 YELLOW
DS1/DS3 ERROR
Histograms for DS1, DS3 and VT1.5
Status Indicators
VT AIS
VT FERF
VT BIP-2 ERROR
DS1/DS3 AIS
DS1/DS3 YELLOW
DS1/DS3 ERROR
Histograms for DS1, DS3 and VT1.5
DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Error Count, Bit
Error Rate and Errored Seconds
CRC, Frame, Parity,
VT-BIT2, VT-FEBE,
Pattern Bit
DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Error Count, Bit
Error Rate and Errored Seconds
CRC, Frame, Parity,
VT-BIT2, VT-FEBE,
Pattern Bit
DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Alarms & Failures On/Off
LOS, LOF, AIS, Yellow (FERF),
VT-LOP, VT-AIS, VT-FERF, VT-LOM,
Pattern Loss, Loss of Power
DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Alarms & Failures On/Off
LOS, LOF, AIS, Yellow (FERF),
VT-LOP, VT-AIS, VT-FERF, VT-LOM,
Pattern Loss, Loss of Power
VT1.5 Pointers
VT Pointer Value, Pointer Justification
VT1.5 Pointers
VT Pointer Value, Pointer Justification
Measurement Utilities
Measurement Control
D–16
Measurement Utilities
Manual Start/Stop
Timed: 1 s to 99 days with 1 s resolution
Continuous
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Measurement Control
D–16
Manual Start/Stop
Timed: 1 s to 99 days with 1 s resolution
Continuous
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Table D–2: Option 22 DS1/DS3/VT1.5 Capabilities (Cont.)
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
Description
Histogram Display Resolution
1 min, 5 min, 15 min, 1 hour
(displays 72 hours with 1 min resolution)
15 min, 60 min, 4 hrs, 12 hrs
(displays 45 days with 15 min resolution)
Histogram Display Resolution
1 min, 5 min, 15 min, 1 hour
(displays 72 hours with 1 min resolution)
15 min, 60 min, 4 hrs, 12 hrs
(displays 45 days with 15 min resolution)
Result Logging
All measurements are recorded with start, stop time
and date.
The current and previous results are stored in
memory both totalized and graphical.
Both graphical and totalized results can be stored
on a disk.
Result Logging
All measurements are recorded with start, stop time
and date.
The current and previous results are stored in
memory both totalized and graphical.
Both graphical and totalized results can be stored
on a disk.
Table D–3: Environmental Specifications
Table D–3: Environmental Specifications
Characteristic
Characteristic
Description
Environmental
Temperature
Environmental
Temperature
Operating: 0_ C to +50_ C
Nonoperating: –40_ C to +75_ C
Altitude
Operating: 4,572 m (15,000 ft)
Altitude
Operating:
To 95%, relative humidity at or below +45_ C for
2 hours or less
Humidity
Operating:
To 95%, relative humidity at or below +45_ C for
2 hours or less
To 90% relative humidity at or below 30_ C,
continuous
Qualifies under National Safe Transit Association
1s Pre-shipment Test; 1A-B-1.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Operating: 4,572 m (15,000 ft)
Nonoperating: 12,192 m (40,000 ft)
To 90% relative humidity at or below 30_ C,
continuous
Transportation Handling
Operating: 0_ C to +50_ C
Nonoperating: –40_ C to +75_ C
Nonoperating: 12,192 m (40,000 ft)
Humidity
Description
D–17
Transportation Handling
Qualifies under National Safe Transit Association
1s Pre-shipment Test; 1A-B-1.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–17
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–4: Physical Characteristics
Table D–4: Physical Characteristics
Characteristic
Description
Characteristic
Description
Dimensions
Height:
165 mm (6.5 in)
191 mm (7.5 in) with accessory pouch
Dimensions
Height:
165 mm (6.5 in)
191 mm (7.5 in) with accessory pouch
Width:
362 mm (14.25 in)
Width:
362 mm (14.25 in)
Depth:
490 mm (19.25 in) with front cover
564 mm (22.2 in) with handle extended
Depth:
490 mm (19.25 in) with front cover
564 mm (22.2 in) with handle extended
Weight
Net: Approximately 8.7 kg (19.3 lb)
Weight
Shipping: Approximately 14.1 kg (31 lb)
Power Requirements
Line Voltage Range: 90 to 250 VRMS
Line Frequency: 48 to 62 Hz.
Power Consumption: 240 Watts max.
Table D–5: Certifications and compliances
Net: Approximately 8.7 kg (19.3 lb)
Shipping: Approximately 14.1 kg (31 lb)
Power Requirements
Line Voltage Range: 90 to 250 VRMS
Line Frequency: 48 to 62 Hz.
Power Consumption: 240 Watts max.
Table D–5: Certifications and compliances
Characteristic
Description
Characteristic
Description
EC Declaration of Conformity – EMC
Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for
Electromagnetic Compatibility. Compliance was
demonstrated to the following specifications as
listed in the Official Journal of the European
Communities:
EC Declaration of Conformity – EMC
Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for
Electromagnetic Compatibility. Compliance was
demonstrated to the following specifications as
listed in the Official Journal of the European
Communities:
EN 55011
Class A Radiated and
Conducted Emissions
EN 55011
EN 50082-1 Immunity:
IEC 801-2
Electrostatic Discharge
Immunity
IEC 801-3
RF Electromagnetic Field
Immunity
IEC 801-4
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst
Immunity
IEC 801-5
Power Line Surge Immunity
FCC Compliance
D–18
Emissions comply with FCC Code of Federal
Regulations 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A Limits
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Class A Radiated and
Conducted Emissions
EN 50082-1 Immunity:
IEC 801-2
Electrostatic Discharge
Immunity
IEC 801-3
RF Electromagnetic Field
Immunity
IEC 801-4
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst
Immunity
IEC 801-5
Power Line Surge Immunity
FCC Compliance
D–18
Emissions comply with FCC Code of Federal
Regulations 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A Limits
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–5: Certifications and compliances (cont.)
Table D–5: Certifications and compliances (cont.)
Characteristic
Description
Characteristic
Description
EC Declaration of Conformity – Low
Voltage
Compliance was demonstrated to the following
specification as listed in the Official Journal of the
European Communities:
EC Declaration of Conformity – Low
Voltage
Compliance was demonstrated to the following
specification as listed in the Official Journal of the
European Communities:
Approvals
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
EN 61010-1/A1
EN 61010-1/A1
Safety requirements for
electrical equipment for
measurement, control,
and laboratory use
UL1244 – Electrical and Electronic Measuring and
Testing Equipment
Approvals
CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 231 – CSA Safety
requirements for Electrical and Electronic
Measuring and testing Equipment
Conditions for Safety Certification
Operating temperature:
+5 to +40 °C
Max. Operating altitude:
Safety requirements for
electrical equipment for
measurement, control,
and laboratory use
UL1244 – Electrical and Electronic Measuring and
Testing Equipment
CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 231 – CSA Safety
requirements for Electrical and Electronic
Measuring and testing Equipment
Operating temperature:
+5 to +40 °C
2000 m
Max. Operating altitude:
2000 m
Equipment Type:
Test and measuring
Equipment Type:
Test and measuring
Safety Class:
Class I, grounded
product (IEC1010-1)
Safety Class:
Class I, grounded
product (IEC1010-1)
Overvoltage Category:
CAT II (IEC1010-1)
Overvoltage Category:
CAT II (IEC1010-1)
Polution Degree:
Polution Degree 2,
rated for indoor use
only (IEC1010-1)
Polution Degree:
Polution Degree 2,
rated for indoor use
only (IEC1010-1)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Conditions for Safety Certification
D–19
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–19
Appendix D: Specifications
Appendix D: Specifications
Table D–5: Certifications and compliances (cont.)
Table D–5: Certifications and compliances (cont.)
Characteristic
Description
Characteristic
Description
Installation Category Descriptions
Terminals on this product may have different
installation category designations. The installation
categories are:
Installation Category Descriptions
Terminals on this product may have different
installation category designations. The installation
categories are:
D–20
CAT III
Distribution-level mains (usually
permanently connected). Equipment at
this level is typically in a fixed industrial
location
CAT III
Distribution-level mains (usually
permanently connected). Equipment at
this level is typically in a fixed industrial
location
CAT II
Local-level mains (wall sockets).
Equipment at this level includes
appliances, portable tools, and similar
products. Equipment is usually
cord-connected
CAT II
Local-level mains (wall sockets).
Equipment at this level includes
appliances, portable tools, and similar
products. Equipment is usually
cord-connected
CAT I
Secondary (signal level) or battery
operated circuits of electronic equipment
CAT I
Secondary (signal level) or battery
operated circuits of electronic equipment
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
D–20
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
The purpose of the incoming inspection test is to verify that the
CTS 710 SONET Test Set is functioning properly. The incoming
inspection test relies on the front panel status lights to indicate the
results of the test. Figure E–1 shows the location of the status lights
used in these procedures.
Yellow history lights
indicate an event has
occurred
Green lights
indicate the
condition is true
Red lights indicate an
event is occurring now
The purpose of the incoming inspection test is to verify that the
CTS 710 SONET Test Set is functioning properly. The incoming
inspection test relies on the front panel status lights to indicate the
results of the test. Figure E–1 shows the location of the status lights
used in these procedures.
Yellow history lights
indicate an event has
occurred
CLEAR HISTORY
button clears
history of events
Green lights
indicate the
condition is true
Red lights indicate an
event is occurring now
CLEAR HISTORY
button clears
history of events
Figure E–1: Front-Panel Status Lights
Figure E–1: Front-Panel Status Lights
Table E–1 details the equipment required to complete the incoming
inspection test.
Table E–1 details the equipment required to complete the incoming
inspection test.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
E–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
E–1
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
Table E–1: Required Equipment
Table E–1: Required Equipment
Item Number and Description
Minimum
Requirements
Example
1
Optical Fiber Cable1
62.5/125 mm
multimode fiber;
FC/PC connector
on one end;
compatible with
CTS 710 connector option on
other end
2
75 W Coaxial Cable
75 W impedance; Tektronix part
number
≈1 m length,
BNC connectors 012-1338-00
3
110 W Bantam Cable
110 W impedance; ≈6 ft
length, bantam
connectors
1
Purpose
Example
Purpose
Optical Fiber Cable1
62.5/125 mm
multimode fiber;
FC/PC connector
on one end;
compatible with
CTS 710 connector option on
other end
Interconnect
electrical signals
2
75 W Coaxial Cable
75 W impedance; Tektronix part
number
≈1 m length,
BNC connectors 012-1338-00
Interconnect
electrical signals
Interconnect
electrical
signals
3
110 W Bantam Cable
110 W impedance; ≈6 ft
length, bantam
connectors
Interconnect
electrical
signals
This equipment is required to test a CTS 710 with any one of the optional
Optical/Electrical Plug-in Interface Modules installed; otherwise, it is not
required.
Loop-Back Connection
1
FC/PC to
Interconnect
FC/PC, Tektro- optical signals
nix part number
174-2322-00
Tektronix part
number
012-1314-00
This equipment is required to test a CTS 710 with any one of the optional
Optical/Electrical Plug-in Interface Modules installed; otherwise, it is not
required.
Loop-Back Connection
The incoming inspection test requires an external loop-back
connection from the TRANSMIT/OUT output to the RECEIVE/IN
input. For the SONET rate electrical loop-back, you can use the 75 W
BNC coaxial cable provided as a standard accessory to the CTS 710.
If the Add/Drop/Test Option is installed, you can use the 75 W
coaxial cable for checking DS3 operation, and will need to use a
bantam cable (a standard accessory with the Add/Drop/Test Option)
to check DS1 operation. If one of the Electrical/Optical Plug-in
Interface Modules is installed in your CTS 710, you also need a short
optical cable that is compatible with the optical connectors on your
instrument. Optical cables are not included as standard accessories to
the CTS 710.
E–2
Minimum
Requirements
1
FC/PC to
Interconnect
FC/PC, Tektro- optical signals
nix part number
174-2322-00
Tektronix part
number
012-1314-00
Item Number and Description
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
The incoming inspection test requires an external loop-back
connection from the TRANSMIT/OUT output to the RECEIVE/IN
input. For the SONET rate electrical loop-back, you can use the 75 W
BNC coaxial cable provided as a standard accessory to the CTS 710.
If the Add/Drop/Test Option is installed, you can use the 75 W
coaxial cable for checking DS3 operation, and will need to use a
bantam cable (a standard accessory with the Add/Drop/Test Option)
to check DS1 operation. If one of the Electrical/Optical Plug-in
Interface Modules is installed in your CTS 710, you also need a short
optical cable that is compatible with the optical connectors on your
instrument. Optical cables are not included as standard accessories to
the CTS 710.
E–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
How to Proceed
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
How to Proceed
If the CTS 710 fails any of these tests, it has failed the incoming
inspection test. Double check the electrical and optical connections
and repeat any failed test. If the failure persists, contact your local
Tektronix field office or representative for assistance.
If the CTS 710 fails any of these tests, it has failed the incoming
inspection test. Double check the electrical and optical connections
and repeat any failed test. If the failure persists, contact your local
Tektronix field office or representative for assistance.
You can perform the following tests in any order. Each test is
independent and does not depend on the setup from the previous test.
You can perform the following tests in any order. Each test is
independent and does not depend on the setup from the previous test.
H Turn on the CTS 710. Allow it to warm up for 20 minutes before
proceeding with the tests.
H Turn on the CTS 710. Allow it to warm up for 20 minutes before
proceeding with the tests.
System Self Test with External Loop-Back
System Self Test with External Loop-Back
This test executes the Self Test including coverage of the transmitter
and receiver I/O circuitry.
Equipment
Required
75 W BNC coaxial cable for electrical loop-back
Prerequisites
Time Required
This test executes the Self Test including coverage of the transmitter
and receiver I/O circuitry.
Equipment
Required
75 W BNC coaxial cable for electrical loop-back
CTS 710 warmed-up at least twenty minutes
Prerequisites
CTS 710 warmed-up at least twenty minutes
Approximately two minutes
Time Required
Approximately two minutes
Optical loop-back cable if Electrical/Optical Plug-in
Interface Module is installed
Optical loop-back cable if Electrical/Optical Plug-in
Interface Module is installed
1. Attach electrical and optical loop-back cables from the
TRANSMIT/OUT outputs to the RECEIVE/IN inputs.
1. Attach electrical and optical loop-back cables from the
TRANSMIT/OUT outputs to the RECEIVE/IN inputs.
NOTE. Connectors labeled OUT and IN are present only on
instruments equipped with the Add/Drop/Test Option.
NOTE. Connectors labeled OUT and IN are present only on
instruments equipped with the Add/Drop/Test Option.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
E–3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
E–3
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
2. Set up and execute the system self test with the following
sequence:
2. Set up and execute the system self test with the following
sequence:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
UTILITY
SELF TEST
Self Test Group
Sys: Ext
UTILITY
SELF TEST
Self Test Group
Sys: Ext
Self Test Control
Run
Self Test Control
Run
SONET Signals
SONET Signals
This test checks that the CTS 710 transmits and receives error-free
signals at all SONET rates.
Equipment
Required
75 W BNC coaxial cable for electrical loop-back
Prerequisites
Time Required
This test checks that the CTS 710 transmits and receives error-free
signals at all SONET rates.
Equipment
Required
75 W BNC coaxial cable for electrical loop-back
CTS 710 warmed up at least twenty minutes
Prerequisites
CTS 710 warmed up at least twenty minutes
Approximately five minutes
Time Required
Approximately five minutes
Optical loop-back cable if Electrical/Optical Plug-in
Interface Module is installed
1. Attach electrical and optical loop-back cables from the
TRANSMIT outputs to the RECEIVE inputs.
E–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Optical loop-back cable if Electrical/Optical Plug-in
Interface Module is installed
1. Attach electrical and optical loop-back cables from the
TRANSMIT outputs to the RECEIVE inputs.
E–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
2. Perform the initial setup of the CTS 710 with the following
sequence:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
TRANSMIT
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
2. Perform the initial setup of the CTS 710 with the following
sequence:
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer Control
Set Value
POINTERS &
TIMING
Pointer Control
Set Value
Pointer Value set
to
Default 522
Pointer Value set
to
Default 522
Select Choice
3. To check the STS-1 rate, press the CLEAR HISTORY button,
wait two seconds, and then verify that no yellow history lights are
on.
3. To check the STS-1 rate, press the CLEAR HISTORY button,
wait two seconds, and then verify that no yellow history lights are
on.
4. To check the STS-3 rate, set the transmit rate as follows:
4. To check the STS-3 rate, set the transmit rate as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-3
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
STS-3
NOTE. When changing the transmit rate, the LOP, LOS, and LOF
history lights may turn on; this is normal. However, the red event
lights should not stay on.
NOTE. When changing the transmit rate, the LOP, LOS, and LOF
history lights may turn on; this is normal. However, the red event
lights should not stay on.
5. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then
verify that no yellow history lights are on.
5. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then
verify that no yellow history lights are on.
6. Steps 7 through 10 of this procedure apply only if one of the
Electrical/Optical Plug-in Interface Modules (Option 03 or
Option 04) is installed in your CTS 710.
6. Steps 7 through 10 of this procedure apply only if one of the
Electrical/Optical Plug-in Interface Modules (Option 03 or
Option 04) is installed in your CTS 710.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
E–5
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
E–5
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
7. To check the OC-3 rate, perform the setup sequence:
7. To check the OC-3 rate, perform the setup sequence:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
OC-3
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
OC-3
8. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then
verify that no yellow history lights are on.
8. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then
verify that no yellow history lights are on.
9. If your CTS 710 does not have OC-12 capability, you have
completed the incoming inspection test. To check the OC-12 rate,
perform the setup sequence:
9. If your CTS 710 does not have OC-12 capability, you have
completed the incoming inspection test. To check the OC-12 rate,
perform the setup sequence:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
OC-12
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
OC-12
10. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then
verify that no yellow history lights are on.
Tributary Signals (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
10. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then
verify that no yellow history lights are on.
Tributary Signals (Add/Drop/Test Option Only)
This test checks that the CTS 710 transmits and receives error-free
signals at all tributary rates.
E–6
Equipment
Required
75 W BNC coaxial cable for DS3 electrical loop-back
Prerequisites
Time Required
This test checks that the CTS 710 transmits and receives error-free
signals at all tributary rates.
Equipment
Required
75 W BNC coaxial cable for DS3 electrical loop-back
CTS 710 warmed up at least twenty minutes
Prerequisites
CTS 710 warmed up at least twenty minutes
Approximately five minutes
Time Required
Approximately five minutes
110 W Bantam Cable for DS1 electrical loop-back
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
E–6
110 W Bantam Cable for DS1 electrical loop-back
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
1. Attach electrical and optical loop-back cables from the OUT
outputs to the IN inputs.
1. Attach electrical and optical loop-back cables from the OUT
outputs to the IN inputs.
2. Perform the initial setup of the CTS 710 with the following
sequence:
2. Perform the initial setup of the CTS 710 with the following
sequence:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TEST SETUPS
RECALL
INSTRUMENT
SETUPS
DEFAULT
FACTORY
SETTINGS
Recall Setup
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Tx/Rx Settings
Coupled
Transmit Rate
DS1
Transmit Rate
DS1
Select Choice
3. To check the DS1 rate, press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait
two seconds, and then verify that no yellow history lights are on.
3. To check the DS1 rate, press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait
two seconds, and then verify that no yellow history lights are on.
4. To check the DS3 rate, set the transmit rate as follows:
4. To check the DS3 rate, set the transmit rate as follows:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
DS3
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Rate
DS3
NOTE. When changing the transmit rate, the LOP, LOS, and LOF
history lights may turn on; this is normal. However, the red error
lights should not stay on.
NOTE. When changing the transmit rate, the LOP, LOS, and LOF
history lights may turn on; this is normal. However, the red error
lights should not stay on.
5. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then
verify that no yellow history lights are on.
5. Press the CLEAR HISTORY button, wait two seconds, and then
verify that no yellow history lights are on.
This completes the incoming inspection test.
This completes the incoming inspection test.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
E–7
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
E–7
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
E–8
Appendix E: Incoming Inspection Test
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
E–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix F: Example Disk Contents
Appendix F: Example Disk Contents
This manual ships with a disk containing files that you can load into
your CTS 710. The files are examples of instrument setups, test
results and pass/fail tests. The files contained on the disk are
described in the following paragraphs.
Instrument Setups
Instrument Setups
The STRESS file is an instrument setup file. The file sets up the
CTS 710 to generate an STS-1 signal that contains alarms, errors and
pointer movements. The STRESS file is an example of how the
CTS 710 can save you time by storing instrument setups on disk for
later recall.
Test Results
The STRESS file is an instrument setup file. The file sets up the
CTS 710 to generate an STS-1 signal that contains alarms, errors and
pointer movements. The STRESS file is an example of how the
CTS 710 can save you time by storing instrument setups on disk for
later recall.
Test Results
The ONEDAY file is a test results file. It contains one day (24 hours)
of test results. Recall the file from the RECALL RESULTS page of
the RESULTS menu. You can view the test results on the MAIN
RESULTS and ERROR ANALYSIS pages of the RESULTS menu.
You can view a graph of the test results on the HISTORY GRAPHS
page of the RESULTS menu. The HISTORY GRAPHS page shows
when alarms, errors and pointer movements occurred.
Pass/Fail Tests
The ONEDAY file is a test results file. It contains one day (24 hours)
of test results. Recall the file from the RECALL RESULTS page of
the RESULTS menu. You can view the test results on the MAIN
RESULTS and ERROR ANALYSIS pages of the RESULTS menu.
You can view a graph of the test results on the HISTORY GRAPHS
page of the RESULTS menu. The HISTORY GRAPHS page shows
when alarms, errors and pointer movements occurred.
Pass/Fail Tests
The DEMO_10S file is a pass/fail test that runs for just 10 seconds.
To make the test fail, press the INSERT ERROR button on the front
panel. To run the test, connect an electrical cable between the
TRANSMIT and RECEIVE connectors on the front panel and then
recall the test from the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS page of the
TEST SETUPS menu. You can see how the test was set up by
viewing the test parameters on the SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS page of
the TEST SETUPS menu after you recall the test.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
This manual ships with a disk containing files that you can load into
your CTS 710. The files are examples of instrument setups, test
results and pass/fail tests. The files contained on the disk are
described in the following paragraphs.
F–1
The DEMO_10S file is a pass/fail test that runs for just 10 seconds.
To make the test fail, press the INSERT ERROR button on the front
panel. To run the test, connect an electrical cable between the
TRANSMIT and RECEIVE connectors on the front panel and then
recall the test from the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS page of the
TEST SETUPS menu. You can see how the test was set up by
viewing the test parameters on the SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS page of
the TEST SETUPS menu after you recall the test.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
F–1
Appendix F: Example Disk Contents
Appendix F: Example Disk Contents
The BER_STS1 file is a 15-minute BER test. The test passes if the
BER is better than 10E–7. To run the test, connect an electrical cable
between the TRANSMIT and RECEIVE connectors on the front
panel and then recall the test from the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS
page of the TEST SETUPS menu. You can see how the test was set
up by viewing the test parameters on the SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS
page of the TEST SETUPS menu after you recall the test.
F–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
The BER_STS1 file is a 15-minute BER test. The test passes if the
BER is better than 10E–7. To run the test, connect an electrical cable
between the TRANSMIT and RECEIVE connectors on the front
panel and then recall the test from the RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS
page of the TEST SETUPS menu. You can see how the test was set
up by viewing the test parameters on the SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS
page of the TEST SETUPS menu after you recall the test.
F–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
This appendix describes the connectors located on the rear panel of
the CTS 710.
VGA
Video
Output
GPIB
Port
External
RS-232 Clock Input
Port
(Optional)
Calibration Overhead 1.544 Mb/s (Connector
BITS
Not Used)
Add/Drop
Signal
Timing
Port
Output
Reference
Input
Ground
Fuse
This appendix describes the connectors located on the rear panel of
the CTS 710.
VGA
Video
Output
Power
Connector
Principal
Power
Switch
GPIB
Port
External
RS-232 Clock Input
Port
(Optional)
Calibration Overhead 1.544 Mb/s (Connector
BITS
Not Used)
Add/Drop
Signal
Timing
Port
Output
Reference
Input
Figure G–1: CTS 710 Rear Panel Connectors
Figure G–1: CTS 710 Rear Panel Connectors
VGA Video Output
VGA Video Output
The CTS 710 can drive an external IBM-compatible VGA monitor.
There are no parameters to set in order to drive an external monitor.
The output is monochrome (green only); the resolution is 640 pixels
× 480 pixels. Figure G–2 shows how the pins are numbered on the
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
G–1
Ground
Fuse
Power
Connector
Principal
Power
Switch
The CTS 710 can drive an external IBM-compatible VGA monitor.
There are no parameters to set in order to drive an external monitor.
The output is monochrome (green only); the resolution is 640 pixels
× 480 pixels. Figure G–2 shows how the pins are numbered on the
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
G–1
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
VGA connector. Table G–1 lists the pin assignment for the rear-panel
VGA connector.
11
15
6
11
10
1
G–2
VGA connector. Table G–1 lists the pin assignment for the rear-panel
VGA connector.
15
6
5
10
1
5
Figure G–2: The VGA Video Output Connector
Figure G–2: The VGA Video Output Connector
Table G–1: VGA Video Output Connector Pin Assignment
Table G–1: VGA Video Output Connector Pin Assignment
Pin Number
Description
Pin Number
Description
1
Ground
1
Ground
2
Video Signal (Green)
2
Video Signal (Green)
3
Ground
3
Ground
4
–
4
–
5
–
5
–
6
Ground
6
Ground
7
Ground
7
Ground
8
Ground
8
Ground
9
–
9
–
10
Ground
10
Ground
11
Ground
11
Ground
12
–
12
–
13
Horizontal Sync
13
Horizontal Sync
14
Vertical Sync
14
Vertical Sync
15
–
15
–
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
G–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
GPIB Port
GPIB Port
The GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus) port is used for remote
control of the CTS 710. For detailed information on remote control
of the CTS 710, see the CTS 710 SONET Test Set Programmer
Manual (Tektronix part number 070-8924-XX)
RS-232 Port
The GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus) port is used for remote
control of the CTS 710. For detailed information on remote control
of the CTS 710, see the CTS 710 SONET Test Set Programmer
Manual (Tektronix part number 070-8924-XX)
RS-232 Port
The rear panel RS-232 connector is used to connect to printers and
instrument controllers. Set the RS-232 parameters for printers on the
PRINTER SETUP page of the UTILITY menu. Set the RS-232
parameters for instrument controllers on the REMOTE CONTROL
page of the UTILITY menu. You can find more detailed information
on remote control of the CTS 710 in the CTS 710 SONET Test Set
Programmer Manual. Figure G–3 shows how the pins are numbered
on the RS-232 port. Table G–2 lists the pin assignment for the
RS-232 port on the CTS 710 rear panel.
9
5
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
6
The rear panel RS-232 connector is used to connect to printers and
instrument controllers. Set the RS-232 parameters for printers on the
PRINTER SETUP page of the UTILITY menu. Set the RS-232
parameters for instrument controllers on the REMOTE CONTROL
page of the UTILITY menu. You can find more detailed information
on remote control of the CTS 710 in the CTS 710 SONET Test Set
Programmer Manual. Figure G–3 shows how the pins are numbered
on the RS-232 port. Table G–2 lists the pin assignment for the
RS-232 port on the CTS 710 rear panel.
9
1
5
6
1
Figure G–3: The RS-232 Port
Figure G–3: The RS-232 Port
Table G–2: RS-232 Rear Panel Connector Pin Assignment
Table G–2: RS-232 Rear Panel Connector Pin Assignment
Pin Number
Name
Description
Pin Number
Name
Description
1
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
1
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
2
RxD
Receive Data
2
RxD
Receive Data
3
TxD
Transmit Data
3
TxD
Transmit Data
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GND
Signal Ground
5
GND
Signal Ground
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
G–3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
G–3
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
Table G–2: RS-232 Rear Panel Connector Pin Assignment (Cont.)
Table G–2: RS-232 Rear Panel Connector Pin Assignment (Cont.)
Pin Number
Name
Description
Pin Number
Name
Description
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
RTS
Request To Send
7
RTS
Request To Send
8
CTS
Clear To Send
8
CTS
Clear To Send
9
RI
Ring Indicator
9
RI
Ring Indicator
External Clock Input
External Clock Input
You use the external clock input to provide an external reference for
the transmit clock. To set the transmit clock to an external clock:
You use the external clock input to provide an external reference for
the transmit clock. To set the transmit clock to an external clock:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Clock
External BITS
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Clock
External BITS
External DSn
External DSn
H Select External to use an external BITS reference clock for
SONET or DSn signals.
H Select External to use an external BITS reference clock for
SONET or DSn signals.
H Select External DSn to use an external clock for DS1/DS3
signals. This selection enables you to input a jittered clock to
provide DSn line jitter.
H Select External DSn to use an external clock for DS1/DS3
signals. This selection enables you to input a jittered clock to
provide DSn line jitter.
Calibration Signal Output
Calibration Signal Output
You use the calibration signal output for servicing the CTS 710.
Information on servicing the CTS 710 is located in the CTS 710
SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service Manual, Tektronix
part number 070-8853-XX.
G–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
You use the calibration signal output for servicing the CTS 710.
Information on servicing the CTS 710 is located in the CTS 710
SONET Test Set & CTS 750 SDH Test Set Service Manual, Tektronix
part number 070-8853-XX.
G–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
Overhead Add/Drop Port
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
Overhead Add/Drop Port
You use the Overhead Add/Drop port to add/drop the section and line
data communication channels (DCC), and the section and line user
channels. The DCC and user channel add/drop functions are
independent; for example, you can add a DCC while dropping a user
channel. Only one DCC or user channel can be added or dropped at a
time. The parameters for adding a DCC or a user channel are located
on the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and PATH OVERHEAD pages of
the TRANSMIT menu. The parameters for dropping a DCC or a user
channel are located on the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and PATH
OVERHEAD pages of the RECEIVE menu.
You use the Overhead Add/Drop port to add/drop the section and line
data communication channels (DCC), and the section and line user
channels. The DCC and user channel add/drop functions are
independent; for example, you can add a DCC while dropping a user
channel. Only one DCC or user channel can be added or dropped at a
time. The parameters for adding a DCC or a user channel are located
on the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and PATH OVERHEAD pages of
the TRANSMIT menu. The parameters for dropping a DCC or a user
channel are located on the TRANSPORT OVERHEAD and PATH
OVERHEAD pages of the RECEIVE menu.
The Overhead Add/Drop port uses a gapped clock. Figure G–4 shows
how the pins are numbered on the Overhead Add/Drop port.
Tables G–3 and G–4 summarize the different communication
channels.
The Overhead Add/Drop port uses a gapped clock. Figure G–4 shows
how the pins are numbered on the Overhead Add/Drop port.
Tables G–3 and G–4 summarize the different communication
channels.
20
37
1
20
19
37
1
19
Figure G–4: The Overhead Add/Drop Port
Figure G–4: The Overhead Add/Drop Port
Table G–3: Overhead Channels Added
Table G–3: Overhead Channels Added
Added Channel
Bytes Added
Data Rate
Clock Rate
Added Channel
Bytes Added
Data Rate
Clock Rate
Section DCC
D1, D2, D3
192 kbps
216 kHz
Section DCC
D1, D2, D3
192 kbps
216 kHz
Line DCC
D4, D5, D6, D7, D8,
D9, D10, D11, D12
576 kbps
2.16 MHz1
Line DCC
D4, D5, D6, D7, D8,
D9, D10, D11, D12
576 kbps
2.16 MHz1
Section User
Channel
F1
64 kbps
72 kHz
Section User
Channel
F1
64 kbps
72 kHz
Path User Channel
F2
64 kbps
72 kHz
Path User Channel
F2
64 kbps
72 kHz
1 The Line DCC signal has a 1/3–2/3 duty ratio.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
1 The Line DCC signal has a 1/3–2/3 duty ratio.
G–5
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
G–5
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
Table G–4: Overhead Channels Dropped
G–6
Table G–4: Overhead Channels Dropped
Dropped Channel
Bytes Dropped
Data Rate
Clock Rate
Dropped Channel
Bytes Dropped
Data Rate
Clock Rate
Section DCC
D1, D2, D3
192 kbps
216 kHz
Section DCC
D1, D2, D3
192 kbps
216 kHz
Line DCC
D4, D5, D6, D7, D8,
D9, D10, D11, D12
576 kbps
2.16 MHz
Line DCC
D4, D5, D6, D7, D8,
D9, D10, D11, D12
576 kbps
2.16 MHz
Section User
Channel
F1
64 kbps
72 kHz
Section User
Channel
F1
64 kbps
72 kHz
Path User Channel
F2
64 kbps
72 kHz
Path User Channel
F2
64 kbps
72 kHz
Table G–5 summarizes the data signal pin assignments on the
Overhead Add/Drop port. Table G–6 summarizes the additional pin
assignments on the Overhead Add/Drop port. The signal lines listed
in Table G–5 can drive 100 W, differential TTL lines. The signal
lines are terminated with a 100 W impedance and can drive 100 W
lines.
Table G–5 summarizes the data signal pin assignments on the
Overhead Add/Drop port. Table G–6 summarizes the additional pin
assignments on the Overhead Add/Drop port. The signal lines listed
in Table G–5 can drive 100 W, differential TTL lines. The signal
lines are terminated with a 100 W impedance and can drive 100 W
lines.
Table G–5: Overhead Add/Drop Port Data Signal Pin
Assignments
Table G–5: Overhead Add/Drop Port Data Signal Pin
Assignments
Signal
+Pin
–Pin
Signal
+Pin
–Pin
Added Tx Data (input)
4
22
Added Tx Data (input)
4
22
Added Tx Clock (output)
5
23
Added Tx Clock (output)
5
23
Tx Common (ground)
37
–
Tx Common (ground)
37
–
Dropped Rx Data (output)
6
24
Dropped Rx Data (output)
6
24
Dropped Rx Clock (output)
8
26
Dropped Rx Clock (output)
8
26
Rx Common (ground)
20
–
Rx Common (ground)
20
–
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
G–6
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
Table G–6: Overhead Add/Drop Port Additional Pin
Assignments
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
Table G–6: Overhead Add/Drop Port Additional Pin
Assignments
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Shield (ground)
1
Shield (ground)
1
Signal Ground (ground)
19
Signal Ground (ground)
19
Reserved
33
Reserved
33
Tx Frame Pulse (output)1
15
Tx Frame Pulse (output)1
15
36
(output)1
36
Rx Frame Pulse
(output)1
Rx Frame Pulse
1 The Frame Pulse signals are nominal 8 kHz, TTL, single-ended signals.
BITS Timing Reference Input
1 The Frame Pulse signals are nominal 8 kHz, TTL, single-ended signals.
BITS Timing Reference Input
Use the BITS (Building Integrated Timing Supply) timing reference
input connector to connect to a BITS reference. To synchronize the
CTS 710 transmit clock with a BITS reference:
Use the BITS (Building Integrated Timing Supply) timing reference
input connector to connect to a BITS reference. To synchronize the
CTS 710 transmit clock with a BITS reference:
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
Press Menu
Button
Select Menu
Page
Highlight
Parameter
Select Choice
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Clock
BITS
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
SETTINGS
Transmit Clock
BITS
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
G–7
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
G–7
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
G–8
Appendix G: Rear-Panel Connectors
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
G–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix H: Changing Optical Port
Connectors
Appendix H: Changing Optical Port
Connectors
The following procedures are discussed in this appendix:
The following procedures are discussed in this appendix:
H Cleaning the Optical Ports
H Cleaning the Optical Ports
H Changing the Optical Port Connectors
H Changing the Optical Port Connectors
Cleaning the Optical Ports
Cleaning the Optical Ports
If the CTS 710 performance appears degraded, the optical fiber and
optical port may be dirty. Clean the fiber connector with a clean
cloth.
If the CTS 710 performance appears degraded, the optical fiber and
optical port may be dirty. Clean the fiber connector with a clean
cloth.
To clean an optical port:
To clean an optical port:
1. Verify that the CTS 710 has been turned off with the principal
power switch on the rear panel.
1. Verify that the CTS 710 has been turned off with the principal
power switch on the rear panel.
2. Remove the four screws that attach the bulkhead connector to the
front panel (see Figure H–1).
2. Remove the four screws that attach the bulkhead connector to the
front panel (see Figure H–1).
3. Gently pull the bulkhead out of the unit and unscrew the fiber
connector. Be careful not to pull beyond the fiber slack.
3. Gently pull the bulkhead out of the unit and unscrew the fiber
connector. Be careful not to pull beyond the fiber slack.
4. Using a soft, lint-free cloth with a high-quality glass cleaner,
clean the tip of the fiber cable.
4. Using a soft, lint-free cloth with a high-quality glass cleaner,
clean the tip of the fiber cable.
5. If available, use low-pressure compressed air or canned air to
blow any dirt out of the bulkhead connector. If compressed air is
not available, then the bulkhead will have to be taken apart and
cleaned. Refer to the Changing the Optical Port Connectors
procedure, on page H–2, for information about bulkhead
disassembly.
5. If available, use low-pressure compressed air or canned air to
blow any dirt out of the bulkhead connector. If compressed air is
not available, then the bulkhead will have to be taken apart and
cleaned. Refer to the Changing the Optical Port Connectors
procedure, on page H–2, for information about bulkhead
disassembly.
6. After cleaning the bulkhead, reconnect the fiber and install the
bulkhead. Be sure to reinstall the dustcap chain.
6. After cleaning the bulkhead, reconnect the fiber and install the
bulkhead. Be sure to reinstall the dustcap chain.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H–1
Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors
Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors
NOTE. To keep cleaning to a minimum, install the dustcap when no
fiber is connected to the optical port.
Optical
Fiber
Connector
Optical
Fiber
Connector
Figure H–1: Removing the Optical Bulkhead Connector
Figure H–1: Removing the Optical Bulkhead Connector
Changing the Optical Port Connectors
H–2
NOTE. To keep cleaning to a minimum, install the dustcap when no
fiber is connected to the optical port.
Changing the Optical Port Connectors
The CTS 710 is shipped with the FC connector bulkhead and dustcap
installed. If you wish to change to the ST, DIN 47256, or SC
connectors perform the following procedure:
The CTS 710 is shipped with the FC connector bulkhead and dustcap
installed. If you wish to change to the ST, DIN 47256, or SC
connectors perform the following procedure:
1. Verify that the CTS 710 has been turned off with the principal
power switch on the rear panel.
1. Verify that the CTS 710 has been turned off with the principal
power switch on the rear panel.
2. Remove the four screws that attach the bulkhead connector to the
front panel (see Figure H–1).
2. Remove the four screws that attach the bulkhead connector to the
front panel (see Figure H–1).
3. Gently pull the bulkhead out of the unit and unscrew the fiber
connector. Be careful not to pull beyond the fiber slack.
3. Gently pull the bulkhead out of the unit and unscrew the fiber
connector. Be careful not to pull beyond the fiber slack.
4. Disassemble the bulkhead as shown in Figures H–2 through H–5.
4. Disassemble the bulkhead as shown in Figures H–2 through H–5.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors
Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors
Figure H–2: FC Optical Bulkhead Assembly
Figure H–2: FC Optical Bulkhead Assembly
Figure H–3: ST Optical Bulkhead Assembly
Figure H–3: ST Optical Bulkhead Assembly
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H–3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H–3
Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors
H–4
Appendix H: Changing Optical Port Connectors
Figure H–4: DIN 47256 Optical Bulkhead Assembly
Figure H–4: DIN 47256 Optical Bulkhead Assembly
Figure H–5: SC Optical Bulkhead Assembly
Figure H–5: SC Optical Bulkhead Assembly
5. Replace the current bulkhead with the one you wish to use and
reassemble.
5. Replace the current bulkhead with the one you wish to use and
reassemble.
6. Installation is the reverse of steps 1 through 3.
6. Installation is the reverse of steps 1 through 3.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Appendix I: Packing for Shipment
Appendix I: Packing for Shipment
If you ship the CTS 710, pack it in the original shipping carton and
packing material. If the original packing material is not available,
package the instrument as follows:
If you ship the CTS 710, pack it in the original shipping carton and
packing material. If the original packing material is not available,
package the instrument as follows:
1. Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with inside
dimensions at least 15 cm (6 in) taller, wider, and deeper than the
CTS 710. The shipping carton must be constructed of cardboard
with 170 kg (375 lb) test strength.
1. Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with inside
dimensions at least 15 cm (6 in) taller, wider, and deeper than the
CTS 710. The shipping carton must be constructed of cardboard
with 170 kg (375 lb) test strength.
2. If you are shipping the CTS 710 to a Tektronix field office for
repair, attach a tag to the CTS 710 showing the instrument owner
and address, the name of the person to contact about the
instrument, the instrument type, and the serial number.
2. If you are shipping the CTS 710 to a Tektronix field office for
repair, attach a tag to the CTS 710 showing the instrument owner
and address, the name of the person to contact about the
instrument, the instrument type, and the serial number.
3. Wrap the CTS 710 with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent
material to protect the finish.
3. Wrap the CTS 710 with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent
material to protect the finish.
4. Cushion the CTS 710 in the shipping carton by tightly packing
dunnage or urethane foam on all sides between the carton and the
CTS 710. Allow 7.5 cm (3 in) on all sides, top, and bottom.
4. Cushion the CTS 710 in the shipping carton by tightly packing
dunnage or urethane foam on all sides between the carton and the
CTS 710. Allow 7.5 cm (3 in) on all sides, top, and bottom.
5. Seal the shipping carton with shipping tape or an industrial
stapler.
5. Seal the shipping carton with shipping tape or an industrial
stapler.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
I–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
I–1
Appendix I: Packing for Shipment
I–2
Appendix I: Packing for Shipment
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
I–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary and Index
Glossary and Index
Glossary
Glossary
AIS
An acronym for Alarm Indication Signal. An AIS is used to alert
downstream equipment that an upstream failure has been
detected.
AIS
An acronym for Alarm Indication Signal. An AIS is used to alert
downstream equipment that an upstream failure has been
detected.
APS
An acronym for Automatic Protection Switching.
APS
An acronym for Automatic Protection Switching.
ASCII
An acronym for American Standard Code for Information
Interchange.
ASCII
An acronym for American Standard Code for Information
Interchange.
BER
An acronym for Bit Error Ratio (or Rate). The principal measure
of quality of a digital transmission system. BER is defined as:
BER
An acronym for Bit Error Ratio (or Rate). The principal measure
of quality of a digital transmission system. BER is defined as:
BER +
Number of Errors
Total Number of Bits
BER +
BER is usually expressed as a negative exponent. For example,
a BER of 10–7 means that 1 bit out of 107 bits is in error.
Number of Errors
Total Number of Bits
BER is usually expressed as a negative exponent. For example,
a BER of 10–7 means that 1 bit out of 107 bits is in error.
BIP
An acronym for Bit Interleaved Parity. A method used to
monitor errors in the transmitted signal.
BIP
An acronym for Bit Interleaved Parity. A method used to
monitor errors in the transmitted signal.
Bit Error
An incorrect bit. Also known as a coding violation.
Bit Error
An incorrect bit. Also known as a coding violation.
BITS
An acronym for Building Integrated Timing Supply.
BITS
An acronym for Building Integrated Timing Supply.
COFA
An acronym for Change of Frame Alignment.
COFA
An acronym for Change of Frame Alignment.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary–1
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary–1
Glossary
Glossary
CV
An acronym for Coding Violation.
CV
An acronym for Coding Violation.
dB
dB
The symbol for decibels.
The symbol for decibels.
dBm
The symbol for power level in decibels relative to 1 mW.
dBm
The symbol for power level in decibels relative to 1 mW.
DM
An acronym for Degraded Minute. A minute with a BER greater
than 10–6.
DM
An acronym for Degraded Minute. A minute with a BER greater
than 10–6.
DSn
An acronym for Digital Signal-n (DS1, DS2, DS3, and DS4).
DS1 is the basic multiplex rate in North America; additional
rates are DS2, DS3, and DS4. The following table lists the DSn
rates and their multiple of DS1:
DSn
An acronym for Digital Signal-n (DS1, DS2, DS3, and DS4).
DS1 is the basic multiplex rate in North America; additional
rates are DS2, DS3, and DS4. The following table lists the DSn
rates and their multiple of DS1:
Digital Signal Transmission Rates
Digital Signal Transmission Rates
Level
Rate
Multiple of DS1
Level
Rate
Multiple of DS1
DS1
1.544 Mb/s
1
DS1
1.544 Mb/s
1
DS1c
3.152 Mb/s
2
DS1c
3.152 Mb/s
2
DS2
6.312 Mb/s
4
DS2
6.312 Mb/s
4
DS3
44.736 Mb/s
24
DS3
44.736 Mb/s
24
EFS
An acronym for Error Free Seconds.
EFS
An acronym for Error Free Seconds.
ES
ES
An acronym for Errored Second. A second with at least one
error.
Glossary–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
An acronym for Errored Second. A second with at least one
error.
Glossary–2
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary
Glossary
FEBE
An acronym for Far End Block Error. An indication returned to
the transmitting LTE that an errored block has been detected at
the receiving LTE.
FEBE
An acronym for Far End Block Error. An indication returned to
the transmitting LTE that an errored block has been detected at
the receiving LTE.
FERF
An acronym for Far End Receive Failure. A FERF indicates to
the transmitting LTE that the receiving LTE has detected an
incoming line failure or is receiving a Line AIS.
FERF
An acronym for Far End Receive Failure. A FERF indicates to
the transmitting LTE that the receiving LTE has detected an
incoming line failure or is receiving a Line AIS.
ITU
An acronym for the International Telecommunication Union.
ITU
An acronym for the International Telecommunication Union.
Line
The portion of a transmission line between two multiplexers.
Line
The portion of a transmission line between two multiplexers.
Line Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
A Line AIS is generated by Section Terminating Equipment
upon Loss of Signal or Loss of Frame.
Line Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
A Line AIS is generated by Section Terminating Equipment
upon Loss of Signal or Loss of Frame.
Line Coding Violation (CV)
The sum of the BIP errors detected at the Line layer. Line CVs
are collected using the BIP codes in the B2 bytes of the Line
Overhead.
Line Coding Violation (CV)
The sum of the BIP errors detected at the Line layer. Line CVs
are collected using the BIP codes in the B2 bytes of the Line
Overhead.
Line Errored Second (ES)
A second during which at least one Line CV occurred, or a
second during which the line was in the Line AIS state.
Line Errored Second (ES)
A second during which at least one Line CV occurred, or a
second during which the line was in the Line AIS state.
Line Far End Receive Failure (FERF)
An indication returned to a transmitting LTE from the receiving
LTE that a Line AIS or incoming line failure has been detected.
Line Far End Receive Failure (FERF)
An indication returned to a transmitting LTE from the receiving
LTE that a Line AIS or incoming line failure has been detected.
Line Overhead (LOH)
Controls the payload information using the section layer and
provides alarm indications, error monitoring, and message
signalling between two LTEs.
Line Overhead (LOH)
Controls the payload information using the section layer and
provides alarm indications, error monitoring, and message
signalling between two LTEs.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary–3
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary–3
Glossary
Glossary
Line Severely Errored Second (SES)
A second with N or more Line CVs, or a second during which
the line was in the Line AIS state. The value of N varies with
the transmit rate, but corresponds to a 2 × 10–7 BER.
Line Severely Errored Second (SES)
A second with N or more Line CVs, or a second during which
the line was in the Line AIS state. The value of N varies with
the transmit rate, but corresponds to a 2 × 10–7 BER.
LOF
An acronym for Loss of Frame.
LOF
An acronym for Loss of Frame.
LOP
An acronym for Loss of Pointer.
LOP
An acronym for Loss of Pointer.
LOS
An acronym for Loss of Signal.
LOS
An acronym for Loss of Signal.
LTE
An acronym for Line Terminating Equipment.
LTE
An acronym for Line Terminating Equipment.
Mapping
The process of placing a tributary signal into a SONET SPE.
Mapping
The process of placing a tributary signal into a SONET SPE.
Mb/s
Megabits per second.
Mb/s
Megabits per second.
NE
NE
An acronym for Network Element.
Glossary–4
An acronym for Network Element.
OC
An acronym for Optical Carrier.
OC
An acronym for Optical Carrier.
OOF
An acronym for Out of Frame.
OOF
An acronym for Out of Frame.
Optical Carrier Level N (OC-N)
An optical version of an STS-N signal.
Optical Carrier Level N (OC-N)
An optical version of an STS-N signal.
Path
The portion of a transmission network between two terminal
multiplexers.
Path
The portion of a transmission network between two terminal
multiplexers.
Path Overhead (POH)
A set of bytes allocated within the information payload to carry
Path Overhead (POH)
A set of bytes allocated within the information payload to carry
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary–4
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary
Glossary
status and maintenance information between two network
elements.
status and maintenance information between two network
elements.
POH
An acronym for Path Overhead.
POH
An acronym for Path Overhead.
PTE
An acronym for Path Terminating Equipment.
PTE
An acronym for Path Terminating Equipment.
Rx
Rx
An abbreviation for Receive.
An abbreviation for Receive.
Section
The portion of a transmission line between a Network Element
(NE) and a Line Terminating Equipment (LTE) or two LTEs.
Section
The portion of a transmission line between a Network Element
(NE) and a Line Terminating Equipment (LTE) or two LTEs.
Section Coding Violation (CV)
A BIP error that is detected at the Section layer. CVs for the
Section layer are collected using the BIP-8 in the B1 byte
located in the Section overhead of STS-1 number 1.
Section Coding Violation (CV)
A BIP error that is detected at the Section layer. CVs for the
Section layer are collected using the BIP-8 in the B1 byte
located in the Section overhead of STS-1 number 1.
Section Errored Second (ES)
A second during which at least one Section CV or OOF/COFA
event occurred, or a second during which the NE was (at any
point during the second) in the LOS state.
Section Errored Second (ES)
A second during which at least one Section CV or OOF/COFA
event occurred, or a second during which the NE was (at any
point during the second) in the LOS state.
Section Overhead (SOH)
A set of bytes allocated within each frame to carry framing and
error monitoring information between an NE and LTE or
between two LTEs. Part of the transport overhead.
Section Overhead (SOH)
A set of bytes allocated within each frame to carry framing and
error monitoring information between an NE and LTE or
between two LTEs. Part of the transport overhead.
SES
An acronym for Severely Errored Seconds.
SES
An acronym for Severely Errored Seconds.
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)
A second with more than N CVs. N varies with the transmit rate
but corresponds to a BER of 2 × 10–7.
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)
A second with more than N CVs. N varies with the transmit rate
but corresponds to a BER of 2 × 10–7.
SOH
An acronym for Section Overhead.
SOH
An acronym for Section Overhead.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary–5
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary–5
Glossary
Glossary
SONET
An acronym for Synchronous Optical NETwork.
SONET
An acronym for Synchronous Optical NETwork.
SPE
An acronym for Synchronous Payload Envelope.
SPE
An acronym for Synchronous Payload Envelope.
STE
An acronym for Section Terminating Equipment.
STE
An acronym for Section Terminating Equipment.
STS
An acronym for Synchronous Transport Signal.
STS
An acronym for Synchronous Transport Signal.
STS-N
An acronym for Synchronous Transport Signal level-N (STS-1,
-3, -9, -12, -18, -24, -36, -48). The different STS-N rates (and
their optical equivalents) for the SONET Signal Hierarchy are
listed in the following table:
STS-N
An acronym for Synchronous Transport Signal level-N (STS-1,
-3, -9, -12, -18, -24, -36, -48). The different STS-N rates (and
their optical equivalents) for the SONET Signal Hierarchy are
listed in the following table:
SONET Signal Hierarchy
SONET Signal Hierarchy
Electrical Signal
Optical Signal
STS-1
OC-1
STS-3
Data Rate (Mb/s)
Electrical Signal
Optical Signal
51.84
STS-1
OC-1
51.84
OC-3
155.52
STS-3
OC-3
155.52
STS-9
OC-9
466.56
STS-9
OC-9
466.56
STS-12
OC-12
622.08
STS-12
OC-12
622.08
STS-18
OC-18
933.12
STS-18
OC-18
933.12
STS-24
OC-24
1244.16
STS-24
OC-24
1244.16
STS-36
OC-36
1866.24
STS-36
OC-36
1866.24
STS-48
OC-48
2488.32
STS-48
OC-48
2488.32
TE
TE
An acronym for Terminal Equipment.
Glossary–6
Data Rate (Mb/s)
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
An acronym for Terminal Equipment.
Glossary–6
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary
Glossary
Through Mode
The ability to retransmit the incoming signal and manipulate its
contents.
Through Mode
The ability to retransmit the incoming signal and manipulate its
contents.
TOH
An acronym for Transport Overhead.
TOH
An acronym for Transport Overhead.
Transport Overhead (TOH)
A set of bytes allocated within each frame to carry operation,
administration, and maintenance information from one end of
the system to the other.
Transport Overhead (TOH)
A set of bytes allocated within each frame to carry operation,
administration, and maintenance information from one end of
the system to the other.
Tributary
The lower rate signal that is input to a multiplexer for
combination (multiplexing) with other low rate signals to form a
higher rate signal.
Tributary
The lower rate signal that is input to a multiplexer for
combination (multiplexing) with other low rate signals to form a
higher rate signal.
Tx
Tx
An abbreviation for Transmit.
An abbreviation for Transmit.
VT
VT
An acronym for Virtual Tributary. A structure (not a signal)
designed for transport and switching of sub-STS payloads. The
sizes of VT currently in use are VT1.5, VT2, VT3, and VT6.
Yellow Signal
A code sent upstream to indicate that a failure condition has
been declared downstream.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary–7
An acronym for Virtual Tributary. A structure (not a signal)
designed for transport and switching of sub-STS payloads. The
sizes of VT currently in use are VT1.5, VT2, VT3, and VT6.
Yellow Signal
A code sent upstream to indicate that a failure condition has
been declared downstream.
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary–7
Glossary
Glossary–8
Glossary
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Glossary–8
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Index
A
Abort
PRINT CONTROL dialog box,
3–197, 3–198
Self Test Control, 3–211
accessories
optional, 1–2
standard, 1–2
accessory pouch, installing, 1–3
Added Tx Clock, Overhead Add/
Drop Port, G–6
Added Tx Data, Overhead Add/
Drop Port, G–6
adding a tributary signal, 3–72
adjusting pointers, 3–141
AIS, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
Alarm, Fail If condition, 3–39
alarm, audible. See beeper
Alarms, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,
3–177
Alternate, Pointer Direction, 3–148
AMI, Transmit Line Code, 3–94
Analyze VT, AUTOSCAN dialog
box, 3–57
APS Mode, APS COMMANDS,
3–161
APS response, checking, 3–161
Architecture, APS COMMANDS,
3–169
AUTOSCAN button, 3–55
B
B3ZS, Transmit Line Code, 3–94
B8ZS, Transmit Line Code, 3–94
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Index
Baud Rate
PRINTER SETUP, 3–205
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209
Beeper, MISC SETTINGS, 3–61,
3–201
BITS, Transmit Clock, 3–69
BITS rear-panel connector, G–7
BR, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
BR&SW, APS COMMANDS,
3–170
Bridge, Receive Level, 3–124
bright text, 2–16
Burst, 3–153, 3–155
Pointer Control, 3–143
Burst Size, POINTERS & TIMING, 3–143
buttons
AUTOSCAN, 3–55
CLEAR HISTORY, 2–5, 3–60
HELP, 2–12
INSERT ERROR, 3–133
menu, 2–11
ON/STBY, 1–9, 1–10
POINTER ACTION, 3–142
principal power switch, 1–9
PRINT, 3–197
START/STOP, 3–27, 3–49
C
Change Bottom, HISTORY
GRAPHS, 3–191
Change Top, HISTORY GRAPHS,
3–190
changing. See editing
Index–1
A
Abort
PRINT CONTROL dialog box,
3–197, 3–198
Self Test Control, 3–211
accessories
optional, 1–2
standard, 1–2
accessory pouch, installing, 1–3
Added Tx Clock, Overhead Add/
Drop Port, G–6
Added Tx Data, Overhead Add/
Drop Port, G–6
adding a tributary signal, 3–72
adjusting pointers, 3–141
AIS, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
Alarm, Fail If condition, 3–39
alarm, audible. See beeper
Alarms, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,
3–177
Alternate, Pointer Direction, 3–148
AMI, Transmit Line Code, 3–94
Analyze VT, AUTOSCAN dialog
box, 3–57
APS Mode, APS COMMANDS,
3–161
APS response, checking, 3–161
Architecture, APS COMMANDS,
3–169
AUTOSCAN button, 3–55
B
B3ZS, Transmit Line Code, 3–94
B8ZS, Transmit Line Code, 3–94
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Baud Rate
PRINTER SETUP, 3–205
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209
Beeper, MISC SETTINGS, 3–61,
3–201
BITS, Transmit Clock, 3–69
BITS rear-panel connector, G–7
BR, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
BR&SW, APS COMMANDS,
3–170
Bridge, Receive Level, 3–124
bright text, 2–16
Burst, 3–153, 3–155
Pointer Control, 3–143
Burst Size, POINTERS & TIMING, 3–143
buttons
AUTOSCAN, 3–55
CLEAR HISTORY, 2–5, 3–60
HELP, 2–12
INSERT ERROR, 3–133
menu, 2–11
ON/STBY, 1–9, 1–10
POINTER ACTION, 3–142
principal power switch, 1–9
PRINT, 3–197
START/STOP, 3–27, 3–49
C
Change Bottom, HISTORY
GRAPHS, 3–191
Change Top, HISTORY GRAPHS,
3–190
changing. See editing
Index–1
Index
Channel Requesting, APS COMMANDS, 3–165, 3–167
checking
APS response, 3–161
continuity, 3–2
error and alarm response, 3–8
fault tolerance, 3–8
line frequency offset response,
3–16
mapping and demapping, 3–6
pointer movements, 3–13
signal quality, 3–4
Clear
Description
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–193
Name
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–192
Operator End Prompt, 3–48
Operator Start Prompt, 3–46
CLEAR HISTORY button, 2–5,
3–60
Company Name, PRINTER SETUP, 3–206
connecting signals, 2–13
connectors
front panel, 2–3
rear panel, 2–4
Continuous, Test Duration, 3–23
controls, front panel, 2–2
Cool Down Period, 3–152
Cool Down Time, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–159
cooling requirements, 1–7
Index–2
Index
Coupled, Tx/Rx Settings
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–102,
3–123
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–66,
3–91
coupling settings, 3–65, 3–101
Current Date, MISC SETTINGS,
3–202
Current Time, MISC SETTINGS,
3–202
D
D1–D3
External Add, 3–85
External Drop, 3–118
D4–D12
External Add, 3–85
External Drop, 3–118
Data Carrier, REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209
Data Communication Channel,
3–84, 3–117
date, setting, 3–202
Day, Test Duration, 3–25
DCC, G–5
adding, 3–84
dropping, 3–117
Dec, GPIB Primary Address,
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207
Decrement, Pointer Direction,
3–148
Default
Operator End Prompt, 3–48
Operator Start Prompt, 3–46
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Channel Requesting, APS COMMANDS, 3–165, 3–167
checking
APS response, 3–161
continuity, 3–2
error and alarm response, 3–8
fault tolerance, 3–8
line frequency offset response,
3–16
mapping and demapping, 3–6
pointer movements, 3–13
signal quality, 3–4
Clear
Description
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–193
Name
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–192
Operator End Prompt, 3–48
Operator Start Prompt, 3–46
CLEAR HISTORY button, 2–5,
3–60
Company Name, PRINTER SETUP, 3–206
connecting signals, 2–13
connectors
front panel, 2–3
rear panel, 2–4
Continuous, Test Duration, 3–23
controls, front panel, 2–2
Cool Down Period, 3–152
Cool Down Time, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–159
cooling requirements, 1–7
Index–2
Coupled, Tx/Rx Settings
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–102,
3–123
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–66,
3–91
coupling settings, 3–65, 3–101
Current Date, MISC SETTINGS,
3–202
Current Time, MISC SETTINGS,
3–202
D
D1–D3
External Add, 3–85
External Drop, 3–118
D4–D12
External Add, 3–85
External Drop, 3–118
Data Carrier, REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209
Data Communication Channel,
3–84, 3–117
date, setting, 3–202
Day, Test Duration, 3–25
DCC, G–5
adding, 3–84
dropping, 3–117
Dec, GPIB Primary Address,
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207
Decrement, Pointer Direction,
3–148
Default
Operator End Prompt, 3–48
Operator Start Prompt, 3–46
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Index
Default (XXXXXXXX), TRANSPORT OVERHEAD, 3–79
Default 0ppm, Frequency Offset,
3–150
Default 4, GPIB Primary Address,
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207
Default 50ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147
Default 522, Pointer Value Set to,
3–145
Default 78, Pointer Value Set to,
3–146
default settings, C–1
Default Trace, J1 byte, 3–83
Delete, Edit Mode, 2–22
Delete File
RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–36
RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–53
RECALL RESULTS, 3–195
deleting a pass/fail test from disk,
3–53
deleting test results, 3–195
deleting text, 2–22
Description
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,
3–33
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–38,
3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–193
Destination Node ID, APS COMMANDS, 3–165
Detected, SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS, 3–39
dimmed text, 2–16
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Disk
RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–34
RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–52
RECALL RESULTS, 3–194,
3–195
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–50
disk drive, 2–23
disk file names, reading, 2–24
Display Brightness, MISC SETTINGS, 3–200
displaying history graphs, 3–182
displaying results, 3–173, 3–175,
3–177
DNR, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
Do Nothing, On Test Completion,
3–49
DONE, Edit Mode, 2–19, 2–21,
2–23
Double Alternating, 3–155, 3–156
Dropped Rx Clock, Overhead
Add/Drop Port, G–6
Dropped Rx Data, Overhead Add/
Drop Port, G–6
dropping a tributary signal, 3–110
DS1 add, 3–72
DS1 drop, 3–110
DS1 ESF
DS1 Framing, 3–108, 3–128
Framing, 3–95, 3–125
Payload, 3–74, 3–111
DS1 Ext Add, Payload, 3–74
DS1 Path Analysis, ERROR
ANALYSIS, 3–181
Index–3
Index
Default (XXXXXXXX), TRANSPORT OVERHEAD, 3–79
Default 0ppm, Frequency Offset,
3–150
Default 4, GPIB Primary Address,
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207
Default 50ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147
Default 522, Pointer Value Set to,
3–145
Default 78, Pointer Value Set to,
3–146
default settings, C–1
Default Trace, J1 byte, 3–83
Delete, Edit Mode, 2–22
Delete File
RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–36
RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–53
RECALL RESULTS, 3–195
deleting a pass/fail test from disk,
3–53
deleting test results, 3–195
deleting text, 2–22
Description
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,
3–33
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–38,
3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–193
Destination Node ID, APS COMMANDS, 3–165
Detected, SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS, 3–39
dimmed text, 2–16
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Disk
RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–34
RECALL PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–52
RECALL RESULTS, 3–194,
3–195
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–50
disk drive, 2–23
disk file names, reading, 2–24
Display Brightness, MISC SETTINGS, 3–200
displaying history graphs, 3–182
displaying results, 3–173, 3–175,
3–177
DNR, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
Do Nothing, On Test Completion,
3–49
DONE, Edit Mode, 2–19, 2–21,
2–23
Double Alternating, 3–155, 3–156
Dropped Rx Clock, Overhead
Add/Drop Port, G–6
Dropped Rx Data, Overhead Add/
Drop Port, G–6
dropping a tributary signal, 3–110
DS1 add, 3–72
DS1 drop, 3–110
DS1 ESF
DS1 Framing, 3–108, 3–128
Framing, 3–95, 3–125
Payload, 3–74, 3–111
DS1 Ext Add, Payload, 3–74
DS1 Path Analysis, ERROR
ANALYSIS, 3–181
Index–3
Index
DS1 SF (D4)
DS1 Framing, 3–108, 3–128
Framing, 3–94, 3–125
Payload, 3–74, 3–111
DS1 Unframed
DS1 Framing, 3–108, 3–128
Framing, 3–94, 3–125
Payload, 3–74, 3–111
DS1/DS3 AIS, status light, 3–60
DS1/DS3 Option, INSTR CONFIG, 3–200
DS1/DS3 YELLOW, status light,
3–60
DS3, Mapping, 3–71, 3–73, 3–106
DS3 Analysis, ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–181
DS3 C–bit
Framing, 3–95, 3–125
Payload, 3–75, 3–111
DS3 drop, 3–110
DS3 Ext Add, Payload, 3–75
DS3 Idle, Transmit alarm set to,
3–137
DS3 M13
Framing, 3–95, 3–125
Payload, 3–75, 3–111
DS3 Unframed
Framing, 3–95, 3–125
Payload, 3–75, 3–111
DS3–>DS1 Demux, Mapping,
3–106
DSn AIS, Transmit alarm set to,
3–137
DSn Path Analysis, 3–177
DSn Yellow, Transmit alarm set to,
3–137
Index–4
Index
E
EDIT BYTE
K1 Full Byte, 3–163
K2 Full Byte, 3–167
Test Pattern, 3–97
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,
3–79
edit mode, 2–19
EDIT NAME, Name
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,
3–32
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–193
EDIT TEXT
Description
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–193
Operator End Prompt, 3–48
Operator Start Prompt, 3–46
EDIT TRACE, J1 byte, 3–83
Edit XX bits, Test Pattern, 3–97
editing
binary numbers, 2–20
bytes, 2–20
decimal numbers, 2–17
text, 2–21, 2–22
electrical connections, 2–13
Enter, Edit Mode, 2–22
entering text, 2–22
ERROR, status light, 3–60
Error Count, Fail If condition, 3–41
error messages, B–3
error rate, 3–133
maximum, 3–133
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
DS1 SF (D4)
DS1 Framing, 3–108, 3–128
Framing, 3–94, 3–125
Payload, 3–74, 3–111
DS1 Unframed
DS1 Framing, 3–108, 3–128
Framing, 3–94, 3–125
Payload, 3–74, 3–111
DS1/DS3 AIS, status light, 3–60
DS1/DS3 Option, INSTR CONFIG, 3–200
DS1/DS3 YELLOW, status light,
3–60
DS3, Mapping, 3–71, 3–73, 3–106
DS3 Analysis, ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–181
DS3 C–bit
Framing, 3–95, 3–125
Payload, 3–75, 3–111
DS3 drop, 3–110
DS3 Ext Add, Payload, 3–75
DS3 Idle, Transmit alarm set to,
3–137
DS3 M13
Framing, 3–95, 3–125
Payload, 3–75, 3–111
DS3 Unframed
Framing, 3–95, 3–125
Payload, 3–75, 3–111
DS3–>DS1 Demux, Mapping,
3–106
DSn AIS, Transmit alarm set to,
3–137
DSn Path Analysis, 3–177
DSn Yellow, Transmit alarm set to,
3–137
Index–4
E
EDIT BYTE
K1 Full Byte, 3–163
K2 Full Byte, 3–167
Test Pattern, 3–97
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,
3–79
edit mode, 2–19
EDIT NAME, Name
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,
3–32
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–193
EDIT TEXT
Description
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–193
Operator End Prompt, 3–48
Operator Start Prompt, 3–46
EDIT TRACE, J1 byte, 3–83
Edit XX bits, Test Pattern, 3–97
editing
binary numbers, 2–20
bytes, 2–20
decimal numbers, 2–17
text, 2–21, 2–22
electrical connections, 2–13
Enter, Edit Mode, 2–22
entering text, 2–22
ERROR, status light, 3–60
Error Count, Fail If condition, 3–41
error messages, B–3
error rate, 3–133
maximum, 3–133
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Index
Error Ratio, Fail If condition, 3–39
Error type set to, ERRORS &
ALARMS, 3–132
Errored Seconds, Fail If condition,
3–42
Errors, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,
3–177
example disk contents, F–1
EXER, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
EXER–R, APS COMMANDS,
3–163
EXER–S, APS COMMANDS,
3–163
EXIT
Help dialog box, 2–13
PRINT CONTROL dialog box,
3–197, 3–198
External Add
PATH OVERHEAD, 3–86
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,
3–85
External BITS, Transmit Clock,
3–93
External Drop
PATH OVERHEAD, 3–119
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,
3–117
External DSn, Transmit Clock,
3–93
external monitor connector, G–1
F
F1
External Add, 3–85
External Drop, 3–118
F2
External Add, 3–86
External Drop, 3–119
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Fail If conditions, Pass/Fail Test,
3–38
Failure, Fail If condition, 3–39
Failure set to, ERRORS &
ALARMS, 3–138
Failures, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,
3–177
FERF, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
15 min, Test Duration, 3–23
files, disk, 2–23
Firmware Revision, INSTR CONFIG, 3–199
5 min, Test Duration, 3–23
Flow Control, PRINTER SETUP,
3–205
4 x STS-3c, Signal Structure,
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70
Framing, RECEIVE SETTINGS,
3–124
Frequency Offset
Pointer/Timing Mode, 3–149
POINTERS & TIMING, 3–150
FS, APS COMMANDS, 3–165
FS–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
FS–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
fuse, 1–7
G
GPIB connector, G–3
GPIB parameters, 3–206
GPIB Primary Address, REMOTE
CONTROL, 3–207
GPIB programming. See Programmer Manual
green lights, 2–4, 3–59
Index–5
Index
Error Ratio, Fail If condition, 3–39
Error type set to, ERRORS &
ALARMS, 3–132
Errored Seconds, Fail If condition,
3–42
Errors, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,
3–177
example disk contents, F–1
EXER, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
EXER–R, APS COMMANDS,
3–163
EXER–S, APS COMMANDS,
3–163
EXIT
Help dialog box, 2–13
PRINT CONTROL dialog box,
3–197, 3–198
External Add
PATH OVERHEAD, 3–86
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,
3–85
External BITS, Transmit Clock,
3–93
External Drop
PATH OVERHEAD, 3–119
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,
3–117
External DSn, Transmit Clock,
3–93
external monitor connector, G–1
F
F1
External Add, 3–85
External Drop, 3–118
F2
External Add, 3–86
External Drop, 3–119
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Fail If conditions, Pass/Fail Test,
3–38
Failure, Fail If condition, 3–39
Failure set to, ERRORS &
ALARMS, 3–138
Failures, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,
3–177
FERF, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
15 min, Test Duration, 3–23
files, disk, 2–23
Firmware Revision, INSTR CONFIG, 3–199
5 min, Test Duration, 3–23
Flow Control, PRINTER SETUP,
3–205
4 x STS-3c, Signal Structure,
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70
Framing, RECEIVE SETTINGS,
3–124
Frequency Offset
Pointer/Timing Mode, 3–149
POINTERS & TIMING, 3–150
FS, APS COMMANDS, 3–165
FS–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
FS–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
fuse, 1–7
G
GPIB connector, G–3
GPIB parameters, 3–206
GPIB Primary Address, REMOTE
CONTROL, 3–207
GPIB programming. See Programmer Manual
green lights, 2–4, 3–59
Index–5
Index
H
Hardware Handshake, REMOTE
CONTROL, 3–209
Hardware Revision, INSTR CONFIG, 3–199
HELP button, 2–12
Help dialog box, 2–12
High
Receive Level, 3–103
Transmit Level, 3–69
high-intensity text, 2–16
history graphs
displaying, 3–182
elements of, 3–186
resolution, 3–189
zooming, 3–188
History Resolution, 3–27
Hour, Test Duration, 3–25
I
icons, 2–8
IDLE, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
Illegal (Max +1), Pointer Value Set
to, 3–145, 3–146
Inc, GPIB Primary Address, REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207
Increment, Pointer Direction,
3–148
Independent, Tx/Rx Settings
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–102,
3–124
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–66,
3–92
Initialization Period, 3–152
Initialization Time, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–158
initializing the CTS, 3–35
INSERT ERROR button, 3–133
installation, 1–7
Index–6
Index
instrument setups
creating, 3–32
recalling, 3–34
Interface Module, INSTR CONFIG, 3–200
Internal, Transmit Clock, 3–68,
3–92
J
J1 Path Trace byte
editing, 3–82
viewing, 3–116, 3–117
K
K1 Full Byte, APS COMMANDS,
3–162
K2 Full Byte, APS COMMANDS,
3–167
knob, 2–3
knob icon, 2–19
L
lights
red, 3–60
status, 2–4, 3–58
yellow, 3–60
Line
ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–177,
3–178
Offset Mode, 3–150
LINE AIS, status light, 3–60
Line AIS, Transmit alarm set to,
3–136
Line Clock Offset, TRANSMIT
SETTINGS, 3–93
Line DCC, Overhead Add/Drop
Port, G–5, G–6
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
H
Hardware Handshake, REMOTE
CONTROL, 3–209
Hardware Revision, INSTR CONFIG, 3–199
HELP button, 2–12
Help dialog box, 2–12
High
Receive Level, 3–103
Transmit Level, 3–69
high-intensity text, 2–16
history graphs
displaying, 3–182
elements of, 3–186
resolution, 3–189
zooming, 3–188
History Resolution, 3–27
Hour, Test Duration, 3–25
I
icons, 2–8
IDLE, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
Illegal (Max +1), Pointer Value Set
to, 3–145, 3–146
Inc, GPIB Primary Address, REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207
Increment, Pointer Direction,
3–148
Independent, Tx/Rx Settings
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–102,
3–124
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–66,
3–92
Initialization Period, 3–152
Initialization Time, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–158
initializing the CTS, 3–35
INSERT ERROR button, 3–133
installation, 1–7
Index–6
instrument setups
creating, 3–32
recalling, 3–34
Interface Module, INSTR CONFIG, 3–200
Internal, Transmit Clock, 3–68,
3–92
J
J1 Path Trace byte
editing, 3–82
viewing, 3–116, 3–117
K
K1 Full Byte, APS COMMANDS,
3–162
K2 Full Byte, APS COMMANDS,
3–167
knob, 2–3
knob icon, 2–19
L
lights
red, 3–60
status, 2–4, 3–58
yellow, 3–60
Line
ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–177,
3–178
Offset Mode, 3–150
LINE AIS, status light, 3–60
Line AIS, Transmit alarm set to,
3–136
Line Clock Offset, TRANSMIT
SETTINGS, 3–93
Line DCC, Overhead Add/Drop
Port, G–5, G–6
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Index
LINE FERF, status light, 3–60
Line FERF, Transmit alarm set to,
3–136
line rate, 3–64, 3–90
LOF
Failure set to, 3–138
status lights, 3–60
LONG, APS COMMANDS, 3–169
LOP, status light, 3–60
LOS
Failure set to, 3–138
status light, 3–60
Low, Receive Level, 3–103
Low (15 min), History Resolution,
3–27
LP, APS COMMANDS, 3–165
LP–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
M
manuals, related, xxii
Mapping, TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–71
mapping a tributary signal, 3–72
Mapping line, RECEIVE SETTINGS page, 3–105
Max +100ppm, Frequency Offset,
3–150
Max 103, Pointer Value Set to,
3–146
Max 2ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147
Max 48ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147
Max 782, Pointer Value Set to,
3–145
Memory
RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–34
RECALL RESULTS, 3–196
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Memory 1–6, Save to Memory,
3–33
menu pages, 2–9
menus
RECEIVE, 2–9
RESULTS, 2–9
TEST SETUPS, 2–9
TRANSMIT, 2–9
UTILITY, 2–9
Min 0, Pointer Value Set to, 3–144,
3–146
Min 10000ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147
mini-graphs, 3–191
Minimum Res, history graphs,
3–186
Minute, Test Duration, 3–25
Model, INSTR CONFIG, 3–199
Monitor, Receive Level, 3–103,
3–124
monitoring performance, 3–18
–more– indicator, 2–16
MS, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
MS–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
MS–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
N
Name
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,
3–32
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–37,
3–44
SAVE RESULTS, 3–192
network stress testing, 3–135
Next, VT Under Test, 3–74
No Mapping (Equipped), Mapping,
3–71
Index–7
Index
LINE FERF, status light, 3–60
Line FERF, Transmit alarm set to,
3–136
line rate, 3–64, 3–90
LOF
Failure set to, 3–138
status lights, 3–60
LONG, APS COMMANDS, 3–169
LOP, status light, 3–60
LOS
Failure set to, 3–138
status light, 3–60
Low, Receive Level, 3–103
Low (15 min), History Resolution,
3–27
LP, APS COMMANDS, 3–165
LP–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
M
manuals, related, xxii
Mapping, TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–71
mapping a tributary signal, 3–72
Mapping line, RECEIVE SETTINGS page, 3–105
Max +100ppm, Frequency Offset,
3–150
Max 103, Pointer Value Set to,
3–146
Max 2ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147
Max 48ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147
Max 782, Pointer Value Set to,
3–145
Memory
RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–34
RECALL RESULTS, 3–196
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Memory 1–6, Save to Memory,
3–33
menu pages, 2–9
menus
RECEIVE, 2–9
RESULTS, 2–9
TEST SETUPS, 2–9
TRANSMIT, 2–9
UTILITY, 2–9
Min 0, Pointer Value Set to, 3–144,
3–146
Min 10000ms, Pointer Rate, 3–147
mini-graphs, 3–191
Minimum Res, history graphs,
3–186
Minute, Test Duration, 3–25
Model, INSTR CONFIG, 3–199
Monitor, Receive Level, 3–103,
3–124
monitoring performance, 3–18
–more– indicator, 2–16
MS, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
MS–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
MS–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
N
Name
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,
3–32
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–37,
3–44
SAVE RESULTS, 3–192
network stress testing, 3–135
Next, VT Under Test, 3–74
No Mapping (Equipped), Mapping,
3–71
Index–7
Index
No Mapping (Unequipped), Mapping, 3–71, 3–72
None
Description
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–193
Error type set to, 3–133
External Add, 3–85
PATH OVERHEAD, 3–86
External Drop
PATH OVERHEAD, 3–119
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,
3–118
Failure set to, 3–138
Transmit alarm set to, 3–136
none, in tables, xxii
Normal, Receive Level, 3–124
Normal (1 min), History Resolution, 3–27
Not Detected, SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS, 3–39
NR, APS COMMANDS, 3–163,
3–164
Null Trace, J1 byte, 3–83
O
Offline, GPIB Primary Address,
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207
Offset Mode, POINTERS & TIMING, 3–150
On, Tributary Drop, 3–112
On AMI, Tributary Drop, 3–112
On B8ZS, Tributary Drop, 3–112
On Test Completion, SAVE PASS/
FAIL TESTS, 3–38
1 hour, Test Duration, 3–23
1 in 8, Test Pattern, 3–75, 3–96,
3–126
1+1, APS COMMANDS, 3–169
Index–8
Index
1:N, APS COMMANDS, 3–169
1 x STS-3c, Signal Structure,
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70
#1–15, APS COMMANDS, 3–166,
3–168
Operator End Prompt, SAVE PASS/
FAIL TESTS, 3–38, 3–48
Operator Start Prompt, SAVE
PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–38, 3–46
optical connections, 2–13
Options, INSTR CONFIG, 3–199
overhead bytes, 3–77
editing, 3–77
viewing, 3–115
P
packaging for shipment, I–1
page tabs, 2–7, 2–9
pages, 2–9
parameters
changing, 2–15
selecting, 2–16
Parity
PRINTER SETUP, 3–205
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209
Pass/Fail test
condition type, 3–38
creating, 3–37, 3–44
specific condition, 3–38
starting, 3–49
threshold, 3–38
Path
APS COMMANDS, 3–169
ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–177
PATH AIS, status light, 3–60
Path AIS, Transmit alarm set to,
3–136
Path Analysis, ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–177, 3–179
PATH FERF, status light, 3–60
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
No Mapping (Unequipped), Mapping, 3–71, 3–72
None
Description
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–45
SAVE RESULTS, 3–193
Error type set to, 3–133
External Add, 3–85
PATH OVERHEAD, 3–86
External Drop
PATH OVERHEAD, 3–119
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,
3–118
Failure set to, 3–138
Transmit alarm set to, 3–136
none, in tables, xxii
Normal, Receive Level, 3–124
Normal (1 min), History Resolution, 3–27
Not Detected, SAVE PASS/FAIL
TESTS, 3–39
NR, APS COMMANDS, 3–163,
3–164
Null Trace, J1 byte, 3–83
O
Offline, GPIB Primary Address,
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–207
Offset Mode, POINTERS & TIMING, 3–150
On, Tributary Drop, 3–112
On AMI, Tributary Drop, 3–112
On B8ZS, Tributary Drop, 3–112
On Test Completion, SAVE PASS/
FAIL TESTS, 3–38
1 hour, Test Duration, 3–23
1 in 8, Test Pattern, 3–75, 3–96,
3–126
1+1, APS COMMANDS, 3–169
Index–8
1:N, APS COMMANDS, 3–169
1 x STS-3c, Signal Structure,
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70
#1–15, APS COMMANDS, 3–166,
3–168
Operator End Prompt, SAVE PASS/
FAIL TESTS, 3–38, 3–48
Operator Start Prompt, SAVE
PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–38, 3–46
optical connections, 2–13
Options, INSTR CONFIG, 3–199
overhead bytes, 3–77
editing, 3–77
viewing, 3–115
P
packaging for shipment, I–1
page tabs, 2–7, 2–9
pages, 2–9
parameters
changing, 2–15
selecting, 2–16
Parity
PRINTER SETUP, 3–205
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209
Pass/Fail test
condition type, 3–38
creating, 3–37, 3–44
specific condition, 3–38
starting, 3–49
threshold, 3–38
Path
APS COMMANDS, 3–169
ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–177
PATH AIS, status light, 3–60
Path AIS, Transmit alarm set to,
3–136
Path Analysis, ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–177, 3–179
PATH FERF, status light, 3–60
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Index
Path FERF, Transmit alarm set to,
3–136
Path Overhead, viewing, 3–80,
3–116, 3–117
path overhead bytes, setting, 3–77
Path User Channel (F2), Overhead
Add/Drop Port, G–5, G–6
PATTERN LOCK, status light,
3–59
Pause Control line, PATH OVERHEAD page, 3–120
Payload, Offset Mode, 3–150
Payload Analysis, ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–177, 3–180
payload mapping, 3–104
DS3, 3–110
setting, 3–71
unequipped, 3–114
VT1.5 Floating Async, 3–72,
3–110
performance monitoring, 3–18
Periodic 26–1, 3–154, 3–156
With Add, 3–155, 3–156
With Cancel, 3–155, 3–156
Periodic 87–3, 3–154, 3–156
With Add, 3–154, 3–156
With Cancel, 3–154, 3–156
Periodic Continuous, 3–153, 3–156
With Add, 3–154, 3–156
With Cancel, 3–156
with Cancel, 3–153
Phase Transient, 3–153, 3–155
pin assignments
Overhead Add/Drop Port, G–5
RS-232, G–3
VGA video output, G–1
Pointer, Fail If condition, 3–43
POINTER ACTION button, 3–142
POINTER ADJ, status light, 3–60
pointer adjust mode, 3–141
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Pointer Control, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–147
Pointer Direction, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–148, 3–157
Pointer Rate, POINTERS & TIMING, 3–147, 3–158
Pointer S–Bits, Pointers & Timing,
3–146
Pointer Type, POINTERS & TIMING, 3–142, 3–157
Pointer Value Set to, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–144, 3–145
Pointer/Timing Mode, POINTERS
& TIMING, 3–141, 3–149,
3–156
Pointers, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,
3–177
power connector, 1–9
power requirements, 1–9
POWEROUT, history graphs,
3–187
Preview
Operator End Prompt, 3–48
Operator Start Prompt, 3–46
Previous, VT Under Test, 3–74
Print
AutoScan dialog box, 3–58
PRINT CONTROL dialog box,
3–197, 3–198
PRINT button, 3–197
Print Error Analysis, PRINT CONTROL dialog box, 3–197
Print Last Screen, PRINT CONTROL dialog box, 3–198
Print Main Results, PRINT CONTROL dialog box, 3–197
Print Summary, On Test Completion, 3–49
Print User & Company, PRINTER
SETUP, 3–206
Index–9
Index
Path FERF, Transmit alarm set to,
3–136
Path Overhead, viewing, 3–80,
3–116, 3–117
path overhead bytes, setting, 3–77
Path User Channel (F2), Overhead
Add/Drop Port, G–5, G–6
PATTERN LOCK, status light,
3–59
Pause Control line, PATH OVERHEAD page, 3–120
Payload, Offset Mode, 3–150
Payload Analysis, ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–177, 3–180
payload mapping, 3–104
DS3, 3–110
setting, 3–71
unequipped, 3–114
VT1.5 Floating Async, 3–72,
3–110
performance monitoring, 3–18
Periodic 26–1, 3–154, 3–156
With Add, 3–155, 3–156
With Cancel, 3–155, 3–156
Periodic 87–3, 3–154, 3–156
With Add, 3–154, 3–156
With Cancel, 3–154, 3–156
Periodic Continuous, 3–153, 3–156
With Add, 3–154, 3–156
With Cancel, 3–156
with Cancel, 3–153
Phase Transient, 3–153, 3–155
pin assignments
Overhead Add/Drop Port, G–5
RS-232, G–3
VGA video output, G–1
Pointer, Fail If condition, 3–43
POINTER ACTION button, 3–142
POINTER ADJ, status light, 3–60
pointer adjust mode, 3–141
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Pointer Control, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–147
Pointer Direction, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–148, 3–157
Pointer Rate, POINTERS & TIMING, 3–147, 3–158
Pointer S–Bits, Pointers & Timing,
3–146
Pointer Type, POINTERS & TIMING, 3–142, 3–157
Pointer Value Set to, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–144, 3–145
Pointer/Timing Mode, POINTERS
& TIMING, 3–141, 3–149,
3–156
Pointers, MAIN RESULTS, 3–175,
3–177
power connector, 1–9
power requirements, 1–9
POWEROUT, history graphs,
3–187
Preview
Operator End Prompt, 3–48
Operator Start Prompt, 3–46
Previous, VT Under Test, 3–74
Print
AutoScan dialog box, 3–58
PRINT CONTROL dialog box,
3–197, 3–198
PRINT button, 3–197
Print Error Analysis, PRINT CONTROL dialog box, 3–197
Print Last Screen, PRINT CONTROL dialog box, 3–198
Print Main Results, PRINT CONTROL dialog box, 3–197
Print Summary, On Test Completion, 3–49
Print User & Company, PRINTER
SETUP, 3–206
Index–9
Index
printer setup, 3–203
Printer Type, PRINTER SETUP,
3–204
printers
RS–232 parameters, 3–204
supported, 3–204
printing results, 3–196
Programmer Manual, xxii
R
reading disk file names, 2–24
Recall, RECALL PASS/FAIL
TESTS, 3–50
Recall Result, RECALL RESULTS, 3–194, 3–196
Recall Setup, RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–34, 3–35
RECEIVE, APS COMMANDS,
3–172
RECEIVE button, 2–11
Receive Level, RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–103, 3–124
Receive Rate, RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–100, 3–122
receive settings, coupled vs. independent, 3–101
Received Optical Power, SIGNAL
STATUS, 3–114
Received Peak Voltage, SIGNAL
STATUS, 3–114
Recovered, Transmit Clock, 3–68,
3–93
red lights, 2–4, 3–60
Reference (programmer), xxii
Reference manual, xxii
repackaging for shipment, I–1
Index–10
Index
Reset Overhead
J1 byte, PATH OVERHEAD,
3–83
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,
3–79
RESLT_XX, Name, SAVE RESULTS, 3–192
results, displaying, 3–175, 3–177
RESULTS button, 2–11
Ring, APS COMMANDS, 3–161
RR, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
RR–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
RR–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
RS-232 connector, G–3
RS-232 parameters, 3–208
Run, Self Test Control, 3–211
Rx Common, Overhead Add/Drop
Port, G–6
Rx Frame Pulse, Overhead Add/
Drop Port, G–7
S
S–Bits, Pointers, Pointers & Timing, 3–146
Save Current, Disk Operation,
SAVE RESULTS, 3–194
Save File
Disk Operation, 3–52
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–49
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,
3–34
Save Previous, Disk Operation,
SAVE RESULTS, 3–194
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
printer setup, 3–203
Printer Type, PRINTER SETUP,
3–204
printers
RS–232 parameters, 3–204
supported, 3–204
printing results, 3–196
Programmer Manual, xxii
R
reading disk file names, 2–24
Recall, RECALL PASS/FAIL
TESTS, 3–50
Recall Result, RECALL RESULTS, 3–194, 3–196
Recall Setup, RECALL INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–34, 3–35
RECEIVE, APS COMMANDS,
3–172
RECEIVE button, 2–11
Receive Level, RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–103, 3–124
Receive Rate, RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–100, 3–122
receive settings, coupled vs. independent, 3–101
Received Optical Power, SIGNAL
STATUS, 3–114
Received Peak Voltage, SIGNAL
STATUS, 3–114
Recovered, Transmit Clock, 3–68,
3–93
red lights, 2–4, 3–60
Reference (programmer), xxii
Reference manual, xxii
repackaging for shipment, I–1
Index–10
Reset Overhead
J1 byte, PATH OVERHEAD,
3–83
TRANSPORT OVERHEAD,
3–79
RESLT_XX, Name, SAVE RESULTS, 3–192
results, displaying, 3–175, 3–177
RESULTS button, 2–11
Ring, APS COMMANDS, 3–161
RR, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
RR–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
RR–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
RS-232 connector, G–3
RS-232 parameters, 3–208
Run, Self Test Control, 3–211
Rx Common, Overhead Add/Drop
Port, G–6
Rx Frame Pulse, Overhead Add/
Drop Port, G–7
S
S–Bits, Pointers, Pointers & Timing, 3–146
Save Current, Disk Operation,
SAVE RESULTS, 3–194
Save File
Disk Operation, 3–52
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–49
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,
3–34
Save Previous, Disk Operation,
SAVE RESULTS, 3–194
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Index
Save to Disk
On Test Completion, 3–49
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,
3–34
SAVE RESULTS, 3–194
Save to Memory, SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–33
saving test results, 3–192
Scan All VTs, AUTOSCAN dialog
box, 3–57
SD–HP, APS COMMANDS,
3–164
SD–LP, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
SD–P, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
SD–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
SD–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
Second, Test Duration, 3–25
Section, ERROR ANALYSIS,
3–177, 3–178
Section DCC, Overhead Add/Drop
Port, G–5, G–6
Section User Channel (F1), Overhead Add/Drop Port, G–5, G–6
selected parameter, 2–7
self test, 1–10, 3–210
Sequence Period, 3–152
Sequence Type, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–157
Serial Number, INSTR CONFIG,
3–199
Service Manual, xxii
SET DATE, MISC SETTINGS,
3–202
SET TIME, MISC SETTINGS,
3–202
Set Value, Pointer Control, 3–144
Set with New Data Flag, POINTERS & TIMING, 3–146
settings, default, 3–35, C–1
SETUP_XX, Name, SAVE
INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–32
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
SF–HP, APS COMMANDS, 3–165
SF–LP, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
SF–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
SF–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
SHORT, APS COMMANDS,
3–169
Show Next Top, HISTORY
GRAPHS, 3–190
Showing Overhead for, TRANSPORT OVERHEAD, 3–78,
3–116
SIGNAL PRESENT, status light,
3–59
signal status, checking, 3–55
signal status indicators, 2–7
Signal Structure, RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–103
Single, 3–153, 3–155
Pointer Control, 3–142
Single Alternating, 3–155, 3–156
Software Handshake, REMOTE
CONTROL, 3–209
Source Node ID, APS COMMANDS, 3–167
Span, APS COMMANDS, 3–161
standard accessories, 1–2
START/STOP button, 3–27, 3–49
Status, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
status lights, 2–4, 2–5, 3–58–3–62
status messages, B–1
Stop Bits
PRINTER SETUP, 3–205
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209
Stress +4.6ppm, Frequency Offset,
3–150
Stress –4.6ppm, Frequency Offset,
3–150
STS LOP, Failure set to, 3–138
STS Under Test
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–104
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70
Index–11
Index
Save to Disk
On Test Completion, 3–49
SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS,
3–34
SAVE RESULTS, 3–194
Save to Memory, SAVE INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–33
saving test results, 3–192
Scan All VTs, AUTOSCAN dialog
box, 3–57
SD–HP, APS COMMANDS,
3–164
SD–LP, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
SD–P, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
SD–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
SD–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
Second, Test Duration, 3–25
Section, ERROR ANALYSIS,
3–177, 3–178
Section DCC, Overhead Add/Drop
Port, G–5, G–6
Section User Channel (F1), Overhead Add/Drop Port, G–5, G–6
selected parameter, 2–7
self test, 1–10, 3–210
Sequence Period, 3–152
Sequence Type, POINTERS &
TIMING, 3–157
Serial Number, INSTR CONFIG,
3–199
Service Manual, xxii
SET DATE, MISC SETTINGS,
3–202
SET TIME, MISC SETTINGS,
3–202
Set Value, Pointer Control, 3–144
Set with New Data Flag, POINTERS & TIMING, 3–146
settings, default, 3–35, C–1
SETUP_XX, Name, SAVE
INSTRUMENT SETUPS, 3–32
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
SF–HP, APS COMMANDS, 3–165
SF–LP, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
SF–R, APS COMMANDS, 3–163
SF–S, APS COMMANDS, 3–164
SHORT, APS COMMANDS,
3–169
Show Next Top, HISTORY
GRAPHS, 3–190
Showing Overhead for, TRANSPORT OVERHEAD, 3–78,
3–116
SIGNAL PRESENT, status light,
3–59
signal status, checking, 3–55
signal status indicators, 2–7
Signal Structure, RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–103
Single, 3–153, 3–155
Pointer Control, 3–142
Single Alternating, 3–155, 3–156
Software Handshake, REMOTE
CONTROL, 3–209
Source Node ID, APS COMMANDS, 3–167
Span, APS COMMANDS, 3–161
standard accessories, 1–2
START/STOP button, 3–27, 3–49
Status, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
status lights, 2–4, 2–5, 3–58–3–62
status messages, B–1
Stop Bits
PRINTER SETUP, 3–205
REMOTE CONTROL, 3–209
Stress +4.6ppm, Frequency Offset,
3–150
Stress –4.6ppm, Frequency Offset,
3–150
STS LOP, Failure set to, 3–138
STS Under Test
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–104
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70
Index–11
Index
STS-1, Signal Structure, RECEIVE
SETTINGS, 3–104
STS-3c, Signal Structure, RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–104
symbols (icons) in display, 2–8
T
TEST BEGIN dialog box, 3–50
Test Duration
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–38,
3–47
TEST TIME, 3–23
test duration limits, 3–26
Test Pattern
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–125
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–75,
3–96
test results, displaying, 3–173
TEST SETUPS button, 2–11
test state indicator, 2–7
TEST_XX, Name, SAVE PASS/
FAIL TESTS, 3–44
tests
actions not allowed during, 3–28
changes not allowed during, 3–28
setting history resolution, 3–27
setting test duration, 3–23, 3–25
starting and stopping, 3–27–3–30
3 in 24, Test Pattern, 3–75, 3–96
3 x STS-1, Signal Structure,
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70
Through Mode, Transmit Rate,
3–67
time, setting, 3–202
To Disk BMP Format, 3–204
To Disk EPS Format, 3–204
To Disk Ileaf Format, 3–204
Transmit alarm set to, ERRORS &
ALARMS, 3–135
Index–12
Index
TRANSMIT button, 2–11
Transmit Clock, TRANSMIT
SETTINGS, 3–68, 3–92
TRANSMIT column, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
Transmit Default, Transmit Setup,
3–171
Transmit Illegal, Transmit Setup,
3–171
Transmit Level, TRANSMIT
SETTINGS, 3–69
transmit parameters, 3–63
Transmit Rate, TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–64, 3–90
transmit settings, coupled vs.
independent, 3–65, 3–90
Transmit Setup, APS COMMANDS, 3–171
Transmit User Setup, Transmit
Setup, 3–171
transport overhead bytes, 3–77
tributary signal, dropping, 3–110
TroubleScan, 3–173
turn on sequence, 1–9
12 x STS-1, Signal Structure,
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70
Tx Common, Overhead Add/Drop
Port, G–6
Tx Delay (Seconds), REMOTE
CONTROL, 3–209
Tx Frame Pulse, Overhead Add/
Drop Port, G–7
Tx Terminator, REMOTE CONTROL, 3–210
Tx/Rx Settings
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–102,
3–123
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–65,
3–66, 3–90, 3–91, 3–92
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
STS-1, Signal Structure, RECEIVE
SETTINGS, 3–104
STS-3c, Signal Structure, RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–104
symbols (icons) in display, 2–8
T
TEST BEGIN dialog box, 3–50
Test Duration
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS, 3–38,
3–47
TEST TIME, 3–23
test duration limits, 3–26
Test Pattern
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–125
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–75,
3–96
test results, displaying, 3–173
TEST SETUPS button, 2–11
test state indicator, 2–7
TEST_XX, Name, SAVE PASS/
FAIL TESTS, 3–44
tests
actions not allowed during, 3–28
changes not allowed during, 3–28
setting history resolution, 3–27
setting test duration, 3–23, 3–25
starting and stopping, 3–27–3–30
3 in 24, Test Pattern, 3–75, 3–96
3 x STS-1, Signal Structure,
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70
Through Mode, Transmit Rate,
3–67
time, setting, 3–202
To Disk BMP Format, 3–204
To Disk EPS Format, 3–204
To Disk Ileaf Format, 3–204
Transmit alarm set to, ERRORS &
ALARMS, 3–135
Index–12
TRANSMIT button, 2–11
Transmit Clock, TRANSMIT
SETTINGS, 3–68, 3–92
TRANSMIT column, APS COMMANDS, 3–170
Transmit Default, Transmit Setup,
3–171
Transmit Illegal, Transmit Setup,
3–171
Transmit Level, TRANSMIT
SETTINGS, 3–69
transmit parameters, 3–63
Transmit Rate, TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–64, 3–90
transmit settings, coupled vs.
independent, 3–65, 3–90
Transmit Setup, APS COMMANDS, 3–171
Transmit User Setup, Transmit
Setup, 3–171
transport overhead bytes, 3–77
tributary signal, dropping, 3–110
TroubleScan, 3–173
turn on sequence, 1–9
12 x STS-1, Signal Structure,
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–70
Tx Common, Overhead Add/Drop
Port, G–6
Tx Delay (Seconds), REMOTE
CONTROL, 3–209
Tx Frame Pulse, Overhead Add/
Drop Port, G–7
Tx Terminator, REMOTE CONTROL, 3–210
Tx/Rx Settings
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–102,
3–123
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–65,
3–66, 3–90, 3–91, 3–92
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Index
Tx/Rx Settings line, RECEIVE
SETTINGS page, 3–101
U
Unknown, Test Pattern, 3–129
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–109,
3–113, 3–126
USER, Fail If table, SAVE PASS/
FAIL TESTS, 3–48
User Channel, G–5
adding, 3–84
dropping, 3–117
USER DEFINED
Error rate set to, 3–135
Frequency Offset, 3–150
Line Clock Offset, 3–93
Pointer Rate, 3–147
Pointer Value Set to, 3–145
Test Duration
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–47
TEST CONTROL, 3–24
User Name, PRINTER SETUP,
3–206
User Trace, J1 byte, 3–83
User Word, Test Pattern, RECEIVE
SETTINGS, 3–109, 3–113,
3–129
User Word 16 bit, Test Pattern,
3–75
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–126
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–96
User Word 24 bit, Test Pattern,
3–75
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–126
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–96
User Word 8 bit, Test Pattern, 3–75
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–126
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–96
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
UTILITY button, 2–11
Index
Tx/Rx Settings line, RECEIVE
SETTINGS page, 3–101
V
V5 byte, editing, 3–80
VGA connector, G–1
View Help, Help dialog box, 2–12
viewing APS response, 3–172
VT 1.5 Analysis, ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–179
VT 1.5 Async, Mapping, 3–71,
3–105
VT AIS
status light, 3–60
Transmit alarm set to, 3–136
VT FERF
status light, 3–60
Transmit alarm set to, 3–137
VT LOM, Failure set to, 3–138
VT LOP, Failure set to, 3–138
VT#1, VT Under Test, 3–74
VT#28, VT Under Test, 3–74
VT1.5 Async, Mapping, 3–73
VT1.5 Floating Async payload
mapping, 3–72, 3–110
VT1.5 Overhead, 3–116
W
WTR, APS COMMANDS, 3–163,
3–164
X
XConnect
Receive Level, 3–103
Transmit Level, 3–69
Index–13
U
Unknown, Test Pattern, 3–129
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–109,
3–113, 3–126
USER, Fail If table, SAVE PASS/
FAIL TESTS, 3–48
User Channel, G–5
adding, 3–84
dropping, 3–117
USER DEFINED
Error rate set to, 3–135
Frequency Offset, 3–150
Line Clock Offset, 3–93
Pointer Rate, 3–147
Pointer Value Set to, 3–145
Test Duration
SAVE PASS/FAIL TESTS,
3–47
TEST CONTROL, 3–24
User Name, PRINTER SETUP,
3–206
User Trace, J1 byte, 3–83
User Word, Test Pattern, RECEIVE
SETTINGS, 3–109, 3–113,
3–129
User Word 16 bit, Test Pattern,
3–75
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–126
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–96
User Word 24 bit, Test Pattern,
3–75
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–126
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–96
User Word 8 bit, Test Pattern, 3–75
RECEIVE SETTINGS, 3–126
TRANSMIT SETTINGS, 3–96
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
UTILITY button, 2–11
V
V5 byte, editing, 3–80
VGA connector, G–1
View Help, Help dialog box, 2–12
viewing APS response, 3–172
VT 1.5 Analysis, ERROR ANALYSIS, 3–179
VT 1.5 Async, Mapping, 3–71,
3–105
VT AIS
status light, 3–60
Transmit alarm set to, 3–136
VT FERF
status light, 3–60
Transmit alarm set to, 3–137
VT LOM, Failure set to, 3–138
VT LOP, Failure set to, 3–138
VT#1, VT Under Test, 3–74
VT#28, VT Under Test, 3–74
VT1.5 Async, Mapping, 3–73
VT1.5 Floating Async payload
mapping, 3–72, 3–110
VT1.5 Overhead, 3–116
W
WTR, APS COMMANDS, 3–163,
3–164
X
XConnect
Receive Level, 3–103
Transmit Level, 3–69
Index–13
Index
Y
yellow lights, 2–5, 3–60
Index
Zoom In, HISTORY GRAPHS,
3–189
Zoom Out, HISTORY GRAPHS,
3–189
Y
yellow lights, 2–5, 3–60
Z
Z
0. DEFAULT memory, RECALL
INSTRUMENT SETUPS page,
3–35
0. DEFAULT memory, RECALL
INSTRUMENT SETUPS page,
3–35
Index–14
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual
Index–14
Zoom In, HISTORY GRAPHS,
3–189
Zoom Out, HISTORY GRAPHS,
3–189
CTS 710 SONET Test Set User Manual